Category Archives: Teachers’ Resources

HOME SCIENCE TEACHING UPDATED NOTES FREE

Home Science may seem like a totally new area to you, since there is no subject known as ‘Home Science’ in the Primary School Curriculum. However, you actually covered it under Science and this includes topics such as, the Human Body, Health Education, Foods and Nutrition, among others.

Just as you enjoyed learning the above topics in Science while in Primary School, I am sure you will enjoy learning Home Science as a subject on its own in Secondary School.

The following sub-topics will be covered in this topic:

  1. Basic sewing tools and equipment
  2. The sewing machine

Introduction

Needlework requires the use of some special tools and equipment which are categorized into two main groups:
Small and Large : needed for:-
Measuring
Cutting
Transferring pattern markings
Sewing
Pressing
Storage
Others

Objectives
By the end of the lesson you should be able to:

State factors to consider when choosing different basic sewing tools and equipment.
Describe how to use and care for basic sewing tools and equipment.

Measuring Tools
Tape measure
Measuring Gauge
Meter stick

Choice
The tape measure should:
Be clearly marked on both sides upto 150cm.
Be woven and plastic coated to avoid fraying and stretching.
Have metal ends.
Use and Care
Remove from the work while cutting out; it can be cut accidentally.
Roll up when not in use.  It should:
Be firm.
Be clearly matched at right angles.
Have several measurements marked.
Used for measuring small width.
Store after use.
Meter Stick

Choice of a Meter Stick
It should be:
Made of smooth wood or plastic.
Marked clearly.
Used to measure long straight lines.
Hem Marker

Choice
Can be made from manila or cardboard.
Used for marking hem depths to ensure even size.

CUTTING OUT TOOLS

Dressmaker’s shears
Pinking shears
Embroidery scissors
Buttonhole scissors
Paper scissors
Dressmaker’s pins
Seam ripper
Table worktop
Dressmaker’s Shears

Should be rust free (stainless steel)
Sharp
Firmly hinged
Comfortable handle with one hole large enough for 2 or more fingers
One blade should be pointed
Long blade ,at least 15cm
Oil the hinges regularly
Hold correctly
Do not chop
Wipe after use
Do not use for cutting hair, paper, thread or for snipping
Pinking Shears

Made of rustless metal stainless steel)
Is serrated
Used for neatening edges especially on open seams, on materials that do not fray.
Embroidery Scissors

Small
Sharp fine pointed blades
Cutting threads, snipping
Cutting buttonholes
Paper Scissors

Smaller in size than the cutting out shears
Not very sharp
Used for cutting out paper patterns.
Dressmaker’s Pins
Assorted lengths
Fine and sharp
Made of stainless steel
Buy those with big heads
Store in a pin cushion or in a small box.
Avoid scattering.
Keep them dry and free from rust.
Seam Ripper

The blade should be sharp.
It should have a cover to protect the sharp point.
Used for removing unwanted stitches and cutting button holes.
Do not drop.
Store in the needlework box when not in use.
Table Top

Should be large enough for laying the pattern pieces out.
Comfortable height for the user.
Smooth and flat not to spoil the fabric.
Should not be polished.
Dust well before placing work.
Do not scratch with sharp objects such as tracing wheel.
Do not stain with carbon.

TRANSFERRING PATTERN MARKINGS

Tailor’s chalk
Tracing wheel
Dressmaker’s carbon paper
Pencils

Tailor’s Chalk

Comes in different shapes
Buy assorted colours
Used for marking patterns
Do not drop, it will break
Store in the needle work box
Tracing Wheel

The edge should be well serrated.
The wheel should be firmly fixed.
Use carbon colour closest to that of the fabric.
Wooden handles are more durable than plastic handles.
Used for transferring pattern markings with dressmaker’s carbon.
Dressmaker’s Carbon Paper

Choose different colours
Should be big in size
Used with tracing wheel for transferring patterns.
Do not press hard while using tracing wheel as it will tear.
Fold and keep well.
Pencils

Choose dark strong pencils: For drawing patterns.

SEWING TOOLS

Needles
Sharps
Betweens
Crewels
Sharps Needle

Have round eyes
Should be fine
Eye should be smooth
Easy to thread
Assorted sizes; the higher the number the finer the needle
Use correctly
Used for ordinary sewing
Should be kept in a pin cushion
Betweens Needle

Assorted sizes; the higher the number the finer the needle.
Shorter and sharper than sharps
Fine needles
Also used for quilting
Crewels Needle

The eyes are oval in shape and larger
Used for embroidery

PRESSING EQUIPMENT

Irons
Ironing board
Irons
Made of non rusting material
Medium weight
Smooth sole
Pointed toe to reach fullness
If electric, should be thermostatic.
Used to press work after each stage of construction
Use right temperature for every fabric
Wipe before use
Do not drop
Occasionally clean thoroughly
Oil hinges of charcoal iron to prevent rusting

Ironing Board

Should be adjustable
Should be well padded
Should be stable on the ground
Should have a loose cover
Used to place work when pressing
Adjust to comfortable height
Remove and wash cover regularly
Fold and protect from dust when not in use
Sleeve Board

Similar to ironing board but small
Used for processing small shapes articles such as cuffs and sleeves
Pressing Cloth

Choose lint free clothes that are closely woven
Used for damping and wetting during pressing.
Wash and store after use.

STORAGE EQUIPMENT

Drawers
Wardrobes
Hangers
Drawers
Large enough to carry the work
Have smooth finishing
For storing all needlework
Should be lined with a clean paper or cloth
Wardrobes

Should have a smooth finish
Should be lockable
Should have a rod or nail for hanging
Used for hanging complete and incomplete garments
Clean regularly and place moth balls occasionally
Hangers

Have assorted sizes
Should be made of smooth wood plastic or metal
Should be strong and wide
Used for hanging complete or incomplete garments.
Dust occasionally to keep clean.

OTHERS

Thimble
Stiletto
Bodkin
Embroidery loop
Pressing cloth
Sleeve board

Thimble

Should fit on the middle finger.
Metal thimbles last longer, especially those made of stainless steel.
Ensure that the metal ones do not have rough edges that may damage the thread and fabrics.

Choice and Care

It is used to push the needle through the fabric.
It also protects the finger from needle pricks.
Wear on the correct finger.

Stiletto

Must be sharp
Should be thick enough to leave holes on the fabric
Should be smooth not to spoil the fabric

Used for making holes and eyelets
Do not drop as the point will become blunt
Bodkin

Eye must be large.
Point should be blunt so that it does not pierce through the work when it is in use.
Used for threading elastic cords, ribbons and tapes through casings or eyelets.
Store in the needlework box.
Embroidery Loop

Choose according to the work

Similar to ironing board but small
Used for pressing small shaped articles such as cuffs and sleeves

Choose lint free clothes that are closely woven
Used for dampening when pressing.
Wash and store after use.

Sewing Machine

sewing machine is a large sewing equipment designed to make stitches. It makes sewing quicker and more efficient.It is a simple machine to operate as it is done manually at the speed of the person operating.

It is portable and easy to carry.
Balance wheel is rotated by hand.
One hand rotates the hand wheel while the other guides the material.
Hand Machine
The following video clip shows the working of a hand machine:
Treadle Machine

Feet rotate the hand wheel
Both hands are free to guide the work
Bulky and hence takes up a lot of storage space
A motor can be fixed onto it to make it electric
Treadle Machine
The following video clip shows the working of a treadle machine:

Electric Machine

Balance wheel is rotated using electricity.
Very fast because both hands are free to guide the work.
Expensive to purchase.
Some are portable and others are very bulky.
The following video clip shows the working of an electric machine:

Parts of a Sewing Machine

Choosing a sewing machine

Consider the cost in relation to the work.
Consider the machine in relation to its work, that is, do not buy a domestic machine for commercial purposes.
Buy from a reliable dealer who will be able to service and supply spare parts.
Machine should have an instruction manual.

Care of the sewing machine

Ensure servicing of machines regularly.
Store the machine while covered to avoid dust from entering.
Clean and oil it regularly.
Learners should use the machine under supervision.
Do not machine over pins to avoid breaking the needle.

Stitches

Home Science is an applied multi-disciplinary science which aims at improving the quality of life and well being of an individual, family and community.

Define Home Science.
Explain the importance of Home Science.
Relate Home Science to various career opportunities.
Classification of stitches
Stitches are classified into two groups:
Roll the mouse over the words: Permanent and Temporary for additional information.

Classify stitches.

Describe how to work out different types of stitches

Joining stitches

These are stitches which are used to hold two or more layers of fabric together permanently. They include:
Machine stitches
Over sewing
Faggotting

Faggotting Stitches

Neatening Stitches
These are stitches which are used to finish raw edges. They include:
Loop stitches
Button hole stitches
Machine zigzag

Buttonhole Stitches

Decorative stitches
These are embroidery stitches worked to add beauty to a garment or article. They include:
Stem stitch
Chain stitch
Satin stitch
Cross stitch
French knot
Even Tackings
Long and Short Tackings
Diagonal Tackings
Tailor Tacks

Other Disciplines in Home Science

Maternal child care
Home care
Textiles
Clothing
Health education
Consumer education
Maternal Child Care

It deals with child development from conception to childhood with special attention to the physical, emotional and social development of the child.
Home Care

It takes care of the individual, the home and the environment through planning, organizing and using available resources efficiently.
Tidy Room
Untidy Room
Textiles
It is the study of fibres which are made into fabrics.

A textile industry

Clothing
It deals with clothing construction and maintenance.

Health Education

It promotes health by changing people’s behaviour, attitude and practices. This is done through personal hygiene, environmental hygiene and care of the sick at home.
A person washing hands after visiting the toilet

Consumer Education

It makes people aware of the available goods and services in the market, their choice and use.

Variety of liquid soaps
A bill board with some information on food
Importance of Home Science
The importance of Home Science to:
The Individual
The Family
The Community

The Individual

Makes a person to be self reliant by giving one skills to start income generating activities.
It is a foundation for further education and training.

Helps one to acquire skills to enhance quality of life by managing scarce resources.
Prepares an individual to take care of personal hygiene, food, clothing and health.

The Family
Home Science helps the family to:
Practice and administer First Aid in case of accidents and illnesses.
Maintain high standards of living.
Improve its economic status.

The Community
Skills acquired create employment opportunities.
Ensures a healthy community therefore reducing illness and death.
Promotes positive environmental practices.
Produces role models for the community to emulate.

CAREER OPPORTUNITIES

Home Science leads to diverse career opportunities such as:
Teacher
Interior Designer
Chef
Air Hostess
Dietician
Community Health Worker
Fashion Designer
Entrepreneur
Researcher
Textile Engineer

Teacher

Chef
This is the chief cook of a large kitchen staff. He/she is in charge of menu creation, staff management and business aspects related to the kitchen.

Air Host / Hostess
Also known as flight steward or cabin crew member. He/she ensures that passengers have a comfortable journey on the flight.

Dietician
An expert in Food and Nutrition. He/she promotes good health through proper eating; supervises the preparation of food, develops modified diets, participates in related research and educates individuals on good nutritional habits.

Community Health Worker
A member of a community who is chosen by community members to provide basic health and medical care to the community.

Fashion Designer
A Fashion Designer creates original garments as well as those that follow established fashion trends. He/she studies trends, sketches designs of clothing and accessories, selects colours and fabrics, and oversees the final product of their designs.

Entrepreneur
A person who identifies a business opportunity, assesses the risks involved, organises the necessary resources to start and run a successful business.

Researcher
A person who tries to discover, interprete and develop methods and systems for the advancement of human knowledge on a wide variety of scientific matters of our world and the universe.

Textile Engineer
The textile engineer specializes in the study of fibres and new textile production methods. The profession includes turning fibre into fabric and fabric into clothing and other textile products.

Interior Designer
This profession is concerned with anything that is found inside a space/room, that is, walls, windows, doors, finishes, textures, light and furnishings. The interior designer uses these elements to develop a functional, safe and aesthetically pleasing space/ room for use.

Personal Hygiene
Personal hygiene refers to the cleanliness of the body. This involves good grooming or care of different parts of the body, choice, use and care of personal items.
Cosmetics are prepared substances which are applied on the body by both men and women to enhance appearance. They include:

Lips stick
Mascara
Rouge
Body lotion
Deodorant
Petroleum jelly
Eye shadow
Nail polish
Hair colour
Hair oil

Eye Liner


By the end of the lesson, you should be able to describe factors to consider when choosing and using cosmetics correctly

Lip Stick
Lip stick is used to enhance the lips by adding colour and texture.
Mascara
Mascara is used to darken, lighten or colour eye lashes.
Rouge is used to redden the cheeks to provide a more youthful appearance and to emphasise the cheekbones.

This is used to soften and smoothen the skin.

 

to insert animation

Click on the PLAY button to view where and how body lotion is used.
This is used mainly to reduce body odour which is caused by bacterial breakdown of perspiration.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how deodorant is used.
This is used to soften and smoothen skin, especially that of children.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how petroleum jelly is used.
It compliments the eye colour, hence draws attention to the eyes.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how eye shadow is used.
It is applied to finger and toe nails to enhance their appearance.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how mascara is used.
It is used to change the colour of hair to a shade regarded as more fashionable or desirable.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how hair colour is used.
It is used to soften the scalp and give the hair a shiny look.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how hair oil is used.
It is applied around the contours of the eye to create a variety of aesthetic illusions.
Click on the PLAY button to view where and how eye liner is used.

Choice of Cosmetics

Choose according to your skin type and complexion.
Choose a cosmetic that provides adequate information, for example, expiry date, composition and side effects.
Avoid cosmetics that contain mercury and hydroquinone as they are harmful to the body.
Choose environmental friendly deodorants and anti-perspirant perfumes.

Use of Cosmetics

Use cosmetics sparingly.
All make-up should be removed before retiring to bed.
Do not wear cosmetic on a skin that has acne, is broken or infected.
Chipped nail vanish should be removed immediately as it is unsightly.
Keep make up fresh by reapplying it when it wears off.
Misuse of Cosmetics
Use cosmetics correctly and in the right area.
Avoid sharing cosmetics as it may be harmful to your skin.
Excessive use of make up makes one look unattractive.
Do not mix cosmetics as it may be detrimental to one’s health.

Safety in the Home and First Aid

The following will be covered in this chapter:

  1. Common Accidents in the Home, Causes, Prevention and Management
  2. Assembling a First Aid Kit

 

A child falling off a bicycle

insert picture

 

A First Aid box

insert picture

 

The home is a safe haven for security and comfort. In order to maintain safety, it is important to take necessary precautions in the home.

By the end of the lesson, you should be able to:

Identify common accidents in the home and their causes.
Explain how to prevent common accidents in the home.

The common accidents in the home are:

Cuts and bruises
Burns and scalds
Fractures and sprains
Suffocation
Choking
Shock
Foreign bodies in the eyes and nose
Fainting
Nose bleeding
Drowning
Insect stings and bites
Snake bites
Poisoning

Cuts and Bruises

A cut is a slit or break on the skin caused by sharp objects such as razor blades, broken glass and knives while bruises are caused by blunt blows.

Prevention

Store sharp objects safely.
Use and care for knives appropriately.
Dispose off empty tins, broken bottles and other sharp objects e.g. by burying.
Keep doors of cupboards, wardrobes and drawers closed.
Household items should be kept in their appropriate places.

Management

Cuts
Clean the wound with clean water or a weak antiseptic solution.
Cover with sterile gauze or a pad of cotton wool and bandage.
For a deep cut, press onto the wound with a pad of cotton wool and bandage.
Raise the wounded part if it is a limb to reduce pain.
Seek medical attention.

Bruises
Cool the bruised part with very cold water or dab with a cloth soaked in cold water.
Raise the injured part if a limb to cut down amount of blood flowing into it so as to reduce the swelling.

Burns and scalds
Burns are caused by dry heat such as hot charcoal, metal and open flames while scalds are caused by moist heat such as stream and hot liquids.

Prevention of burns and scalds
Matches, boiling stoves, hot liquids, burning candles should be kept away from children.
Store flammable liquids away from children.
Lids covering hot foods should be opened away from the handle while cooking.
Saucepablows
direct or indirect force on bones
falls

A sprain is a tearing or stretching of ligaments. It is caused by a stretching of a joint beyond the normal level of motion.

Rooms should be tidy and well lit.
Floors should be free from spills and peels.
Arrest any bleeding that may occur.
Use a splint to hold the fracture in place.
Apply a sling.

Choking
Choking is when one is not able to breathe. Choking is caused by food or foreign objects such as seeds, bones and coins stuck in the throat or air passage making breathing difficult.
Encourage the casualty to cough
Give back slaps

 Obstruction

Avoid putting foreign objects in the mouth.Children should not play while eating. If casualty is breathing, encourage him/her to cough as this will help to dislodge the obstruction. For babies, hold upside down by the legs and pat gently on the upper part of the back until the object pops out.

For older children and adults, hit the person sharply with the palm of the hand between the shoulder blades until the object pops out.You can also stand behind the casualty, link your hand below their naval, press the belly with strong jerks until the object pops out.

Suffocation

Suffocation occurs when there is inadequate supply of fresh air or when the wind pipe is blocked, hence preventing air from getting into the lungs.

A child wearing a polythene bag over his/her head
Dispose off polythene bags appropriately.
Cooking stoves should be used in well ventilated rooms.
Replace worn out gas tubes.

Identity the cause and act appropriately. If it’s the lack of fresh air, take the person outside to an airy place. If it is due to a polythene bag getting stuck in the head, remove it.Check the airways are open and the casualty is breathing.If breathing has stopped, start artificial respiration.Take casualty to hospital for further assessment and management.

Shock

Shock is a temporary lack of supply of blood to the brain and other vital organs. It is caused by upsetting or good news and events such as electric shock, excessive injury, and illness.

Causes

Severe bleeding, either internal or external.
Loss of plasma in burns or crash injuries.
Heart failure as in acute heart attacks.
Loss of body fluid from recurrent vomiting or severe diarrhoea.
Acute abdominal emergencies, example perforation of stomach or ruptured appendix.
All electric wires should be well insulated and defective equipment repaired and replaced.
Do not touch electric switches and appliances with wet hands.

Prepare one for bad news

Lay the casualty down and deal with the injury or underlying cause of the shock.
Raise and support legs to improve the blood supply to the vital organs.
Loosen tight clothing at chest, neck, waist to reduce constriction in these areas.
Protect when necessary with a blanket or sheet.
Do not give casualty anything to drink.
Take him to hospital as soon as possible.

Foreign bodies in the ears, eyes and nose

A foreign body is anything undesirable that enters into the body such as dust, insects and seeds (common with children).

A child putting a bean in the nose and then breathing it out.People should protect their eyes when walking or working in an area where there are dust particles in the air e.g. by wearing protective gear.Keep small items such as seeds and beads away from children.

Foreign body in the eye
Advise the casualty not to rub the eye.Let the casualty sit facing the light, separate the eyelids gently with clean fingers and thumb.If foreign object can be seen, wash it out with clean water. If it is stuck on, remove with a moist swab or damp corner of clean cloth.If the object remains stuck on, bandage the eye and seek medical assistance at the nearest health facility.

Foreign body in the nose
Calm the casualty and request him/her to breath through the mouth.Press the unaffected nostril with a finger and blow the nose to remove the object. If it does not come out, do not attempt to remove it, but seed medical assistance. For small children, seek medical assistance immediately.

Foreign body in the ear
Reassure the casualty and let him/her lie down.Flood the ear with clean water if an insect is lodged inside.If unsuccessful, refer casualty to nearest health facility.

Fainting

It occurs due to temporary loss of blood flow in the brain causing a brief loss of consciousness.
Illness such as anemia
After receiving bad or good news
Hunger
Overworking
Standing for a long time

Avoid standing for too long.
Avoid overcrowding and poorly ventilated rooms.
Break bad news calmly.
Lay the casualty down and raise the legs slightly above the level of his head.
Loosen all tight clothing.
Ensure there is plenty of fresh air.
Reassure the casualty.
Gradually, raise him into the sitting position and give sips of water, if required.
If he/she does not regain consciousness, seek medical assistance.

Nose Bleeding

This happens when blood comes out of the nose. It may be caused by an injury, blowing the nose forcefully and picking the nose.
Someone pinching the nose to prevent blood from coming out during nose bleeding. The head should be slightly bent.

Avoid picking the nose.
Avoid blowing the nose too hard and often where possible.
Sit the casualty down with the head forward.
Pinch the nose firmly below the bridge for 10 minutes, making the person breath through the mouth.
After 10 minutes, request the casualty to release the pressure on the nose.
Encourage the casualty to spit out any blood that flows into the mouth.
If nose bleeding persists beyond 30 minutes, seek medical attention.

Drowning

Drowning is the blockage of air passages by liquids when swimming or if one falls into water bodies such as lakes, rivers and basins. A child bending into a bucket full of water. The child then falls inside.Water storage containers must have tight fitting lids. Do not store water in open containers.All water pools around the house should be drained.Bathtubs should be unplugged after use.

Do not swim unaccompanied by a life saver.
Remove the casualty from the water as quickly as possible.
Shout for help if you cannot swim.
Once the casualty is out:
Open airways by placing casualty briefly on the side to drain out the water.
Check for breathing and blood circulation.
Start artificial respiration immediately if the casualty is not breathing.
If there is no pulse, start Cardiac Pulmonary Resuscitation.
If casualty starts breathing, put him/her in a recovery position.
If no response, continue with Cardiac Pulmonary Resuscitation until help arrives.

 

Insect stings and bites

Some insects such as bees, wasps and scorpions sting while others such as mosquitoes, ticks, lice and cockroaches bite.

Keep the environment clean.
Do not disturb bees and hornets.
Air beddings thoroughly and change them frequently.

Bites
Clean the affected area thoroughly with clean water.
If possible apply alcohol or alcohol mixed with iodine on affected areas except those close to the eyes.

Stings
Pluck the sting firmly with fine tweezers.
Apply a cold compress to relieve pain and minimize swelling.

Snake bites

Snake bites can be poisonous or non-poisonous.

Different types of snakes

Do not provoke snakes.
Clear bushes around the house
Lay the casualty down. Reassure the casualty and keep him/her calm and still.
Wash wound well and pat dry with clean swabs.
Lightly compress the limb above the wound with a roller bandage and immobilize the injury.
Clear bushes around the house

Poisoning

Poison is any substance which when taken causes harm to the body. It gets into the body through swallowing, breathing in gases (inhalation), contact through pesticides and chemicals pushed through the skin.
Baby drinking paraffin from a bottle

Man seated in an enclosed room without ventilation and there is a jiko, hence he is inhaling carbon monoxide.

Wash hands after handling pesticides.
Label medicines, insecticides and all other poisonous substances and keep them away from the reach of children.
Medicines should be taken as prescribed by the doctor.
Do not store chemicals near food
Management of poison that does not burn
If conscious, give drinks of milk or water immediately.
Induce vomiting by touching the back of the throat with fingers.
Give more drinks as you take the person to the nearest health facility.
Note: take the container that held the poison with you.

Management of poison that burns

Give casualty water to drink immediately.
Wash away poison from the skin.
Refer casualty to nearest health facility
Note: take the container that held the poison with you
Do not store chemicals near food.

What is First Aid?

First Aid is the immediate help given to a person who has had an accident or sudden illness before being placed under medical care. It is usually done at the place where the accident occurs.A person who gives first help uses a First Aid Kit. This is a container with items required to give the first help.

By the end of the lesson you should be able to assemble items in a First Aid Kit.
Contents of a First Aid Kit

Cotton Wool
Bandages
Disposable Gloves
Clinical Thermometer
Ointment
Petroleum Jelly
Antiseptic
Adhesive Dressings
Surgical Blades
Scissors
Tweezers
Pain Killers
Gauze
Safety Pins
Sling
Notepad and Pen
Water

Housing the Family

By the end of this lesson you should be able to:

Explain different ways of providing family shelter.
State factors to consider when providing family shelter.
identify various types of houses.

Traditional houses are constructed using materials such as palm leaves, grass, mud and cow dung, which are not durable. Examples of traditional houses include:

Manyatta (Maasai hut)
Kikuyu hut
Borana/ Somali hut
Giriama hut
Luo hut
A Manyatta

Manyatta Hut (Maasai) – Oblong in shape.Uses poles, sticks, grass leaves which are smeared with a plaster of cow dung and mud on both walls and roof.The house has small openings for ventilation.

Kikuyu hut – Circular in shape.Constructed using poles, sticks and grass. Walls are plastered with mud and then smeared with clay.

Borana/Somali hut –The Borana /Somali people are nomads and as such their houses are constructed in a way that they can easily be dismantled and moved to new locations.
Constructed using poles, sticks and grass. Long grass is neatly woven and tied together with strings into portions.
The portions are secured in an overlapping manner onto a supporting frame in both the roof and walls of the house.
These portions can easily be rolled up and secured for ventilation.

Giriama hut – Cone shaped with no apparent difference between the wall and the roof.
Made of overlapping long grass tied using strings to a framework of poles and sticks.
Palm leaves and twigs are closely woven together to form a detachable door.

Luo hut –Round in shape.Made of poles, sticks and grass for the roof. Wall and floor are smeared with mud and cow dung and beautifully patterned.There are holes on the wall for ventilation. The floor is smeared with cow dung and mud.

Improved Traditional Houses

These are houses that are constructed by a combination of both temporary and permanent materials. Unlike traditional houses, they are partitioned.

Modern Houses

Modern houses are more durable as they are made using strong materials like stones, cement, bricks, metal, and concrete hence making them permanent. Examples of modern houses include:

Bungalow
Mainsonette
Flats or Apartments

Bungalow
A house where all rooms and facilities are constructed on the ground floor. Comes in different shapes like L-shaped, U-shaped and rectangular shaped. House where different areas are constructed on two or more floors hence occupying less ground. Different floors are connected by stairs.

Flats or apartments
Housing units where one complete house is built on top of another. The compound is a common ground floor shared by all.

There are three ways of providing family shelter. These are:
Renting a house
Building a house
Buying an already built house

Advantages of building

One is able to:
Build according to taste and specifications that meet the family needs and values.
Rent it out and generate income.
Have an investment for future.
Have a feeling of permanence and stability.
Use it as security for loans.
Alter and renovate it.
Choose the type of materials to use.

Disadvantages

Expensive
If expertise is lacking the quality of work may be sub-standard.
It is involving and time consuming.

Advantages of Buying a house

The house is available for occupation as soon as the transactions are complete.
One can choose a location that he/she likes.
One can select a house design that best meets his/her family requirements.
One can use it to secure loans.
Expensive if bought through mortgage.
If mortgage is not completely paid, the house can be repossessed.
A house already built may not meet all the family requirements.

Advantages of Renting a House

The owner is responsible for maintenance.
The tenant rents a house that suits the income and family size.
The tenant may vacate the house at will.
The tenant chooses a desired location. For example, near social amenities or place of work.
Renting is expensive in the long run.
One lacks a sense of permanent land ownership.
The owner may decide to increase the rent.
One cannot modify the house to suit his/her liking.
Repairs may not be done on time as required.

Factors determining the building a  House

  1. Family Size

The house should take care of family members as well as different sexes and ages. This factor is considered for all the methods.

2. Cost
Choose a house within your means. One that you can afford.
3. Social Amenities
A house should be in close proximity to social amenities.

4. Security
Ensure a safe locality and hazardous free zones far from factories, industries, airport and sewages for health reasons.

5. Construction
Quality of material used in building the house should be durable. Workmanship should be of high quality.
6. Type Of Soil
The type of soil affects the cost of building e.g. black cotton soil is most difficult to manage and hence increases the cost
7. Drainage
The site should be well drained to avoid flooding which leads to dampness, pests and damage to property.

8. Orientation
The positioning of the house in relation to the sun and direction of wind should be considered.

9. Ownership
Ensure you are the legal owner of plot/land house and that all legal requirements are taken care of.

Care of the Home

Cleaning Equipment
The home should be kept clean at all times. In order to maintain the cleanliness of the home, constant removal of dirt is important.

The following equipment is necessary for the removal of dirt:
Brooms
Scrubbing brush
Cobweb brush
Carpet brush
Toilet brush
Buckets and Basins
Dustpan and hand broom
Mop and mop bucket

State factors to consider when choosing different cleaning equipment.

Choice and Care of:

Brooms and brushes
Buckets, basins and karais
Dustpans
Labour saving equipment

Brooms and Brushes

Buy for the correct purpose.
Material used should be durable.
Bristles should be firmly fixed.
The head and handle must be smooth and curved.

Care
Use for the correct purpose.
Remove loose dirt after every use and clean regularly.
Store them appropriately so that the bristles are not damaged.
Never store them when wet to avoid bad smell.

Basins, Buckets, Karais

Choose those made from durable material.
Should be light in weight.
Should be easy to clean.
Should be washed after use with warm soapy water, rinsed and dried before storage.
Store in a cool, clean and dry place.
Avoid using scouring pads and strong abrasives as they scratch the surface.
Dustpan

The edges should be smooth.
Should have a flat base.
Should be made from durable material.
Clean after every use and store appropriately.
Thoroughly clean weekly in hot soapy water, rinse and dry.
Do not bang as they loose shape.
Use for intended purpose.

Labour Saving Equipment

Choice and care of labour saving equipment
Should be strongly constructed.
Should have all the necessary attachments.
Buy one that can be easily operated.
Make sure it has the correct voltage.
Get a manual and a certificate of warranty
Get a demonstration from the dealer.
Ensure availability of after sales service and spare parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Occasionally empty the dust bag of the vacuum cleaner.
Replace the brushes of a carpet sweeper once worn out.
Wind the cord around the handle and keep all attachments together while not in use.
Store in a hanging position.

Types of Kitchen Equipment and their Use

Kitchen equipment is categorized into 3 main groups mainly:
Small equipment
Large equipment
Labour saving equipment/devices

By the end of the lesson you should be able to identify various kitchen equipment and their use.

SMALL KITCHEN EQUIPMENT

These are usually classified according to their functions namely:
Measuring and weighing equipment
Cutting tools
Shaping and molding
Separating tools
Lifting, mixing, turning and scooping tools
Oven/baking utensils
Pans and pots (Cooking vessels)
Measuring and Weighing Equipment

Cutting Tools
Knives
Shaping and Moulding Tools
Separating Tools
Lifting, Turning, Scooping and Mixing Tools
Spoons
Oven/ Baking Utensils
Pans and Pots
Large Kitchen Equipment
Labour Saving Devices

Measuring and Weighing Equipment

Cutting Tools
Knives
Shaping and Moulding Tools
Separating Tools
Lifting, Turning, Scooping and Mixing Tools
Spoons
Oven/ Baking Utensils
Pans and Pots
Large Kitchen Equipment
Labour Saving Devices
Food Hygiene
Food Spoilage and Food Poisoning

Food spoilage is the deterioration of food, making it unfit for human consumption.
Food poisoning is the illness caused by eating contaminated food.

Objectives By the end of the lesson you should be able to:

Explain causes and prevention of food spoilage and food poisoning.
Identify signs and symptoms of food poisoning.

Causes of Food Poisoning

Chemical Contamination
Bacterial Contamination
Natural Poisoning
Chemical Contamination
Pesticides
Using chopping board to chop meat then:
The same chopping board is used to chop fruits before cleaning
Poorly stored maize
Maize with aflatoxins

Causes of Food Spoilage

  1. Poor storage of foods
  2. Chemicals present in food containers wrappers and packets
  3. Keeping food for too long until it rots, wilts or withers.

Cover cooked foods to keep off bacteria, pests and pets.
Milk should not be stored together with strong smelling foods as it absorbs their smell.

Chemicals in Food
Canned Meat
Chocolate wrapper
Prolonged Storage
Mould Bread
Rotten Meat

Food poisoning and food spoilage can be prevented by:

  1. Storing harmful chemicals such as kerosene, detergents away from food.
  2. Thoroughly drying grains before storage and then storing them in a clean dry and well ventilated grain store.
  3. Not buying foods that have expired or are about to expire.
  4. Washing hands, preparing, cooking and serving food in a clean environment.
    5. Washing fruits and vegetables before using them.

    Signs and Symptoms of Food Poisoning

    Violent vomiting
    High fever
    Severe abdominal pain
    Dizziness
    Diarrhoea
    General body weakness
    Shivering

    Methods of Cooking

    What is cooking?
    Cooking is a process of preparing food by applying heat.

Discuss reasons for cooking food.
Identify different methods of cooking.
State general rules for different methods of cooking.

Why do we cook food?

To improve flavour or taste of food.
To improve appearance and make it more appealing.
To kill germs and parasites hence making it safe for human consumption.
To preserve it.
To make it tender/ soft, hence easy to chew, digest and absorb.
To improve the texture.

Factors that Determine Methods of Cooking

Type of food to be cooked.
Personal taste/ preference.
Person being cooked for.
Time available.
Cooking equipment available.
Number of people to be served.
Amount of money available.

General Rules of Cooking

There are two main categories of methods of cooking namely:
Those that use moist heat
Those that use dry heat

Moist Methods

Boiling
Stewing
Steaming
Frying
Boiling Method
Boiling is cooking food completely immersed in boiling water.

General Rules

Moist foods should be put in cold water and then heated to boil.
The water should be at the boiling temperature throughout until food is cooked.
The food should be immersed in water.
Avoid overcooking.
Suggested Foods for Boiling
Eggs, Meat, Starchy foods like Sweet Potatoes, Maize, Rice, Beans, Githeri, Bone soup
General Rules for Boiling
Most foods should be put in cold water and then heated to boil.
It should be at boiling temperature throughout until food is cooked.
Eggs
Meat
Starchy foods like sweet potatoes,maize, rice
Beans
Githeri
Bone soup

Stewing Method
Stewing is cooking food in a measured amount of liquids. Once the food has boiled it is allowed to simmer.Sufficient amount of liquid water or stock should be added for a stew of the right consistency.The saucepan or pot used should have a tight fitting lid to avoid loss of nutrients.Use gentle heat or cook slowly to avoid hardening proteins and damaging food texture and flavour.

Suggested Foods for stewing
Tough cuts of meat, fruits like pears and pineapples, vegetables like carrots and peas, smoked fish

General Rules for Stewing
Sufficient amount of liquid water should be added.Upon boiling, simmer to avoid denaturing proteins and damaging of texture and flavour of food.Tough cuts of meat Fruits like pears and pineapples. Vegetables like carrots and peas
Smoked fish

Steaming Method
This is cooking food using steam from boiled water. Steaming can be done directly or indirectly.Have water boiling prior to steaming.The steamer must have a tight fitting lid to avoid loss of steam.The temperature of the water bath must be boiling throughout.

Suggested Foods for steaming
Fish, Green vegetables, Tender cuts of meat
General Rules for Steaming
Fish
Green vegetables
Tender cuts of meat
The following is a video clip showing steaming method of cooking.

Frying Method
This is cooking food in hot fat or oil. The food can either be deep, shallow or dry fried.Use a heavy/ strong pan, which has no seam or rivets.All oils/ fats should be of good quality and of high smoking point to avoid overheating fat/oil and burning.Fill the pan until 2/3 (two thirds) of oil to avoid overflowing when deep frying.Heat the fat/ oil to the right temperature before putting in food.Do not overload the fryer as this lowers the temperature of the oil.Foods to be fried should be dry or coated to prevent splattering.

Suggested Foods for frying
Doughnuts, Fish, Chips, Chapatti, Pancakes, Eggs, Meat

Rules Rules for Frying
The deep frying oil should not be more than 2/3 (two thirds) full to avoid overflowing when deep frying.Foods to be fried should be dry or coated.

Doughnuts
Chips
Chapatti
Pancakes
•Doughnuts
•Fish
•Chips
•Chapatti
•Pancakes
•Eggs
•Meat

Dry Methods

Roasting
Baking
Roasting Method
Cooking food using direct source of heat which can be done using an oven or over a charcoal fire.
Ensure frequent basting or turning of food to keep it moist and ensure even cooking.
Food to be roasted should be of good quality e.g. tender cuts of meats.
The oven or fire should be ready when beginning to roast.

Suggested Foods for roasting

Meat, Maize, Chicken, Potatoes, Arrow roots, Yams, Cassava
General Rules for Roasting
Maize
Chicken
Potatoes
Arrow roots
Yams
Cassava

Baking Method

Cooking food using hot dry air which is done in an oven.
Heat the oven before baking.
Observe the baking duration for the item being baked.
Test for readiness before removing from the oven.

Suggested Foods for baking

Potatoes, bread, cakes, fish, biscuits, pastries and pies
Click at the top to view the video clip on baking
General Rules for Baking
Potatoes
Bread
Cakes
Fish
Biscuits
Pastries
Pies

Textile Fibres

The following sub-topics will be covered under this topic:

  1. Classification of Textile Fibres
  2. Properties of Textile Fibres

Fibres

Fibres are classified into two main groups:

Natural
Man-made
Wool fibre 

Natural Fibres

  1. Animal
  2. Plant
  3. Mineral

Animal Fibres

  1. Wool
  2. Silk

Plant Fibres

  1. Cotton
  2. Linen

Man-made Fibres
These are fibres that are not made purely from natural raw materials. They are classified into two groups:

  1. Regenerated
  2. Synthetic

Regenerated Fibres
They are made from natural fibres treated with chemical substances. They include:

  1. Viscose Rayon
  2. Acetate Rayon

Viscose Rayon
Viscose rayon is made from cotton linters and chemicals.
Spinneret

Acetate Rayon
Acetate rayon is made from wood pulp and chemicals.

Synthetic Fibres
Synthetic fibres are made from chemicals. These chemicals are derived from coal, oil or petroleum products. The fibres are made through a process known as polymerisation where polymers are made by the combination of small molecules.

They include:

  1. Polyamide
  2. Polyester
  3. Polyacrylics

Polyamide
They are made from benzene (from coal), oxygen and nitrogen (from air) and hydrogen (from water).Polyamide under the microscope

Polyester
Polyester fibres are derived from petroleum.

Polyacrylics
This is produced from acrylonitrile, a liquid produced from petroleum or natural gas.
Elastomerics

They are elastic and rubber like substances made from polyunethane.
Properties of Textile Fibres

Properties of Cotton

Cotton is produced from the cotton plant. It is one of the most popular natural fibres used to make personal and household articles.
Desirable qualities of cotton
Cotton is absorbent making it suitable for towels and undergarments.Cotton is a strong fibre and can withstand the friction required in laundry work. This makes it suitable for school uniforms, children’s clothing and bed linen.Cotton can withstand mild alkalis and stain removers hence making it ideal for household linen and daily wear.Cotton can withstand high temperatures. This makes it suitable for items that need to be sterilized such as dish clothes, towels and napkins.

Cotton is a good conductor of heat thus keeps the body cool in warm weather.Cotton does not generate and hold static electricity therefore clothes do not cling to the body when worn. This makes it ideal for outdoor clothing.Cotton takes in dyes easily therefore comes in a wide variety of colours.Cotton is resistant to attack from moths.

Undesirable Properties of Cotton
Creases easily
Shrinks readily
Yellows with age
Not resistant to mildew
Lacks lustre
Flammable
Not resistant to strong acids

Properties of Linen

Linen is produced from the stem of a flax plant.
The properties of linen are similar to those of cotton except that it:
Is crisp
Has lustre
Is stronger
Frays readily
Desirable qualities of Linen
It is used for table linen such as table cloths, napkins, mats and cushions because it is strong, hence withstands regular laundering and high temperatures.
Linen is popularly used in the kitchen because it is strong and is resistant to high temperatures.
Linen clothes are popular because they are absorbent making them suitable in hot climate.
Linen takes in dyes easily therefore comes in a wide variety of colours.
It is popularly used to make household articles like organizers, chair covers and cushions.
Undesirable Properties of Linen
Creases readily
Attacked by mildew

Properties of Wool

Wool is the hair or fur from animals such as sheep, goats or camels.

Desirable Properties of Wool
It has a natural crimp which makes it warm to wear.
Wool is resilient making it crease resistant.
Wool is non-flammable
It is absorbent

Properties of Silk

Silk is produced from the secretion of a silk worm.

Desirable Properties of Silk
Silk is a very strong fibre therefore washes and wears well, making it suitable for underwear.
Silk has a soft fine lustre therefore popularly used for evening wear.
Silk drapes well
Silk is absorbent.
Silk is resistant to mildew, fungi and moths.
It is crease resistant therefore suitable for travel wear.

Undesirable Properties of Silk
Weak when wet;
Easily damaged by high temperatures;
Weakened by long exposure to sunlight;
Perspiration weakens it;
Easily weakened by alkalis and acids.

Properties of Mineral Fibres

Asbestos
The most commonly used mineral fibre is asbestos.

Properties of Asbestos
It is resistant to fire and most chemicals. Asbestos is commonly used to make fire fighting clothes.Asbestos cloth being resistant to heat and fires is used to make various items such as hats, gloves, belts, ropes and fire fighting uniform. Asbestos fibre is also used as insulation materials for water heaters, fridges and ovens.

Silver strands are used to make decorative clothes and items.

Gold fibres are woven into fabric for decorative purposes to make various items.

Properties of Viscose Rayon

Viscose rayon is made from wood pulp and chemicals. The properties of viscose rayon are similar to those of cotton.

Desirable Properties of Viscose Rayon
Being a filament fibre it produces a smooth and lustrous surface. It is therefore popularly used to make table cloths and napkins.Viscose is absorbent therefore cool to wear in hot climate.Viscose takes in dyes well and therefore can be produced in a wide variety of colours and designs.Viscose blends easily with other fibres and is normally blended with cotton and wool. This makes it crease resistant and strong while maintaining its high lustre.

Undesirable Properties of Viscose Rayon
Is not a strong fibre and is weaker when wet. It should therefore not be twisted, wrung or rubbed during laundry.
Scorches when exposed to heat
Develops mildew
Yellows and rots due to prolonged exposure to light.

Properties of Synthetic Fibres

Synthetic fibres are made from chemical substances which are mainly derived from coal, oil or petroleum products. There are properties that are common to all synthetic fibres.

Desirable Properties of Synthetic Fibres
Synthetic fibres are very strong. They are therefore used to make a variety of items.
Synthetics are smooth and have a lustrous finish.
Synthetic fabrics drape well and are popularly used to make curtains and table clothes.
Synthetic fabrics are resilient. This means they do not crease easily and are therefore good for traveling and work clothes.
Light in weight therefore good for travel.
Resistant to sunlight except nylon which yellows with prolonged exposure to sunlight.
Not attacked by moths, insects and mildew.

Undesirable Properties of Synthetic Fibres
Not absorbent
Develop static electricity making them cling to the body and attract dirt.
Damaged by chlorine bleaches
Damaged by high temperatures
Abrasion and prolonged wear causes pilling (small ball-like features) on the fabric.

ENGLISH PP1 FORM 4 JOINT EXAM WITH ANSWERS FREE

NAME…………………………………………………………ADM NO………………………

SCHOOL……………………………………………………. SIGNATURE …………………

DATE………………………………………………

101/1

ENGLISH FORM FOUR

PAPER 1

END OF TERM  EXAMINATION

TIME:2 HOURS

MWAKICAN JOINT EXAMINATIONS

INSTRUCTIONS

  • Write your name and admission number in the spaces provided
  • Sign and write the date of examination in the spaces provided above
  • AnswerALL questions in this paper
  • All answers must be written in the spaces provided in this paper
  • Candidates should check the question paper to ascertain that all the pages are printed as indicated and no questions are missing.

For Examiners Use Only

Questions Maximum score Candidates score
1 20  
2 10  
3 30  
            Total Score 60  

 

  1. FUNCTIONAL WRITING (20mks)

You are organizing a party for your brother who has graduated with  first class honours from the University. The Area Women representative has been invited as the guest of honour. Your mother has assigned you the responsibility of preparing the meal  for 50 guests.

  1. Prepare a recipe for the dish. (12 marks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. b) Write a thank note that you would give to the women representative. (8 marks)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. CLOZE TEST

Fill  in  the  blanks  with  the  most  appropriate  word                                           (10mks)

We need to start reading more. (1)………………………………………encourages more creative thinking, keeps the (2)………………………….fresh and stimulated in ways nothing else can.Reading awakens a (3)………………………………… imagination and inhibits the brain (4)…………………………….rotting, as is evident with(5)……………………………. so-called political elite. If you  neglect the pot, (6)………………boils over and extinguishes the fire. The youth (7)………………………….. should ignite a love for reading  (8)………………………….of engaging in nonsensical issues they are normally caught up in. it is said a reader lives a thousand lives (9)………………………………. they die, but one (10) ………………………. never reads lives only once.

  1. ORAL SKILLS
  2. Read the poem below and answer the questions that follow:-

Made for pure pleasure

Like buds two wonderful to name

Miracles unfold

And Catherine wheels begin to flame

Like a whirling marigold

Rockets and Roman candles make

An orchard of the sky

Whence magic trees their petals shake

Upon each gazing eye

  1. Describe the rhyme scheme of this poem. (2marks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

  1. Using examples, explain how rhythm has been achieved in this poem. (4 Marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  • What kind of facial expressions would you exhibit when reciting the poem?       (2mks

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. Which words would you stress in line one and why? (2 marks)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

B The underlining indicates the stressed word in the sentences below. Briefly explain what each                  sentence means. (3 Marks)

  1. i) David hit Joan today

……..……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. ii) David hit Joan today.

……..………………………………………………………………………………………………            ……………………………………………………………………………………………………

iii) David hit Joan today.

……..……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

C (i)  Provide a homophone for the following words.      (4 mrks)

won–

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

wood –

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(ii)Provide  a  word  in  which the  letter  given  below  is  silent. (2mrks)

  1. t-
  2. p-

 

  1. D) Indicate the intonation in the following sentences. (3 Marks)
  2. How often do you visit your mother?

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Have you lost your way?

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • She is writing her exams.

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. E) Identify the odd one out in each of the following sets according to the pronunciation of the underlined sound .
  2. Enough, staff, dough, graph

 

  1. Depot, rapport, report, debut

 

  • Hours, honour, heir, heifer

 

 

  1. Prison, reason, censor, season

 

  1. Sure, scissor, store, scare

 

  1. F) A teacher of English was in class during a reading session. She realized that the students had poor reading habits. Mention three of these habits the teacher might have observed. (3 Marks)

 

G: Identify the silent letters in the following words. (2 Marks)

poignant-

boutique-




MOKASA 2,

2019 PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME

  1. Imagine you are the secretary of your school’s journalism club. Recently you held a meeting whose agenda included revamping the club, starting a school magazine, starting an interclass writing competition to nurture writing talent. There were some matters that were followed up from the previous meeting. During the meeting, the treasurer and another member sent their apologies while two members failed to turn up without any explanation. The club patron was present during the meeting. Write down the minutes you took during the meeting. 20 marks

FORMAT:

  • Title – 1mk (Capture name of club, date, time, and venue)
  • Present – ½ mk
  • Apologies – ½ mk
  • Absent – ½ mk
  • In attendance – ½ mk
  • Preliminaries – ½ mk
  • Confirmation – ½ mk
  • Adjournment – ½ mk
  • Signing off – ½ mk

Total – 5 marks

CONTENT

  • Confirmation of Minutes – 2mk
  • Matters Arising – 2mks
  • Revamping club – 2mks
  • Starting magazine – 2mks
  • Starting interclass competition – 2mks
  • O.B – 1mk

LANGUAGE

  • A – 4mks
  • B – 3mks
  • C – 2
  • D – 1mk

 

 

 

 

 

 

CLOZE TEST.

 

  1. frightens
  2. faced
  3. in
  4. however
  5. of
  6. The
  7. approach
  8. assignment
  9. exactly
  10. outline

 

 

  1. ORAL SKILLS
  2. Describe the rhyme scheme of this poem. (2 marks)
  • The above poem has a regular rhyme scheme of aa bb cc dd e eff gg hh ii that can be predicted.
  1. Identify any two sound patterns used in the poem above.(2 marks)
  • There is an aspect of rhyme weep blow

Sleep, snow

  • Consonance has also been used in the poem, I am the gentle showers of autumn rain
  • Alliteration has also been used in the poem, I am not there. I do not die/ Of beautiful birds in circling flight. (any 2 points)
  • How would you perform the last line of the poem? (3 marks)

I would use a falling intonation to indicate finality while using my hands to gesture at an imaginary grave to show I did not die/ I would speak at a slow pace to create emphasis.

  1. Which words would you stress in the first line?                       (2 marks)

I would stress the words not, stand, grave and weep since they are the content words/ words that give meaning.

  1. b) Your school is participating in a debate on the motion, “Technology has brought more harm than good.” How would your listeners lead to your failure in presentation? (4 marks)
  • My listeners would lead to my failure if the keep walking in and out of the debate room.
  • If the listeners keep murmuring as I speak
  • If the listeners fail to maintain a meaningful eye,contact with me as I speak.
  • If the listeners keep fidgeting.
  • If the listeners doze off during my presentation.(Any 4 points)

 

  1. c) State whether the following sentences would be said in a falling or raising intonation? (3 marks)
  2. Will you take tea or coffee today? Falling intonation.
  3. He who laughs last laughs the longest falling intonation.
  • You don’t have to leave immediately, do you? Rising intonation
  1. d) Underline the silent letter in each of the following words. (3 marks)
  2. Parliamenti
  3. Debris. s
  • Subtleb
  1. e) Complete the list below by providing another word pronounced in the same way as the ones below. (3 marks)

Prays               praise             preys

Bight               byte                bite

Sees                 seas                seize

  1. f) You recently attended an interview at Upendo Supermarket for the position of an accounts clerk, unfortunately you were not successful. What would have led to your failure? (4 marks)
  • I might have failed to maintain a meaningful eye contact with the interviewers
  • I might have arrived late for the interview
  • I may have been inappropriately dressed for the interview
  • I may have failed to present all my documents when asked to
  • I might have spoken negatively/ill about my previous employer/colleagues which might have painted a negative picture about me.
  • I might have failed to answer all the questions as asked/ I might have lied during the interview.
  • I might have failed to maintain a meaning eye contact/ upright posture during the interview.
  • I might have sat before being offered a seat. (any 4 points)
  1. f) You have just witnessed an accident. A matatu rammed into a stationary truck. Many passengers have been seriously injured. The driver has requested you to call Kona Mbaya Police station and inform them about the accident. Complete the following telephone conversation between you and the police officer on duty. (4 marks)

You:Hello…! Hello! Is this Kona Mbaya police station?(1 mark)

Police officer: Yes. This is Kona Mbaya Police Station. Constable Kiraka speaking. Can I help you?

You: Yes, please. There has been a terrible accident.

Police officer:            May I know who is calling please?

You:I am Mr. Tumbo Mali; I’m calling to report an accident.(1 mark)

Police officer: Where has the accident taken place?

You: Along Kona Mbaya- Majengo road.

Police officer: What happened?

You:A matatu rammed into a stationary truck.(1 mark)

Police officer: Really! Are there any casualties?

You:Yes, many passengers have been seriously injured.                                                (1 mark)

Police officer:            Don’t worry; we will be there as soon as possible. Meanwhile call the                                     ambulance and alert Kona Mbaya hospital to be ready for casualties.  Thank you very much Mr. Tumbo Mali for calling.

Form 2 Latest Notes free pdf downloads {Simplified for all subjects}

Approved Form 2 Latest Notes free pdf downloads {Simplified for all subjects}

F2 AGRIC SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 AGRIC SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 BIOLOGY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 BUSINESS SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 BUSINESS SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 CHEMISTRY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 CHEMISTRY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 COMPUTER SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 COMPUTER SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 CRE SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 ENGLISH SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 ENGLISH SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 GEOGRAPHY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 GEOGRAPHY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 HISTORY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 HISTORY SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 HOME-SCI SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 HOME-SCI SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 IRE SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 IRE SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 KISWAHILI SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 KISWAHILI SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 MATHS SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 MATHS SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf
F2 PHYSICS SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP (2).pdf
F2 PHYSICS SIMPLIFIED NOTES SP.pdf

Download more form 2 notes below at no cost:

Form 2 notes for all subjects free download

FREE UPDATED FORM TWO NOTES

DOWNLOAD FREE UPDATED FORM TWO NOTES FOR ALL SUBJECTS.

Simply click on each link below to access the materials free of charge;

FORM 2 FREE KISWAHILI NOTES

FORM 2 FREE MATHEMATICS NOTES

FORM 2 FREE BIOLOGY NOTES

FORM 2 FREE PHYSICS NOTES

FORM 2 FREE CHEMISTRY NOTES

FORM 2 FREE HISTORY NOTES

FORM 2 FREE GEOGRAPHY NOTES

FORM 2 FREE CRE NOTES

FORM 2 FREE IRE NOTES

FORM 2 FREE HRE NOTES

FORM 2 FREE HOME SCIENCE NOTES

FORM 2 FREE ART & DESIGN NOTES

FORM 2 FREE AGRICULTURE NOTES

FORM 2 FREE WOOD WORK NOTES

FORM 2 FREE METAL WORK NOTES

FORM 2 FREE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION  NOTES

FORM 2 FREE POWER MECHANICS NOTES

FORM 2 FREE ELECTRICITY NOTES

FORM 2 FREE DRAWING & DESIGN NOTES

FORM 2 FREE AVIATION TECHNOLOGY NOTES

FORM 2 FREE COMPUTER STUDIES NOTES

FORM 2 FREE FRENCH NOTES

FORM 2 FREE GERMAN NOTES

FORM 2 FREE BUSINESS STUDIES NOTES

UPDATED FORM TWO NOTES PER SUBJECT (PLAIN TEXT THAT CAN BE READ ON ANY PHONE)

Biology KCSE Past Papers and marking schemes free downloads

CRE Form 1-4 Notes and Exams Free downloads

Free CRE notes and exams download

UPDATED FORM ONE TO FOUR NOTES PER SUBJECT

History & Government free download notes and exams for form 1, 2, 3 and 4READ ALSO:  Free CRE notes and exams download

F1-4 CRE free notes and exam papers

F1-4 free downloads: History secondary school notes and exams

Biology Form 1, 2, 3 and 4 full exams and notes free downloads

Form one (1) to four (4) free Exams for all subjects

All Form 1,2,3 & 4 free exam papers downloads and marking schemes

End of term 1, 2 and 3 Free Exams; Questions plus marking schemes for all forms

Form 2 notes pdf,
Form 2 notes Geography,
Form 2 Notes History,
Biology form 2 notes,
Form 2 notes Chemistry,
CRE form two Notes,
Chemistry form two notes easy Elimu,
EasyElimu Form 2 Notes,

Latest Grade Two CBC Schemes of Work Free Downloads

Latest Grade Two CBC Schemes of Work Free

GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 MUSIC SCHEMES.doc

ART 2 (1)-2.pdf
art TERM 2.docx
art TERM 2.pdf
CRE GRADE 2 TERM 2 (1).pdf
CRE TERM 2-1.pdf
CRE TERM 2.docx
ENG TERM 2.docx
ENGLISH GRADE 2 TERM 2 (1).pdf
ENGLISH GRADE 2 TERM 2.docx
GRADE 2 – ART TERM 3.docx
GRADE 2 ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES.docx
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 ART AND DESIGN SCHEMES (1).doc
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 CRE SCHEMES.doc
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 ENGLISH SCHEMES.doc
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 ENVIRONMENTAL ACTIVITIES SCHEMES.doc
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 KISWAHILI SCHEMES.doc
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 LITERACY ACTIVITIES SCHEMES.doc
GRADE 2 TERM 2 2020 MATHEMATICS SCHEMES v2.doc
HYG 2.docx
HYGI ONE-TERM 2.docx
KISWAHILI GRADE 2 TERM 2-1.pdf
KISWAHILI GRADE 2 TERM 2.docx
MATHEMATICS GRADE 2 TERM 2-1.pdf
MATHEMATICS GRADE 2 TERM 2.docx
MOVE 2-1.pdf

Grade 5 Rationalized Notes Free

Grade 5 Rationalized Notes Free Downloads:

GRADE-5-SOCIAL-STUDIES-NOTES (2)

GRADE-5-AGRICULTURE-NUTRITION-NOTES (1)

GRADE-5-AGRICULTURE-NUTRITION-NOTES-1 (1)

GRADE-5-SOCIAL-STUDIES-NOTES (1)

GRADE-5-AGRICULTURE-NUTRITION-NOTES-2 (1)

GRADE-5-FRENCH-NOTES

AGRI-NUTRITION-Indigenous-Foods (1)

grade-5-art-and-craft-strand-2-indigenous-kenyan-craft-notes-1 (1)

grade-5-art-and-craft-strand-2-indigenous-kenyan-craft-notes (1)

SCIENCE-TECH-Living-Things (1)

grade-5-agriculture-strand-1-conserving-our-environment-notes (1)

science-and-technology-notes-grade-5 (1)

science-and-technology-notes-grade-5-1 (1)

grade-5-art-and-craft-strand-3-design-mixed-media-and-technology-notes (1)

GRADE-5-SCIENCE-AND-TECHNOLOGY-NOTES (1)

grade-5-agriculture-lesson-notes-2021-2022

More Grade 5 Rationalized Notes Free Downloads

CBC Grade 5 notes, Exams, Schemes of Work Free pdf

Grade 5 Notes, schemes of Work and Exams

Grade 5 Latest Rationalized Notes {All Subjects & Topics}

Grade 5 Rationalized Notes Free

Grade 4 & 5 Rationalized Notes

GRADE 5 SOCIAL STUDIES LESSON NOTES- UPDATED 

Free CBC Grade 4, 5 & 6 Notes, Exams Downloads

Grade 5 CBC Notes Free PDF download

Competency Based Curriculum, CBC, training notes (Grade 3 to 5 Curriculum Designs)

CBC Grade 5 Exams, Notes, Schemes & Assessment Materials

Grade 5 Free CBC Notes (Updated)

Grade 5 CBC Notes Free- All subjects

Grade 5 Free Termly Assessment Exams, Notes & Schemes

Grade 5 CBC free Schemes of works, Exams & Notes (Updated)

AGRICULTURE GRADE 5 LESSON NOTES- NEW CBC SYLLABUS

Physics KCSE Mock Exams and Answers {Latest Best Collections}

 

MOCKS 1 2023

232/1

PHYSICS

Paper 1

Marking scheme

  1. Volume = 2cm × 3cm × 5cm

= 30cm³ 1

 

Mass          = Volume × density

= 30cm³ × 13.6g/cm³

= 408g 1

 

Weight      = 408g × 10N/kg

1000g

 

= 4.08N 1

 

  1. Reading = exact + – error

= 4.85 – 0.02

= 4.83cm 1

1

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Stability increases since centre of gravity is lowered when ice melt to a smaller volume. 1
  2. The mass slides towards A and settles midway between A and B. This because the wire expands when melted and becomes loose thus enabling the mass to slide freely.
  3. Flow rate = Cross-section area × velocity.

7.7 × 10-2m³/s = 3.142 × (3.5 × 10-3)² × V

 

7.7 × 10-2m³/s   = 3.8489 × 10-5m²V

3.8489 ×10-5m²     3.8489 × 10-5

 

V   =2.000s × 10³ m/s

 

  1. Weight of the machine parts

–     Energy lost / used to lift machine parts.                  any one correct.

 

  1. Resultant force = 15N – 8N = 7N

F = ma

a = F

m

= 7N = 1.4m/s²

5kg

  1. Area of cross-section (thickness)

Length of conductor

Type of metal                     any two correct

 

 

 

 

 

 

                                                1      

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Heat loss = heat gained

5 × 4200 × 40 = ×4200 × 25

x = 5 × 40

25

= 8kg

  1. A cm = cm

1.3 × 60     = 1.2 × T

78              = 1.2 T

T               = 65N

 

Section B (55 marks)

 

12.a)    Energy is not created nor destroyed but can be charged from one form to another.

  1. ii) It has a higher V.R.
  2. b) i) Work done        = force × distance

AB       = 200 × 20 = 4000Nm

CD       = 600 × 20 = 12,000Nm

EF        = ½ × 10 × 400 = 2000Nm

FG       = ½ × 10 × 400 = 2000Mm

GH       = 10 × 400 = 4000

24,000 Nm

 

  1. ii) Power   = force × velocity

= 600 × 0.6 m/s

= 360W

 

  1. c) P = D = 3.6 × 105 × 10 × 400

Time                    3600 sec

=400KW

 

Total power            = 400 + 200      = 600 kw

 

Efficiency              = 400 × 100      = 66.67%

600

  1. a) The rate of change of linear momentum is directly proportional to the external ü1  force and takes place in the

direction of the force.

  1. b) The bus has greater momentum ü1 than the saloon car and therefore a greater inertia ü1  (since

mass in higher)

  1. c) i) Momentum before impact

= momentum after impact ü1

m1u1 +m2u2                  = (m1 + m2)v

0.02 × 200 + 0.45 × 0 = (0.4s + 0.2)V ü1

V = 4  = 6.154ms-1  ü1

0.65

  1. ii) h          = ½ gt²

5          = ½ × 10 × t² ü1

t²          = 1

t           = 1 sec

iii)        R         = ut

= 6.154 × 1 ü1

= 6.154m ü1

 

  1. a) Expands regularly.
  • Does not wet glass
  • Good conduct of heat any 2 × 1 mk
  1. b) i) Oil of creosote
  2. ii) On cooling, is leaves space for expansion.

iii)   when it is hot, oil of creosote in the bulb expands pushing mercury up arm A of U tube mercury pushes steel

index in A upward to maximum temperature of creosote.

When temperature falls oil of creosote in the bulb contracts pushing mercury towards bulb and pulls steel index up indicating minimum temperature.

  1. iv) Lower ends of indices.
  2. d) Magnet

 

  1. a) Impurities

Pressure         any 1 × 1 mark

  1. b)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

       iii) VIt = MLf

 

8 × 2.25 × 10 × 60 =200Lf

1000

Lf = 8 × 2.25 × 10 × 60

0.2

= 54000Jkg-1

 

iii)             No heat is absorbed from surrounding  environment.

16.a)i)     Provide the centrifugal force so that the body is maintained in a circular path without skidding

  1. ii) Water escapes through the holes leaving the clothes dry.  This is because the adhesive force between the water particles and the drum  is reduced and the water escapes through the holes.

 

  1. b) i) w          = 2pf

= 60 × 2p

60

= 2 p rads / sec

= 6.28 rads / sec ü1

 

  1. ii) V         = wr

= 6.28 × 0.18

= 1.1304m/s ü1

a          = v²                  1.1304² ü1

r                          0.18

= 7.099m/s² ü1

 

 

  1. a) i)          0.315N ü1

 

  1. ii) Wgt of liquid displaced = 0.315N ü1

Volume of liquid displaced        = 60 × 4.2

= 25.2cm³ ü1

 

Density,           = m

v

= 31.5gü1

25.2cm³

= 1.25g/cm³

= 1250kg/m³ ü1

 

  1. b) Weight of solid = weight of liquid displaced

Mass of solid          = 5 × 0.8g/cm³

= 4g ü1

 

Mass of solid          = 4g

Volume of solid     = 20cm³

 

Density of solid      = 4ü1

20

= 0.2g/cm³ ü1

 

 

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

PHYSICS PAPER 3MARKING SCHEME

232/3

PART A

QUESTION 1

Length l (cm) I (A) Pd, V(V) I(mA) Pd, v(MV) log I log V
20 0.14 0.25 140 250 2.146 2.398
30 0.16 0.35 160 350 2.204 2.544
40 0.18 0.50 180 500 2.255 2.699
50 0.19 0.65 190 650 2.279 2.813
60 0.20 0.85 200 850 2.301 2.929
80 0.24 1.30 240 1300 2.380 3.114
  3mks 3mks -½ mk -½ mk -½ mk -½ mk

 

I(A) = x + 0.2A  ; 2dp                                                                                       (4sf)                 (4sf)

V(v) = x + 0.10V ; 2dp

  1. d) Graph attached
  2. e) slope = D log I (from graph not the table)

Dlog V

(238 – 214) x 10-2          Correct substitution – (1 mk)

(310 – 240) x 10-2          Correct evaluation   – (1 mk)

= 0.3429   (4 sf)              ans to 4 sf or exact   – (1 mk)

  1. f) log I = n log v + log k

y = mx + C

  1. i) log k = y intercept

log k = 211 x 10-2  = 2.11ü (1mk)

k = 128.82  (4sf or exact)

  1. ii) n

n = slope

n = answer in e

= 0.3429 ( exact as in e)

PART B

            QUESTION I

  1. c)

 

Time in minutes 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Temperature of W(0C) 80.0 79.0 77.5 76.0 75.0 74.0 72.5 71.0 70.0 69.0
Temperature of L(0C) 80.0 76.0 75.0 72.0 70.0 68.0 66.0 64.5 62.5 61.0

 

Time in minutes 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5
Temperature of W(0C) 68.0 67.0 66.0 65.0 64.5 62.5 62.0 61.5 61.0 60.0
Temperature of L(0C)                    

Temp (0C) + 2.00C                                                                                                               (4mks)

  1. Graph (as attached)

 

 

f    i) tw = 6.5 – 2.0

= 4.5 minutes

Correct readings from graph – 1mk

  1. ii) tl =  0 – 0.6

= 1.4 minutes

Correct readings from the graph – 1mk

  1. g) r =  2tl

dtw

4.2 x 1.4 = 1.6333

0.8 x 4.5

Correct substitution of tl ,tw and d – 1mk

Correct evaluation of 4 SF or exact –  1mk

Part B

  1. h) Length, x = 0.8 +2cm   – 1mk
  2. i)   thickness    d  =  x

20

0.8cm  = 0.04cm

20

Correct substitution of x – 1/2mk

Correct evaluation to 2 dp or exact – 1/2mk

  1. j) V =

=

 

= 0.1508cm3

Correct substitution of  p = 3.142 , d2 , L – 1mk

Correct evaluation to 4 s.f or exact – 1mk

Correct unit – 1mk

 

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

PHYSICS PAPER TWO  MARKING SCHEME

 

232/2

  1. New object distance = 5 – 2 = 3cm

Distance between tip and its image = 3 + 3 ü

= 6cmü

  1. a) Like poles repel, unlike poles attract. ü
  2. b) Pole X is South poleü
  3. Convex mirror gives a wider field of view ofüthe rear (behind) compared to plane mirror.
  4. a) Period, T = 8.0 x 10-4

Frequency =

= 1250

= 1.25 x 103 Hz

  1. b)

 

  1. a) Primary cells cannot be recharged after use while secondary cells can be recharged after use. ü
  2. b) Polarization is reduced by adding a depolarizer

or

Adding Manganses (VI) oxideü

 

 

  1. 2 Distance = Speed x timeü (2d = vt)

2x = 320 x 0.8 ü

x     = 320 x 0.8

2

x = 128m ü

 

  1. Gamma rays, Ultra violet, Blue light, Red light

Radiation

Increasing wavelength              ü

 

  1. a) Doping ü

 

  1. b) N – Type semiconductor ü

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Reduce the amount of current. ü

or

Reduce magnetic field strength.

 

  1. a) To reduce power losses ü
  2. b)

I =

=

= 5A

 

R =

=

= 4Wü

Or

P =

=

=

=

= 4W

 

I =

=

= 4Wü

 

Or

 

I =

=

= 5A

P =

R =

R =

= 4Wü

 

  1. a) The current flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference

across the conductor provided Temperature and other physical conditions are kept constant. ü

  1. b) Effective Resistance =

 

=

= 2Wü

V = IR

I = ü =  = 2.5A ü

 

 

SECTION B (55 MARKS)

  1. a) The direction of induced current is such as to oppose the change causing it. ü
  2. b) i) Deflects to the right handsideüBecause by Lenz’s law, end A of the solenoid produces a

South pole and there current is flowing in direction X to Z. ü

  1. ii) – Decreasing the strength of the magnet
  • Decreasing the number of turns in the solenoid.
  • Decreasing the speed at which the solenoid moves.

Any ü

  1. c) The core is made up of thin sheets of insulated soft iron plate (ie. Core is laminated) instead

of using a block of iron coreü

  1. d) i) The galvanometer deflects in one direction and goes back to zero when switch is closed. ü

When the switch is open the galvanometer deflects in the opposite direction then to zero. ü

  1. ii) The deflection would be smaller.
  2. e) i) Step down transformer. Because the number of turns in the primary coils are more than the

number of turns in secondary coils. ü

  1. ii) ü         VS =

= 24Vü

iii) Power in primary =VPIP

= 120 x 0.5

= 60W

Power in secondary = VS x IS

= 24 x 2

= 48V

Efficiency = ü

=

= 80% ü

  1. a) Like charges repel, unlike charges attract. ü
  2. b) As the rod approaches the cap, the positive charges initially attracts the negative charges on the

leaf and plate before the leaf falls. ü As the rod is brought nearer, net positive charges are

induced on the leaf and plate, where they repel each other making the leaf rise again. ü

  1. c) The milliameter record current as the capacitor is charging. ü When the capacitor is fully

charged, it offers an equal P.d in the opposite direction therefore no current flows. ü

  1. d) i) 2 + 10

= 12mFü

CT =

=

= 2.4mFü

  1. ii) Q = CV

= 2.4 x 240ü

= 576 mC

= 5.76 x 10-4

iii)  V =  ü

=

= 48Vü

  1. a) -The ray of light must be travelling from an optically denser medium to an optically rarer

medium.

– The angle of incidence must be greater than the critical angle.  Any ü

 

b)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) η = ü

Height = Real depth = n x Apparent depth

= 1.48 x 11.4

= 16.872cm ü

 

  1. d) i) – The mirror absorbs some incident light while the prism does not.

– The mirror silvering peels off but this does not happen in prism.

– The mirror is thick and produces multiple images unlike prism.

Any ü

ii)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) i) – Object distances, u, using a metre rule. ü

–  A image distance, V, using a metre rule. üany

  1. ii) Extrapolate the graph to cut either   axis or both.

At  intercept,     = 0

  • .: =   ,       = value of      intercet

f =       =  ü

or f = 4cm

At   intercept,   = 0

.:  = à f =  = 4cm

  1. f) i) – Too short eyeball ü

– Lens with too long focal lengthü

  1. ii) By wearing converging lens spectacles. ü

 

  1. a) I – Copper is a good conductor of heat and therefore conducts heat produced. ü

II – To accelerate electrons from  the cathode to the anode. ü

or

To give electrons sufficient  kinetic energy.

  1. ii) Decrease the amount of heating current in the filament. ü

iii) X-ray penetrate more in less dense material and penetrate less in denser materials. ü

b i) The emission of electrons from a metal surface when the metal surface is irradiated with

electromagnetic radiation.

 

 

  1. b) I E = hf

= 6.63 x 10-34ü x 6.25 x 1014

= 4.14373 x 10-19

II   Wo = Hfo

= 6.63 x 10-34üx 5.5 x 10-14

= 3.6465 x 10-19

III     –  KE = hf­- Wo

= (4.14375 – 3.6465) x 10-19ü

= 0.49725 x 10-19

= 4.972 x 10-20

 

 

  1. i) E – Filament ü

F – Y – Plateü

  1. ii) Thermionic emissionü
  2. b) i) Alpha particles have higher charge (+2) ü

Compared to Beta particles (-1)

  • Alpha particles are heavier compared to Beta particles.

Any ü

  1. ii) a = 234ü

b = 84 – 2 = 82 ü

 

iii)

ü

 

ü

 

 

 

 

 

MOCKS 1 2023

CONFIDENTIAL

PHYSICS

PAPER 3

232/3

 

Section A

  1. – 2 size D dry cells.

– 100cm nichrome wire on a mm scale, labelled P at one end, 0 cm mark.

– A bulb (2.5V) and a bulb holder.

– 8 connecting wires (at least 4 with crocodile clips).

– Cell holder

– A switch

– A volt Meter ( 0 – 5V)

– An ammeter ( 0 – 1A)

– A jockey

 

Section B

  • A liquid labelled L (50 ml of paraffin).
  • A measuring cylinder (50ml or 100ml).
  • 2 boiling tubes.
  • A thermometer.
  • 50ml of distilled water in a beaker labelled W.
  • A 250ml beaker containing some water.
  • A stop watch
  • A tripoid stand and wire gauze
  • Clamp and stand
  • A card board with a hold at the middle (3cm by 3cm)
  • Copper wire of length 130cm. (0.28mm)
  • Test tube of diameter 1.5cm (ordinally)
  • Metre rule

 

 

 

Name:………………………….…………………….…Index No…………………………….

232/1                                                               Candidate’s Signature…………………………

PHYCICS PAPER 1                                      Date…………………..

Time: 2Hrs.               

 

MOCKS 1 2023

 

The Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

PHYSICS

Paper 1

Instructions:

  • This paper consists of TWO Sections: A and B.
  • Answer ALL the questions in sections A and B in the spaces provided.
  • ALLworkingsMUST be clearly shown.
  • Mathematical tables and electronic calculators may be used.

 

 

 

 

For Examiner’s Use Only

 

Section Question Maximum Score Candidate’s  Score
A 1 – 11 25  
 

 

B

12 9  
13 9  
14 7  
15 8  
16 8  
17 9  
 

                      TOTAL SCORE

 

80

 

 

 

 

 

 

SECTION A (25 marks)

Answer ALL the questions in the spaces provided.

 

  1. A rectangular container measures 2cm by 3cm by 5cm. What is the weight of mercury that will fill the container to the brim. (Take g = 10N/kg and density of mercury = 13600 kg/m³).     (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A vernier calliper has a zero error of -0.02cm. Draw the section of the calliper scale when used to take an actual measurement of 4.85cm.                                                 (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure one below shows a beaker placed on a bench. A block of ice is placed in a beaker as shown below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fig 1

State and explain the change in the stability of a beaker  when ice melts.                (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure 2 below shows horizontal copper wire tightly fixed on two stands. A mass P is suspended from the wire using a string that can freely slide.

 

 

 

 

Fig 2

 

The copper wire is then heated for sometime. State and explain what happens to mass P.(2 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Water flows through a pipe with different cross-section areas at a rate of 7.7 × 10-2 m³ / s. If the pipe has a diameter of 7mm, determine the velocity of water through the pipe at that particular section.        (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Apart from friction, name another factor that reduces efficiency in machine. (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Two forces act on a trolley as shown below;

 

 

 

Fig 3

 

 

 

Find: the acceleration of the trolley.          (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. State the factors that affect the rate of flow of heat through a metal conductor.        (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

  1. Sketch a graph of volume of a fixed mass of a gas against pressure on the axes below. (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A form three student heats 5kg of water to a temperature of 80°C. When he added X kg of water at 15°C, the mixture attains a temperature of 40°C. Determine the value of X. (3marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A uniform rod of length of 5m and a mass of 6kg is pivoted at 3.8m mark. The rod is held horizontally by a vertical rope at 5m mark as shown in figure 3 below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate tension on the rope.                                                                                (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SECTION B: 55 marks)

 

  1. a) i)        State the law of conservation of energy.                                                (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Explain why it is easier to use a thick screw driver than a thin one.        (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

  1. b) The figure below shows a force-distance graph for a car being towed on a horizontal ground.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Calculate the total work done.                                                                           (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) If the velocity just before reaching point D is 0.6m/s, calculate the power developed by the source providing the force at this point.                                                                  (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) An electric pump can raise water from a low level reservoir to a high level reservoir at a rate of 3.6 × 105 kg/h. The vertical height that water is raised is 400m. If the rate of energy loss in form of heat is 200kw, calculate the efficiency of the pump.      (3 marks

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State Newton’s second law of motion.                                                             (1 mark)

 

 

 

  1. b) Why is it easier to stop a saloon car than a bus moving at the same velocity.    (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

  1. c) A bullet of mass 20g moving at 200ms-1 hits and gets embedded in a wooden block of mass 450g that is suspended freely on a light inextensible string at a height of 5m above the ground. If the string breaks on impact, calculate:
  2. i) the velocity of the block immediately after impact.                                          (2marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) the time taken by the block to strike the ground.                                             (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

iii)   the horizontal range of the block.                                                                    (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State two properties of mercury that makes it a suitable thermometric liquid.   (2 marks)
  2. b) Figure below shows a six’s maximum and minimum thermometer.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) What is the thermometric liquid in the thermometer                           (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Give a reason why vapour in bulb B is saturated.                                 (1 mark)

 

 

 

iii)   Describe how the thermometer above works.                                       (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. iv) At what points is reading of temperature taken from the thermometer.            (1 mark)

 

 

 

  1. a) State one factor that affects freezing point of distilled water.                  (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Figure below illustrates an experiment in which electrical energy is used to determine specific latent heat of fusion of ice.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Complete the circuit to show connection of essential circuit components.        (3 marks)

 

  1. ii) In the above experiment the following readings were obtained when heater was switched on for 10 minutes.

Voltage – 8.0V

Current – 2.25A

Temperature rise – 10°C

At the end of the experiment 400g of water at 0°C was collected in the beaker. Determine latent heat of fusing of ice.                                                                                         (3 marks

 

 

iii)   State any assumption made in (ii) above.                                                         (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a)i) What is the importance of banking a road in corners?                                     (1 mark

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Explain why wet clothes put in a drum which has holes at the bottom get dried faster when the drum of drying machine is rotated at high speed.                                                          (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) A turntable of a record player makes 60 revolutions per minute. Calculate.
  2. i) Angular velocity in rads/second.                                                                                    (2 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) The linear acceleration at a point 0.18M from the centre.                                               (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

17.a) In an experiment to determine the density of a liquid, uniform metal cylinder of cross-section area 6.0cm² and length of 4.2cm was hang from a spring balance and lowered gradually into liquid. The graph below shows upthrust plotted against, lengths submerged.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

From the graph, determine:

  1. i) Value of upthrust when the cylinder is fully submerged.                                                (1 mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) The density of the liquid in SI units.                                                                 (5 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) A solid displaces 5.0cm³ of paraffin when floating and 20cm³ when fully immersed in it. Given that the density of paraffin is 0.8g/cm³, calculate the density of the solid.                       (3 marks)

 

 

 

Name:………………………….…………………….…Index No…………………………….

232/2                                                               Candidate’s Signature…………………………

PHYCICS PAPER 2                                                  Date…………………..

Time: 2Hrs.               

 

MOCKS 1 2023

The Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education

PHYSICS

Paper 2

Instructions:

  • This paper consists of TWO Sections: A and B.
  • Answer ALL the questions in sections A and B in the spaces provided.
  • ALLworkingsMUST be clearly shown.
  • Mathematical tables and electronic calculators may be used.

 

 

 

 

 

 

For Examiner’s Use Only

 

 

Section Question Maximum Score Candidate’s  Score  
A 1 – 12 25  
 

 

B

13 12  
14 9  
15 11  
16 10  
17 8  
 

                      TOTAL SCORE

 

80

 

 

 

Section I  (25 marks)

  1. Figure 1 shows a pencil lying in front of a plane mirror. The pencil is moved 2cm towards the mirror in the same orientation.

 

Figure 1

Determine the distance between the new position of the tip of the pencil and its image. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State the basic law of magnetism.             (1mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Figure 2 shows two bar magnets, one whose poles are labelled and a second one whose poles are labelled X and Y. Iron nails are attracted to the lower ends of the magnets as shown.

 

                                                                                                                                                (1mk)

            Figure 2

Identify pole X

 

 

 

 

  1. State the reason why convex mirror is preferred over a plane mirror for use as driving mirrors in cars.             (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure 3 shows the displacement-time graph for a certain wave.

 

 

 

 

 

            Figure 3

  1. a) Determine the frequency of the wave. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) On the same diagram, draw a wave with half the amplitude and twice the frequency of the one

shown.                                                                                                        (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State the main difference between primary chemical cells and secondary chemical cells. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) State how the design of a dry Lechlanche cell reduces polarization. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure 4 shows a wave incident on a narrow opening.

           

 

Figure 4

 

Draw the appearance of the wave after passing through the opening.                              (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. A student stands between two classroom walls and claps. After 0.6 seconds, she hears the first echo and hears the second echo after 0.8 seconds. Determine the distance from the student to the further wall. Take speed of sound in air = 320m/s.             (3mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The list below is some radiations in the electro-magnetic spectrum. Red light, Gamma rays, Ultra violet radiations and Blue light. Arrange the radiations in order of increasing wavelength. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

  1. A controlled amount of pentavalent (donor) impurity atoms added in to a pure semi conductor such as silicon to improve its conductivity.
  2. a) Give name to the process above. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) What type of semiconductor is obtained in the above process?             (1mk)

 

 

N
  1. Figure 5 shows the cross-section of two bar magnets and a current carrying conductor held between them. The direction of current is into the paper.

 

S
N
Conductor

 

 

 

 

 

S

 

 

Figure 5

  1. a) indicate with an arrow the direction of force experienced by the conductor.             (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) State one way in which the force on the conductor above can be reduced.             (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State the reason why electrical power is transmitted over long distances at very high voltage

and low current.                                                                                                                       (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) An electric bulb is labelled 100W 20V. Determine the resistance of its filament at its operating

temperature.                                                                                                  (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State Ohm’s law.             (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. b) Figure 6 shows an electrical circuit.
A
3W
6W

 

Switch
5V

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 6

Determine the Ammeter reading in a closed circuit.                                                       (2mks)

 

 

SECTION B (55 Marks)

  1. a) State Lenz’s law of electromagnetic induction.             (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. b) Figure 7 shows stationary magnet and a solenoid being moved as shown.

 

Figure 7

  1. i) State with a reason the direction of deflection of the galvanometer. (2mks)

\

 

 

  1. ii) State one way through which the size of deflection of the galvanometer can be decreased.                         (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. c) State how energy losses in a transformer through eddy currents is minimized in its design.(1mk)

 

 

 

  1. d) Figure 8 shows two identical coils C and D made of insulated copper wires and are placed close to each other. Coil C is connected to DC power supply and Coil D to a galvanometer.

 

Figure 8

 

(i) State and explain what would be observed on the galvanometer immediately switch S is closed

and then opened.                                                                                                     (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) How would the observation made in d(i) differ if the number of turns in coil C were doubled

but those in D remain unchanged?                                                               (1mk)

 

 

 

 

  1. e) The primary coil of a transformer has 250 turns and the secondary coil has 50 turns. The

primary coil is connected to a 120V AC supply.

  1. i) State with a reason the type of transformer described above. (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. ii) Determine the voltage in the secondary coils. (1mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

iii) Given that the current in the primary coil is 0.50A and in the secondary coil is 2.0A. Determine the efficiency of the transformer.                                          (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State the law of electrostatic charges.             (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) Figure 9 shows a highly positively charged glass rod being brought slowly near the cap of a

negative charged gold leaf electroscope. It is observed that the leaf initially falls and then rises.

 

 

            Figure 9

Explain this observation.                                                                                   (1mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Figure 10 shows an electric circuit used to charge a capacitor C. When switch is closed, it is

observed that, the millimeter records some current which gradually reduces to zero with time.

Power Supply
R
mA
C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 10

Explain the observation                                                                                     (1mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Figure 11 shows an electrical circuit with three capacitors of 10mF, 2mF and 3mF capacitance

connected to a 240V supply.

3mF
2mF
10mF
240V

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 11

Determine

 

  1. i) The effective capacitance of the capacitor combination. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) The charged stored in the circuit. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

iii) The potential difference across the 2mF capacitor                                          (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State one condition necessary for total internal reflection to occur. (1mk)

 

 

  1. b) Figure 12 (a) shows a ray of light travelling in an optically denser medium to an optically rarer

medium. The angle of incidence i and angle of refraction r are also shown.

 

 

 

Figure 12 (a)                                                                                          Figure 12 (b)

Complete Figure 12 (b) to show the path of refraction ray when the angle of incidence is increased to reach critical angle.                                                                                                (1mk)

 

 

 

 

  1. c) An optical pin placed at the bottom of a glass measuring cylinder filled with a liquid and appears to be 11.4cm below the surface of the liquid. If the refractive index of the liquid is 1.48. Determine The height of the column of the liquid in the measuring cylinder.             (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) i) State one reason why glass prisms are preferred to plane mirrors in their use in periscope. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Figure 13 shows two right angled glass prism arranged to be used in a periscope.

An object is placed besides one prism as shown.

object
eye

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Figure 13

Complete the diagram by showing the path of rays of light from the object until they reach the eye.(1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) In an experiment to determine the focal length of a lens, you are provided with the following

apparatus.

  • A converging lens and a lens holder
  • A lit candle
  • A metre rule
  • A white screen
  1. i) State one measurements that you would take in the experiment. (1mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) In another experiment similar to the above, a graph showing the relationship between and was plotted as shown in figure 13.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

– Use the graph to determine the focal length, f of the lens.                               (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Figure 14 shows a defeat of the eye

 

 

 

 

            Figure 14

 

  1. i) State two possible causes of the defect. (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. ii) Explain how the defect is corrected. (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. a) i) In an X-ray tube explain why
  2.    The anode is made up of copper.                                                                          (1mk)

 

 

 

  1.   The cathode and the anode are connected to a high potential difference between them. (1mk)
  2. ii) State the adjustments made in an X-ray tube in order to decrease the intensity of X-ray. (1mk)

 

 

iii) State the property of X-rays that makes it used in detecting foreign objects in human bodies.

(1mk)

 

 

 

  1. b) i) Explain the meaning of the term photoelectric effect.             (1mk)

 

 

  1. ii) A monochromatic light frequency 6.25 x 1014 Hz is incident on a metal surface. The minimum

frequency that can cause photo emmission on the metal surface is 5.5 x 1014Hz. Given that Planck’s constant, h is 6.63 x 10-34 Js.

Determine

  1. The energy of the source light.                                                              (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The work function of the metal surface.                                                (2mks)

 

 

 

III.       The average kinetic energy of the photo electrons.                                 (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Figure 15 shows some features of a cathode ray tube.

 

Figure 15

  1. i) Name parts E & F             (2mks)

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) The process through which electrons are produced.             (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. b) i) Alpha (a) particles cause more ionization in a gas compared to Beta (b) particles. Give one

reason for this.                                                                                                        (1mk)

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) The following is part of radioactive decay series. The symbols do not represent the actual

symbols of the nuclides.

b
a

 

 

 

Determine the values of a and b                                                                                    (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

iii) A radioactive Isotope has a halflife of 5.25 years. Determine the fraction of the original

mass in a sample that will remain after 42 years                                                   (2mks)

 

 

Name:…………………………………………………IndexNo…………………………….

 

232/3                                                                          Candidate’s Signature:………………

PHYSICS

PRACTICAL                                                         Date:…………………………….……

PAPER 3

TIME:  HRS

 

MOCKS 1 2023

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (K.C.S.E.)

 

232/3

PHYSICS

Paper 3

 

INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES

  • Write your name and index number in the spaces provided.
  • Mathematical tables and non-programmable calculators may be used.
  • This paper consists of section A and section B.
  • Attempt all the questions in the spaces provided.
  • ALL working MUST be clearly shown.

 

 

 

                                                  For Examiners  Use

QUESTIONS MAXIMUM SCORE CANDIDATE’S SCORE
1 20  
2 20  

 

TOTAL 40  

 

This paper consists of  9printed pages. Candidates should check to ascertain that all pages are printed as indicated and that no questions are missing

Question 1

 

  1. You are provided with the following apparatus:

–           2 size D dry cells

–           100cm nichrome wire on a mm scale, labelled P at one end.

–           A bulb (2.5V) and a bulb holder.

–           8 connecting wires (at least 4 with crocodile clips)

–           Cell holder

–           A voltmeter (0-5V)

–           An ammeter (0-1A)

–           A jockey

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Connect the apparatus provided as shown in the diagram.

 

  1. b) Place the jockey at L = 20cm from P, then close the switch.

Record the ammeter reading and the voltmeter reading in the table below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) Repeat the experiment by placing the jockey at L = 30, 40, 50, 60 and 80cm from P.

Record your readings and complete the table below.

            Length l (cm) I (A) Pd, V(V) I(mA) Pd, v(MV) log I log V
20            
30            
40            
50            
60            
80            
  3mks 3mks -½ mk -½ mk -½ mk -½ mk

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Plot a graph of log I (y-axis) against log V (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Determine the slope of the graph. (3mks)

 

 

  1. f) Give that log I = nlog V + log K where n and k are constants of the lamp. Determine using your graph the value of:
  2. i) K                                                                                             (2mks)

 

 

  1. ii) n (2mks)

Question 2

Part A

You are provided with the following:

  • A retort stand, boss and clamp.
  • 2 boiling tubes
  • A thermometer
  • Some distilled water in a beaker labelled W
  • Some liquid in a beaker, labelled L
  • A 250ml beaker containing some water.
  • A measuring cylinder
  • A stop watch
  • A tripod stand and wire gauze
  • A card board with a hole in the middle
  • A burner.

Proceed as follows

  1. a) Clamp one boiling tube on the retort stand. Measure and pour 45ml, of the distilled water, W

into a boiling tube. Set up the apparatus as shown in the figure below.

  1. b) Heat the water in the large beaker (250ml) until the temperature of the distilled water reached 850 Remove the boiling tube from the hot water by lifting up the retort stand and placing it away from the burner.
  2. c) Stir the water in the boiling tube using the thermometer. Record in the table below the temperature of the distilled water at intervals of 30 seconds starting at 800C until it drops to 600C (stir the distilled water before taking any reading).
Time in minutes 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5
Temperature of W(0C)                    
Temperature of L(0C)                    

 

Time in minutes 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 7.0 7.5 8.0 8.5 9.0 9.5
Temperature of W(0C)                    
Temperature of L(0C)                    

(4mks)

  1. d) Using the second boiling tube, repeat the procedure in b and c using 45ml of liquid L instead of distilled water. Record your results in the same table.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Using the same axis on the grid provided, plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against time for
  2. i) Distilled water, W
  3. ii) Liquid L

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(Label the graphs of L and W.                                                                        (7mks)

 

  1. f) From the graph, determine:
  2. i) the time, t taken for the distilled water to cool from 750C to 650

tw = _____________ minutes                                                                               (1mk)

 

 

  1. ii) the time, t taken for liquid L, to cool from 750C to 650C

tL= _____________ minutes                                                                         (1mk)

 

  1. g) Determine the constant r given that where d, density of liquid, L = 0.8g/cm3. (2mks)

PART B

You are provided with the following:

  • Copper wire of length 130cm.
  • Test tube of diameter 1.5cm (ordinary)
  • Metre rule.

Procedure

By using the wire provided, make 20 closely packed turns around the said ordinary test tube as shown.

 

  1. h) Measure the length x = ______ cm (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. i) Use the result “X” to determine the thickness of the wire, d = ______ cm. (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. j) Given that the volume of the wire pd2L, determine the volume, V of the wire if

L = 120cm.                                                                                                   (3mks)

 

 

Free Grade 1 Lesson Plans for all Subjects

Download Free Grade 1 Lesson Plans for all Subjects

Foods-lesson-plans-grade-2-hygiene-and-nutrition-word-format

Grade-1-rationalised-mathematics-lesson-plans-term-2

Grade-1-rationalised-mathematics-lesson-plans-term-2-1

Grade-1-rationalised-creative-arts-lesson-plans-term-2

Grade-1-rationalised-english-lesson-plans-term-2

Grade-1-rationalised-environmental-activities-lesson-plans-term-2

Grade-1-mathematics-activities-term-2-lesson-plans-word-format

Form 3 Rationalized Term 2 Schemes of Work

Download Form 3 Rationalized Term 2 Schemes of Work at no cost, below:

FORM_3_TERM_2_CHEMISTRY_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_GEOGRAPHY_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_COMPUTER_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_KISWAHILI_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_IRE_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_ENGLISH_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_BUSINESS_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_AGRICULTURE_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_HISTORY_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_MATHEMATICS_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_BIOLOGY_SCHEMES
FORM_3_TERM_2_CRE_SCHEMES 
FORM_3_TERM_2_PHYSICS_SCHEMES

SMARTPASS ENGLISH PAPER 1 EXAMS PLUS ANSWERS FREE

Name………………………………………………………………Index No…………………….

Candidate’s signature………………………………………………Date………………………….                                                                                                                         

101/1

ENGLISH

Paper 1

(Functional writing, cloze test and oral skills.)

 2 Hours

SMARTPASS EXAMINATION

Kenya Certificate of Secondary Education (KCSE)

MODEL ONE 

ENGLISH

Paper 1

INSTRUCTIONS TO STUDENTS

  1. Write your name admission number and class in the spaces provided above.
  2. Answer all the questions in this question paper.
  3. All your answers must be written in the spaces provided in this question paper.
  4. This paper consists of 7 printed pages.
  5. Candidates should check the paper to ascertain that all the pages are printed as indicated and that no questions are missing.

For Examiner’s use only

Ques. Max. Score Student’s Score
1 20
2 10
3 30
TOTAL SCORE

 

  1. FUNCTIONAL WRITING 20 MARKS

You are the organizing secretary of the Youth Club in your school. You have planned to invite a school from a far place to discuss some emerging issues that affect the youth.

Fax the invitation, including some emerging issues to be discussed and instructions on how to get to your school.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. CLOZE TEST (10 MARKS)

Read the passage below and fill each blank space with an appropriate word.

As a teenager, I ______1______ very rebellious. I ______2______ lived my life on my own terms no matter what the advice I got, until an experience transformed all that.

Curiosity and adventure got the _______3_______ of me soon after completing high school and I found ________4________ taking opium. Soon I got hooked and started craving the stronger stuff ________5________ cocaine and heroin. The obedient pre-teenager youngster was all gone. In his place was a beast that could steal anything to _______6_______ an ill habit. Before long, my world came caving in when my best friend killed herself ________7________ overdosing intravenously. At her funeral, it was disclosed that she was HIV positive as well. This sobered me _______8_______. I immediately did what I had to do and got tested. The ______9______ were as expected. With my reckless lifestyle, there wasn’t going to be any other result. I had no one to blame but myself for contracting this dreaded disease at only 20 years of age. It is this very incident that confirmed _______10_______ everyone had been warning me about.

 

  1. ORAL SKILLS (30 MARKS)
  2. Read the story below and answer the questions that follow.

 

THE CRUEL STEP-MOTHER

Once upon a time, there was a man and wife who had a baby girl, unfortunately, the wife died, and so, the man married again. He got another girl with the second wife. The two girls became extremely close, so that whenever the mother sent one on an errand, the other was sure to accompany her. The mother, however, did not like the child of the deceased. She would always show her dislike by denying her certain favors. Her feelings became so bad that she decided to get rid of the girl. To do this, she dug a hole in her bedroom on a day when the husband was absent and covered the hole with a cow’s hide. She then called her daughter and sent her to the house of a friend some kilometers away. As usual, the two girls wanted to go together but the woman refused giving the excuse that she wanted to send the other one elsewhere.

After the departure of her daughter, she tailed the other girl and sent her for her snuffbox in the bedroom. Unaware of what lay ahead, the girl eagerly rushed into the room only to fall into a hole! The mother very quickly filled the hole with soil, completely disregarding the girl’s screams for help.

When the daughter came back, she merely assumed that the absence of her dear companion was justified. After hours of waiting, she, however, became impatient and questioned the mother.

‘Where is my sister?’ she asked.

‘But she followed you. As soon as she did what I wanted, she ran after you. Now stop bothering me,’ the mother retorted.

Time passed and now the anxious girl went around calling out the name of the other one, but all in vain. Alas…. She cried the whole night and the next day and refused to touch any food. The father helped in the search but to no avail.’

After three days, the girl still cried and called the other one. She then heard a very weak voice responding in song:

Maalya Maalya

Maalya Maalya

Na mwenvu niwe mwai iiee malya

Ekwinza muthiko iiee malya

Wakwisa kunthika iiee malya

 

Maalya Maalya

And your mother is the wise one iiee Malya

She dug a grave iiee Malya

For interring me in iiee Malya

 

The girl dashed towards the direction of the voice, repeated her cries and again got the same response. She came to the conclusion that whoever was responding was definitely underground somewhere in the house. Immediately the father came that day (before the arrival of the mother), she told them what had happened. After hearing the song, the father dug up the place and pulled out an extremely weak and disfigured daughter. All three, wailed and wailed. Eventually, the father gave her a mixture of blood from a goat and milk to drink after which she vomited all the soil she had eaten. He gave her some more of the mixture after which he hid her.

 

When the wife eventually came back, the man did not let her get into the house but sent her for a cow in a far-off place. He explained away his action by telling her that he had decided to host a feast for relatives (including his in-laws). In the meantime, he sent for all of them. When the woman came back with the cow, she found everyone waiting for her. Uneasy now, she sat down in the place she was shown by her husband. He then called upon the wife to explain the circumstances leading to the sad episode. She hauntingly repeated the now commonly known story. When she sat down, the husband told this woman’s daughter to repeat her earlier wails after which all heard:

 

Maalya Maalya

Maalya Maalya

Na mwenvu niwe mwai iiee malya

Ekwinza muthiko iiee malya

Wakwisa kunthika iiee malya

 

All were surprised to hear the words of the other girl’s song and at that moment, the ‘dead’ girl joined them. The woman was as though paralyzed by shock. The husband then explained the truth of the matter and told the in-laws to take their daughter with them. They said that if that was what she had done to the girl, they couldn’t have such a monster in the house. The woman was disowned by all and chased away.

 

  1. Questions:

 

  1. If you were performing this story what oral skills would you use? (4 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. As a story teller, how would you deliver the two songs to portray the different contexts.                                                                                     (2 marks)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  • If you were one of the relatives invited by the girl’s father, how would you portray your reaction towards the revelation of the step-mother’s behaviour? (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. In each of the following groups of words, three words begin with the same consonant sound while one does not. Underline the words that begin with a different consonant.

(3 marks)

  1. Wrist, Write, Rattle, Wasp

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Fish, Psychology, Phantom, Physics

………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Chase, Cheat, Chord, Charm

………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. Underline the stressed syllables in the following words                         (3 marks)

 

  1. Palatial
  2. Rejuvenation
  • Police

 

  1. You are attending a debate club competition in your neighbouring school. When a student from your school takes the podium. You notice that she/he is afraid.

Write down three indicators that would tell you the student is afraid and suggest how to overcome them.                                                                                              (6 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

  1. Identify the odd one out for each of the following according to the pronunciation of the underlined part.                                                                         (3 marks)

 

  1. Garage, Passage, Damage, Rummage

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Expect, Explosive, Extract, Exploration

………………………………………………………………………………………

  • Jealous, Heavy, Thread, Meal

………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. Read the following conversation between a teacher and a student and answer the questions that follow:                                                                                     (8 marks)

 

Student:          Excuse me sir, I would like you to give me permission to go out.

Teacher:          Why do you need to go out just when I have entered the class?

Student:          I am sorry about that sir, but I suffer incontinence.

Teacher:          Stop using big words! Do you think that you can impress me with that?

Student:          I did not mean to offend you sir. All I am trying to say is that I am unable to control my bladder.

Teacher:          So now you take me for a simpleton!

Student:          No sir!

Teacher:          Now get out of my sight before I lose my temper.

 

Now rewrite the teacher’s responses in this conversation to show proper etiquette and empathetic listening.                                                                                           (8 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………




101/1 SMARTPASS ENGLISH PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME MODEL ONE 

  1. Functional Writing

The question tests the candidate’s ability to write a fax, invitation and how to give directions.

Points of Interpretation

  1. Format of a fax 5mks

Name of inviting institution (at the top)       ½

Fax no. (of invited institution)                       ½

No. of pages                                                   ½

Attention of                                                    ½

From                                                               ½

Date                                                                ½

Salutation e.g. Dear                                        ½

Closing (yours +Name)                                  ½

NB if name is missing deny the mark

 

Body

  1. Candidate should state that it is an invitation at the introductory level e.g. welcome you to, I invite you to etc
  2. The reason for the invitation- at least 3 emerging issues e.g. ICT, Drugs, HIV and AIDS etc
  • The date, time and venue 4mks
  1. The direction 5mks

Candidates should give brief, clear and precise instructions to guide the invited school to arrive without getting lost.

What to Mark:

  • Direction – compass directions e.g. left, right, East 1mk
  • Distance – idea of distance expressed in miles and kilometers 1mk
  • Landmarks – rivers, mountains, at least 2 2mks
  • Time- e.g. 2 hrs 1mk

 

Language:       5mks

Award as follows:

A         4 – 5                No errors

B         3                      A few errors

C         2                      Multiple errors

D         1                      Broken

 

 

  1. CLOZE TEST (10 MARKS)

 

  1. Was
  2. Only
  3. Better
  4. Myself
  5. Like
  6. Satisfy
  7. After
  8. Up
  9. Results
  10. What

 

  1. ORAL SKILLS (30 MARKS)

 

  1. Tonal variation to distinguish the different characters i.e. the narrator, the girl and the mother.

Singing the song

Use of gestures e.g. digging, covering the hole with a cow’s hide etc.

Use of facial expressions e.g. surprise after the girl is discovered, portray weak and disfigured girl, etc.

Dramatise – mother quickly filling the hole with soil.

Any two- 1 mk for identification 1mk for illustration

No mark for illustration without identification

4 mks

  1. 1st song – low intonation (weak/pleading tone to show despondency/helplessness/despair/stress 1mk

2nd song – Higher intonation (confident tone /forceful/tone of malice/condemnation                         1mk

 

  • Gesture of surprise

Shaking of head in disbelief

Clicking in disgust

A sign of relief           (Any 1mk)

  1. Wasp
  2. Psychology
  • Chord
  1. Palatial
  2. Rejuvenation
  • Police

 

  1. Trembling hands
  2. Beads of sweat on the forehead
  • Stammering and trembling lips
  1. Avoiding eye contact with audience
  2. Shaky paper or the reading material he/she is holding

(Any 3 × 1) = 3mks

How to overcome

  1. Taking a deep breath before presentation
  2. Mastering the content
  • Organising the presentation/points in a logical manner
  1. Looking over the audience instead of looking at them directly
  2. Rehearsing well before the presentation with a friend or in front of the mirror.

(Any 3 × 1) = 3mks

 

  1. Garage
  2. Exploration
  • Meal
  1. May I know why you need to go out just when I have entered the classroom?
  2. I am sorry, but I do not get what you mean by incontinence
  • I am sorry to hear about that. By the way, thank you for teaching me a new word.
  1. You may go out.

2 marks for each correct answer: total = 8 marks

KCSE Chemistry Exam Papers

KCSE Chemistry Exam Papers – Improve Your Performance with Practice.

Enhance your KCSE Chemistry exam preparation with a collection of past papers. Boost your performance and achieve better results.

Get an unlimited KCSE Chemistry Exams below;

[bsk-pdfm-pdfs-columns id=”106,107,108,109,110,111,112,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,121,122,123,124,125,126,127,128,129,130,131,132,133,134,135,136,137,138,139″  columns=”2″ featured_image=”yes” show_pdf_title=”yes” target=”_blank”]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

.

ELECTRONICS PHYSICS NOTES

TOPIC 41 – ELECTRONICS

  1. Introduction
    1. Definition – Study of free electrons in motion.
    2. Uses – pocket calculators, digital watches, musical instruments, radios, TVs, computers, robots, etc
  2. Classes of materials and their differences:-
    1. Conductors – Have free electrons on the outer shell – copper, silver, aluminium, etc
    2. Insulators – Electrons tightly bound to the nucleus – rubber, plastics, ceramics, etc
    3. Semi-conductors – conducting properties between conductor & insulators – silicon, Germanium,
  3. Energy Bands or Levels:-
    1. Conduction band – electrons are free to move under an influence of an electric current.
    2. Valance band – Electrons are not free to move
    3. Forbidden band – represents the energy level where electron cannot occupy
    4. Materials and the three energy levels
  4. Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semi-conductors
    1. Intrinsic semiconductors:
  5. Definition: Pure semi-conductors – with properties of a pure substance –
    1. Examples – Group 4 elements – silicon & Germanium
    2. Extrinsic semi-conductors
  6. Definition – With added impurities –
    1. Doped to obtain a desired electrical property. G3 or G5
  7. The Doping Process – Extrinsic Semi-conductors
    • Doping is a process of introducing a very small quantity of impurity to a pure semiconductor to obtain a desired electrical property.
  8. N-Type – formed by doping G4 with G5 – Pentavalent atom – Phosphorous, Antimony, Arsenic
  1. Majority charge carriers are electrons and minority charge carriers are hole.
  2. ii) Illustrate with sketches
    1. P-Type – formed by doping G4 with G3 – Trivalent atom – Boron, aluminium, Indium etc-
  3. Majority charge carriers are holes and minority charge carriers are electrons.
  4. ii) Illustrate with sketches
  5. Junction Diodes – The P-N Junction Diode
    1. Definition of a diode – device which allows current to flow in one direction only. It is a one way valve
    2. Formation of p-n junction diode – device in which the p-side is connected to Anode and n-side to Cathode
    3. Depletion layer – region between p-side and n-side having very high resistance – conducts poorly.
    4. Difference between a thermionic diode and p-n junction diode – and their circuit symbols
  6. Biasing -Two biasing systems of P-N Diodes:-
    1. Forward bias – low resistance – current flows – conducts well – draw circuit diagram
    2. Reverse bias – high resistance – current through the diode is virtually zero – draw circuit diagram
  7. Characteristics curves for p-n junction diodes
    1. Current I against Voltage for Silicon
    2. Current I against Voltage for Germanium
    3. Reason why silicon is preferred to Germanium.
  8. Applications of P-N Junction diode
    1. Protection – from reverse power supply
    2. Rectification – changing Alternation current to Direct current – AC to DC
  9. Rectification and smoothing.
    1. Definition of rectification & use of diodes
    2. Definition of smoothing & use of capacitors
    3. Types of rectification
  10. Half-wave rectification – use of one diode
    1. Full-wave rectification:
      1. Use of Two Diodes – centre-tap-transformer & Use of Four diodes – bridge rectifier
  1. Project work – Simple radio Receiver
  1. Introduction
  1. Definition – Study of motion of free electrons in electrical circuits.
  2. Uses – pocket calculators; digital watches; heart pacemakers; musical instruments; radios, TVs, computers for industry, commerce and scientific research; traffic lights; microwave ovens; video cassette recorders; Personal computers (PCs); electronic games; multimedia applications; computer aided design (CAD); electronic limbs; “keyhole” surgery; data processing; electronic cash dispensers; digital telephone links; fax; e-mail; World Wide Web; Robots, etc
    1. Classes of materials and their differences:-
  3. Conductors:
  4. Have free electrons on the outer shell
    1. Electrons not tightly bound to the nucleus of the atom
  • The materials have very low electrical resistance
  1. Good conductors of electricity.
  2. Examples – silver, copper, aluminium, etc
  3. Resistance increases with rise in temperature, caused by collision between moving free electrons and the vibrating atoms.
  1. Insulators
  2. Electrons are not free.
  3. Electrons are tightly bound to the nucleus of the atoms.
  • The materials have very high electrical resistance
  1. They do not conduct electricity.
  2. Examples – Rubber, plastics, ceramics,
  3. Insulators have negative temperature coefficient of resistance.
  4. Semi-conductors
  5. Materials with conducting properties between conductors and insulators
  6. Their electrical conductivities are higher than those of insulators but less than those of conductors.
  • Examples – silicon, Germanium, Indium, Gallium Arsenide, Cadmium Sulphite, etc
  1. Semiconductors have negative temperature coefficient of resistance; i.e. their electrical resistance decrease with increase in temperature.
  2. The extent to which a semiconductor conducts electricity is considerably affected by the presence of impurities.

 

 

  1. Energy Bands or Levels:-
  • Conduction band – here electrons are free to move under the influence of an electric current.
  • Valance band – here electrons are not free to move
  • Forbidden band – represents the energy level that cannot be occupied by electrons. The width of the band determines the conductivity of the material.

Materials and the three energy levels:-

  1. For Conductors
  2. Conduction band:- have free electrons
  3. Valence band – few electrons – unfilled because some electrons are in the conduction band
  • Forbidden band – No forbidden band –conduction and valence band overlap.
  1. For Insulators
  2. Conduction band – has no electrons – Empty
  3. Valance band – Filled with electrons – full of electrons
  • Forbidden band – has very wide gap – high resistance – 3 to 5 eV
  1. For Semiconductors
  1. Conduction band: – Has no electrons at 0K Empty at very low temperatures

– Partially filled at room temperature.

  1. Valance band – – Filled with electrons at 0K i.e. filled at very low temperatures

– Unfilled at room temperature – few electrons at room temperature.

  • Forbidden band – Has a narrow gap – 1 eV

Diagrams to illustrate energy levels for materials

 

NOTE: For Semiconductors –

  • At room temperature – it has holes in the valance band and electrons in the conduction band
  • At 0K – it behaves like an insulator
  • HOLES – Holes are created when an electron moves from valance band to conduction band.
  • Holes are very important for conduction of electric current in semiconductors.

 

  1. Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semi-conductors
  1. Intrinsic semiconductors:
  1. They are pure semi-conductors, with electrical properties of a pure substance.
  2. Has equal number of holes and electrons
  • Conductivity is very low, insulator at low temperature.
  1. Usually not used in the pure state.
  2. Examples – Group 4 elements – silicon & Germanium
  3. Diagrams
  • An atom of silicon has four valence electrons and in the lattice each one is shared with a nearby atom to form four covalent bonds.
  • A strong crystal lattice results in which it is difficult for electrons to escape from their atoms.
  • Pure silicon is therefore a very good insulator, being perfect at near absolute zero (- 273 0C).

 

  1. b) Extrinsic semi-conductors
  2. i) They are semiconductors with added impurities
  3. ii) They are doped to obtain a desired electrical property; doped with group 3 or 5 elements.
    • All semiconductors in practical use have added impurities

 

  1. The Doping Process – Extrinsic Semi-conductors
  • Doping is a process of introducing a very small quantity of impurity to a pure semiconductor to obtain a desired electrical property.

 

  • There are two types of extrinsic semiconductors:-
  1. N-Type Semiconductor
  2. Formed by doping G4 with G5 – Pentavalent atom – Phosphorous, Antimony, Arsenic
  3. Group 4 elements – Tetravalent – silicon, germanium, etc
  • Formation of an N-Type Semiconductor:-
    • Formed by adding a Pentavalent atom (Phosphorus) to a group 4 semiconductor (silicon) and an extra electron is left unpaired and is available for conduction.
    • Majority charge carriers are electrons and minority charge carriers are positive hole.
    • Conduction of electricity is now possible because of extra electrons.
    • Phosphorous is called a DONOR. Silicon has now more electrons.

 

  1. Diagrams

 

  1. P-Type Semiconductor
  2. formed by doping G4 with G3 – Trivalent atom – Boron, aluminium, Indium etc-
  3. Formation of a P-Type Semiconductor:-
  • Formed by adding a trivalent atom (Boron) to a group 4 semiconductor (silicon), a fourth electron will be unpaired and a gap will be left called a positive hole.
  • Pure semiconductor is doped with an impurity of group 3 element, combination creates a positive hole which can accepts an electron.
  • The doping material creates a Positive hole, which can accept an electron – called an
  • Majority charge carriers are holes and minority charge carriers are electrons.
  • Diagrams:-

 

  1. Junction Diodes – The P-N Junction Diode
  1. Definition of a diode –
  • An electronic device with two electrodes, which allows current to flow in one direction only.
  • It is a one way valve. It is a solid device.
  1. Formation of p-n junction diode
    • It is a device in which the p-side is connected to Anode and n-side to Cathode
  • It consists of such a p-n junction with the P-side connected to the Anode and the N-side to the Cathode.
  • It is formed by doping a crystal of pure silicon so that a junction is formed between the p-type and n-type regions.
  1. Depletion layer –
  • The region between p-side and n-side having very high resistance, it conducts poorly.
  • At the junction, electrons diffuse from both sides and neutralize each other.
  • A narrow depletion layer is formed on either side of the junction free from charge carriers and of high resistance
  1. The Junction
  • The plane (boundary) between two different types of semiconductors.
  1. Diagram of unbiased P-N Junction diode.

 

  1. Difference between a thermionic diode and p-n junction diode – and their circuit symbols

 

  1. Biasing -Two biasing systems of P-N Diodes:-
  2. Forward bias – low resistance – current flows – conducts well – draw circuit diagram
  3. Reverse bias – high resistance – current through the diode is virtually zero – draw circuit diagram

 

  1. Characteristics curves for p-n junction diodes
  2. Current I against Voltage for Silicon
  3. Current I against Voltage for Germanium
  4. Reason why silicon is preferred to Germanium.

 

  1. Applications of P-N Junction diode
  2. Protection – from reverse power supply
  1. Rectification –

changing Alternation current to Direct current – AC to DC

RECTIFIERS

Overview

As we have noted when looking at the Elements of a Power Supply, the purpose of the rectifier section is to convert the incoming ac from a transformer or other ac power source to some form of pulsating dc. That is, it takes current that flows alternately in both directions as shown in the first figure to the right, and modifies it so that the output current flows only in one direction, as shown in the second and third figures below.

The circuit required to do this may be nothing more than a single diode, or it may be considerably more complex. However, all rectifier circuits may be classified into one of two categories, as follows:

 

Half-Wave Rectifiers. An easy way to convert ac to pulsating dc is to simply allow half of the ac cycle to pass, while blocking current to prevent it from flowing during the other half cycle. The figure to the right shows the resulting output. Such circuits are known as half-wave rectifiers because they only work on half of the incoming ac wave. 

Full-Wave Rectifiers. The more common approach is to manipulate the incoming ac wave so that both halves are used to cause output current to flow in the same direction. The resulting waveform is shown to the right. Because these circuits operate on the entire incoming ac wave, they are known as full-wave rectifiers. 

 

 

Rectifier circuits may also be further clasified according to their configuration, as we will see below

 

The Half-Wave Rectifier

 

 

The simplest rectifier circuit is nothing more than a diode connected in series with the ac input, as shown to the right. Since a diode passes current in only one direction, only half of the incoming ac wave will reach the rectifier output. Thus, this is a basic half-wave rectifier.

 

The orientation of the diode matters; as shown, it passes only the positive half-cycle of the ac input, so the output voltage contains a positive dc component. If the diode were to be reversed, the negative half-cycle would be passed instead, and the dc component of the output would have a negative polarity. In either case, the DC component of the output waveform is vp/π = 0.3183vp, where vp is the peak voltage output from the transformer secondary winding.

It is also quite possible to use two half-wave rectifiers together, as shown in the second figure to the right. This arrangement provides both positive and negative output voltages, with each output utilizing half of the incoming ac cycle

 

 

Note that in all cases, the lower transformer connection also serves as the common reference point for the output. It is typically connected to the common ground of the overall circuit. This can be very important in some applications. The transformer windings are of course electrically insulated from the iron core, and that core is normally grounded by the fact that it is bolted physically to the metal chassis (box) that supports the entire circuit. By also grounding one end of the secondary winding, we help ensure that this winding will never experience even momentary voltages that might overload the insulation and damage the transformer.

The Full-Wave Rectifier

 

While the half-wave rectifier is very simple and does work, it isn’t very efficient. It only uses half of the incoming ac cycle, and wastes all of the energy available in the other half. For greater efficiency, we would like to be able to utilize both halves of the incoming ac. One way to accomplish this is to double the size of the secondary winding and provide a connection to its center. Then we can use two separate half-wave rectifiers on alternate half-cycles, to provide full-wave rectification. The circuit is shown to the right.

 

 

Because both half-cycles are being used, the DC component of the output waveform is now 2vp/π = 0.6366vp, where vp is the peak voltage output from half the transformer secondary winding, because only half is being used at a time.

This rectifier configuration, like the half-wave rectifier, calls for one of the transformer’s secondary leads to be grounded. In this case, however, it is the center connection, generally known as the center tap on the secondary winding.

 

 

The full-wave rectifier can still be configured for a negative output voltage, rather than positive. In addition, as shown to the right, it is quite possible to use two full-wave rectifiers to get outputs of both polarities at the same time.

The full-wave rectifier passes both halves of the ac cycle to either a positive or negative output. This makes more energy available to the output, without large intervals when no energy is provided at all. Therefore, the full-wave rectifier is more efficient than the half-wave rectifier. At the same time, however, a full-wave rectifier providing only a single output polarity does require a secondary winding that is twice as big as the half-wave rectifier’s secondary, because only half of the secondary winding is providing power on any one half-cycle of the incoming ac.

Actually, it isn’t all that bad, because the use of both half-cycles means that the current drain on the transformer winding need not be as heavy. With power being provided on both half-cycles, one half-cycle doesn’t have to provide enough power to carry the load past an unused half-cycle. Nevertheless, there are some occasions when we would like to be able to use the entire transformer winding at all times, and still get full-wave rectification with a single output polarity.

 

 

The Full-Wave Bridge Rectifier

 

The four-diode rectifier circuit shown to the right serves very nicely to provide full-wave rectification of the ac output of a single transformer winding. The diamond configuration of the four diodes is the same as the resistor configuration in a Wheatstone Bridge. In fact, any set of components in this configuration is identified as some sort of bridge, and this rectifier circuit is similarly known as a bridge rectifier.

If you compare this circuit with the dual-polarity full-wave rectifier above, you’ll find that the connections to the diodes are the same. The only change is that we have removed the center tap on the secondary winding, and used the negative output as our ground reference instead. This means that the transformer secondary is never directly grounded, but one end or the other will always be close to ground, through a forward-biased diode. This is not usually a problem in modern circuits.

 

 

To understand how the bridge rectifier can pass current to a load in only one direction, consider the figure to the right. Here we have placed a simple resistor as the load, and we have numbered the four diodes so we can identify them individually.

During the positive half-cycle, shown in red, the top end of the transformer winding is positive with respect to the bottom half. Therefore, the transformer pushes electrons from its bottom end, through D3 which is forward biased, and through the load resistor in the direction shown by the red arrows. Electrons then continue through the forward-biased D2, and from there to the top of the transformer winding. This forms a complete circuit, so current can indeed flow. At the same time, D1 and D4 are reverse biased, so they do not conduct any current.

During the negative half-cycle, the top end of the transformer winding is negative. Now, D1 and D4 are forward biased, and D2 and D3 are reverse biased. Therefore, electrons move through D1, the resistor, and D4 in the direction shown by the blue arrows. As with the positive half-cycle, electrons move through the resistor from left to right.

In this manner, the diodes keep switching the transformer connections to the resistor so that current always flows in only one direction through the resistor. We can replace the resistor with any other circuit, including more power supply circuitry (such as the filter), and still see the same behavior from the bridge rectifier.

Free Biology KCSE Past Papers and Marking Schemes – All Years

Biology KCSE Past Papers and Marking Schemes – All Years Free

2008-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PAPER-1-MS.docx
2008-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PAPER-1.docx
2008-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PAPER-3-MS.docx
2009KCSE-BIOLOGY-QUESTIONS.pdf
2010-2011-BIOLOGY-ANSWERS.doc
2010-2011-BIOLOGY-QUESTIONS.doc
2012 KCSE BIO MS.pdf
2012-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PAPER-1.pdf
2012-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PAPER-2.docx
2012-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PRACTICAL-PAPER-3.pdf
2013-KCSE-BIOLOGY-MS.docx
2013-KCSE-BIOLOGY-QUESTIONS.docx
2014-KCSE-BIOLOGY-MS.pdf
2014-KCSE-BIOLOGY-QS-PAPERS.pdf
2015-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP1.pdf
2015-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP2.pdf
2015-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP3.pdf
2016-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP1.pdf
2016-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP2.pdf
2016-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP3.pdf
2016-MS-ALL-SUBJECTS.pdf
2017 KCSE BIO PP1 MS.pdf
2017 KCSE BIO PP2 MS.pdf
2017 KCSE BIOLOGY PP1.pdf
2017 KCSE Biology report.pdf
2017 KCSE_BIOLOGY PP2.pdf
2017-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP2-MARKING-SCHEME.pdf
2017-KCSE-BIOLOGY-PP3-ms.pdf
2018 231 P3 MS – Osoro_-578339011.pdf
2018 bio pp2 mrk scm kcse.pdf
2018 bio pp3 msc.pdf
2018 KCSE BIO PP2.pdf
2018 KCSE BIO PP3.pdf
2018 KSCE biology p1 qns.pdf
2019 KCSE bio p1 ms(2).pdf
2019 KCSE BIO P1.pdf
2019 KCSE Bio p2 ms.pdf
2019 KCSE BIO P2.pdf
2019 KCSE Bio P3.pdf
Advert for Director-KISE CHIEF AND SENIOR PRINCIPAL.pdf
KCSE 2018 bio p1 ms.pdf
TRAINING OF TEACHERS IN CBC.pdf

RADIOACTIVITY PHYSICS NOTES, REVISION QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

RADIOCTIVITY

INTRODUCTION

Radioactivity is a process where an unstable nuclide breaks up to yield another nuclide of different composition with emission of particles and energy

Radioactive decay is the spontaneous disintegration/decay of a radioactive  nuclide.

Radioisotopes are isotopes which are radioactive

.

Radioactivity is a nuclear reaction and not a chemical reaction

        similarities:between  Nuclear and chemical reaction

(i)-both involve the subatomic particles; electrons, protons and neutrons in an  atom

(ii)-both involve the subatomic particles trying to make the atom more stable.

(iii)-Some form of energy transfer to the environment take  place.

Differences between chemical reactions and nuclear reactions

Nuclear reaction Chemical reaction
Takes place within the nucleus and involves neutrons and protons Takes place on the outer energy elevel and only involves valency electrons
Release large amounts of heat energy Much less energy released
Not affected by environmental factors such as temperature Are affected by environmental factors such as temperature and pressure
New element  formed No new element formed

 

 

CHARACTERISTICS OF RADIOACTIVITY

All atoms with atomic number above 82 are radioactive

Radioactivity reactions are spontaneous and produce a lot of energy

Radioactivity is not affected by external factors like temperature and pressure

Types of radiation

There are three types of radiations emitted when radioactive nuclides disintegrate

 

(i)alpha(α) particle decay

 

(ii)Beta (β) particle decay

 

iii)Gamma (y) particle decay
       I.          Is positively charged and are attracted to the negative  plate of electric field

 

is negatively charged  hence attracted to the positive plate of electric field. No charge
     II.          Has mass number 4 and atomic number 2 therefore equal to a charged helium atom ( 42he2+)

 

no mass number  and atomic number  negative one(-1)  therefore equal to a fast moving electron (0 -1e)

 

 has  no mass number  and atomic number therefore equal to   electromagnetic waves.
they show a lesser deflection by electric filed ,due to their large mass Show are greater deflection due to the lesser mass Not deflected
have very low penetrating power and thus can be stopped  a thin sheet of Have medium penetrating power and thus can be stopped  thin sheet of aluminum foil.

 

very high  penetrating power and thus can  be stopped by a thick block of lead..
       I.          have high ionizing power thus cause a lot of damage to living cells.

 

Have medium ionizing power thus cause less damage to living cells than α particle. have very low ionizing power thus cause  less  damage to living cells  unless on prolonged exposure

 

 

Alpha decay;

a nuclide undergoing α-decay has its mass number reduced by 4 and its atomic number reduced by 2

 

Examples of alpha decay

 

210 84 Pb                        206 82 Pb            + 42He 2+

 

226 88 Ra                       222 88 Rn +          42He 2+

 

 

complete the equations below

 

266 106 Sg                      mn RF     +          42He 2+

 

251 98 Cf                       238 92U   +          …………………

 

285 112 Cn                     pq Hs      +          2 42He 2+

 

z a Es                           235 93 Np +          3 42He 2+

 

288 114 Uuq                   278 104 Rf   +       ………………

 

226 88 Ra                       222 88 Rn +          42He 2+

 

beta (β) decay

  1. v) a nuclide undergoing β -decay has its mass number remain the same and its atomic number increase by 1

 

Examples of beta (β) decay

22888Ra                                     22889Ac              +  0-1e

    

  22888Ra                         22892Th             +         

 

.    23290Th                      23291Pb                          +

                     

 lkTh                  21293Np            + 30-1e

 

Gamma y -decay

 

  1. v) a nuclide undergoing y -decay has its mass number and its atomic number remain the same.

 

 

The sketch diagram below shows the penetrating power of the radiations from a radioactive nuclide.

 

 

 

radioactive nuclide      sheet of paper       aluminium foil       thick block of lead

(radiation source)          (block α-rays)         (block β-rays)        block y-rays)

 

 

 

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  α-rays              β-rays                          y-rays

           

The sketch diagram below illustrates the effect of electric /magnetic field on the three radiations from a radioactive nuclide

 

 

 

 

Radioactive disintegration/decay naturally produces the stable 20682Pb nuclide /isotope of lead.Below is the 238 92 U natural decay series. Identify the particle emitted in each case

 

 

B:NUCLEAR FISSION AND NUCLEAR FUSION

Radioactive disintegration/decay can be initiated in an industrial laboratory through two chemical methods:

  1. a) nuclear fission
  2. b) nuclear

a)Nuclear fission

Nuclear fission is the splitting process of a a heavy unstable nuclide releasing lighter nuclides, and a large quantity of energy   when bombarded /hit by a fast moving neutron

Nuclear fission is the basic chemistry behind nuclear bombs made in the nuclear reactors.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Examples of nuclear equations showing nuclear fission

 

 

Supply the missing information to te equations below

10 n  +  235 b U                        9038 Sr  + a54Xe + 310 n  +  energy

 

10 n   +        2713 Al                       2813 Al        +   y  +   energy

 

23592 U  + 10 n                          14757 La +    8735  Br + —- + energy

 

 

10 n  +  235 b U                   10 n  + ………….. energy

 

24796Cm  + 10 n                         ……….+    10 n       + energy

 

23595U  + 10 n                            ……….+     14256 Ba +310 n    +   energy

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NUCLEAR FUSION.

Nuclear fusion is the process which smaller nuclides join together to form larger / heavier nuclides releasing a large quantity of energy..

Nuclear fusion is the basic chemistry behind solar/sun radiation.

Two daughter atoms/nuclides of Hydrogen fuse/join to form Helium nuclide on the surface of the sun releasing large quantity of energy in form of heat and light

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

21H      +    21H                        abHe       +      10 n + energy

        

 

   21H       +       21H                        ………..      +    11 H+ energy

 

11H                        42He       +         ………….+ energy

 

147N     +     ………….                      178O      +           11 H+ energy

 

5324N     +      42He       .                      10n      +      …………….+ energy

 

 

 

 

Similarities between nuclear fusion and nuclear fission

 

In both  a large quantity of energy

Both processes results in chain reactions

In both cases sub-atomic particles such as neutrons accompany the peocess

 

 

Differences between nuclear fusion and nuclear fission

Nuclear nuclear fission nuclear fusion
Heavy nucleus is split to smaller nuclei Smaller nuclei combine to form heavy nucleus
Have a lower activation energy Have a higher activation energy
Produces larger  amount of energy than nuclear fusion Produces relatively lower amount of energy

 

 

 

: HALF LIFE PERIOD (t1/2)

 

The half-life period is the time taken for a radioactive nuclide to spontaneously decay/ disintegrate to half its original mass/ amount.

It is usually denoted t 1/2.

The rate of radioactive nuclide disintegration/decay is constant for each nuclide.

 

 

The table below shows the half-life period of some elements.

 

Element/Nuclide Half-life period(t 1/2 )
238 92 U 4.5 x 109 years
14 6 C 5600 years
229 88 Ra 1620 years

 

The less the half life the more unstable the nuclide /element.

The half-life period is determined by using a Geiger-Muller counter (GM tube)

.A GM tube is connected to ratemeter that records the count-rates per unit time.

This is the rate of decay/ disintegration of the nuclide.

If the count-rates per unit time fall by half, then the time taken for this fall is the half-life period.

 

 

 

APPLICATIONS OF HALF LIFE

 

  1. Carbon dating
  2. Detecting leakages
  • Monitoring plant growth
  1. In medicine to monitor plant growth.

 

 

 

 

Examples

a)A radioactive substance gave a count of 240 counts per minute but after 6 hours the count rate were 30 counts per minute. Calculate the half-life period of the substance.

If  t 1/2  = x

 

then  240         120       60        30

From 240 to 30 =3x =6 hours

=>x  = t 1/2 = ( 6 / 3 )

= 2 hours

  1. b) The count rate of a nuclide fell from 200 counts per second to 12.5 counts per second in 120 minutes.

Calculate the half-life period of the nuclide.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. c) After 6 hours the count rate of a nuclide fell from 240 counts per second to 15 counts per second on the GM tube. Calculate the half-life period of the nuclide.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. d) Calculate the mass of nitrogen-13 that remain from 2 grams after 6 half-lifes if the half-life period of nitrogen-13 is 10 minutes.

 

 

 

  1. e) What fraction of a gas remains after 1hour if its half-life period is 20 minutes?

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. f) 348 grams of a nuclide A was reduced to 43.5 grams after 270days.Determine the half-life period of the nuclide.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. g) How old is an Egyptian Pharaoh in a tomb with 2grams of 14C if the normal 14C in a present tomb is 16grams.The half-life period of 14C is 5600years.

           

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. h) 100 grams of a radioactive isotope was reduced 12.5 grams after 81days.Determine the half-life period of the isotope.

                       

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A graph of activity against time is called decay curve.

A decay curve can be used to determine the half-life period of an isotope since activity decrease at equal time interval to half the original

 

The graph below shows the rate of decay of carbon-14

 

 

 

 

(i)From the graph show and determine the half-life period of the isotope.

 

From the graph t 1/changes in activity from:

( 100 – 50 )      =>   ( 5700 – 0 )  =  5700  years

( 50 – 25 )      =>   ( 11400 – 5700 )  =  5700 years

Thus      t ½  5700 years

 

(ii)Why does the graph tend to ‘O’?

Smaller particle/s will disintegrate /decay to half its original.

             There can never be ‘O’/zero particles

 

 

The table below shows the change in mass of a radioactive isotope with time

 

Time (days) 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
Mass (g) 10.0 8.7 7.5 6.2 5.0 4.1 3.4 2.9 2.5 2.3

 

 

 

On the grid provided ,plot a graph of the percentage of bismuth remaining against time.  (3mks)

  1. From the graph determine
  2. half life of the radioisotope

 

  1. the mass after the 7th day

 

 

  • the mass after the 20th day

 

 

  1. The table below shows the measurements of radioactivity in counts per minute from a radioisotope iodine-128
Counts per minute 240 204 176 156 138 122 112
Time in days 0 5 10 15 20 25 30

 

  1. Plot a graph of counts per minute against time

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Use your gaph to determine the half life of iodine-128

 

 

 

 

  1. From youethe graph determinecount rate after;
  2. 12 minutes

 

 

 

  1. 22minutes

 

 

 

 

  1. After how many minutes was the count rate ;
  • 160 counts per minute

 

 

 

  • 197 counts per minute

 

 

 

A quantity  of  44Y was monitored with a GM tube and the folllowinf results were obtained over a period of 70 minutes.

Counts per minute 800 580 427 305 225 165 122 85
Time 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

 

 

  1. the grid provided plot a graph of counts per minute against time.

 

 

  1. Determne the half life of Y

 

 

  • On Starting with 32g of 44Y,how much of the isotope would remain after 110 minutes.

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Give two applications of half life

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

E: APPLICATION AND USES OF RADIOCTIVITY.

The following are some of the fields that apply and use radioisotopes;

a)Medicine: -\

  • Treatment of cancer to kill malignant tumors through radiotherapy e,g colbalt-60 and caesium-137
  • Sterilizing hospital /surgical instruments by exposing them to gamma radiation.
  • -to monitor growth in bones and healing of fractures
  • For providing power in heart pacesetters

 

  1. b) Agriculture:
  • monitor plant growth by tracing the route of the radioisotope.
  • Radioactive phosphorus is used to determine rate of absorption of phosphate fertilizers

 

  1. c) Food preservation:

 X-rays are used to kill bacteria in tinned food to last for a long time.

  1. d) Chemistry:

 To study mechanisms of a chemical reaction, one  reactant is replaced in its structure by a radioisotope e.g.

During esterification the ‘O’ joining the ester was discovered comes from the alkanol and not alkanoic acid.

During photosynthesis the ‘O’ released was discovered comes from   water.

 

 

 

  1. e) Dating rocks/fossils:

Comparing the mass of 14C in living and dead cells, to determine their age,

 

F: DANGERS OF RADIOCTIVITY.

  1. Exposure to theses radiations causes chromosomal and /or genetic mutation in living cells.
  2. Living things should therefore not be exposed for a long time to radioactive substances.
  3. One of the main uses of radioactive isotopes is in generation of large cheap electricity in nuclear reactors.
  4. Those who work in these reactors must wear protective devises made of thick glass or lead
  5. Accidental leakages of radiations usually occur
  6. In 1986 the Nuclear reactor at Chernobyl in Russia had a major explosion that emitted poisonous nuclear material that caused immediate environmental disaster
  7. In 2011, an earthquake in Japan caused a nuclear reactor to leak and release poisonous radioactive waste into the Indian Ocean.
  8. The immediate and long term effects of exposure to these poisonous radioactive waste on human being is of major concern to all environmentalists.

 

Control

Proper use,storage and disposal of radioactive materials

Regular checks of equipment which emit radiations

 

            Revision quiz   RADIOACTIVITY

 

 

 

  1. 1993 Q P1A 7

The Table below gives the rate of decay for radioactive element Y.

 

Number of days Mass (g)
0 384
270 48

 

Calculate the half-life of the radioactive element Y.

 

 

 

  1. 1995 P1A Q30

(a)      100g of radioactive   23391 Pa    was reduced to 12.5g after 81 days.

Determine the half-life of Pa.                                                                   (2 marks).

 

 

 

  1. b) 23391 Pa decays by Beta emission. What is the mass number and the atomic

number of the element formed?                                                  (1 mark)

 

 

  1. 1996 P1A Q 20

Complete the diagram below to show how α and β particles from radioactive can be

distinguished from each other. Label your diagram clearly.                         (3 marks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Source of radiation                                           Paper                            Metal foil

 

  1. 1997 P1A Q 7

M grammes of a radioactive isotope decayed to 5 grammes in 100 days.

The half –life of the isotope is 25 days.

(a) What is meant by half-life?                                                                            (1 mark)

 

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(b) Calculate the initial mass M of the radioactive isotope.                     (2 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. 1998 P1A Q1

An isotope of Uranium 234 94U  decays by emission of an alpha particle to thorium. Th.

 

 

(a). Write the equation for the nuclear reaction undergone by the isotope.        (1 mark)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(b). Explain why it is not safe to store radioactive substances in containers made from

Aluminum sheets.                                                                                           (1 mark)

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. 2000 Q 13

A radioactive isotope X2 decays by emitting two alpha (a) particles and one

beta (β) to from  214

Bi

83

(a) What is the atomic number of X2?

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

(b) After 112 days, 1/16 of the mass of X2 remained. Determine the half life of X2

 

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. 2002 Q 10

                The graph below represents a radioactive decay series for isotope H.

Study it and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Name the type of radiation emitted when isotope H changes to isotope J.

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(b) Write an equation for the nuclear reaction that occur when isotope J changes to isotope K

 

 

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. c) Identify a pair of isotope of an element in the decay series

 

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

 

100 g of a radioactive substance was reduced to 12.5 g in 15.6 years.

Calculate the half – life of the substance.                                                        (2 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

           9.

(a)  Complete the nuclear equation below.                                                               (1 mark)

 

37 18A…..                   3719B  +………..

 

 

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(b)     State one:

(i)         Use of radioisotopes in agriculture                                                                    (1mark)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

(ii)        Danger associated with exposure of human beings to radioisotopes           (1 mark)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. 2007 Q 14
  2. a)    Distinguish between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.                                 (2 marks)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Describe how solid wastes containing radioactive substances should be disposed of.                                                                                                                                                         (1 mark)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

11,.          2008 Q 24

  1. a) A radioactive substance emits three different particles. Give the symbol of the particle

with the highest mass.                                                                                              (1 mark)

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

  1. b) (i)  Find the values of Z1 and Z2 in the nuclear equation below

                                        Z1                1                  94                140              1

U   +  n           Sr   +     Xe +2 n

92                0                  38                Z0                0                 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) What type of nuclear reaction is represented in represented in b (i) above?

(1mark)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Time (minutes)

Give the name of the:

  1. a) Process taking place between t0 and t                                                   (1mark)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

  1. b) Energy change that occurs between t3 and t4

 

                    ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. 2009 Q 6d P2

   (d) Naturally occurring uranium consist of three isotopes which are radioactive.

Isotopes            234 u                235u                 238u

Abundance       0.01%               0.72%               99.27%

(i) Which of these isotopes has the longest half-life? Give reasons.                      (1 mark)

 

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(ii) Calculate the relative atomic mass of uranium.                                                  (2 marks)

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

(iii) 235 92U is an alpha emitter .If the product  of the decay of this nuclide

is thorium (Th) .Write a nuclear equation for the process.                    (1 mark)

 

 

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. iv) State one use of radioactive isotopes in the paper industry (2 marks)

 

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. 2011 Q 2

            Complete the nuclear equation below:

131          131

I       Xe +

53             54

The half life of   13153 I   is 8 days.

Determine the mass of    13153I remaining if 50 grammes decayed for 40 days.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………

Give one harmful effect of radioisotopes.                                                 (1 mark)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….

  1. 2012 Q9 P1

120g of iodine – 131 has a half life of 8 days decays for 32 days. On the grid provided,

plot a graph of the mass of iodine – 131 against time.                                            (3 marks)

 

 

Form One latest Exam Papers and Answers Term 1 to 3 Free downloads

Form 1 latest Exam Papers and Answers Term 1 to 3 Free

Questions

565 F2 BUSINESS QS.docx
451 F2 COMPUTER QS.doc
443 F2 AGRICULTURE QS.docx
441 F2 HOMESCIENCE QS.docx
313 F2 CRE QS.docx
312 F2 GEOGRAPHY QS.docx
311 F2 HISTORY QS.docx
233 F2 CHEMISTRY QS.docx
232 F2 PHYSICS QS.docx
231 F2 BIOLOGY QS.doc
121 F2 MATHEMATICS QS.docx
102 F2 KISWAHILI QS.docx
101 F2 ENGLISH QS.docx

Answers

565 F2 BUSINESS MS.docx
451 F2 COMPUTER MS.doc
443 F2 AGRICULTURE MS.docx
441 F2 HOMESCIENCE MS.docx
313 F2 CRE MS.docx
312 F2 GEOGRAPHY MS.docx
311 F2 HISTORY MS.docx
233 F2 CHEMISTRY MS.pdf
232 F2 PHYSICS MS.docx
231 F2 BIOLOGY MS.doc
121 F2 MATHEMATICS MS.docx
102 F2 KISWAHILI MS.docx
101 F2 ENGLISH MS.docx

CURRENT ELECTRICITY PHYSICS NOTES, REVISION QUESTIONS & ANSWERS

  1. Define the term “e.m.f” of a cell. (1mk)

 

  1. Distinguish between electromotive force and potential difference (2mks)

 

  1. Distinguish between terminal voltage and e.m.f of a battery. 2mks

 

  1. Define the volt.                                   (1mk)

 

  1. Distinguish between open and closed circuit. (2mk)

 

  1. What is meant by the term “lost volts”? (1mk)

 

  1. State Ohms Law. (1mk)

 

  1. State the condition necessary for Ohms Law to be obeyed (1mk)

 

  1. State two conditions that are necessary for a conductor to obey Ohm’s law.

 

  1. Other than temperature state the other factors that affect the resistance of an ohmic conductor.                   (1 mk)

 

  1. What causes electrical resistance in conductors? ( 1mk)

 

  1. Define a non-ohmic conductor (1mk)

 

  1. Define electric resistance. (1mk)

 

  1. Eight dry cells can be arranged to produce a total e.m.f of 12v just like a car battery.

(a)  What is the e.m.f of an individual cell?                                         (2mk)

(b)        Why is it possible to start a car with the lead acid accumulator, but not with the eight dry cells in series?

 

  1. Give a reason why fluorescent tubes are preferred to filament bulbs for domestic lighting

 

  1. A boy who has been driving a car in rain discovers that the movement he alights from it while touching its body he gets an electrical shock. Offer him a scientific explanation why he was not getting the shock while inside even if he touches the metallic parts of the car.

 

  1. A circuit consists of a battery, a metal wire, ammeter and a switch connected in series. The switch is closed and the ammeter reading noted. The metal wire is now heated.

      (i)       State the observations made on the ammeter reading.            (1mk)

      (ii)      Give one observation for the above observation made.      (1mk)

  1. Describe an experiment to verify Ohm’s law given a cell, ammeter, voltmeter, switch, nichrome wire and connecting wires.

 

  1. A battery is connected to an external resistor, R. State any two factors that determine the magnitude of the current produced in the circuit. (2mk)
  2. Figure below shows an ammeter used to measure current through the conductor.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the reading from the meter when the student is using the;

(i) Lower scale.                                                                                 (1mk)

(ii) Upper scale                                                                                 (1mk)

 

  1. Figure below shows a voltmeter used to measure voltage through the conductor. The student used the upper scale.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the reading from the meter.                                             (1mk)

 

 

  1. Figure below shows an ammeter used to measure current through the conductor. The student used the lower scale.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure below shows a voltmeter used to measure voltage through the conductor. The student used the upper scale.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the reading from the meter.                                             (1mk)

 

  1. State why the filament of a lamp is made of tungsten (1mk)

 

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer.  Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs.                  (1mk)

 

  1. In large circuits, large resistors in parallel are preferred to low resistors in series. Explain.

 

  1. Describe a laboratory experiment to verify ohm’s law, by use of appropriate diagrams where necessary.                                     (5mk)

 

  1. You are required to determine the resistance per unit length of a nichrome wire X, you are provided with a D.C. power supply an ammeter and voltmete
  2. i) Draw a circuit diagram to show how you would connect the circuit.

 

  1. Describe with aid of a diagram and experiment to verify Ohm’s law

 

  1. A student wishes to investigate the relationship between current and voltage for a certain resistor X. In the space provide, draw a circuit diagram including two cells, rheostat, ammeter, voltmeter and the resistor X that would be suitable in obtaining the desired results.  Describe how you would use the circuit in (a) (i) above to determine the resistance of x.          (5mk)

 

  1. The figure below shows a circuit that can be used to verify Ohm’s law

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Explain briefly how the setup can be used to verify ohm’s law          (4mks)

  1. An ammeter, a voltmeter and a bulb are connected in a circuit so as to measure the current flowing and the potential difference across both. Sketch a suitable circuit diagram for the arrangement.

 

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer. Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs. (2mk)

 

  1. A student learnt that a battery of eight dry cells each 1.5V has a total e.m.f of 12V the same as a car battery. He connected in series eight new dry batteries to his car but found that they could not start the engine. Give a reason for this observation.

 

V = IR

  1. A current of 0.08A passes in a circuit for 2.5 minutes. How much charge passes through a point in the circuit?

 

  1. What current will a 500Ω resistor connected to a source of 240V draw?
  2. Two resistors of 4W and 2W in parallel are connected in series to a 3W resistor and a cell of 2.0V.

Calculate

  1. Equivalent resistance of the circuit. (3 marks)
  2. Current through each resistor. (4 marks)

 

  1. Three identical dry cells each of m.f. 1.6 V are connected in series to a resistor of 11.4Ω. a current of 0.32A flows in the circuit.  Determine.
  2. i) The total e.m.f. of the cell                                    1mk
  3. ii) The internal resistance of each cell;                     3mk
  4. A wire of resistance R connected in series with 1.5V cell is found to be carrying a current of 0.05A. If the wire is now connected in parallel with an identical wire, find the new current in the circuit. (3mk)

 

  1. Two heaters A and B are connected in parallel across a 10volts supply. Heater A produces 1000J of heat in one hour while B produces 200J in half an hour. Calculate the ratio RA/RB. (3mks)

 

  1. A current flows through a coil wire of resistance 50W when it is connected to the terminals of a battery. If the potential difference is 20V, find

(i) The value of current                                                                     2 mks

  1. ii) The number of electrons that pass through the coil per second. (Take

charge of electronse = 1.6 x 10-19 c)                                          3 mks

 

  1. Three identical resistors each of resistance 2.0are connected so as to obtain the least effective resistance. If a battery of voltage V is connected in series to the arrangement of the resistors and supplies a current of 3A. Calculate the value of V                                                                (4mks)

 

  1. Two resistors R1 and R2 are connected in series to a 10V battery. The current flowing then is 0.5A.  When R1 only is connected to the battery the current flowing is 0.8A.

(a)  Calculate the

(i)     Value of R2

  1. ii) Current flowing when R1 and R2 are connected in parallel with the same batter.

(b)        One of the 6W resistors has a length of 1m and cross-sectional

area of 5.0 x 10-5m2. Calculate the resistivity of the material.

 

  1. Suppose a high–resistance voltmeter reads 1.5V connected across a dry battery on open circuit and 1.2V. when the same battery is in a closed circuit when it is supplying a current of 0.3A through a lamp of resistance R.

(a)         Draw a circuit diagram to show the above experiment when in;

(ii)     Open circuit

  1. ii)     Closed circuit.

(b)       What is

  1. i) The e.m.f of the battery.
  2. ii) The internal resistance of the battery

iii) The value of R?

 

  1. When a resistor is connected across the terminals of a battery a current of 0.20A flows. What is the time taken for 2.0 coulombs of charge to pass a given point in the circuit? If e.m.f of the battery is 4.0v and its internal resistance is 0.20hm determine the rate at which heat is produced in the resistor.

 

  1. A cell supplies a current of 1.8A through two 2W resistors connected in parallel. When the resistors are connected in series, the current is 0.6A. Calculate the internal resistance of the cell. (3mk)

 

  1. A cell can supply a current of 1.2A through two 2W resistors connected in parallel. When they are connected in series, the value of the current is 0.4A. Calculate the internal resistance of the cel          (3mks)

 

  1. A battery of e.m.f. 3V drives a current through a 20W The p.d across the resistor is 2.8V as measured by a voltmeter.  Calculate the internal resistance of the battery.

 

  1. Resistors of 2W and 3W are connected in series with a cell and voltmeter connected across the 3W resistor reads 1V, but this increases to 1.2V when an extra 2W resistor is connected in parallel with the first 2W resistor, calculate the e.m.f and the internal resistance of the cell.

 

  1. A torch uses two identical dry cells connected in series. When a bulb of resistance 2.0W is connected across the cells the pd across the bulb is 2.0V. When a bulb of resistance 1.5 ohms is used, the p.d is 1.8V, calculate the e.m.f and internal resistance of each cell.

 

  1. A cell drives a current of 3.2A through a 2.8 Ω resistor. When it is connected to 1.6Ω resistor, the current that flows is 5A. Find the:

(i) E.m.f (E) for the cell.        (2mk)

(ii) Internal resistance (r) for the cell.   (2mk)

 

  1. A cell drives a current of 8A through a 1.2resistor when the same cell is connected to a 1.8resistor, the current that flows is 6.0A. Determine
    • The internal resistance. (4mks)
    • m.f of the cell. (2mks)

 

  1. A cell supplies a current of 0.5A when connected to a 2W resistor and 0.25A when connected to a 5W Find the e.m.f and the internal resistance of the cell.                                                     (4mks)

 

  1. A wire of resistance X connected in series with a 1.5 V battery is found to carry a current of 0.075 A. If the wire is now connected in parallel with an identical wire, find the total current in circuit. (3mk)

 

 

BULBS

  1. An electrician installed electric wiring in a house and connected the bulbs and the switches as shown in the figure below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Explain what happens when switch

(i) S1 is closed.                                                                   (1mk)

(ii) S2 is closed.                                                           (1mk)

(iii) S3 is closed.                                                          (1mk)

  • (i) Using a redrawn diagram show the best position the bulbs should be installed. (3mks)

 

  1. State the changes in brightness of the bulbs in the circuit diagram as the switches S1, S2 and S3 are switched on one after the other. (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure below shows a circuit diagram containing three identical bulbs.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Compare the brightness of the bulbs                                          (2mks)

 

  1. The voltmeter and the ammeter in figure (a) below read 2.1v and 0.35A respectively.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the reading in the voltmeter and ammeter in figure(b) respectively. (The lamps are identical to those in (a)

  1. A student set up the circuit shown in Fig. 3. The lamps didn’t light when she closed the switch S.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Suggest a reason for this observation.                                       (2mk)

 

  1. Figure below shows two circuits with identical dry cells and identical bulbs;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) In which circuit will the bulbs be brighter                               (1mk)

 

(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i) above                            (1mk)

 

 

 

  1. A student was investigating the brightness of bulbs when setup in an electric circuits. She used identical bulbs and cells. The circuits shown in figure 3(a) and (b) were what she setup.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Which setup was the bulb brightest? Give a reason for your answer.      (2mk)

 

  1. Fig (a) and (b) show two possible arrangements of a bulb to a source of power.

 

 

 

 

 

 

In which of the arrangement above would the cells drain faster. Explain your answer.                                                                                     (2mk)

 

  1. The circuit diagram in figure below has two switches P and Q. The brightness of the lamp isobserved when P only is closed and when P and Q are both closed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Compare the brightness of the lamp in the two cases. State a reason for your answer.                                                                                    (2mks)

 

CIRCUITS

  1. Three resistors of resistance 2 Ω, 3 Ω and 4 Ω, are to be connected to a cell such that they have the least effective resistance.

(i)  Draw a circuit to show how they can be connected to achieve this.(2mk)

(ii)  Determine the least effective resistance of the three resistors. (3mk)

 

(iii) State two factors that determine the resistance of a metallic conductor.

(2mk)

  1. Figure shows a voltmeter connected across the cell. The voltmeter reads 1.5V when the switch S, is open and 1.2V when the switch is closed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) What is the e.m.f. of the cell.                                                (1 mk)

(ii) What is the terminal voltage of the cell.                                (1 mk)

(iii) Calculate the internal resistance of the cell.                 (3 mks)

 

  1. You are provided with three resistors of 3Ω, 2Ωand1Ω. Arrange the resistors in the circuit so as to have minimum resistance. Determine the effective resistance in the above circuit         (3mk)

 

  1. Figure below shows part of an electric circuit. The current through the 18Ω resistor is observed  to be 2A.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

State the value of the current through each of the 10Ω resistors.             (1mk)

 

  1. Study the circuit diagram below and answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate

  • The current flowing through the ammeter.   (3mks)
  • The P.d. across AB (2mks)
  • The current through the 4Ω resistor (2mks)

 

  1. The figure below shows an electric circuit. When the switch is closed the ammeter reading is 0.3A.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the voltmeter reading.                                     (3mks)

 

  1. In the circuit diagram below, the battery source has a voltage of 12V and an internal resistance of 5Ω.

 

 

 

                                                

                           

 

 

 

 

 

         (i)  Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.                  (3mk)

         (ii) Calculate effective current in the circuit.                      2mk)

 

 

  1. Use the circuit in figure below to answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     Calculate the total resistance in the circuit                          (3mk)

(ii)     Determine the current flowing through the 5W resistor          (3mk

 

  1. In a balanced condition, the resistance of resistors P,Q and R is 80 ,120and 100 Find the resistance S.                 (3mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Two resistors K and L are placed in the gaps of the metre bridge as shown

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • (i) State the purpose of the resistor M. (1mk)
  • (ii) Find the resistance K below if the Jockey balances the galvanometer at the 20cm
  1. The figure below shows a 6V battery connected to an arrangement of resistors. Determine the current flowing through the 2 Ω resistor. (3mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. It was noted that for the circuit diagram below, when the switch is open, the voltmeter gives a reading of 12V, but when the switch is closed the voltmeter drops to 10V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a)         Give an explanation for the difference in reading on the voltmeter when

the switch is open and when it is closed.                     (2mk)

(b)    If the ammeter gives a reading of 0.8A when the switch is closed,

determine the value of R.                                         (1 mk)

(c)     Determine the internal resistance of the accumulator     (2mk)

 

  1. The figure below shows a series – parallel circuit.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate:

(i) Total resistance of the circuit.                                       (3mks)

(ii) Total current flowing in the circuit.                                (2mks)

(iii) Voltage drop across R1                                                               (2mks)

(iv) Current through the 3W resistor.                                 (3mks)

 

  1. Use the circuit in fig below to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.                                        (2mk)

(ii)    Calculate effective current in the circuit.                                        (2mk)

(iii)    Calculate current through the 2Ω resistor.                                  (2mk)

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A large battery is connected as shown in figure 5 to a resistor of resistance 1000W. The voltmeter across the resistor reads 50V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     What is the reading of the ammeter (A)?          (3mk)

(ii)     Determine the electrical energy dissipated by the resistor in one

minute.                                                                           (3mk)

 

  1. Determine the effective resistance in figure below. (3mk)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Figure shows three resistors connected as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

         If the voltmeter reads 4v, find the

(i)     Effective resistance.                                                         (2mks)

(ii)     Current through the 3W resistor.                              (2mks)

(iii)    Potential difference across the 8W resistor.                         (2mks)

 

  1. In the circuit diagram shown in figure below, determine the reading of the meters if:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)    The switch S1 is open and S2 closed.                                  (3mks)

(ii)    Switch S1 closed, S2 open.                                                (1mk)

(iii)   Both switches are closed.                                                  (6mks)

 

  1. Study the circuit shown in fig below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • Determine the effective resistance when both switches S1 and S2 are open.                                                                                   (3mk)
  • Determine the effective resistance when both switches S1 and S2 are closed.                                                                                   (3mk)
  • Determine the ammeter reading when both switches are closed. (2mk

 

  1. Figure represents a 4.8V battery connected to two conductors XY and YZ of the same Material and same length welded together at Y. The radius of XY is half that of YZ. The resistance of YZ is 1.6.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Calculate;
  2. i) The resistance of the conductor XZ                                    (5mks)
  3. ii) The current which flows in the circuit when the switch S is closed(3mks)

iii)     The potential drop across the conductor XY                        (2mks)

 

  1. The circuit diagram in figure shows three identical resistors connected to a cell of e.m.f. 12V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i)     Determine the reading of the voltmeter.                                    (2mk)

(ii)     If another identical resistor R is connected parallel to PT, determine the

potential difference across QS

 

  1. In the circuit below figure, the e.m.f of the cell is 1.5V. Its internal resistance is r ohms. Resistors P and Q are each 3Ω. If 0.3A current flows through P. find the value of r.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Fig shows three resistors connected to a 12V battery of internal resistance 2Ω

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate

  1. i) The current drawn from the cell.
  2. ii) The “Lost voltage”, in the cell

iii) The potential different across the 7Ω resistor.

 

  1. The cells shown in the figure below have each an e.m.f of 2.1V and negligible internal resistance

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the reading of the voltmeter                                              (3mk)

 

  1. The cell in figure has an e.m.f of 1V and negligible internal resistance.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the

(i)     Total resistance in the circuit                   (2mk)

(ii)    Current in the circuit                                       (1mk)

(iii)   Reading on the voltmeter                                (2mk)

 

  1. Four 5W resistors are connected to a 10V d. c. supply as shown in the diagram below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate;-

  1. The effective resistance in the circuit.
  2. ii) The current I following in the circuit.
  3. Sketch a graph current against voltage for an electrolyte solution such as dilute sulphuric acid.

 

  1. For a particular bulb, a series of readings of the current through the bulb for different potential differences across it is taken and plotted as shown.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Draw the circuit diagram you would use for the experiment.(2mks)
  2. Explain how the resistance of the bulb changes        (3mks)
  3. How would the resistance of the bulb change if

(I) The length were doubled                                                   (2mks)

(II) The diameter were doubled                                             (2mks)

 

  1. The graph below shows results obtained in an experiment to determine the m.f.(E) and the internal resistance, r, of a cell.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  • (i) Determine the slopeof the graph

Given that the equation of the graph is Determine

  • (ii) The e.m.f E of the cell.
  • (iii) The internal r resistance of the cell.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The graph below shows the Voltage current relationship for a certain battery.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine:

(i)     The e.m.f of the cell.                                                        (1mk)

(ii)     The internal resistance of the cell.                    (4mks)

 

  1. Two resistors 4Ω and the other unknown resistor x are connected in a circuit as shown in the fig below

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

The current I passing through the combination is measured for various potential differences, A graph of p.d. against current is shown in the grid below.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Use the graph to determine the total resistance of the combination. (3mk)

(ii) Determine the value of the unknown resistance x            (2mk)

 

  1. Figure 12 shows the variation of voltage against current.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Given the equation; E = V + Ir

Find from the graph.

(i) the e.m.f, E of the cell.                                                             (1mk)

(ii) the internal resistance, r, of the cell.                                          (3mks)

 

  1. On the axes provided, sketch a graph to show how current, I varies with potential difference, V, across a metallic conductor that is being heated at the same time. Explain your answer                 (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The graph below shows how the voltage, V, varies with the current, I for a filament lamp.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) From the graph, determine the resistance of the lamp when a current of 0.5A  flows.                                                                               (3mks)

 

(ii) State with a reason whether the device is ohmic or non-ohmic.    (2mks)

 

 

 

  1. The graph in fig. shows the current – voltage characteristics of a certain device Q.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) State with a reason whether the device obeys ohm’s law.                 (2mk

  • Determine the resistance of the device, Q when current through it is

30mA.                                                                    (3mk)

iii)     When the device, X, is connected in the circuit below, the voltage across it is 0.70V.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Calculate the value of the resistance R.

 

  1. The current I through a given diode for various values of voltage V between anode and cathode is given in the table below.
V (volts) 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 225
I(mA) 0 1.0 3.0 4.0 6.0 10.0 16.0 28.0 80.0

 

  • Draw the characteristic graph of the diode using the data. (5mks)
  • Explain the nature of graph. (2mks)
  • Determine the resistance of the diode when the voltage is 150V.

(3mks)

  1. A battery is connected in series with an ammeter and a variable resistor R. The resistor is varied and the corresponding readings of the ammeter recorded in the table below.
Resistance R (Ω) 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 10.0
Current I (A) 2.0 1.5 1.2 1.0 0.75 0.5
  • Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit that was used to perform this experiment. (1mk)
  • On the grip provided, plot a graph of R (y-axis) against I (x-axis). (5mk)
  • Use your graph to determine the internal resistance of the battery. (2mk)
  • Determine the e.m.f of the cell. (2mk)

 

  1. A student carried out an experiment to investigate how current varies with potential difference

applied across a filament lamp. The following readings were obtained.

 

P.d.(V) 0 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.20 1.60 2.40
   I (A) 0.0 0.11 0.20 0.28 0.34 0.43 0.50 0.58

 

(a) Draw a diagram for the circuit used to obtain the values.       (2mks)

(b) Describe briefly how the experiment was carried out.  (2mks)

(c) Plot a graph of V against I for the values presented in the table.   (5mks)

(d) Determine the resistance of the lamp when a current of 0.4A flows through it.

(3mks)

(e) Explain why a filament lamp does not obey Ohm’s law.      (2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SCHEEM

  1. Define the volt. (1mk)

ANS   It is the work done in moving a unit charge in a circuit from one point to anotherü1

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer.  Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs.                  (1mk)

Connect the three bulbs in parallel so that the internal resistance is

reduced. This set up increases the current making the bulbs more bright. 1mk

  1. Three identical bulbs are connected in series with a battery. At first, the bulbs shine brightly but gradually become dimmer. Using the same cells, explain how you would increase the brightness of the bulbs. (2mk)

Connect the three bulbs in parallel so that the internal resistance is reduced. This set up increases the current making the bulbs more bright.

  1. Figure below shows two circuits with identical dry cells and identical bulbs;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) In which circuit will the bulbs be brighter                               (1mk)

(ii) Give a reason for your answer in (i) above                            (1mk)

         ANS  (i)   B      √1mk

(ii)   In both A and B the voltage is the same while current in B is twice the current in A.

B cells are in parallel hence lower effective internal resistance

  1. The voltmeter and the ammeter in figure (a) below read 2.1v and 0.35A respectively.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Determine the reading in the voltmeter and ammeter in figure(b) respectively. (The lamps are identical to those in (a)

ANS          Voltmeter would read 2x 2.1V = 4.2 V ü1

                              Ammeter would read 0.35 A ü1

 

 

Maseno High School KCSE 2025 Exam Papers & Answers

Maseno High School KCSE 2025 Exam Papers & Answers

MASENO PHYC PP3 CONF.pdf
MASENO PHYC PP3 CONF.docx
MASENO PHYC PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CHEM PP3 CONF.pdf
MASENO CHEM PP3 CONF.docx
MASENO CHEM PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO BIO PP3 CONF.pdf
MASENO BIO PP3 CONF.docx
MASENO BIO PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO HOME SCI PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO HOME SCI PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO HOME SCI PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO HOME SCI PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO HOME SCI PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO COMP PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO COMP PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO COMP PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO MATH PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO MATH PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO MATH PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO MATH PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO KISW PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO KISW PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO KISW PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO KISW PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO ENG PP3 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO ENG PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO ENG PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO ENG PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO GEO PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO GEO PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO GEO PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO HIST PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO HIST PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO HIST PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CRE PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CRE PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CRE PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO BST PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO BST PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO BST PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO AGRI PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO AGRI PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO AGRI PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO PHYC PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO PHYC PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx
MASENO PHYC PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CHEM PP2 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CHEM PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.pdf
MASENO CHEM PP1 2025 PREDICTIONS.docx

Kigogo notes in pdf free download

Looking for free summarized Kigogo notes, questions and answers? Get all Kigogo free resources in PDF download, here.

FREE KIGOGO GUIDES, NOTES, QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS

  • FREE KIGOGO REVISION QUESTIONS

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO KCSE QUESTIONS

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO QUESTIONS

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO REVIEW QUESTIONS

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO STUDY NOTES

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO UPDATED GUIDE

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO MWONGOZO

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO CLASS NOTES

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO PDF GUIDE

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO KCSE SAMPLE QUESTIONS

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGOTEACHER’S GUIDE

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO REVISION QUESTIONS

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO MWONGOZO

Click here to download free

  • FREE KIGOGO STUDY GUIDE FOR TEACHERS AND STUDENTS

Click here to download free


DOWNLOAD FREE PRIMARY & HIGH SCHOOL MATERIALS


FREE PRIMARY & SECONDARY RESOURCES (OVER 300,000 DOWNLOADS)

FREE UPDATED NOTES

Click on the links below

FORM ONE NOTES

FORM ONE NOTES

FORM TWO NOTES

FORM THREE NOTES

FORM FOUR NOTES

FREE LATEST EXAMS WITH MARKING SCHEMES

Click on the links below;

FORM ONE EXAMS

FORM TWO EXAMS

FORM THREE EXAMS

FORM FOUR EXAMS

FORM 1-4 FREE EXAMS

SCHEMES OF WORK

KCSE REVISION MATERIALS

FREE PRIMARY SCHOOL RESOURCES

FREE CLASS 8 RESOURCES

LOWER PRIMARY RESOURCES (PP1-2 & GRADE 1-6)


FREE KIGOGO GUIDES

Popular.

Download free Grade 2 schemes of work

Looking for Free Grade 2 schemes of work? Download all the grade two schemes of work in this page for free. Just click on the links below to save your own copy of the schemes.

Free Grade 2 schemes of work for all subjects.

Term 2 free schemes of work.

Get all the schemes below;

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/MATHEMATICS-SCHEME-GRADE-TWO-TERM-TWO.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/MAAZIMIO-YA-KAZI-YA-KISWAHILI-MUHULA-WA-PILI-1.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/GRADE-TWO-MUSIC-SCHEME-OF-WORK-TERM-TWO.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/GRADE-TWO-MOVEMENT-SCHEME-OF-WORK-TERM-TWO.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/GRADE-TWO-HYGIENE-AND-NUTRITION-SCHEME-TERM-TWO.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/GRADE-TWO-ENGLISH-SCHEME-OF-WORK-TERM-TWO.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

[embeddoc url=”https://educationnewshub.co.ke/wp-content/uploads/2020/12/ENVIRONMENTAL-SCHEME-OF-WORK-GRADE-TWO-TERM-TWO.pdf”]

Click on this link to download the schemes for free.

Didn’t find what you were looking for? Worry not. Get all primary and secondary materials here.

HOW TO MANAGE STRESS- BEST GUIDE

Stress

 Stress is any situation that makes you feel emotionally
uncomfortable and psychologically disturbed.
 Most stress occur as a result of how we relate to our
fellow human beings.

Stress may come from:
 Financial / marital issues
 Ill-heath, joblessness etc.

Effects of stress
 Hypertension
 Stomach ulcer
 Obesity
 Alcoholism
 Infertility
 Marital discord

Zones of stress

Stress occurs most often at two places:
 Your home
 Your workplace

Causes of stress

We relate to our fellow human beings through
communication:
 Verbal–what we say (words)
 Non-verbal–how we behave.
 Communication friction/ineffective communication is the cause of most stresses
 You can avoid stress by learning how to communicate and behave better both at home and at the workplace.

Watch your words.
They can eat you up
 Words are powerful
 Use them wisely
 What you say is important;
 How you say it, is even more important.
 In the courtroom, you are judged by what you say.
 Your words can put you in trouble, and
 Your words can also get you out of trouble.

At Home

 Your spouse is the most significant source of stress in your house.
 Endeavour to build a good communicative relationship
with your spouse.
 Discuss important issues with him/her including your
vision for the family (where do you want the family to
be in the next 5-10 years?).

Managing stress at home

 Resolve not to say anything in anger, especially in
response to your spouse.
 It may cost you sleepless nights.
 Support your spouse materially and emotionally, and
 Never take them for granted.
 Give your spouse the benefit of the doubt
If you are close enough to your spouse,
 The children will naturally find their level.

Pull your spouse up

 To maintain a meaningful communicative state with your
spouse, pull him or her along the social ladder as you climb
up.
 It is not everybody who can pursue academics, so find out
what your spouse like doing and support him or her to be
among the best in that field or vocation.
 It boosts confidence and makes communication between
the two of you easier.
 Compromise when it is necessary to bring peace and
harmony in the house.
 You need that peace of mind to concentrate on your
activities at the workplace; make it a priority.

At the Office

 Your boss may be the most significant source of stress
at the workplace.
 Learn to do your job well enough to be respected.
 Engage your colleagues in meaningful communication:
1. Focus on the reason for the discussion.
2. Communicate emotions in person.
3. Listen more than you talk.
4. Simplify your messages.

Have a vision

 If you know where you want to go with your career, you
will be less stressful at the workplace.
 Have a vision for your career
 Find out what you need to do to realise your dreams at
the workplace.
 When you are focused on a vision of being at the top
management level in the next 5-10 years, you will not
be distracted by small issues like office chairs.

Define your friends

Your colleagues at the workplace are not your friends:
 they are your business partners, at best
 your competitors, at worst.
 Focus on your job at the office
 Don’t bring your personal issues into the workplace.

Avoid gossip (s)

 Don’t get involved in any unholy discussion about any
individual at the workplace; either your boss or your
subordinates.
 It may come back to bite you.

Be loyal

 Don’t do anything to undermine the success of the
company.
 Give your full support to the boss.
 He may not know as much about the business as you
do.
 That is the reason why he/she is your boss.
 Respect the position the person occupies and it would
be easier to respect the occupant of that position

 Work to make your boss more popular at the
workplace.
 Refuse to do anything to undermine him/her.
 That means you should not challenge your boss in
public/meeting place.
 Seek a private audience with your boss, if you have a
different opinion about an issue he/she is passionate
about

Be professional

 Don’t compromise on your professional values even if
that will cost you a position or your job.
 The company may put out damaging information
about you, but the truth will eventually come out that
you stood for what is right and got fried or fired
 You will get bigger and better job offers

Leave work issues at office

 Resolve not to take office / work issues home.
 Don’t complain about your colleagues or your boss to
your wife.
 Women are more emotionally courageous than men.
 They may come fighting for you and cause you more
stress at the office.

Grade 7 Free CBC Schemes of Work (Updated)

Grade 7 Free CBC Schemes of Work (Updated)

GRADE 7 TERM 2 AGRI NUTRITION SCHEMES v2.doc
GRADE 7 TERM 2 CRE SCHEMES oxford.doc
GRADE 7 TERM 2 ENGLISH3 SCHEMES.docx
GRADE 7 TERM 2 PRETECHNICAL SCHEMES.doc
GRADE 7 TERM 2 RATIONALIZED AGRI NUTRITION SCHEMES v2.doc
GRADE 7 TERM 2 SOCIAL STUDIES SCHEMES.docx

Maximum Revision Grade7 Encyclopedia.pdf

Grade 7 SOCIAL STUDIES.pdf

Grade-7-Mathematics-Schemes-of-Work-Term-2.docx

Grade_7_spotlight_intergrated_science_schemes_of_work_term (5).docx

Form four exams with marking schemes

Download free complete Form 4 Exams With Marking Schemes here at no cost.

FREE FORM FOUR EXAMS PLUS MARKING SCHEMES.

English- 101/1 QUESTIONS

English- 101/1 ANSWERS

English- 101/2 QUESTIONS

English- 101/2 ANSWERS

English- 101/3 QUESTIONS

English- 101/3 ANSWERS

Kiswahili- 102/1 QUESTIONS

Kiswahili- 102/1 ANSWERS

Kiswahili- 102/2 QUESTIONS

Kiswahili- 102/2 ANSWERS

Kiswahili- 102/3 QUESTIONS WORD

Kiswahili- 102/3 QUESTIONS PDF

Kiswahili- 102/3 MARKING SCHEME

Mathematics- 121/1 QUESTIONS

Mathematics- 121/1 ANSWERS

Mathematics- 121/2 QUESTIONS

Mathematics- 121/2 ANSWERS

Biology- 231/1 QUESTIONS

Biology- 231/1 ANSWERS

Biology- 231/2 QUESTIONS

Biology- 231/2 ANSWERS

Biology- 231/3 CONFIDENTIALS

Biology- 231/3 QUESTIONS

Biology- 231/3 ANSWERS

Physics- 232/1 QUESTIONS

Physics- 232/1 ANSWERS

Physics- 232/2 QUESTIONS

Physics- 232//2 ANSWERS

PHYSICS 232/3 CONFIDENTIALS

Physics- 232/3 QUESTIONS

Physics- 232/3 ANSWERS

Chemistry- 233/1 QUESTIONS

Chemistry- 233/1 ANSWERS

Chemistry- 233/2 QUESTIONS

Chemistry- 233/2 ANSWERS

Chemistry- 233/3 CONFIDENTIALS

Chemistry- 233/3 QUESTIONS

Chemistry- 233/3 ANSWERS

Biology for the Blind- 236

General Science- 237

History- 311/1 QUESTIONS

History- 311/1 ANSWERS

History- 311/2 QUESTIONS

History- 311/2 ANSWERS

Geography- 312/1 QUESTIONS

Geography- 312/1 ANSWERS

Geography- 312/2 QUESTIONS

Geography- 312/2 ANSWERS

CRE- 313/1 QUESTIONS

CRE- 313/1 ANSWERS

CRE- 313/2 QUESTIONS

CRE- 313/2 ANSWERS

IRE- 314

HRE- 315

Home Science- 441

Art and Design- 442

Agriculture- 443/1 QUESTIONS

Agriculture- 443/1 ANSWERS

Agriculture- 443/2 QUESTIONS

Agriculture- 443/2 ANSWERS

Wood Work- 444

Metal Work- 445

Building Construction- 446

Power Mechanics- 447

Electricity- 448

Drawing and Design- 449

Aviation Technology- 450

Computer Studies- 451/1 QUESTIONS

Computer Studies- 451/1 ANSWERS

Computer Studies- 451/2 QUESTIONS

Computer Studies- 451/2 ANSWERS

French- 501

German- 502

Arabic- 503

Sign Language- 504

Music- 511

Business Studies- 565/1 QUESTIONS

Business Studies- 565/1 ANSWERS

Business Studies- 565/2 QUESTIONS

Business Studies- 565/2 ANSWERS

Grade 4 CBC Exams, Free For Term 1 to 3

Download free Grade 4 CBC Exams, Free For Term 1 to 3. All at no extra cost:

G4-COMPOSITION

G4-CREATIVE-ARTS

G4-CREATIVE-ARTS-1

G4-ENGLISH

G4-ENGLISH-1

G4-INSHA

G4-INTEGRATED-SCIENCE

G4-INTEGRATED-SCIENCE-1

G4-KISWAHILI

G4-KISWAHILI-1

G4-MARKING-SCHEME

G4-MARKING-SCHEME-1

G4-MATHEMATICS

G4-MATHEMATICS-1

G4-MATHEMATICS-2

G4-SOCIAL

G4-SOCIAL-STUDIES

GRADE-4-AGRICULTURE-AND-NUTRITION (1)

Grade-4-Composition (1)

GRADE-4-CREATIVE-ARTS

GRADE-4-ENGLISH

GRADE-4-KISWAHILI

GRADE-4-MATHEMATICS

GRADE-4-SCIENCE-AND-TECHNOLOGY

GRADE-4-SOCIAL-STUDIES

GRADE-4-TERM-1-AGRIC-AND-NUTRITION-SCHEMES

GRADE-4-TERM-1-CREATIVE-ARTS-SCHEMES

GRADE-4-TERM-1-SOCIAL-SCHEMES

Grade 4 CBC Assessment Exams Plus Marking Schemes …

Grade 4 Free CBC Exams Download {Latest}

Grade 4 exams with marking scheme- CBC EXAMS

Grade 4, 5 & 6 Holiday Assignments {All Subjects)

Grade 4 Rationalized Notes Free

Grade 4 Latest Rationalized Notes

Grade 4 Rationalized Schemes of Work

Grade 4 Rationalized Notes Free

Grade 4 Lesson Plans Free

Free CBC Lesson Plans Grade 4

Grade 4 & 5 Rationalized Notes

Grade 4 Free CBC Rationalized Term 2 Schemes of Work

Latest Grade 4 Schemes of Work Free Downloads

Grade 4 CBC schemes of work Term 1-3

Updated Grade 4 CBC Schemes of Work Free – Term 1, 2 & 3

CBC UPDATED GRADE 4 TERM 3 SCHEMES

Grade 4 CBC Assessment Exams Plus Marking Schemes Free

Free CBC Grade 4, 5 & 6 Notes, Exams Downloads

Grade 4 Term 2 Schemes Of Work For 11 Weeks

SOCIAL STUDIES CBC NOTES FOR GRADE 4

CBC Grade 4 Exams, Notes, Schemes & Assessment Materials

Grade 4 Free CBC Schemes of Work (Updated)

Free Grade 4 Schemes of Work for Term 3- All subjects Editable

Grade 4 CBC free Schemes of works, Exams & Notes (Updated)

Grade 4 Free CBC Exams Download {Latest}

Grade 4 Free CBC Schemes Of Work Free (Term 1, 2 and 3)

Grade 4 free schemes of work, notes and exams

CBC Upper Primary Subjects (Grade 4, 5, 6)

Grade 4 Term 3 updated Schemes of Work

Free Grade 4 Schemes of Work for Term 2- All subjects Editable

GRADE 4 REPORT CARD FOR CBC ASSESSMENT

CBC Grade 4 Free Exams Downloads- Term 1 to 3

Grade 4 schemes of work (Term 1, 2 and 3)

Free Grade 4 Schemes of Work

Grade 4, 5 and 6 Free CBC Topical Revision Questions and Answers

Grade 4 Notes, schemes of Work and Exams

 

 

 

 

 

English Exams Form 4 With Marking Scheme

Download free English Form 4 Exam With Marking Scheme, below;

FORM 4 ENGLISH EXAM

FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 1 QUESTION PAPER

FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 2 QUESTION PAPER

FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 3 QUESTION PAPER

FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 1 MARKING SCHEME

FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 2 MARKING SCHEME

FORM 4 ENGLISH PAPER 3 MARKING SCHEME

More Free Downloads.

FORM FOUR FULL EXAM PAPERS & ANSWERS FOR ALL SUBJECTS: OVER 1,000 KCSE REVISION PAPERS

FORM 4 EXAMINATIONS AND MARKING SCHEMES: ALL SUBJECTS FOR KCSE CANDIDATES- OVER 1,000 PAPERS

Form 4 free exams with marking schemes

Free English notes, revision questions, KCSE past Papers, Exams, Marking Schemes,…

INTERNET & EMAIL COMPUTER TEACHER NOTES PDF

INTERNET.

Why Study about the Internet?

  • To understand what the Internet is, the services that it offers, what is required in order to get connected, as well as to establish a connection and log out of the Internet.

 

What is the Internet?

 

  • It is a large no. of connected computers (or a large set of computer networks) linked together that communicate with each other, over telephone lines.

 

  • It is a worldwide computer network connecting thousands of computer networks, through a mixture of private & public data using the telephone lines.

 

  • It is a worldwide (global or an international) network of computers that provide a variety of resources and data to the people that use it.

 

  • Internet refers to a global inter-connection of computers and computer networks to facilitate global information transfer. It is an interconnection of computers throughout the world, using ordinary telecommunication lines and modems.

 

The Internet uses VSATS (Very Small Aperture Telecommunication Systems) such as Telephone lines, Satellite.

 

The other names for the Internet are:

 

  • The
  • Information Superhighway.
  • Cyber space.

 

Internet is a facility that links the Internet users to the actual Internet documents.  Therefore, it is a system that links together many kinds of information all over the world.  This technology allows computers equipped with telecommunication links to exchange information freely, and as such, the Internet has enhanced what is being referred to as a global village.

 

Internet enables companies, organizations, individuals, schools and governments to share information across the world.

 

A computer on the Internet can be located anywhere in the world.  The Internet enables the computer to communicate with any other computer.

 

HISTORY (DEVELOPMENT) OF THE INTERNET.

 

The Internet was started by the U.S Department of Defence in 1969 as a network of 4 computers called ARPANET.  Its aim was to connect a set of computers operated by several Universities and Scientists doing military research so as to enable them share research data.

 

The original network grew as more computers were added to it.  By 1974, 62 computers were already attached.

 

In 1983, the Internet split into 2 parts; one dedicated exclusively (solely/only) to military installations (called Milnet), and the other dedicated to university research (called the Internet), with around 1,000 host computers.

 

In 1985, the Canadian government developed the BITNET to link all the Canadian Universities, and also provided connections into the U.S Internet.

 

In 1986, the U.S National Service Foundation created NSFNET to connect leading U.S universities.  By the end of 1987, there were 10,000 host computers on the Internet and 1,000 on BITNET.

 

In 1987, the National Science Foundation leased (acquired/rent) high-speed circuits to build a new high-speed backbone for NSFNET.  In 1988, it connected 13 regional internal networks containing 170 LAN’s and 56,000 host computers.

The Canadian Research Council followed in 1989, replacing BITNET with a high-speed network called CA*net that used the Internet protocols.  By the end of 1989, there were almost 200,000 host computers on the combined U.S and Canadian Internet.

 

Similar initiatives (plans/projects) were undertaken by other countries in the world, such that by the early 1990s, most of the individual country networks were linked together into one worldwide network of networks.

Each of these individual country networks was different (i.e., each had its own name, access rules, and fees structure), but all the networks used the same standard as the U.S Internet network.  So, users could easily exchange messages with each other.

 

By 1990s, the differences among the networks in each of the countries had disappeared, and the U.S name; Internet began to be used to mean the entire worldwide system of networks that used the Internet TCP/IP protocols.

 

A Protocol – a set of rules and standards that computers use to communicate with each other over a Network.

 

Features of the Internet.

 

  • The Internet is a collection of networks; it is not owned or controlled by any single organization, and it has no formal management organization. However, there is an Internet Society that co-ordinates and sets standards for its use.

In addition, Networks have no political boundaries on the exchange of information.

 

  • Networks are connected by Gateways that effectively remove barriers so that one type of network can “talk” to a different type of network.

 

  • To join the Internet, an existing network will only be required to pay a small registration fee and agree to certain standards based on TCP/IP.

 

The costs are low, because the Internet owns nothing, and so it has no real costs to offset.  Each organization pays for its own network & its own telephone bills, but these costs usually exist independent of the Internet.

 

  • Networks that join the Internet must agree to move each other’s traffic (data) at no charge to the others, just as it is the case with mail delivered through the International Postal system. This is why all the data appear to move at the cost of a local telephone call, making the Net a very cheap communication media.

 

FUNCTIONS OF THE INTERNET.

 

The Internet carries many kinds of traffic, and provides users with several functions.  Some of the most important functions are:

 

 

Many people all over the world use the Internet to communicate with each other.

 

Internet communication capabilities include; E-mail, Usenet Newsgroups, Chatting and Telnet.  You can send e-mails to your friends anywhere in the world, chat with your friends, send instant messages, etc.

 

  1. Information retrieval.

 

The Internet is a library.  Thousands of books, magazines, newspapers and encyclopedias can be read on the Internet.

 

  1. Easy-to-use offerings of information and products.

 

You can find information for your school assignments, buy books online, check what the weather is like anywhere in the world, and much more.

 

 

 

INTERNET SERVICES.

 

The following are some of the services offered by Internet:

 

  • Electronic mail (e-mail).
  • Fax services.
  • Conference services.
  • Online chatting.
  • Downloading of programs.
  • Online shopping.
  • File transfer.
  • Entertainment (Games, Music and Movies).
  • Free information retrieval (e.g., Educational information).
  • Formation of Discussion groups, e.g. Usenet Newsgroups.
  • Video Conferencing.
  • Access & Use of other computers.

 

Electronic Mail (E-mail).

 

An E-mail is a system that enables sending & receiving of messages electronically through computers.  It is used for communication between organizations or departments in the same organization.

 

E-mail is a quick, cheap, efficient & convenient means of communication with both individuals and groups.  It is faster than ordinary mail, easy to manage, inexpensive and saves paper.

 

With Internet mail, it is possible to send and receive messages quickly from businesses, friends or family in another part of the world.  An E-mail message can travel around the world in minutes.

 

Fax services.

 

Fax services enable individuals & businesses to send faxes through e-mail at a lower cost compared to the usual international Fax charges.

 

Conference services.

 

Conferencing on the Web can be defined as the dynamic exchange of all kinds of information – text, graphics, audio, video, etc – in a situation whereby the conversations are organized by item and allows a participant to contribute spontaneous responses to any item in the conversation.

 

Application of Conferencing on the Web.

 

The conversation can:

 

  • Provide important information that can assist in decision-making.
  • Provide any required technical support.
  • Help in community-building, project management & distance learning.
  • Help to organize electronic meetings, etc.

 

The Internet also allows you to have access to various types of information you might require to make accurate and informed decisions, E.g., it provides information on business, education, sports, politics, etc.

 

Chatting.

 

Internet Relay Chat (IRC) is a chatting system on the Internet that allows a large no. of people from various locations of the world who are on the computer to chat (i.e., simultaneously hold live and interactive electronic conversations) among themselves.

 

You can join discussion groups on the Internet and meet people around the world with similar interests.  You can ask questions, discuss problems and read interesting stories.

 

Anyone interested in chatting can join a discussion forum on one of the listed topics.  Only people who happen to be signed on at the same time are able to talk because messages are not stored.

This discussion can be an effective business tool if people who can benefit from interactive conversation set a specific appointment to meet and talk on a particular topic.

 

Disadvantage.

 

  • Usually, the topic is open to all without security; so intruders can participate.

 

Information retrieval.

 

The Internet is a voluntarily decentralized network with no central listing of participants or sites.  Therefore, End-users, usually working from PCs are able to search & find information of interest located in different sites assisted by special software and data stored in readily usable formats.

 

The Internet gives you information on almost any subject.  This is because of the Worldwide Web (www).

 

The World Wide Web is a global (an international) system of connected Web pages containing information such as, text, pictures, sound and video.  The WWW is hypertext based (i.e., it is able to access text and graphical data formatted for easy search, retrieval and display).

 

With the WWW, you can review Newspapers, magazines, academic papers, etc.  In addition, Governments, colleges, universities, companies and individuals offer free information on the Internet.  E.g., you can inquire (find out) about universities in Britain or America.

 

Note.  Its major problem is finding what you need from among the many storehouses of data found in databases and libraries all over the world.

 

Dowloading of Programs.

 

There are thousands of programs available on the Internet.  These programs include; Word processors, Spreadsheets, Electronic cards, etc.

 

You can therefore, look for the latest software over the Internet, e.g., you can get the latest Anti-virus software, and in addition, retrieve a free trial issue.

 

Entertainment.

 

There are hundreds of simple games available on the Internet.  These include; Chess, Football, etc.  The Internet also allows you review current Movies and hear Television theme songs.

 

Online Shopping.

 

You can order goods and services on the Internet without leaving your desk.  E.g., you can view a catalogue of a certain clothes shop over the Internet and fill in an online Order form.

 

Commercial enterprises use the Web to provide information on demand for purposes of customer support, marketing and sales.

 

File Transfer.

 

Data in the form of files can be transferred across the Internet from one site to another using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP).  FTP software is needed at both ends to handle the transfer.  It is through FTP that the two pieces of software manage to ‘understand’ each other.

 

Discussion Groups.

 

A Discussion group is a collection of users who have joined together to discuss some topic.

 

There are many discussions on different topics including Cooking, Skydiving, Politics, Education, recreational, scientific research, etc.

 

Two of the commonly used discussion groups for business are;

  • Usenet newsgroups.
  • List Servers.

 

  • Usenet newsgroups.

 

These are the most formally organized of the discussion groups.

 

Using a facility on the Internet called USENET, individuals can gain access to a very wide variety of information topics.

 

Usenet Newsgroups are usually worldwide discussion groups in which people share information and ideas on a defined topic through large electronic Bulletin Boards where anyone can read any articles or write articles and post messages on the topic for others to see and respond to.

 

The individuals can add messages to different topics and read those contributed by others. For instance, users such as students can ask questions about problems they face, or they could contribute or give an advice on how to improve the teaching of the subject.

 

Messages can be easily linked so that it is easy to know messages that are related.

 

Establishing a new newsgroup requires a vote of all interested people on the Internet.  If enough people express interest, the new topic is established.

 

Note. To join a Newsgroup and be able to read messages on various topics, your computer must have Newsreader software such as Outlook Express, or Internet News.

Any Internet user can access some of these newsgroups, while other newsgroups will require to subscribe to a specific topic or set of topics.

Once you have subscribed, each time you access the newsgroups you are informed of any new messages added to the topics.  You can then read these messages and respond to them by adding your own message.

 

The Usenet software receives “postings” of information and transmits new postings to users who have registered their interest in receiving the information.  Each individual posting takes the form like that used for e-mail.

 

There are over 10,000 such newsgroups; however, each Usenet site is financed independently & controlled by a Site Administrator, who carries only those groups that he/she chooses.

 

  • List Server

 

A List Server (or list serve) group is similar to the Usenet newsgroups, but is generally less formal.

Anyone with the right e-mail server software can establish a list server, which is simply a mail list.

The processor of the List Server processes commands such as request to subscribe, unsubscribe, or to provide information about the list serve.  The List serve mailer directs messages to everyone on the mailing list.

To use a List server, you need to know the addresses of both the Processor and the Mailer.

To subscribe to a List server, you send an e-mail message to the List server processor, which adds your name to the list.  Many different commands can be sent to the List server processor to perform a variety of functions.  These commands are included as lines of text in the e-mail messages sent to the processor.

 

List servers are more focused that the Usenet newsgroups and have fewer members.  They are harder to find than the Usenet newsgroups because literally anyone can create one.

 

Video Conferencing.

 

Video conferencing provides real-time transmission of video & audio signals to enable people in 2 or more locations to have a meeting.

 

The fastest growing form of video conferencing is Desktop video conferencing.

Small cameras installed on top of each camera enable meetings to take place from individual offices.

Special application software (e.g., CUSeeMe) is installed on top of each client computer.  It transmits the image across a network to application software on a video-conferencing Server.  The server then sends the signals to the other client computers that are to participate in the video conference.  In some areas, the clients can communicate with each other without using the server.

Some systems have integrated other types of GroupWare with desktop video conferencing, enabling participants to communicate verbally to attend the same “meeting” while sitting at the computer in their offices.

 

Advantage of Video conferencing.

 

  • Saves time & cost, as it reduces the need to travel.

 

Access & Use of other computers.

 

The Internet has a facility called TELNET that enables a user on one computer to use another computer across the network, i.e., the user is able to run programs on the other machine as if he/she is a local user.

 

Telnet is a protocol, which enables a user on one computer to log in to another computer on the Internet.

 

TELNET establishes an error-free, rapid link between two computers, allowing a user to log on to his/her home computer from a remote computer even when traveling.  You can also log on to and use third-party computers that have been made available to the public.

 

TELNET will use the computer address you supply to locate the computer you want to reach and connect you to it.  You will, of course, have to log in & go through any security procedures you, your company, or the third-party computer owner have put in place to protect that computer.

 

Telnet requires an application image program on the Client computer and an application layer program on the Server of the host computer.  Many programs conform to the Telnet Standard (e.g., EWAN).

 

Once Telnet enables the connection from the Client to the Server, you can log in by use of commands.  The exact commands to gain access to these newsgroups vary from computer to computer.

 

Telnet enables you to connect to a remote computer without incurring long-distance telephone charges.

 

Telnet can be useful because, it enables you to access your Server or Host computer without sitting at its Keyboard.

 

Telnet can be faster or slower than a modem, depending on the amount of traffic on the Internet.

 

Note.  Telnet is insecure, because everyone on the Internet can attempt to log in your computer and use it as they wish.  One commonly used security precaution is to prohibit remote log ins via Tel-net unless a user specifically asks for his/her account to be authorized for it, or permit remote log ins only from a specific set of Internet addresses., e.g., the Web server at a university can be configured to only accept telnet log ins from computers located on the Kabete Campus network.

 

Electronic Commerce.

 

Many people are actively using the Internet for Electronic Commerce (i.e., doing business on the Internet).

The use of the Internet in E-commerce is not necessary for making money as such, but mainly to find information, improve communication and provide information.

 

Many people automatically focus on the retail aspect of e-commerce, i.e., selling products to individuals.  However, this is just one small part of e-commerce.  The fastest group and the largest segment of e-commerce is business-to-business settings.

 

There are 4 ways in which the Web can be used to support E-commerce;

 

  • Electronic Store.

 

Electronic Store is a Website that lists all the products or services a business wishes to sell, thus enabling customers to purchase them by using the Internet itself.

 

E-store sites provide physical goods and services.

 

The cost of providing information on the Web is low (unlike a Catalog, in which each page adds to the cost), and therefore, electronic stores can provide much information.  In addition, electronic stores can also add value by providing dynamic information.

 

E-mail can also serve the purpose of E-store.  This is because, e-mail is essentially a collection of e-stores.  The mail usually provides all the computer information needed for e-commerce, and advertises the mail to potential customers.  In return, the stores pay the mail a monthly fee or some percentage of sales.

 

  • Electronic Marketing.

 

E-marketing sites focus on the products or services of one company with aim of increasing sales.

This type of site supports the sales process, but does not make actual sales.  The goal is to attract and keep customers.

 

By doing so, such sites provide a wealth of information about the firms and products complete with technical details and photos.  Customers can review these but cannot buy over the Web.  The idea is to encourage the user to visit a local dealer, who will then make a sale.

 

Computers also use e-marketing sites to provide newsletters with information on the latest products and tips on how to use them.  Other companies enable potential customers to sign up for notification of new product releases.

 

E-marketing is cheaper in many ways than traditional marketing (radio, direct marketing, TV or print media).  This is because while it costs the same to develop these traditional media, it costs nothing to send information to the customers.  It is also easier to customize the presentation of information to a potential customer, because the Web is interactive.  In contrast, the other media are fixed once they are developed, and they provide the same marketing approach to all who use it.

 

  • Information / Entertainment provider.

 

The Information/Entertainment provider supplies information (in form of text or graphics) or entertainment.  These providers provide information from many sources with an aim of helping the users.

 

Several radio and TV stations are using the Web to provide broadcast of audio and video.  The Web also offers new forms of real entertainment e.g., enables new multiplayer interactive games, which are not available in any other media.  The information / entertainment providers generate revenue by selling advertisement printouts.

 

  • Customers Service sales.

 

This provides a variety of information for customers after they have purchased a product or service – to allow customers access most commonly needed information 24 hrs a day.

 

Many software companies post updates that fix problems so that customers can download for themselves.

Customer service sites benefit both the company and the customers.  They enable customers to get a 24 hr support and easy access to needed information.

 

They often reduce the no. of staff needed by automating routine information requests that previously had to be handled by an employee.

 

GroupWare.

 

GroupWare is a software that helps groups of people to work together more productively.

 

They are often organized using a two-by-two grid.

 

Same place Same time Different time
  Group support systems Group support systems
Different place Video teleconferencing, Desktop video teleconferencing E-mail, Discussion groups, Document-based GroupWare

GroupWare allows people in different places to communicate either at the same time (as on a telephone) or at different times.

GroupWare can also be used to improve communication and decision-making among those who work together in the same room, either at the same time or at different times.

GroupWare allows people to exchange ideas, debate issues, make decisions, and write reports, without actually having to meet face to face.  Even when groups meet in the same room at the same time, GroupWare can improve meetings.

The major advantage of GroupWare is its ability to help groups make faster decisions, particularly in situations where it is difficult for group members to meet in the same room at the same time.

 

The 3 most popular types of GroupWare are;

  • Discussion groups.
  • Group support systems.
  • Video Conferencing.

 

Group Support Systems (GSS).

 

Both e-mail and documents-based GroupWare are designed to support individuals and groups working in different places at different times.  They are not suited to support groups working together at the same time and in the same place.  In addition, they don’t provide advanced tools for helping groups to make decisions.

 

Group Support Systems (GSS) are software tools, designed to improve group’s decision-making.  GSS are used with special-purpose meeting rooms that provide each group member with a network computer plus a large screen video projection system that acts as electronic blackboards.  These rooms are equipped with special-purpose GSS software that enables participants to communicate, propose ideas, analyse options, evaluate alternatives, etc.  Typically, a meeting facilitator assists the group.

 

The group members can either discuss verbally or use computers to type ideas and information, which are then shared with all other group members via the network.  For large groups where only one person can speak at a time, typing ideas is faster than talking.  Everyone has the same opportunity to contribute and ideas can be collected much faster.  In addition, GSS enables users to make anonymous comments.  Without anonymity, certain participants may withhold ideas because they fear their ideas may not be well received.

The system also provides tools to support voting and ranking of alternatives, so that more structured decision-making process can be used.

 

Just like in document-based GroupWare, vendors use the Web browser as their client software.  So, almost anyone can access GroupWare Server.

 

Note. Discussion groups, document-based GroupWare and GSS all focus on the transmission of text and graphical images.

 

Information Superhighway.

 

A term coined by U.S Clinton administration referring to advanced information infrastructure accessible to individuals, groups and firms.

 

In general, the Information superhighway can be defined as;

 

  • A facility that provides a global electronic data interchange between computer users at a higher rate of message exchange, and at cheaper costs. g., the Internet that allows researchers, businesses, and electronic media to exchange information.

 

  • An Information Communication Technology (ICT) network, which delivers all kinds of electronic services – audio, video, text, and data to households and businesses.

 

The communication services on the superhighway can be one-to-one way (Telephones, e-mail, fax, etc); one-to-many (Broadcasting, interactive TV, video conferencing, etc), many-to-many (typified by bulletin boards and forums on the Internet).

Origin.

 

Information superhighway is a mass technology project aimed at creating a National Information Infrastructure (NII) in the U.S.

 

The concept emerged as the brainchild (idea) of U.S vice president Al Gore.   It is an alliance between the Federal government and a no. of industries.

 

The Information superhighway describes networks of Optic fiber and Coaxial cable linked by sophisticated switches that can deliver voice, data, image, text, and video signals all in the same digital language.

 

In the U.S, it has been proclaimed (declared) as the foundation for a national transformation to an information-based society, and a key element in the national efforts to sustain leadership in the world economy.

 

Governments and industries are developing a new method of competition, which will enable telecommunications, cable television, computer hardware and software companies, and entertainment corporations to work together to create and operate information superhighways.  These activities will finally result into a wide range of electronic services including electronic Shopping malls, collaborate electronic Education and distance learning, electronic Libraries, Multimedia information, messaging, and entertainment.

 

Web casting.

 

Web casting (or “Push technology”) is a special application of the Web that has the potential to dramatically change the way we use the Web /Internet.

 

With Web casting, the user signs up for a type of information on a set of channels.  Regularly (minutes, hours, days), the user browser contacts the Web server providing these channels to see if they have been updated.  If so, the browser will load the information, and if required by the user, will automatically display the information on the user screen.

 

Web casting changes the nature of the Web from one in which the user searches for information (a “pull” environment) into an environment in which the user accepts whatever information is on the Webcast Server (a “push” environment).   This is called the “Push” because the user does not request specific information, but rather permits the Web server to “push” the information when it becomes available.

 

The Web has been likened to a library because users move form site to site and page to page just like they move from shelf to shelf and book to book in a library.

 

Web casting is more like TV because the content and time of delivery is selected using the Web caster, the user only chooses the channels.

 

Web casting can be used for news (e.g., CNN) or financial reports (e.g., Stock market quotations), Corporate announcement, and as a replacement for broadcast e-mail.  It even has the potential to provide automatic updates to software packages.

 

Importance of services provided on the Internet.

 

The services offered by the Internet can be used as important tools in various ways:

 

  • As a research tool:

 

To learn about new developments or products, competitors, market news and customer opinions.

 

  • As an advertising / trading tool:

 

To help in selling goods or delivering information through the Web pages to customers on a 24-hour basis.

 

  • As a communication tool:

 

To support communication with customers, suppliers or staff through Electronic mail (e-mail).

 

  • As an Entertainment channel:

 

Most of the Games, Movies, and Television theme songs are available for free on the Internet.

In addition, you can have live, interactive conversations with people around the world including celebrities.

 

Users of the Internet.

 

Considering the facilities & the various tools offered, the Internet has attracted among others the following users;

 

  • Researchers can get information.
  • Writers and Scientists use the Internet to compile, compare and analyse their work.
  • Individuals use the Internet for their work or to communicate with each other.
  • People with the same interests can share ideas.
  • Large organizations use the Internet to communicate with each other, and also to keep in touch with subordinate (subsidiary) companies or their suppliers.
  • Students can communicate and gather information.
  • Business people can advertise, communicate and sell their goods.
  • Sales people use the Internet to keep in touch with their home offices.
  • Buyers can do their shopping online.

 

Exercise (a).

 

  1. (a). What do you understand by the term Internet?

(b). What are the other names of the Internet?

  1. Describe the Functions of the Internet.
  2. List 6 services that are offered on the Internet.
  3. Identify 6 categories of people who can benefit through the use of the Internet.

 

Exercise (b).

 

  1. Define the Internet.
  2. Briefly describe six services offered by the Internet.
  3. Discuss the growth of Internet in recent days.
  4. Explain the importance of Information superhighway (Internet).
  5. Write short notes on the following:
  • E-commerce.
  • Information Superhighway.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CONNECTING (LOGGING ON) TO THE INTERNET.

 

Log On -To identify yourself & gain access to a computer.  To log on, type a user name & a password.

 

Facilities Needed.

 

To use the Internet, you must have access to it.  In order to get connected to the Internet and access the World wide Web, you will require the following facilities:

 

  • A Computer.

 

The computer to be used must have the following desirable elements;

 

  • A Fast processor, e.g., Pentium 1 & above – to quickly access and download information & programs from the Internet.
  • RAM memory of 32 MB & Above.
  • Hard disk capacity of at least 400 MB.
  • A high-quality Colour Screen – to enable you view the various graphics and images.
  • Free disk space on which to download the information or programs from the Internet.

 

  • Web Browsers.

 

Web browsers are application programs that are used to retrieve Web pages from the Internet onto your Personal Computer.

 

One of the most popular Web browsers is Internet Explorer from Microsoft.

 

Each Web page in the World Wide Web is based on an HTML (HyperText Mark Language) file.  A Web browser decodes the information in an HTML file and displays a Web page on your computer screen according to its instructions.  This process is called Downloading.

 

  • Downloading is the process of copying files from one computer to another by using a Modem or a network connection. You can also download files from the Web to your hard disk.

 

  • HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) -The language used to create Web pages. To view HTML documents, use Web browsing Software.

 

  • Telephone lines.

 

  • Modem (Modulator/Demodulator).

 

On the Internet, computers exchange information through Telephone lines.  Therefore, to use the Internet, you need a Modem & a Telephone line.

 

A Modem is a device that enables you to connect to the Internet, and access information.

 

As a Transmitting modem, it translates computer information (which is in digital form) into analogue form (the form that can transmit over telephone lines).  This process is called Modulation.

As a Receiving modem, it translates the information back into digital form (a form that your computer can understand); a process called Demodulation.

 

The Modem must be fast.  This helps to reduce the amount of time spent waiting for Web pages, files, or messages from the Internet.

Modem speeds are expressed in Bits per second (bps).  The typical speeds are 9,600 bps, 4.4 Kbps (Kilobits per second), 28.8 Kbps, 56 Kbps, etc.

 

  • Internet Service Provider (ISP).

 

When connecting to the Internet using a modem, you need to sign up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP).

 

  • Internet Service Provider (ISP) is a commercial organization (or a company) that provides Internet connections, along with a set of support services usually for a fee. It maintains a Server that is directly connected to the Internet.

 

  • Internet Service Provider – A company or organization that provides Internet Access, usually for a fee. To connect to your ISP, use a modem.

 

Most people and organizations connect to the Internet over a Telephone line through an ISP.  However, some larger businesses and institutions (such as universities) have their own Internet connections.

 

An ISP usually has a no. of Host computers.  These host computers usually provide space for the storage of user’s electronic mail messages, storage of user’s Web sites and a set of related facilities such as, advice, support software and appropriate security.

 

Examples of the local ISPs include;

  • Africa Online, Kenya Web, ISP Kenya, Swift Kenya, and Inter-Connect.

 

Connecting to an ISP involves calling the provider and setting up a PPP account.  When you open an account with an ISP, you will be provided with a User name and a Password.

 

  • Username – Every time you get connected, you require a name to identify yourself on the Internet.

 

  • Password – This is needed for security purposes. It ensures that your Internet account is secure.

 

Note. ISPs charge for the services rendered.

  • Website.

 

This is an area in the Internet where information of a particular organization is kept.  The Website must be updated on daily basis.

 

Content Provider – A business that uses the Internet to supply you with information such as news, weather, business reports & entertainment.

 

ACCESSING THE INTERNET.

 

There are 3 common ways in which an individual user can access the Internet:

 

  • Through a connection already setup through the computer in your organization. Typically, the service is accessed in a similar way to other services on a LAN.

 

  • Through paying for an account with an Internet Service Provider (ISP).

 

In order to access an ISP directly, the user will need a Personal Computer, a Modem, a Telephone line & a suitable software in order to connect to the service.  Most ISPs give help and advice on how to connect.

 

  • Through a Bulletin Board Service (BBS), e.g. CompuServe. BBS are commercially run information providers, each with its own information services and normally offering access to Internet services.

The BBS companies normally sell some form of start-up package.

 

Setting up an Internet account.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To be able to gain access to the facilities that are offered on the Internet, the user needs to log on. To log on, use Dial-Up to connect to the Internet, and then use a Web browser like Internet Explorer to load Web pages.

 

There are several ways to start Internet Explorer;

 

Method 1.

 

  1. Double-click the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop.

 

Method 2.

 

  1. On the taskbar, click Start, point to Programs, then click Internet Explorer.

 

You may be required to make a connection through your ISP in order to log on to the Internet.  To do this, a Dial-up Connection dialog box is displayed.

 

  1. Click in the User name box, and type a user name, for instance ‘Iat’.
  2. Type in your password in the Password box, and then select the Save password

The password appears in asterisk format (***) for added privacy and security.

 

  1. Click the Connect button to access the Internet.

 

The Internet Connection wizard creates an Internet connection for you, and then displays a list of Internet Service Providers (ISPs) and information about their services.

To sign up for a new account, click an ISP in the list.

 

Wizard – A tool that walks you through the steps of a complex task.

 

Selecting options in the Internet Connection Wizard.

 

If you are connecting to the Internet using a modem & an Internet Service Provider (ISP), your ISP will supply most of the information needed.  You will also need to provide the following information.

 

 

Information                                                   Needed for.

 

The ISP you want to use                                 choosing an ISP

 

Your address & billing information                payment for your ISP account

 

Note. You may be prompted to restart your computer during the Internet connection process; save and close any open documents before you proceed.

 

  1. After successfully logging on, the Internet Explorer displays the “Home page” and a Connection Indicator icon on the taskbar to indicate that you are online.

 

Method 3. To open Internet Explorer from Outlook Express.

 

  1. On the Help menu, point to Microsoft on the Web, then click the Web option you want.

E.g., click Search the Web to look for a Web site, a person, a company, or an organization.

– Or-

Click Best of the Web to open the MSN.COM page that lists some of the best sites on the Web.

 

Online Service – An Internet service that provides a wide range of content to its subscribers including Internet Access.

 

Parts of the Microsoft Internet Explorer screen.

 

  • Title bar.
  • Menu bar.
  • Address Bar. It contains the Address box in which you type an address to open the file you want.  The Address Bar provides a method of opening files that are on the Internet or your computer.
  • Current page, with Links.
  • Scroll bars.
  • Status bar.
  • Standard toolbar; with buttons such as, Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Home, Search, Favorites, History, Mail, Print, Discuss.

You can use the toolbar buttons in the Internet Explorer to move between Web pages, to search the Internet or to refresh the content of Web pages.

 

Button                                          description.

Forward                                       moves to the next Web page.

Back                                             moves to a previously viewed Web page.

Home                                            jumps to your home page.

History                                          displays a list of recently visited sites.

Favorites                                      displays a list of Web pages that you have selected as your favorites.

Refresh                                         updates the contents of a currently displayed Web page or window.

Search                                          opens a Web page that lists the available search engines.

Edit                                               opens FrontPage Express or Windows Notepad so you can edit a Web page.

 

Print                                             prints a Web page.

Stop                                              stops the downloading of a Web page.

Mail                                              opens Outlook Express or Internet News.

 

Viewing connection information.

 

Purpose.

 

  • When you register with an ISP, you acquire an Internet account with them and from time to time, you may want to view connection information such as, how long you have been online, the speed of connection & the activities done during the online session.

 

  1. Right-click the Connection Indicator icon on the Taskbar.
  2. From the shortcut menu that appears, click Status.

The Connected to <Africa Online> dialog box appears:

 

Some of the useful information displayed on this window includes:

  • The speed at which you are connected, e.g. 26,400 bits per second (bps).
  • The duration you have been online, e.g., 2 minutes, 50 seconds.
  • The Transfer rate, in case you are downloading files from the Internet.

 

  1. Click OK, after viewing the details.

 

Customizing the Web browser.

 

Purpose.

 

  • Moving from site to site can be slow if the ISP or Internet lines are busy, if the Host server (the server storing the site you are trying to access) is busy, or if you are using a slow modem.

 

If a site contains graphics (or other multimedia content like video, audio, etc) you can prevent the graphics from downloading so as to speed up browsing.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, select Internet Options….
  2. Click the Advanced tab, then scroll down to the Multimedia
  3. Deselect the options or content that you want turned off, e.g., Show Pictures, play Animations, or Play Videos, then click OK.

 

Multimedia – A technology that combines data/text, voices/sounds, graphics, pictures, videos and images into one complete system.  Multimedia uses Optical disk, e.g., CD-ROM to stock all the above in one media.  Multimedia can be used in training.

 

 

 

 

 

Logging out from the Internet.

 

Purpose.

 

  • As long as you are connected to the Internet, you continue to incur Telephone and account usage charges. This can prove to be expensive in the long run.

 

It is recommended that you disconnect or log out from the Internet soon after you have finished with a session.  This is to avoid incurring extra or unnecessary charges.

 

  1. Right-click the Connection Indicator icon on the Taskbar.
  2. From the shortcut menu that appears, click Disconnect and you will automatically be logged out.

 

When you log out, the Connection Indicator icon is disabled.

Note. Some browsers or ISPs automatically disconnect you from the Internet when there is no activity between the user and ISP for a period of about 5 – 10 minutes.

 

Understanding the World Wide Web.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To understand some of the Internet terminologies like Web pages, Web sites, Web browsers, URLs and Home page.

 

The World Wide Web (www).

 

The World Wide Web is also known as the Web, WWW or W3.

 

  • The Web is an Internet application (software) that uses the Internet as its network.

 

  • World Wide Web is the graphical, multimedia portion of the Internet.

 

  • The WWW is a collection of hyperlinked Web pages published on the Internet.
  • The World Wide Web is a global (an international) system of connected Web pages containing information such as, text, pictures, sound and video. The WWW is hypertext based (i.e., it is able to access text & graphical data formatted for easy search, retrieval and display).

 

The Web is a part of the Internet.  It is comprised of millions of Web pages.  This huge collection of documents is stored on computers, called Hosts, around the world.

The documents may contain text, pictures, sound, small programs or forms to be completed by a user.

 

To view files on the Web, you need Web browsing Software.   This software can be used to view different locations on the Web or to explore the Web pages.

 

Web pages.

 

  • Web pages are documents published by organizations and individuals who are interested in putting themselves on the Web. Web pages can include text, pictures, sound and video.

 

  • Web page is a location on the WWW, usually a Web site.

 

The Web pages can also be found on company Intranets.

 

Intranets and Extranets.

 

What is an Intranet?

 

  • An Intranet is an internal corporate network used in organizations to enable the sharing of documents among coworkers. It supports users inside one organization (usually on a LAN).

 

  • Intranet – A private network within an organization. It can connect all types of computers within an organization.

 

Intranet has a private Web Server, which can be made available to the entire organization, individual department or to specific departmental workgroups.

 

An Intranet uses the infrastructure and standards of the Internet and can be connected to the Internet.

 

 

Note. Intranet applications are usually combined with the normal Web application of other organizations, but are hidden from those outside the organization.

 

Extranet:

 

An Extranet works in much the same manner as an Intranet, but provides information to selected users outside the organization.

E.g., a certain university can have an Internet library containing millions of articles, but only make it available to staff and students at colleges and universities within the country.

 

To access the library, you must provide a password when you connect to the Internet site.

 

Home Page.

 

  • Home page is the Web page loaded when Internet Explorer is first started, i.e., when you access the Web.

E.g., the Internet address of the Windows home page is http://www.Microsoft.com /Windows

 

  • Home page can also the first page of a company or an individual’s Website on the Web.

Those who offer information through the Web must first establish a Home page – a www text and graphical screen that welcomes the user and explains the organization that has established the page.

  • Home page – is the introductory page of a Web site. The home page contains links to other pages in the site.

 

Notes.

 

  • You can set any Web page as your Home page.
  • Do not confuse your home page with the home page of the Websites you visit. Your home page is set through Internet Explorer.  The home page of a Website is the introductory page for the site.

If you click a hyperlink such as Home on a Web page, you will jump to the home page of the Website, not yours.  To access your home page, click the Home button on the Explorer toolbar.

 

Web Site.

 

  • A collection of Web pages belonging to an organization or individual. These organizations or individuals maintain the Website.

 

  • Web site – A group of related Web pages.

 

  • A Web site is a screen or a collection of screens that provide information in text or graphical form that can be viewed by Internet users by activating the appropriate icon or commands.

 

Web Browsers (Web browsing software).

 

A Web browser is a program that lets the user browse through information on (or surf) the Web.

 

Information on the Web is structured into pages.  Each page has a specific address that is used to locate and access information on that page.

 

A WWW browser program enables the user to either search for data by name or by specifying locations known as Uniform Resource Location (URL).

 

The two common Web browsers are:

 

  • Internet Explorer from Microsoft.
  • Navigator from Netscape.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Browsing the Web.

 

This is also known as Navigating or ‘Surfing’ the Web.

 

  • To Browse is to navigate the Internet or the contents of your computer.

 

  • Browsing can also be defined as moving around and between Web pages.

 

Using a Web browsing software you can read documents, listen to music, watch videos, make purchases, participate in surveys, advertise products, do research, share interests and download files on the Web.

 

EXPLORING / BROWSING THE INTERNET.

 

Use the Internet Explorer on your Windows desktop to browse the Web.

 

There are several ways in which you can browse the Web pages or “surf the net”.

 

  • When viewing a Web page, you can navigate the Internet by clicking Links, Underlined text or special features that cause you to jump to another Web page.

 

Hyperlinks.

 

 

A Hyperlink is a coloured or underlined text or a graphic that you click to ‘jump’ from one location to another.  The hyperlinks enable the user to ‘jump’ to another file, or to another location in the same file.

 

All Web pages have hyperlinks.  These links:

 

  • Connect one part of a Web page to another part of the same Web page. This is useful if the Web page is large.
  • Connect one Web page to another Website somewhere on the Web.
  • Connect a page to a file, such as a sound clip, video, a Spreadsheet or a Word document.

 

The links can connect to objects stored anywhere on the Internet.

 

Hypertext links are indicated by underlined text highlighted usually in blue.  Hyperlinks can also be represented by buttons, graphics or pictures.

 

To find hyperlinks on a page, move your mouse pointer over the page and where there is a hyperlink, the mouse pointer will change into a hand with a pointing finger.  When you click a link, another Web page appears.

 

As you browse the Web, Internet Explorer stores the sites and pages that you visit.  Usually, the hyperlinks you previously selected are colored differently.  Internet Explorer does this to remind you that you have already visited the page identified by this link.

 

  • You can also use the Standard toolbar buttons in the Internet Explorer to move between Web pages, or to search the Internet.

 

History.

 

Internet Explorer remembers the Websites and Web pages that you have visited.  It keeps record of each Web page as it is downloaded.  This is the History feature.

 

You can therefore, easily return to the page you have visited.  To redisplay the page you have just left, click on the Back button.  To move to the next page (available only if you have moved back), click the Forward button.

 

Web Hosting.

 

A World Wide Web Server is a computer with programs that answer requests for documents from Clients (browsers) over the Internet.  Files containing Web sites are placed on these servers.

 

A Host computer is any computer connected to the Internet and stores information that has been made available to the Web.

 

ISPs also use host computers to store user’s electronic mail messages, Web sites and other related facilities such as, support software and appropriate security.

 

Web Address (Uniform Resource Locator – URL).

 

An Address is the location of a file.

 

Each Web page in the world has a unique Internet address or location.  Internet addresses are also called the Uniform Resource Locator (URL).  E.g., the general URL for Microsoft is http://www.Microsoft.com./

 

You can use addresses to find files on the Internet & your computer.  You can instantly display any Web page if you know its URL.  E.g., http://www.compaq.com. 

 

AutoComplete – A feature in the Address Bar.  When you begin typing a previously used address, this feature finishes it as you type.

 

How the Web Works.

Each Client computer needs an application software package called a Web browser, such as Navigator, Internet Explorer.

Each Server on the network needs an application software package called a Web Server.  There are many different Web servers, such as those produced by Netscape, Microsoft and Apache.

 

In order to get a page from the Web, the user must type the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired page, or click on a link that provides the URL.  The URL specifies the Internet address of the Web Server, the directory and the name of the specific page required.  If no directory or page is specified, the Web server will display whatever page has been defined as its Home page.  If no server name is specified, the Web browser will assume that the address is on the same server and directory as the last request.

 

In order for the Web server to understand requests from the Web browser, they must use the same standard protocol.  If there was no standard, then each Web browser would use a different way to request pages.  This means that, it would be impossible for a Web browser from Netscape to communicate with a Web server from Microsoft.

The standard protocol for communication between a Web browser and a Web server is the HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP).  An HTTP request for a Web browser to a Web server has 3 parts, but only the 1st part is required, the other two are optional.

 

  • The Request Line, which starts with a command (e.g., GET), provides the URL, and ends with HTTP version number that the browser understands.

 

  • The Request Header, which contains a variety of optional information such as the Web browser being used (e.g., Internet Explorer), the date, the User ID and Password for using the Web pages as password protected.

 

  • The Request Body, which contains information sent to the Server, such as information from a firm.

 

Note.  Every Web user must provide the Internet address of the receiving computer, otherwise, the server would not know where to send the requested page.

Some browsers also provide the requestor’s e-mail addresses as well.  Most Web servers keep a record of Internet addresses of all the requests (and the e-mail address, if provided by the browser).  Some companies use this information to make a follow up with prospective customers.

 

An HTTP response for a Web server to a Web browser also has 3 parts, but only the last part is required, the first two are optional.

 

  • The Response Status, which contains the HTTP version number the server has used as status code (e.g., 200 means ‘OK’, 404 means ‘Page not found’), and reason phrase (i.e., a text description of the status code).

 

  • The Response Header, which contains a variety of optional information such as the Web server being used, the date, the exact URL of the page in the response body, and the format of the body (e.g., HTML).

 

  • The Response Body, which is the Web page itself.

 

Internet Addresses.

 

Internet addresses are strictly regulated, otherwise, someone could add a computer to the Internet that had the same address as another computer.

 

Each address has 2 parts; The computer name and its domain.

 

The Domain is the specific part of the Internet to which the computer is connected (e.g., Canada, Australia, etc).

 

The general format of an Internet address is therefore: computer.domain.  Some computer names have several parts separated by periods.  For example, the main university Web server of an imaginary University like Yairobi can be www.Yairobi.edu, while the college of Humanities and Social Sciences server can be www.chss.Yairobi.edu.

 

Each domain has an address board that assigns address for its domain.  The boards ensure that there are no duplicates.

 

Finding Web pages (information) on the Web.

 

There are 3 ways you can use to find interesting and useful Web pages on the Web;

 

  • You could get the Web address from an advertisement.

 

Many businesses include their Web addresses in their Television and Print advertisements.

 

  • You click a link that will enable you jump from one page to another.

 

Many industries or organizations, magazines and topic experts maintain pages that provide links from page to page.

 

  • Use of Search Engines.

 

Search Engines / Search Services.

 

  • A Search engine is software that helps in locating information in the Web.

 

  • Search engine is a tool that searches the Web for information that you want to find.

 

Purpose.

 

  • If you want to get some information concerning an area or subject of interest over the Web but you do not know where to find it, you can use a Search engine to locate sites that contain the information.

 

  • Locate particular information in a Website, e.g., if you wish to read the Sports news you can load a Web site like http://www.cnn.com/, and then use a search engine within that site to locate information on Sports.

 

The following are the various search engines:

 

 

These search engines offer different kinds of searching capabilities.  However, they differ in the way they organize information in response to your request.

 

Yahoo focuses on the largest & most important Websites and organizes them in a directory format.  Small and little known Websites are excluded.  Therefore, if you are looking for the address of a well-known company or product or a popular topic, Yahoo is probably the easiest way to find it.

 

Alta Vista is the broadest of all.  It lists almost everything it can find.  It is probably the best choice if you are looking for an unclear topic or a very specific combination of topics or words (e.g., to find a famous quote).

 

The major disadvantage of Alta Vista is that, you may have to look through dozens of sites before you find the ones you want.  In addition, Alta Vista does not provide some help in focusing your search.

 

Excite is easier to use in that, it uses advanced special intelligence techniques to help you search those pages that best match your interest.  E.g., after looking at the result of a search, you can tell Excite to find more pages that are similar to a specific page it has found.  Excite will then search again and present those pages first.  In this case, Excite refines the search based on the characterization of the page you have selected.

 

Meta Crawler provides the best search facilities.  It does not search the Web and provide a list of what it finds.  Instead, whenever you enter a search request, it simultaneously sends that request to several search engines (including Yahoo & Alta Vista), then combines, and organizes the information it receives from all the search engines into one display.

 

How Search Engines find Web pages.

 

Hundreds of thousands of new Web pages are created each day.

 

There are 2 ways that search engines use to locate Web pages:

 

  • Use of Spiders / Robots.
  • Through Submissions.

 

 

Search Engines normally use software spiders to explore the Web.  The Spiders are usually automated robots that travel around the Web looking for new pages, and creating links to them.

 

These spiders methodically search all the pages on the Websites they can find and report back their discoveries.  The search engine builds an index to these pages based on the words they contain.  When you connect to a search engine, and type a few words describing what you want, the Search engine will search its index for these keywords and provide you with a list of pages that contain them.

 

 

These are derived from people who have created new Web pages and then submit information about the pages they have created.

 

  1. Select a search engine, e.g., Yahoo, and type its address in the Address box, i.e., http://www.yahoo.com/.

 

Once the search engine home page appears, type a keyword or phrase in the Search box, e.g., Kenya, then click the Search button.

 

Note.  The steps may vary depending on the search engine you are using.

 

  1. When the search is completed, a list of sites that contain the keyword or phrase you are looking for is displayed. Select a site whose description comes closest to the information you desire and click on its link.
  2. If there are many sites, an option that allows you to view the next 10 or so matches is displayed. Click on this if necessary to view the next set of links.

If there are too many matches, you may want to use an additional keyword to narrow down the search.  E.g., to find the sites that contain information about the economy in Kenya, in the Search box, type phrase “Kenya AND Economy”.

  1. Click the Search
  2. From the search results, select the links that may help you get the information you require.

 

Locate information within a Website.

 

Once you access a Website, you can search for specific text or information on that site or page.

 

Unlike search engines like Yahoo, Infoseek, Lycos, Web Crawler, and Excite that present you with the URLs or links of sites that hold information you are looking for, search engines within a Web page locate information within that Web page.

 

  1. Load the Web page to browse. g., let’s use a Website: http://www.carleton.ca.
  2. Click in the Search box, and type a keyword(s), e.g., International AND Student.

 

Note. When typing in a keyword, you can use logical words or operators like AND (when you want to display results that meet both criteria) and OR (when you want to display results that meet one of the two criteria).

  1. Click the Search button, to begin the search.
  2. From the Search Results screen, click on a link that is closest to your requirements.

 

To open a favorite Web site from the Start menu.

 

  1. Click the Start button, point to Favorites, and then click the Web page you want.

 

To search the Web from the Start menu.

 

  1. Click the Start button, point to Find, then click On the Internet.

To use the Run command to open a Web page.

 

  1. Click Start, click Run, and then type the Internet address you want.

If the page you are opening is one you’ve viewed before, the AutoComplete feature can complete the address for you.

To find pages you’ve recently visited.

 

To find Web sites and pages you’ve viewed in the last few days, hours, or minutes.

 

 

  1. On the toolbar, click the History

The History bar appears, containing links for Web sites and pages visited in previous days and weeks.

  1. In the History bar, click a week or day, click a Web site folder to display individual pages, and then click the page icon to display the Web page.

 

Notes.

  • To return to the last page you viewed, click the Back button on the toolbar.
  • To view one of the last nine pages you visited in this session, click the arrow to the side of the Back or Forward button, and then click the page you want from the list.

 

 

 

 

To enter Web information more easily.

 

The AutoComplete feature saves previous entries you have made for Web addresses, forms, and passwords.

When you type information in one of these fields, AutoComplete suggests possible matches.

 

  1. When typing an information in the Address bar, and the AutoComplete feature suggests what you want to enter in that field, click the suggestion. If not, continue typing.

 

Setting or changing a Home Page.

 

Home page is the page that is displayed every time you start Internet Explorer.

 

Note.  Make sure it is a page that you want to view frequently, or make it one that you can customize to get quick access to all the information you want, such as the Msn.com home page.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To enable the user to choose or specify a page that will provide a good starting point for exploring the Web.

The Home page will appear each time the user accesses the Web.

 

  1. Go to the page you want set as your Home page.
  2. On the Tools menu, click Internet Options….

The Internet Options dialog box appears.

  1. Click the General
  2. Under the Home Page section, type the address of the new home page in the Address box. Alternatively, click Use Current to make the current Website the home page.
  3. Click the OK

 

Tips.

 

  • To restore your original home page, click Use Default.
  • You can return to your home page anytime by clicking the Home

 

Exercise.

 

  1. Mention at least 4 facilities that are needed to connect to the Internet.
  2. How can you establish the time you have been online in a session?
  3. In a step-by-step format, illustrate how you can log out of the Internet.
  4. Define the following terms:
    • Worldwide Web.
  5. (i). What is a Web site?

(ii). Give the advantages and disadvantages of a Web site.

  1. Give 2 examples of Web Browsers.
  2. Explain the term ‘Host computer’.
  3. Define the word ‘History’ with reference to a Web browser.
  4. (a). What is a Search engine?

(b). Give examples of Search engines.

  1. How does the Web work? Explain with the help of a diagram.
  2. Describe the procedure of finding information on the Web.

 

Downloading Web pages and programs from the Internet.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To enable the user to view Web pages without being connected to the Internet.
  • To be able to browse a site in a location that does not provide any network access.
  • In order to free your telephone lines.

Downloading a Web page.

 

  1. Load the Web page you want to download, e.g., http://www.nationaudio.com.
  2. Access all the links that you would like to read offline. Make sure that the whole Web page is fully loaded before moving to the next one.
  3. On the Favorites menu, click Add to Favorites.
  4. Select the option Yes, notify me of updates and download the page for offline viewing.
  5. Click OK, and then Logoff.

 

Downloading a program.

 

  • Programmers and software houses like Microsoft usually develop programs and may decide to send a test copy to their existing clients or to publish it on the Internet for interested users to test it for a specified period of time.

 

To test such software, a user will have to download the program onto the hard disk.  A user can also download a movie clip or games, etc, and view it offline to save on costs.

 

  1. Locate a site from which you wish to download a program, e.g., http://softwarenow.iboost.com.
  2. Select the category of programs you want to download, e.g., Games.
  3. Select a game category, e.g., Racing Games.
  4. Select a game you want to download.

 

Note. The window lists the properties of the program, e.g., version, file size.  Ensure that you understand the licence agreement, i.e., whether the program is freeware or shareware.

Freeware is a program that is absolutely free, while Shareware program is available for a limited period of time.

 

  1. To download the program, click on the download link, e.g., Download Cars & Brix.
  2. From the File Download dialog box, select Save this program to disk option, then click OK.
  3. In the Save As dialog box, select the folder in which you wish to store the downloaded program, then click Save.

 

Once the program is loaded, you can access the folder it was saved in and load it without being connected to the Internet.

 

Saving pictures or text from a Web page.

 

Purpose.

 

  • You can save information for future reference or in order to share with other people. You can save the entire Web page or any part of it: text, graphics, or links.

 

  • You can print Web pages for people who don’t have access to the Web or a computer.

 

To copy information from a Web page into a document,

 

  1. Select the information you want to copy, on the Edit menu, click Copy.

 

To use a Web page image as desktop wallpaper.

 

  1. Right-click the image on the Web page, then click Set as Wallpaper.

 

 

 

 

Saving information (a Web page) from the Internet to the Hard disk.

 

Purpose.

 

  • When you come across a Web page you would want to read, but it is too long, you can save the Web page onto your hard disk so as to read it later on when you are off-line. This helps in reducing the costs of browsing while online.

 

  1. Load the Web page you want to download.

Make sure the Web page you want to save is completely transferred to the screen of your Web browser.

  1. On the File menu, select Save As.
  2. In the Save HTML Document dialog box that appears, select the drive & folder where you want to save the page in.
  3. In the File name box, type a name for the page.
  4. In the Save as type box, select a file type.
  • To save all of the files needed to display this page, including graphics, frames, and style sheets, click Web Page, complete. This saves each file in its original format.

 

  • To save just the current HTML page, click Web Page, HTML only. This will save the information on the Web page, but it does not save the graphics, sounds, or other files.

 

  • To save just the text from the current Web page, click Text Only. This saves the information on the Web page in straight text format.
  1. Click Save.

The Explorer program automatically assigns the extension .htm to the file name.

 

To open a saved file.

 

  • After saving a Web page, you may want to read and analyze the information at a later time.

 

  • You may also want to send the saved file to another person via e-mail as an attachment.

 

  1. On the File menu, select Open. This displays the Open dialog box.
  2. Click on the Browse button in order to locate the folder where the file is stored.
  3. Click the file, then choose Open.

 

Note.  When you save a file in a local disk, only the text on the page is shown.  The graphics in a site are displayed in graphics placeholders (which appear as small rectangles).

 

Graphics and Download time.

 

When designing Web pages, graphics have to be incorporated sensibly into the Web page.

 

Although they are appealing to the eye, the more graphics you use on a Web page, the longer the Web browser will take to download the page.

 

File Formats.

 

The most common file formats found on the Internet are:

 

  • Graphic Interchange Format (GIF), and
  • Joint Photographic Experts Group (Jpeg).

 

Generally, GIFs are used for simple page design elements like lines, buttons and dividers, while JPEGs are mostly used for complex photographs and images.

 

Movie (video) files usually have the extension .avi, .mpg, or .mov, while Sound (audio) files have the extension .au, or .ra, or .ram, or .wav.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Printing Web pages.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To obtain a hard copy of the information that you have researched on and collected, for the purposes of reviewing later or filing.

 

Change how a page looks when it prints.

 

Before printing a Web page, it is advisable to check the settings in the Page Setup dialog box.

 

This will ensure that the right Paper size, Margins and Orientation of the page are set correctly.  You can also add headers and footers to a Web page.

 

  1. On the File menu, click Page Setup.
  2. In the Margins boxes, type the margin measurements (in inches).
  3. In the Orientation area, click either Portrait or Landscape to specify whether you want the page printed vertically or horizontally.
  4. In the Header and Footer boxes, specify the information to be printed, then click OK.

 

Printing the Web page.

 

  1. On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.
  2. Set the printing options you want, then click OK.

 

Exercise.

 

  1. What are the benefits of saving information from the Internet to your hard disk?
  2. List the type of files that can be downloaded from a Website.
  3. In which dialog box would one enter a footer and header of a Web page to be printed.
  4. Graphic objects are visible upon opening of saved Web pages. True/False? Explain.
  5. Define the following terms with respect to the Internet:
    • Access Provider. (6 marks).

 

Creating a Bookmark.

 

Purpose.

 

  • When you browse the Web, you may come across sites that you want to visit regularly.

Examples of such sites include; news sites like CNN or BBC.  You can decide to ‘bookmark’ the Web page.

 

The Bookmark feature (also known as a Hotlist or Favorites feature) allows you to store the addresses of Web pages that you frequently visit.  Hence, you do not have to constantly retype your favourite Web page addresses.  When you want to visit the site, simply select the bookmark from a list.

 

  1. Open the Website that you want to create a shortcut to. g., http://www.cnn.com.
  2. On the Favorites menu, choose Add to Favorites.

The Add to Favorites dialog box appears.  The name of the site you are in appears on the Name box.

  1. Under Create in: click the folder you want to add the site to, e.g., Links, then click OK.

This will add the title of the Web page in the Favorites list.

 

To go to a site using a Bookmark.

 

  1. On the menu bar, select Favorites.
  2. Select the folder that holds the favorites item, e.g., Links.
  3. From the drop-down list, click com.

 

To delete a Bookmark.

 

  1. On the menu bar, select Favorites.
  2. Point to the item from the Favorites list, e.g., CNN.com.
  3. Right-click the item, and then click Delete.

The Confirm File Delete dialog box appears.

  1. Click Yes, to remove the item from the list.

 

Working Offline.

 

Connection to the Internet usually means that you are using telephone lines, and therefore incurring telephone charges and usage on your ISP account.

 

Offline – Not connected to a network or the Internet.

 

BROWSING THE WEB (INTERNET) OFFLINE.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To enable the user to save on the time spent connected to the Internet, and hence reduce the general costs of being online.

 

  1. Access the Web site that you want to browse offline.
  2. Access all the links to download all the information you require.

Ensure that each Web page is downloaded completely before going to the next one.

  1. On the Taskbar, right-click the Connection Indicator button, then choose Disconnect.

 

The Connection Indicator disappears from the Taskbar showing that you are now working offline.

 

After disconnecting the user can go ahead and read all the downloaded information.  The user can also “browse” through the site while offline provided all the pages and links are downloaded.

 

Note. Some services like Internet, Usenet, Newsroom, or Shopping will not be available when you are offline.  To use these services, you need to re-establish the connection.

 

Making Web pages available for offline viewing.

 

Offline Reading –To view a Web page without being connected to the Internet.

You can download the page to your hard disk, disconnect from a network or the Internet, and read the material later.

 

When you make a Web page available offline, you can read its content when your computer is not connected to the Internet.

E.g., you can view Web pages on your Laptop computer when you don’t have a network or Internet connection.

 

  1. On the Favorites menu, click Add to Favorites.
  2. Select the Make available offline
  3. To specify a schedule for updating that page, and how much content to download, click Customize.
  4. Follow the instructions on your screen.

Note. Before you go offline, make sure you update your pages.  To do this, click the Tools menu, then click Synchronize.

 

To make an existing favorite item available offline.

 

  1. On the Favorites menu, click Organize Favorites.
  2. Click the page you want to make available offline.
  3. Select the Make available offline
  4. To specify a schedule for updating that page, and how much content to download, click Properties.

 

Get Help with Internet Explorer.

 

Purpose.

 

  • While working with Internet Explorer, you may sometimes need help on how to perform certain tasks or help on a particular topic of interest.

 

  1. On the Help menu, select Contents and Index (or press F1).

The Internet Explorer Help window is displayed.

  1. Click the Contents
  2. Click a book in the list, and then click a Help topic you want to look at.

The Help topic contents are displayed on the right-hand side of the Help window.

  1. Read the help and click the hyperlinks (blue, underlined text) if you want to see help on related topics.
  2. When you have finished, click the Close button to exit help.

 

Using the Index to get Help.

 

  1. On the Help window, click the Index
  2. Type in the first few letters of the word or topic that you are looking for.

In the Index box, all the help topics are listed in alphabetical order.

  1. Click the Display button to view the information about the topic selected.

 

Exercise.

 

  1. What is a Bookmark?

 

Advantages of the Internet.

 

  • One can download (copy) information from a Website.
  • The Internet has enabled the interlinking of people worldwide / globally.
  • It is convenient in the sense that you can access data 24 Hrs.
  • It is cheap, i.e., the operational cost that one may incur is low.
  • It has brought in the technology of doing the following; E-learning, E-Agriculture, E-commerce, E-governance, etc.
  • Provides up-to-date information.
  • It doesn’t require a lot of training to browse.
  • It provides entertainment facilities.
  • Can be used for research.
  • Brings harmony in the world, because people can communicate and exchange ideas.
  • The Internet can be accessed at any part of the world.
  • There is always a full backup provided by the Servers, hence no data loss.
  • It’s a fast way of communicating.
  • It provides an easy way to use offers in Information and products.

 

Internet provides information from almost all parts of the world that you need in order to make accurate and informed decisions.

You will get information you need from business to education, from sports to politics, from arts to eating out.

 

Disadvantages of Internet.

 

  • It’s a technology, which is fetched for (imposed/forced on) the Third world countries.
  • The cost of the Internet Service Provider is high.
  • It is leading to exposure of morally harmful shows such as Pornography.
  • It leads to spread of viruses.
  • Has proved to be unreliable especially accessing information.
  • No copyright rules meant to protect the property of an organization.

 

ELECTRONIC MAIL (E-MAIL).

 

About e-mail.

 

Electronic mail (also known as e-mail) is one of the common services provided by the Internet.

 

  • E-Mail is a worldwide system for sending & receiving electronic messages from one computer to another.

 

  • E-Mail (Electronic mail) refers to electronic messages sent over the Internet or a network. E-mail can contain both text & files.

 

With e-mail, users can create and send messages to one user, several users, or all the users on a distribution list.

 

Most e-mail software enable users to send text messages. In addition, users can attach files from Word processors, Spreadsheets, Reports, production data, etc, and then send them by e-mail.

 

Most E-mail packages allow you to do the same things you do with regular paper mail.  You can file messages in electronic file cabinets, forward copies of messages to other users, send “carbon copies” of messages, and so on.  The E-mail packages also allow you to filter or organize messages by priority.  E.g., all messages from a particular user (e.g., your boss) could be given top priority, so that they always appear at the top of your list of messages.

 

However, E-mail is a much faster, economical & convenient way of sending messages to family, friends and colleagues than the paper mail (usually called “Snail mail”).  Messages can be sent or received 24-hrs a day.  With “Snail mail” a message or a letter is sent to the recipient through the Post office and takes days or weeks before reaching the destination.

 

Components required.

 

For one to be able to communicate using e-mail, the following components are needed:

 

  • A Computer – where you will send or receive the e-mail messages.
  • An E-mail program.

 

Your computer must be installed with an e-mail program that lets you send, receive and manage your e-mail messages.

 

Examples of E-mail programs;

 

  • Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express, & Microsoft Exchange from Microsoft.
  • Communicator from Netscape.
  • Lotus Notes.

 

  • E-mail address of the sender & the address of the receiver.

 

 

  • An Internet Service Provider (ISP) – company who will deliver your message to the receiver.

 

Once you send a letter or a message, it travels from your computer through a Modem, which connects your computer to the Internet using the Telephone network.  The Mail passes through various computers, until it reaches the final destination.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

How E-mail Works.

 

The figure below shows how an e-mail message can travel over a Wide Area Network (WAN) such as the Internet.

 

 

Each Client computer in the Local Area Network (LAN) runs an e-mail software package called User Agent, e.g., Eudora, Lotus Notes, Outlook Express, Microsoft Outlook, etc.

 

The user writes the e-mail messages using one of the User Agents, which formats the message into 2 parts;

 

  • The Header, which lists the source and destination e-mail addresses.
  • The Body, which is the message itself.

 

The User agent sends the message header & body to a Mail Server that runs a special application package called a Message Mail Transfer Agent.  The Message Mail Transfer Agent in the Mail Server reads the envelope & then sends the message through the network (possibly through dozens of Message Transfer Agents) until the message arrives at the Mail Server of the receiver.

The Message Transfer Agent on this server then stores the message in the receiver’s mailbox on the server.

 

When the receiver accesses his/her e-mail, the User Agent on the receiver’s Client computer contacts the Message Transfer Agent on the Mail Server, and asks for the contents of the user’s mailbox.  The Message Transfer Agent sends the e-mail message to the client computer, which the user reads using the user agent.

 

E-MAIL STANDARDS.

 

Several standards have been developed to ensure the compatibility between different e-mail software packages.

 

The 3 commonly used standards are:

 

  • Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).
  • X-400.
  • Common Messaging Calls (CMC).

 

All the 3 e-mail standards work in the same basic fashion.

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP).

 

SMTP is the most commonly e-mail standard used on the Internet.

 

SMTP defines how Message Transfer Agents operate and how they format messages sent to them.  As the name suggests, SMTP is a simple standard that permits only the transfer of text messages.  Non-text files such as graphics or Word processing documents are not permitted.

 

However, several standards for non-text files have been developed that can operate together with SMTP.  They include; Multi-Purpose Internet Mail Extension (MIME), Unencoded & Bin Hex.

 

A different standard called Post Office Protocol (POP) defines how User agents operate and how messages to & from the Mail Transfer Agents are formatted.

 

POP is gradually being replaced by a newer standard called Internet Mail Access Protocol (IMAP).

The main difference between POP & IMAP is that, before a user can read a mail message with a POP user agent; the e-mail message must be copied to the client’s hard disk and deleted from the mail server.  With IMAP, e-mail messages can remain stored on the mail server after they have been read.  Therefore, IMAP is beneficial to users who read their e-mail from many different computers (e.g., at home, in office & in computer labs), because all e-mail is stored on the server until it is deleted.

 

X-400

 

The X-400 e-mail standard was developed in 1984.  It is a set of seven (7) standards that define how e-mail is to be processed by the User agents and the Mail Transfer Agents.

 

Common Messaging Calls (CMC).

 

The CMC standard is a simpler version of the X-400 standard.

It was developed in 1994.

It is more popular than X-400, because it is simple & it is also supported by a large no. of leading vendors/sellers.

 

File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

 

FTP enables you to send and receive files over the Internet.  FTP requires an application program on the client server and an application program on the FTP Server.  Many application packages use the FTP standard (e.g., WS-FTP).

 

Almost anyone can establish a FTP server, which permits anyone on the Internet to log in, send and receive files.

 

There are 2 types of FTP sites;

 

Closed FTP site.

 

A Closed site requires users to have permission before they can connect and gain access to the files.  Access is granted after the user provides an Account name with a secret password.

For example, a Network Manager would write a Web page using software on his/her client computer and their user FTP to send it to a specific account on the Web Server.

 

Anonymous FTP site.

 

Anonymous is the most common type of an FTP site.

It permits any Internet user to log in using the account of anonymous.

 

When using the anonymous FTP, you will still be asked for a password.  You can enter your Internet e-mail address as the password.

 

Many files and documents available via FTP have been compressed to reduce the amount of disk space they require.

Note.  If a file that you want has been compressed by a compression program that is not in your computer, you cannot access the file until you get the decompression program it used.

 

Using Lotus Notes.

 

One of the problems with e-mail is that, it lacks a structured way to support an ongoing discussion.  Each mail message is a separate item, unrelated to the other messages.  Usually, you can group and file e-mail messages into separate file folders, but it not possible to combine them.

 

Using Lotus Notes (a document database of text and graphics), documents with different sections can be organized into a hierarchical structure of sections, documents and folders.

 

Lotus Notes can be used as a computer Bulletin board to support ongoing discussions. Several topics and sub-topics can be created, and everyone or selected individuals in the organization can be given access.

 

Lotus Notes can also be used to organize a discussion among certain people such as a Project team working to improve manufacturing quality.  It might reduce the amount of time the team spent in face-to-face meetings, because many of the issues might be discussed before the meeting actually starts.

 

Lotus Notes also could be used to replace standard Word processors in preparing reports.  Each team member could use Lotus Notes to write a portion of report, which could then be passed to other team members for editing or comments.

 

Lotus Notes can also automate certain document-based processes (called Workflow automation).  For example, insurance claims require people from several different parts of an Insurance company to work together to process the claim.  One person might handle the initial claim, which would then be passed to an Insurance adjuster to finish a report.  Another person would process the payment.  All this paperwork could be replaced if Lotus Notes were used to prepare and pass the documents from one person to another.

 

Note. Lotus Notes has the ability to replicate.  Replication is the automatic sharing of information among servers when information changes.  E.g., Lotus Notes servers can be set to replicate information they contain within any other Lotus Notes server on the network, so that a change to a document on the server will automatically be shared with all other servers that contain the same document.

 

Setting up (adding) an E-mail or News account.

 

To set up an e-mail account, use an e-mail program such as Outlook ExpressOutlook Express is a Web browsing software that can help you exchange e-mail messages with colleagues and friends on the Internet or join newsgroups to trade/share ideas and information.

 

You will need the following information from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) or Local Area Network (LAN) administrator:

 

  • For e-mail accounts, you’ll need to know;
    • The type of Mail server you use (POP3, IMAP, or HTTP)
    • Your Account name and Password.
    • Name of the incoming mail server and,
    • If you are using POP3 or IMAP, the name of an outgoing mail server.

 

  • For a news account, you’ll need to know;
    • The name of the news server you want to connect to and, if required, your account name and password.

 

To add a mail or news account.

 

  1. On the Start menu, point to Programs, then click Outlook Express.
  2. On the Tools menu, click Accounts.
  3. In the Internet Accounts dialog box, click the Add
  4. Select either Mail or News to open the Internet Connection Wizard, and then follow the instructions to establish a connection with a mail or news server.

Tips.

  • After you set up your account, just double-click the Outlook Express icon on the desktop to begin sending and receiving e-mail.
  • You can get a free mail account from Hotmail, which uses HTTP servers.

 

E-mail addresses.

 

Each user has his own e-mail address (or mailbox) in form of computer storage space to receive messages.  The mailbox is accessed via a computer terminal within the system.  In addition, each user has a password to protect access to his/her own mailbox.

 

Messages are drawn to the user’s attention when they enter the system.

 

Components of an E-mail address.

 

An e-mail address consists of two parts separated by the @ symbol.  For example, if your e-mail address is Drg@tropicalheat.com:

 

  • The 1st part of the address to the left side of the @ symbol refers to the person’s identity or login name. It is the name or identifier of the specific individual or organization, e.g., “drg”.

 

  • The 2nd part following the “@” symbol is the computer address. It is usually made up of 2 to 3 sub-parts to further identify the individual, organization, ISP or a country.  In this case:
    • “tropicalheat” identifies the business.
    • “.com” is the extension, which identifies the type of the organization.

 

The table below shows some extensions and what they represent: –

 

Extension Represents
.org A non-profit making organization
.edu An educational institution or organization
.com A commercial organization
.net Network
.mil Military
.gov government

 

Sometimes, the name of the country is included in the e-mail address.  E.g., Skynews@sky.co.uk or Nation@africaonline.co.ke.

 

In this case, “.co.uk” refers to a company in the United Kingdom, while “.co.ke” refers to a company in Kenya.

 

Examples of E-mail addresses;

 

Smith@CompuServe.com

Iat@Africaonline.co.ke

Were@Egerton.edu

Manager@Kenyapower.org

Bridge@arcc.or.ke

Tim@Yahoo.com                    (free e-mail address)

Douglas@hotmail.com           (free e-mail address)

 

 

 

 

Exercise.

  1. (a). What is E-mail?

(b). Give TWO examples of e-mail software.

(c). Give an example of an e-mail address.

  1. Identify institutions whose e-mail addresses end with the following extensions:
    • .org ______________________________________________________
    • .gov ______________________________________________________
    • .edu ______________________________________________________
    • .com______________________________________________________
    • .net ______________________________________________________
    • .mil ______________________________________________________
  2. Identify the parts of the following e-mail address:

 

iat@africaonline.co.ke

 

 

 

 

 

 

A         B           C    D

 

A _________________________________________________________________

B _________________________________________________________________

C _________________________________________________________________

D _________________________________________________________________

 

Reading E-mail Messages.

 

Purpose.

 

  • Once an e-mail message that has been sent to you arrives at your computer, to read the contents you must open it using the program you have installed for sending e-mail, e.g., Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express.

 

  1. Open the e-mail program, e.g., Outlook Express from the Start menu or a shortcut on the desktop.

 

The Choose Profile dialog box appears to allow you to select your profile.

 

Note.  A User Profile is a group of settings that define how the e-mail program is set up for a particular user.  It also defines through the information services how a user can send, store, and receive messages.

 

  1. Select your profile by clicking the down arrow on the Profile Name box, and then click OK.

 

Usually, all incoming messages are stored in the Inbox when you connect to Outlook Express.  The Inbox displays all the e-mail messages that you have received.

 

  1. To open and read e-mail messages, click the Inbox icon either on the Outlook bar or on the Folders list, and then choose the message that you want to read.
  • To view the message in the preview pane, click the message in the message list.
  • To open the message in a separate window, double-click the message in the message list.

 

The lower grid of your screen will have the full message.

 

  1. When you have finished reading a message, you can close the window. Choose Exit on the File  This will take you back to the Outlook Express window.  If there are any e-mails in the Outlook that have not been sent, a message will appear prompting you to send the e-mail(s) at that particular time or you can send it later.

 

Tips

  • After Outlook Express downloads your messages, you can click the Send/Recv button on the toolbar, to read messages either in a separate window or in the preview pane.

 

  • To view all the information about a message, such as when it was sent, click the File menu, and then click Properties.

 

  • As you read the items in your items in your Inbox, you can reply to, forward, or file them in other folders that you create.

 

  • To save the message in your file system, click Save as and then select a format (mail, text or HTML) and location.

 

 

Reply to E-mail Messages.

 

Purpose.

 

  • If you have read a message, you may want to send a reply to the original sender.
  • If the original message that you are replying to was also copied to a no. of other people, you may want to send a reply to all of them.

 

When replying to a mail message, you can choose to reply with or without the original message insertion.  The original message, sometimes referred to as the History, appears in the body of the message, and is used for reference purposes.

 

Reply with the original message insertion.

 

  1. Open the message you want to reply.
  2. Click the Reply button in the Mail The Reply message window appears containing the message you are replying to at the bottom.
  3. Type the reply where the insertion point is.
  4. When you have finished typing and editing the reply, click the Send button (if you are online) to send the message.

 

Note.  If you click the Send button while you are offline, the mail will be placed in the Outbox folder and will automatically be sent the moment you are online.

 

Reply without the original message insertion.

 

To remove the original message, select the text, and then press the DELETE key or set options in the Options dialog box.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
  2. Click the Reading
  3. Under When replying to a message box, click the down arrow, then select Do not include original message, then click
  4. Follow the procedure used to reply a message with the original message insertion.

This time, the Reply message window will not contain the message you are replying to at the bottom.

 

Note.  After replying to an e-mail, the E-Mail icon will indicate a checkmark showing that the mail has been replied to.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Creating and sending an e-mail message.

 

Purpose.

 

  • To communicate with another user who has an e-mail address. This is cheaper than sending fax or using the telephone especially for long distance calls.
  • It is also faster to send e-mail than to post a letter.

E.g., to send a letter around the world using e-mail takes some few minutes as compared to the weeks ordinary mails take.

 

  1. Start the Microsoft Outlook
  2. On the toolbar, click the New Mail Message

The message composition window is displayed.

 

  1. In the To… and/or Cc… boxes, type the e-mail addresses of each recipient.
    • If you want to sent copies of the message to other people, type in their e-mail addresses in the Cc… box, separating the addresses with a semicolon (😉.
    • To add e-mail names from the Address Book, click the book icon in the New Message window next to To, Cc, and then select names.

 

  • You can also send a Blind Carbon Copy (Bcc). In this case, the recipients entered receive the message but their names are hidden from other recipients of the message.  To use the Bcc box, click the View menu, and then select Bcc field.
  1. In the Subject box, type a message title.
  2. In the lower grid of the message composition window, type in the message that you want to send.

You can format the e-mail message using the formatting tools like, Bold, Font size, Underline, etc.

  1. When you have finished typing the message, editing, and spell checking, click the Send button on the New Message

 

Notes.

  • To save a draft of your message to work on later, click the File menu, then click Save. You can also click Save as to save a mail message in your file system in mail (.eml), text (.txt), or HTML (.htm) format.

 

  • A message that returns to the sender because it cannot reach its destination is referred to as a Bounced message.

 

Checking the spelling in mail messages.

 

Before sending a mail message, you can spell check it to correct any spelling mistakes in the mail.

 

Outlook Express uses the spelling checker provided with Microsoft Office 97 programs, such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and Microsoft PowerPoint.

 

  1. In the New Message window, click the Spelling button on the toolbar, (or click the Tools menu, and then choose Spelling).
  2. The Spelling dialog box appears. The misspelt words are highlighted and shown in the dialog box.  Choose the correct word by selecting it, and then click the Change

If the word or phrase is correct but is not in the dictionary, click Ignore.

  1. Once spell checking of the mail is complete, and a dialog box appears, click OK.

 

 

Formatting e-mail message text.

 

To add special emphasis or structure to message text-such as bold, color, or bulleted lists, and also to add graphics and links to Web sites in your mail messages, use Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) – the standard language for formatting text for the Internet.

 

 

 

 

To use HTML formatting on all outgoing messages.

 

  • When you create messages using HTML formatting, only mail programs that support HTML can read the formatting. If the recipient’s mail or newsreading program does not read HTML, the message is displayed as plain text with an HTML file attached. The recipient can view the attached file by opening it in any Web browser.

 

To send the message in HTML formatting;

 

  1. In the main window, click the Tools menu, click Options, then click the Send
  2. In the Mail Sending Format or News Sending Format sections, click HTML.

 

To use HTML formatting on an individual message.

 

In an e-mail message window, make sure HTML formatting is turned on, i.e., Click the Format menu, then choose Rich Text (HTML). A black dot appears by the command when it is selected.

 

To change the font, style, and size of text.

 

You can change the way the text looks for all your messages or you can make changes to selected text within a message.

 

To change the text style for all messages.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click
  2. Click the Compose tab, then click the Font Settings

 

To format text within individual messages.

 

  1. Select the text you want to format. To change the font for an entire message, click the Edit menu, then click Select All.
  2. On the Formatting toolbar, click the buttons for the options you want.

 

To format a paragraph.

 

  1. Click anywhere in the paragraph, or select the text you want to format.
  2. Use either the Formatting toolbar or the commands on the Format menu to change the text.

 

To                                                                               Do this

 

Change the indentation of a paragraph                       Click the Increase Indent or Decrease Indent button on the Formatting toolbar.

 

Add a horizontal line                                                  Click where you want the line to appear, and then click the Insert Horizontal line button on the Formatting toolbar.

 

Format text written in Rich Text (HTML) mode       Click the Format menu, point to Style, and then choose an option.

 

To create a numbered or bulleted list.

 

  1. In your message, click where you want the list to start.
  2. On the Format menu, point to Style, then click either Numbered List or Bulleted List.
  3. Type the first item in the list. When you press ENTER, another list entry is started on the next line.

To end the list, press ENTER twice.

 

Inserting items in a message.

 

To insert a Business card in all messages.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Options, then select the Compose
  2. In the Business Cards section, select the Mail or News check box, and then select a business card from the drop-down list.

 

Notes.

 

  • To change information in a business card, click the Edit

 

  • To add a business card or signature to an individual message, in a message window, click the Insert menu, then click either Signature or My Business Card.

 

To include a sound in a message.

 

  1. Click anywhere in the message window.
  2. On the Format menu, point to Background, and then click Sound.
  3. Enter the name of the file you want to include and the number of times you want the file to play.

 

To insert a picture in a message.

 

  1. In the message, click where you want the image to appear.
  2. On the Insert menu, click Picture, then click Browse to find the image file.
  3. Enter Layout and Spacing information for the image file as needed.

Notes.

 

  • If message recipients are not able to view your inserted images, click the Tools menu, and then click Options. Click the Send tab, click HTML Settings, and then make sure that Send pictures with messages is selected. Then resend your message.

 

  • To insert a background picture in your message, in the message window, click the Format menu, point to Background, then click Picture. Click the Browse button to search for the file you want to use.

 

Attaching files to e-mail messages.

 

Purpose.

 

  • You can attach a copy of any type of file such as a document, spreadsheet, graphic image or a presentation to your e-mail messages.

 

  1. Click the New Message
  2. In the Message Composition dialog box, enter the e-mail address and type in the message to be sent.
  3. Click where you want the file attachment to appear, then click the Insert File button to display the Insert File dialog box.
  4. Locate the folder that contains the file you want to attach, and then click the file.

To select multiple files, hold down the CTRL as you click each of the files.

  1. Click the OK

The attached file is displayed as an icon in the body of the message.  The icon indicates the file type and name.  e.g., Sales Results.xls

  1. Click the Send

 

To open or view the attached file.

 

Documents that contain file attachments display a paper clip image in the view or folder next to the document file.

Once the document is open, Microsoft Outlook displays an icon representing the attachment.

 

Note. You must have the application in which the attachment was composed in order to open it.  The MIME (Multi-purpose Internet Mail Extension) type of file enables Internet browsers to access an Internet mail file without prompting the user to specify the program used to create the attached file.

 

  1. In the Inbox, select the e-mail message that contains the attachment.
  2. Double-click the e-mail message to open it.
  3. Double-click the icon that represents the attachment.

 

 

Deleting an attachment.

 

  1. Open the e-mail message that contains the attachment.
  2. To delete the attached file, click the file icon, then press the Delete

 

Organizing E-mail messages.

 

Purpose.

 

  • You can use Outlook Express to organize your incoming messages and make it easy to send mails.

 

To use your online time efficiently, use Outlook Express to find messages, automatically sort incoming messages into different folders, keep messages on a mail server, or delete them entirely.

 

Organizing the Inbox.

 

You can organize the messages in your Inbox quickly by sorting them.

 

To quickly sort messages by Subject, Sender or the Date received, click on the respective column header.  E.g., to sort your messages in alphabetical order by sender, click on From in the column header.

 

To create a Mail folder.

 

  1. On the File menu, click New, then choose Folder.
  2. Enter the name of the folder in the Name box, e.g., My Own.
  3. Select the Inbox folder so that the mail folder created will become a subfolder of the Inbox.
  4. You can add details, such as a description of the folder in the Description box, then click OK.

 

To move or copy a message to another folder.

 

  1. In the message list, select the message (s) you want to move or copy.
  2. On the Edit menu, click Move to Folder or Copy to Folder, then select the folder you want to move or copy the message to.

 

To delete a mail message.

 

  1. In the message list, select the message.
  2. On the toolbar, click the Delete button (or press the Delete key).

 

Notes.

 

  • To restore a deleted message, open the Deleted Items folder, and then drag the message back to the Inbox or other folder.

 

  • If you don’t want messages to be saved in the Deleted Items folder when you quit Outlook Express,
    1. Click the Tools menu, then click Options.
    2. On the Maintenance tab, select the checkbox labeled Empty messages from the ‘Deleted Items’ folder on exit.

 

  • To manually empty all deleted items,

 

  1. Select the Deleted Items
  2. On the Edit menu, click Empty Deleted Items Folder.

 

Sending a Web page by e-mail.

 

Purpose.

 

  • You may find some interesting and useful material on the Internet that you would like to share with friends and colleagues.

 

You can send Web pages by e-mail to other people even if the recipients are not connected to the Internet.

 

  1. Access the Web page you want to send.
  2. Click the File menu, point to Send, then click Page By E-mail or Link By E-mail.
  3. If necessary, choose the correct profile to use from the Profile dialog box, i.e., Outlook Express, and click OK.
  4. In the Message dialog box, enter the address of the recipient, then click the Send

 

Note. You must have an e-mail account and an e-mail program set up on your computer.

 

Blocking Unwanted messages.

 

You can control the mail and news messages you get in Outlook Express . You can block certain people from sending you mail, you can hide conversations that don’t interest you, and you can guard against being sent damaging code in mail by setting security levels.

 

To block messages from a sender or domain.

 

You can block messages from a particular sender or domain.

 

  • The Domain is the name following the @ symbol in an e-mail address.

 

  • Domain – A group of networked computers that share information & resources.

 

When you block a sender or domain, no e-mail or news message from that sender or domain will arrive in your Inbox or in the news messages you read.

E-mail from blocked senders goes directly into your Delete folder while Newsgroup messages from blocked senders are not displayed.

  1. From your e-mail Inbox or the list of messages in a newsgroup, select a message from a sender you want to block.
  2. On the Message menu, click Block Sender.

The e-mail address of the sender will appear in the Address box. You can type a different address or domain in the Address box if you wish.

  1. Select the blocking option you want: mail, news, or both kinds of messages.

 

Important.  Blocking a sender applies to standard POP mail only. It does not apply to HTTP mail (Hotmail) or IMAP messages

 

Differences between E-mail and General Post office mail.

 

  • E-mail is computerized, while Post office mail is manually operated.
  • Post office mail is slow, while E-mail is fast & has a wide area of coverage.
  • E-mail is more secure.

 

Advantages of E-mail.

 

Electronic mail has several advantages over regular mail.

 

  • It is cheap & economical.

It costs almost nothing to transmit an e-mail message over the network, i.e., there is no need for stamps, envelopes, etc.

  • It is secure, i.e., access to a user’s mailbox can be restricted by use of a password.
  • It is faster, i.e., mails can be sent instantly.

The delivery of an e-mail message normally takes seconds or minutes, depending on the distance to the receiver.

  • It is efficient, i.e., a message prepared only once can be sent to several people.
  • It is convenient.

With E-mail, you can send your messages when it is convenient for you and your recipients respond at their convenient times.

 

  • E-mail is cheaper in terms of the time invested in preparing the message.

 

The expectations and culture of sending & receiving e-mail are different from that of sending regular letters.  Regular business letters & inter-office memos are expected to be error-free and formatted according to certain standards.  In contrast, most e-mail users accept less well-formatted messages and slight typographical errors are overlooked. So, less time is spent perfecting the appearance of the message.

 

  • E-mail can act as a substitute for the Telephone calls, thus allowing the user to avoid telephone tag (i.e., the process of repeatedly exchanging voice mail messages because you or the other person may not be available when the other calls).

E-mail can often communicate enough of a message so that the entire “conversation” will take less time than a phone call.

 

E-mail is particularly effective for multinational organizations, which have people working in different time zones around the world.

 

Disadvantages of E-mail.

 

  • The initial installation cost is higher.
  • Messages may be lost before they are read due to virus infections.
  • Messages may not be kept for future reference due to the high cost of storage, i.e., it requires regular deletion of messages from the hard disk.

 

Exercise.

 

  1. How does one send an e-mail message?
  2. What is the advantage of filing e-mail messages when you can leave them in the Inbox and still have them for future reference?
  3. List THREE levels of importance one can set on an e-mail message.
  4. Lucille has received an e-mail message that contains an attachment. Can she use any application to open the attached file? Explain.
  5. What are the advantages of e-mail over the ordinary post office mail.
  6. Give THREE differences between electronic mail and the Post office mail?

 

 

Using the Address Book.

 

Purpose.

 

  • The Address Book is a directory of personal details, including e-mail addresses, for the people to whom you send messages (called Contacts).

 

It is used to store/keep track of e-mail addresses, mailing addresses, phone numbers, and other information about your friends and also provides space for notes.

 

You can store such addresses in the Address Book so as to address mails more easily, i.e., each time you want to send e-mail messages, you simply select the names from the list of addresses.

This will save the time used to enter lists of e-mail addresses as well as help maintain their accuracy.  E.g., an e-mail address like Njiiri.mworia@mit.edu.uk can be difficult to remember.  In addition, one can easily make a typing error when typing the address.

 

The Address Book is accessible from Internet Explorer, Outlook Express and NetMeeting, thus enabling you to keep one list of addresses that are accessible by various programs.

 

To add a contact to the Address Book.

 

  1. To open the Address Book, click the Address Book

There can be several types of address books in the Address Book dialog box including the Global Address list and Personal Address Book.

  1. In the Show names from the box, select the type of address book you want to use.

 

The Global Address list is the address book that contains all e-mail addresses for users, groups, and distribution lists in your organization that you can address messages to.  The Administrator creates and maintains this address book.

 

The Personal Address Book is the address book used to store personal distribution lists you frequently address messages to, such as a list of your friends.

 

  1. Click the New Entry
  2. Specify the entry type of the contact, i.e., whether it is an Internet address or an entry for a distribution list.
  3. Type in the display name for the address as well as the full e-mail address.
  4. Complete the dialog box with the rest of the contact details using the other tabs, e.g., Business or Phone Numbers, then click OK.

The contact address is added to the Address Book.

 

To edit a contact in the Address Book.

 

  1. Open the Address Book.
  2. Select the contact that you want to edit.
  3. On the File menu, click Properties.
  4. Make the necessary changes to the information, then click OK.

 

To create a contact from a mail message.

 

When you receive a mail message, you can add the sender’s details (name and e-mail address) to your Address Book.

 

  1. From the Inbox, right-click a message.
  2. Select Add sender to Address Book, from the shortcut menu that appears.

 

To delete a contact from the Address Book.

 

  1. Open the Address Book.
  2. Select the address that you want to remove from the Address book.
  3. Click the Delete button (or press the Delete key).
  4. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the name or entry.

 

To create a distribution list.

 

If you send mails to the same group of people frequently, you can create a group address list.  Group address lists are known as Distribution lists.

 

When you address a message to that group, each individual in the group receives it.

 

Note.  You must have a Personal Address Book set up in order to be able to create a personal distribution list.

 

  1. Open the Address Book.
  2. Click the New Entry
  3. In the Select the entry type box, click Personal Distribution List, and then click OK.
  4. In the Name box, type a name for the group, e.g. Sales Dept., then click the Add/Remove Members
  5. To add members to the group, select a contact or name from the left hand list box, then click the Members button (or double-click on a name) to move the name to the right list box.

The contact is copied to the Personal Distribution List box.

  1. Repeat step 5 until you have all the names you want in your group in the Personal Distribution List, then click OK.

The group or distribution list is usually listed in the Address Book.

 

To send a message using the Address Book or distribution list.

 

  1. In the Microsoft Outlook window, click File then select the New Mail Message.
  2. Click the To… button to open the Address Book.
  3. Select the contact names from the list or select the distribution list, then click on To ->.

 

Note. To see the full e-mail addresses, select the name of the person from the lists and click on Properties button.

 

  1. Click OK to return to the message composition dialog box.
  2. Type out the rest of the message and click on Send.

 

Exercise.

 

  1. What are the advantages of using the Address Book as opposed to typing e-mail addresses each time you send e-mail?

 

READING MAIL MESSAGES OFFLINE.

 

Once you have opened the E-mail program, it is not necessary for you to be connected directly so that you can read & write your e-mail messages.  You may choose to work offline to save on costs.

 

When you are offline, Outlook Express downloads mail messages to your local computer. When you connect (or choose to work online) again, messages in your Outbox are sent, messages you marked for deletion are removed, and all other actions taken offline are completed at once.

 

There are 2 situations where it is beneficial to use Outlook Express offline:

 

  • If your ISP charges you by the hour or if you have only one phone line. Under these conditions, you might want to reduce time spent online.

 

  • If you use a Laptop to read your messages while you are traveling or any other time you are not connected to the Internet.

 

To set up Outlook Express to reduce online time.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click Options.
  2. On the Connection tab, select Hang up after sending and receiving.

If you connect to an IMAP or HTTP server, click the server name in the folder list, and then make sure that the items you want to view offline are checked.

 

This procedure can be used to set up Outlook Express so that it automatically disconnects after you select Send and Receive from the Tools menu.

You can then read and compose messages offline without incurring charges or tying up a phone line.

 

Note.  To reconnect to send or receive messages, click the Tools menu, point to Send and Receive, and then select the option you want.

 

To read messages while you are away from your Internet connection.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, select Options, then click the General
  2. Under the field labeled If my computer is not connected at this time, select Connect only when not working offline.

If you connect to an IMAP or http server, click the server name in the folder list, make sure

that the items you want to view offline are checked, and then click Sync Account.

 

  1. On the File menu, click Work Offline.

 

Note.  To check the type of account you have, click the Tools menu, and then click Accounts. Select your e-mail account and then click Properties. The account type is listed on the Advanced tab.

 

Viewing and posting to Newsgroups.

 

What are newsgroups?

 

A Newsgroup is a collection of messages posted by individuals to a News server (a computer that can host thousands of newsgroups).

 

Some newsgroups are “owned” by someone who reviews the postings, can answer questions, delete inappropriate messages, etc.

Anyone can post messages to a newsgroup. This is because, Newsgroups do not require any kind of membership or joining fees.

 

To use newsgroups in Outlook Express, your Internet Service Provider must offer links to a news server. After you set up an account for the server you want in Outlook Express, you can read and post messages in any of the newsgroups stored on that news server.

 

 

To switch between mail and news reading.

 

  • In the Folders list, click Inbox to go to your e-mail, or click a news server name or specific newsgroup to visit newsgroups.

 

To find newsgroups of interest.

 

  1. In the Folders list, click a server name, then click the Newsgroups
  2. In the Display newsgroups which contain box, type the words you want to search for.

 

 

To subscribe to a newsgroup.

 

Subscribing ensures that the newsgroup is included in your Folders list for easy access.

 

You can subscribe to a newsgroup in any of the following ways:

 

 

  • When adding a news server, Outlook Express prompts you to subscribe to newsgroups on that server.

 

  • Click a news server name in your Folders list, and then click the Newsgroups Select the newsgroup that you want to subscribe to, and then click the Subscribe button.

 

Note: When you double-click a name in the Newsgroup list, a subscription is automatically generated.

 

 

  • When you click a newsgroup, its name appears in your Folders list. Right-click the name, and then click Subscribe.

Tips.  To cancel your subscription to a newsgroup,

  1. Click the Newsgroups button, click the Subscribed tab, select the group you want, and then click the Unsubscribe

Or

Right-click the newsgroup in your Folders list, then click Unsubscribe.

 

To view a newsgroup without subscribing to it.

 

To find out if a specific newsgroup is right for you, read some of the messages in it.

 

  1. From the Tools menu, select Newsgroups to open the Newsgroup Subscriptions dialog box.
  2. Select the news server you want in the Accounts All of the newsgroups on that server appear on the All tab.
  3. Select the newsgroup you want to view, and then click Go To.

 

Note.  The first time you view a newsgroup, it may take several minutes to download the messages. The next time you go to that newsgroup, it downloads faster, because Outlook Express downloads only new messages.

 

To read newsgroup messages.

 

Go to a newsgroup and look through the message list for a message you want to read (you may need to scroll).

 

  • To view the message in the preview pane, click the message once.

 

  • To view the message in a separate window, double-click the message in the message list.

 

To read and send international messages.

 

Outlook Express can usually display messages in the language in which they were sent. However, some messages, particularly those from newsgroups, often do not have enough information (or the information is incorrect) in the header file to display the correct language.

 

To change the language encoding for a message you are reading.

 

  • In the message window, click the View menu, point to Encoding, and then click the language encoding you want to use.

 

To set the default encoding for reading messages.

 

  1. On the Tools menu, click On the Read tab, click Fonts.
  2. Select a language at the top, and then click the Set as Default

 

Posting messages to newsgroups.

 

There are several ways that you can post messages, depending on whether you are posting a new message or replying to one and how widely you want it distributed.

 

  1. In the Folders list, select the newsgroup you want to post a message to.
  2. On the toolbar, click the New Post

 

Note. To send your message to multiple newsgroups on the same news server, click the icon next to Newsgroups in the New Message dialog box. In the Pick Newsgroups dialog box, hold down the CTRL key to select multiple newsgroups, and then click Add.

  1. Type the Subject of your message. Outlook Express cannot post a message that does not contain a subject.
  2. Compose your message, and then click the Send

 

To reply to a newsgroup message.

 

  1. In the message list, click the message you want to reply to.
  2. To reply to the author of the message by e-mail, click the Reply button on the toolbar.

To reply to the whole newsgroup, click the Reply Group button on the toolbar.

 

  1. Type your message, and then click Send.

 

Note.  To view information about a newsgroup message, such as when it was sent, select the message, click the File menu, and then click Properties.

 

To prevent newsgroup messages from automatically downloading.

 

On the Tools menu, click Options.

On the Read tab, clear the following check box: Automatically download messages when viewing in the Preview Pane.

 

To view newsgroups efficiently.

 

View only unread news messages in a newsgroup.

 

  1. Open the newsgroup, click the View menu, point to Current View, and then click Hide Read Messages.

 

View the replies to a particular message in a newsgroup.

 

  1. Click the plus sign ( + ) next to the message. The replies to that message appear below it. A message with its replies is called a “conversation.”

 

To watch a conversation.

 

In both mail and news, you can watch a conversation that is of particular interest you. A conversation is an original message and all its replies.

  1. In your Inbox or newsgroup message list, select the conversation you wish to watch.
  2. On the Message menu, click Watch Conversation.

If your message list’s Watch/Ignore column is turned on, the watch icon will appear next to all the messages of a watched conversation.

 

READING NEWSGROUP MESSAGES OFFLINE.

 

Offline newsreading enables you to read newsgroup messages without being connected to the Internet, saving connection costs.

 

To do this,  you must subscribe to the newsgroup whose messages you want to read offline, mark it to specify whether you want to see headers or whole messages, and then transfer them to your computer (synchronize). Once this is done, you can log off from the Internet and then read the messages at your leisure.

 

Reading message headers only, gives you the subject, author, and size of the message.

 

To set up newsgroups for offline news reading.

 

For newsgroups you subscribe to, you can set up Outlook Express to make messages or headers available offline by synchronizing. This enables you to read them at your leisure when you are not connected to the Internet.

 

  1. From the Folders list, select a news server.
  2. In the main window, select one or more newsgroups you subscribe to whose messages you want to read offline. (To select multiple newsgroups, hold down the CTRL key while you click the newsgroups.)
  3. Click the Settings button, and then click to mark what you want transferred from the server to your computer during synchronization:
    • All Messages,
    • New Messages Only (new to the server since you last synchronized), or
    • Headers Only (subject, author, date, and size of message).
  4. Click the Sync Account

 

Exercise.

 

  1. (a). When can you work offline?

(b). Why should you work offline?

 

Methods of Accessing Computer and Locating Files.

 

  • Gopher:

 

This is a client/server tool that enables the user to locate almost all textual information stored on Internet servers through a series of easy-to-use or understand, hierarchical menus that provide point-and-click interfaces.

 

The Internet has thousands of Gopher server sites throughout the world.  Each gopher site contains its own system of menus listing related topics, local files, and other relevant gopher sites.

To search for a specific topic or select a related item from a menu, activate the gopher software.  The server will automatically transfer you to the appropriate file on that server or the selected server wherever it is located in the world.  Once on the distant server, you are presented with more menus of files and Internet addresses of other gopher site servers that might interest you.  You can then move from site to site locating information that you want anywhere in the world.  After finding the information or files you want, you are free to browse, read them online, or download them onto your own computer for searching for text that appears in gopher menus.

 

  • Archie:

 

This is a tool for locating data on the Internet that performs keyword searches of an actual database of documents, software, and data files available for downloading from servers around the world.

 

An individual Archie database can list only a small percentage of the files in the world.  However, clicking on the relevant listing from one Archie server will bring you to another computer system where relevant files are stored.  While on the other computer, the Archie server may provide other relevant references, allowing you to continue your search for related files, moving from database to database, library to library, until you locate what you need.

 

Archie database searching uses the subject keywords entered such as “telecommuting” or “inflation” to display a list of sites that contain files on that topic.  Once you find the files you want, you may use a file transfer program to download them.

 

  • WAIS (Wide Area Information Servers):

 

This is a tool for locating data on the Internet that require the name of the databases to be searched based on keywords.

Once you specify specific database names and key identifying words, WAIS searches for the keywords in all the files in those databases.  When the search is completed, you are given a menu listing all the files that contain your keywords.

 

  • The Word Video Web:

 

The Web is another information retrieval tool similar to gophers, Archie, and WAIS.  It is widely used for commercial purposes on the Net due to the fact that, it is attractive, easy to use, and helpful in publishing or providing information to anyone interested.

 

  • Home Page:

 

Anyone willing to offer information through the Web must first establish a Home Page (a WWW text & graphical display that welcomes the user and explains the organization that has established the page).  The Home page will lead the user to other pages.

All the pages of an organization are known as a Website.

 

Home pages combine text, hypermedia, graphics and sound, unlike the other methods of locating information on the Net, which are text-based.  This means that, home pages can handle all types of communication, while making it easy to link resources that are far apart.

 

Graphics allow organizations to communicate more effectively, making their own material more appealing to the eye, more informative, and easy to understand.

 

Hypermedia provides a point-and-click connection to related information within the same document, between documents on the same computer, or to documents located on another computer anywhere in the world (as long as the computer is connected to the Net, and the hypermedia connection has been programmed in).

 

Sound allows some of the Web displays to talk or play music.

 

Note.  The specific hypermedia technology used in the Web is known as Hyperlinks.

Within any web document, there are certain words or graphics that are highlighted (usually appear bold, in a different colour, underlined, or a combination of these).  The highlighted objects have hyperlinks embedded within them that contain the path to another location within the same document, a document on the same computer, or a document on another computer.

Hyperlinks allow the user to move with ease within complex documents or across the network.  If the reader of the document wants more information on the highlighted word, he/she double-clicks the word, and quickly that other information will be displayed, even if it is stored in another part of the world.

 

Advantages of Hyperlinks.

 

  • It is easy to use.
  • The user is free to jump from place to place following his/her own logic and interest, and does not have to move according to a static, pre-programmed, linear sequence.

The user moves around almost as easily as a book reader might follow keywords and jump around an encyclopedia.

 

To navigate the Web requires a graphics Computer to link to the Internet.  The user must also have a special software tool to navigate the Web known as Web Browser.

 

 

BENEFITS FROM THE USE OF THE INTERNET.

 

  • Reduces the Cost of Communication.

 

Before the Internet, organizations had to build their own Wide Area Networks or subscribe to Value-Added Network (VAN) service.

Many organizations find the Internet more cost-effective than building their own networks or paying VAN subscription fees.  Organizations use the Internet to fulfill a wide range of communication needs.  This lowers other communication costs, including their network management expenses, telephone and Fax costs.

Reduced communication costs are beneficial particularly to small businesses because it sometimes enables them to compete with larger companies in the markets that would otherwise be closed to them.

 

  • Enhances Communication & Co-ordination.

 

Global companies use the Internet as an important instrument for coordinating their activities.  Such companies have set up internal Web sites to keep employees informed about company developments.  Through the Web, employees are able to see a company Calendar, the employee Policy manual, product Brochures, interactive Training tools, and even stock quotes.

 

The Internet has made it easier and less expensive for companies to co-ordinate small staffs when opening new markets or working in isolated places, because they do not have to build their own networks.

 

  • Accelerates the Distribution of Knowledge.

 

To speed product development and also to react to an emerging problem, information gathering must be quick and easy.

 

The Internet is very useful in the modern society, which is increasingly dependent on knowledge.  Organizations are using E-mail and the availability of databases all over the world to gain access to information in such areas as Business, Science, Law, and Government.  The Internet can quickly link a computer user sitting at a computer screen to mountains of data (including Graphics) all over the world, which would otherwise be too expensive and too difficult to get.

 

  • Improves Customer service and satisfaction.

 

Organizations can also use the Internet to communicate efficiently to make product information, ordering and technical support easier and immediately available.

A company can establish a Website on the Internet in order to distribute useful product information to its customers and product users.  It can also use the Internet to give engineering support to its customers without the involvement of engineering staff.

 

  • Facilitates Sales and Marketing.

 

The Internet provides opportunities for firms to market and sell their products in a way that does not offend others.  This is because, the Internet is a passive instrument, i.e., it requires potential customers to seek out offerings by companies rather than having those companies actively reach out to potential customers, as is the case in most marketing and advertising.

 

Retailers update their Web page offerings frequently as required.  Suppliers can also update technical materials used by customers easily.  Therefore, the Internet assist buyers and sellers make contacts.

Firms use their Websites to distribute more marketing information.  A firm can include its Web address in product advertisements and design their site for visitors to browse information on pricing, press releases on new products, technical manuals and sales brochures.

 

PROBLEMS FACING THE INTERNET.

 

  • Lack of Security.

 

Lack of security is one of the reasons why the Internet, while being widely used to facilitate transactions, is still in limited use to carry out transactions.

When large amounts of data are stored in electronic form, they are exposed to more kinds of threats/dangers than when they exist in manual form.

 

Through data communication networks, information systems in different locations on the Internet are interconnected.  The potential for unauthorized access, abuse or fraud is not limited to a single location but can occur at any access point in the Internet.

 

Internet Hackers have found ways of stealing passwords as they pass through one site and use them to break into computer system at other sites all over the world.

 

The hackers can get access to company’s strategic business plans, profit reports, product development information, pricing data, marketing plans, sales contracts, and scientific research data.  Such information is too sensitive and companies are unwilling to have it accessed by unauthorized people.

 

  • Technology Problems.

 

  • The Internet lacks standards for accessing the net and sending e-mails. A no. of incompatible ways for accessing the net exist, allowing specific users to perform certain functions but not others.

 

  • The lack of standards also affects the ability of organizations to establish a stable link to the Internet. As the traffic on the Internet becomes more complex, it can bring problems if it does not have good technical support.

 

  • Many people and organizations are sending so much data through the Net, much of it in graphics form, such that telecommunication links are already overloaded. Frequent users are unable to access the net, while those who use the graphics-based Web regularly find connecting to the intended Server very slow or even almost impossible during busy times.

 

  • Moreover, the growing need for bandwidth due to graphics will only expand as the transmission of sound and full-motion video expands. All this is raising the cost of using the Net.  Some firms are already discovering that they need more expensive telecommunications connections, Workstations or higher speed computers with improved graphics capability, and even Information system specialists with skills related specifically to the Internet.

 

  • Individuals and organizations in less developed countries with poor Telephone lines, limited hardware and software capacity or Government controls on communication will not be able to take full advantage of Internet resources.

 

  • Due to the fact that there is no a comprehensive method of locating and keeping track of pages in the World Wide Web (www), Internet users often spend a lot of time in futile (unsuccessful) searches, despite the many new tools and planned indexes to the Web. There is no good technology enough to filter/sort out irrelevant information while allowing people to access the specific information they need.

 

  • Legal Issues.

 

Until a greater clarity on several legal issues is obtained, doing business on the Internet will become unreliable.

 

Laws governing E-commerce are mostly non-existing or are just being written.

There are several open questions that still exist such as, the legality of E-mail contracts, the role of electronic signatures, and the application of copyright laws to electronically copied documents.

 

  • Anti-Commercial culture.

 

Initially, the Internet was a scientific and academic tool.  As it grew, a strong anti-commercial culture grew with it.

Internet users have shown themselves unwilling to accept the Internet mail.  Many commercial users also fear that allowing commercial organizations to add very many unasked for marketing messages will make the Internet E-mail difficult to manage.

Thus, while businesses remain free to use the Internet for E-mail, research, and other forms of information exchange, they will have to learn new ways to do their marketing on the Internet; ways that do not offend the other users.

 

Exercise I.

 

  1. State the various methods of accessing computer and locating files.
  2. Describe the main benefits from the use of the Internet.
  3. Give a brief view of the main problems of the Internet.

 

Exercise II.

 

  1. Briefly describe four advantages of using Internet to disseminate information compared to other conventional methods. (8 marks).
  2. One of the problems of using Internet for business is insecurity. What are some of the other problems and what controls should be put in place in order to solve the problems?. (4 marks).
  3. Your manager wishes to be connected to the Internet. He already has a powerful Personal Computer (PC), a Printer and access to a Telephone line.  However, he understands that he will need a Modem.

 

Required:

  • State why a Modem is required to connect him to the Internet. (2 marks).
  • Suggest any four application areas in which you would expect a Supermarket retail manager to use the Internet. (4 marks).

DESK TOP PUBLISHERS, DTP, TEACHER NOTES FREE PDF

Terminologies used in DTP.

  • Ranner – the main headline across the top of the page.
  • Cross head – a small heading used to break up text into easily readable sections.
  • Bullet – solid dot printed before pieces of text in order to add an emphasis.
  • Cast off – a calculation as to how much space the text will use on a page.
  • Footer – a line of text at the bottom of each page giving the publications title, author’s name, etc.
  • Masthead – details of the person involved in printing the publication.
  • WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) – this means that, the presentation on the screen is exactly what you will get from the Printer.
  • Jigging – moving text around by means of DTP software.

Setting up a publication using master pages.

Every publication has 1 or 2 blank Master pages identified by letter ‘L’ for left and ‘R’ for right. Letters L & R mark the master page icon for facing pages, while R alone marks a single-sided publication.

These icons appear at the lower left corner of a publication window.

 

To switch to master pages, click the master page icon, then:

 

  1. Place non-printing ruler guides on the master pages.

 

Non-printing ruler guides are vertical or horizontal lines you place on the printable area.  They assist you to place text & graphics accurately & consistently throughout the publication.

 

To place ruler guides; point to the ruler, then drag the guide to the required position.

 

  1. Create basic design elements on the master pages, including the text & graphics that you want to appear on each page in your publication.

 

Creating a new master page based on a publication page.

 

  1. Switch to the publication page on which you want to base the new master.
  2. Click on Window, then choose Show Master Pages.
  3. From the Master Pages palette menu, choose Save Page As.
  4. Type a name, then click Save.

 

Objects and guides applied to the selected publication page are copied to the new master.  The new master page then becomes active and its name appears on the Master Pages palette.

  • To open the Master Pages palette menu, click the right-facing arrow at the right corner of the palette.
  1. To turn to the master applied to the current publication page, click the name of the master page.

 

 

 

 

Displaying master pages and master page items.

 

Method 1:

 

  1. Right-click the master page icon at the bottom of the publication window to display the list of masters, then select the master you want to view.

 

Method 2:

 

  1. Click on Layout, choose Go to Page, and then select the name of the master you want.

 

Adding, or modifying guides & objects on a master page.

 

You can add or manipulate text and graphics, and change guides or rulers on a master page.  When you modify a master page, the changes appear instantly on associated publication pages.

 

To modify or rename a master page:

 

  1. Display the master page you want to add or modify text, graphics, or nonprinting guides.

 

  1. To change the master’s name, page margins, or column guides;

 

  1. Press CTRL and double-click the name of the master page you want to modify or edit.
  2. Type the new name, and the new values you want for margins or columns.
  3. If you want the objects and guides (i.e., margins and columns) on the associated pages to be repositioned or resized as appropriately as those of the master you are editing, select Adjust Layout.

 

  1. Click OK.

 

Deleting a master page and all the objects on it.

 

  1. Click on Window, then choose Show Master Pages.
  2. Select the master page to delete, then click the trash button on the bottom of the palette.
  3. When prompted, click OK.

 

Setting up margin guides

 

Margin guides are very important because; they define the printable area of your publication.

 

To change margin settings;

 

  1. Click on File, then choose Document Setup.

 

  • For a double-sided document (i.e., a document that will be printed on both sides), enter the values for inside & outside margins to accommodate binding. For single-sided pages, set the Left & Right
  • Enter the values for the Top & Bottom

 

  1. Click OK.

 

Displaying and hiding rulers

 

  1. To display the rulers, click on View, then select Show rulers. To hide the rulers, click on View, then select Hide rulers

 

Setting measurement units of a ruler

 

You can set the measurement units on both the vertical and horizontal ruler.

 

  1. Right-click each ruler separately, to display a list of the available measurement systems.
  2. Select the measurement unit you want to use, e.g., millimeters, inches, etc

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

SAVING THE LAYOUT OF YOUR PUBLICATION

 

Once you set up your publication layout, it is important to save it before you start entering text and graphics.

 

To save a publication for the first time.

 

  1. Click on File, then choose Save or Save As (or press CTRL+’S’).
  2. In the Save Publication dialog box, type a name for the publication, then select a drive or folder in which to store the publication.
  3. Click Save.

 

After you name and save a publication once, the Save and Save As commands function differently:

 

To save changes made to a publication.

 

  1. Click on File, then choose Save (or click the Save button on the toolbar).

This saves the changes made to your publication with the same filename.

 

Using the ‘Save As…’ command.

 

Save As can be used if you want to:

 

  • Name and save a new publication.
  • Save a publication on a different disk drive or in a different folder.
  • Make a copy of an existing publication with a new name, leaving the original publication unchanged.

 

To save a publication with a new name or in a different location.

 

  1. Click on File, then select Save As.
  2. In the Save Publication dialog box, select the new location you want to save your publication in and/or type a new name.
  3. Under Copy, select an option.
    • No additional files – saves the current publication only.
    • Files required for remote printing – copies all the files needed to print the publication to one location.
  4. Click Save.

 

Reverting to the Last Saved version.

 

Sometimes, you may make changes to a document that make the document more confusing.  To abandon all the changes and restore the most recently saved version of your publication;

 

  1. Click on File, then select Revert.
  2. In the prompt that appears, click OK.

 

This deletes all changes made since the last time you saved the publication.

 

Closing a publication.

 

This closes the active publication and returns to the PageMaker window.

 

  1. Click on File, then choose Close.

 

If you have made any changes since you last saved the publication, PageMaker asks if you want to save those changes.  You can save the changes, or ignore them.

 

Opening an existing publication.

 

  1. Click on File, select Open (or press CTRL+’O’).
  2. In the Open Publication dialog box, select the drive or folder that contains the document.
  3. Select the filename of the publication you want to open.
  4. Choose whether to open it as Original or a Copy, then click Open.

 

 

To quickly open a recently saved publication.

 

PageMaker keeps track of the last eight publications you opened and saved.

 

  1. Click on File menu, then choose Recent Publications.
  2. Select the publication you want to open from the Recent Publications

 

Review Questions.

 

  1. Identify four common features in word processing and desktop publishing software.
  2. Differentiate between the Pasteboard and Printable page.
  3. (a). What are Master pages?

(b). Why are master pages important in a publication?

  1. What commands are used in place of portrait and landscape page orientation in PageMaker?
  2. Explain the importance of the following tools on the PageMaker’s toolbox.
  • Pointer tool
  • Text tool
  • Rotate tool
  • Line tool
  • Hand tool
  • Zoom tool

WORKING WITH TEXT

 

Adding text to a PageMaker publication.

 

Text can be entered into a PageMaker publication in 2 main ways:

 

  • Typing the text directly into a page.
  • Importing the text from another program.

 

Method 1: Typing text directly into the page.

 

  1. Click the Text tool (T) from the toolbox. The pointer turns into an I-beam (insertion point).
  2. Click at the point where you want to insert text on the page, then type the text.

Or

Drag a rectangular area to define a text block or text frame, then type the text.

 

A text frame defines the space you want the text to occupy.  It confines the text to the area you’ve selected.

 

  1. To display the boundaries of the text block you’ve created, select the Pointer tool and click anywhere in the text.

 

Method 2: Pasting text from another Window-based program.

 

  1. Select the text you want to copy, e.g., in Microsoft Word.
  2. Click on Edit, then choose Copy.
  3. Switch to the PageMaker program, e.g., using ALT+TAB.
  4. Click to place the insertion point where the pasted text should start.
  5. Click on Edit menu, then choose Paste.

 

Changing the view of a Page.

 

After typing text into a PageMaker publication, you may need to increase or decrease the page view to see either all the text and graphics or to magnify a portion of the page.

 

  1. Click in the text or select the graphic you want to see clearly so that when you magnify, it comes to the center of the screen

 

  1. Click on View menu, then choose:

 

  • Actual Size – to see text and graphics as they will appear when printed.

 

  • Fit in Window – to check the overall composition of a page or a two-page spread.

 

-Or-

 

  • Choose Zoom To, then click the desired view from the list that appears, e.g., 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%, etc.

 

  • Entire Pasteboard – to view objects on the pasteboard.

 

Selecting text in a PageMaker publication.

All text in PageMaker is contained either in text blocks or in text frames.

 

Method 1: Selecting text using the Text tool (T).

 

When the text is selected using the Text tool, you can type, edit or change the text attributes, e.g., Bold, Underline, etc.

 

  1. Select the Text tool from the toolbox.
  2. Move the cursor to the beginning of the text to be worked on, then drag the I-beam to select a range of text.

 

Alternatively;

 

  • To select a word, double-click the word.
  • To select an entire paragraph, triple-click the paragraph.

 

  1. Choose the desired command to apply to the text.

 

Method 2: Selecting text using the Pointer tool (ë).

 

The Pointer tool is used to select a text block.  When you click the text using the Pointer tool, a line appears at the top and at the bottom of the text block.

 

This method is used if you want to:

  • Move the text block.
  • Change the size of the text block.
  • Delete the text block.

 

Method 3: Using the Select All command.

 

This selects all the objects and/or text in a text block.

 

  1. Using the Text tool, click anywhere inside the text block.
  2. On the Edit menu, click Select All (or press CTRL+’A’).

To deselect, click an empty part of the page (or choose Deselect All from the Edit menu).

 

Selecting objects.

 

  • To select a single object, click the object with the Pointer tool to display the object’s border.

 

  • To add objects to a selection, hold down SHIFT as you click other objects.

 

  • To select several objects at once, drag the pointer tool around multiple objects. Make sure you include each object’s bounding box (as indicated by its selection handles).

 

  • To select an object underneath another object on the same layer, press CTRL and click the object you want to select.

 

Editing a publication.

 

The term editing means making changes to a publication.

 

PageMaker has two special editing tools:

 

  • The Find and Change tool, and
  • The Spelling

 

Therefore editing a publication includes the process of correcting spelling mistakes, and replacing of words.

 

Note.  Before editing the publication, you must open it in the story window.

 

PageMaker defines each text block as a story.  A Story is a collection of text that PageMaker recognizes as a single unit for editing purposes.

 

A story can be just one letter or several hundred pages of text.

 

Searching for and replacing words in the publication.

 

The Find and change tool helps a person to search for specific occurrences of a particular word or a group of words in a publication and replace it with another one.

 

To find and change a word or a phrase in the publication:

 

  1. Using the Text tool, click an insertion point in a story, or select a range of text if you want to limit your search to that section.
  2. Click on Edit, then select Edit Story. The publication now opens in the story window showing only the text but not the graphical objects.
  3. Click on Utilities, then select Find or Change. A dialog box is displayed.
  4. In the Find What textbox, type the word you want to find. To change the word, type the new word to replace with in the Change To
  5. Under Search document, select an option to determine the scope of the search, e.g., Current publication or in all open publications. If you search the current publication only, select an option in the Search Story.
  6. Click Find in the dialog box to begin the search. To continue with the search operation, select Find Next.
  7. Once you are through, click on Story, then choose Close Story.

 

Spell-checking the publication.

 

  1. Click the I-beam anywhere in the publication or select the range to be spell checked.
  2. Click on Edit, then select Edit Story.
  3. Click on Utilities, then select Spelling. A dialog box is displayed with the following options:

 

  • Change To: – displays the word PageMaker does not recognize. Type or select the correct word from the list in the Suggestions

 

  • Ignore: –

 

  • Replace: – replaces the misspelled word with the one you have typed in the Change To box, or selected in the Suggestions

 

  • Add: – opens the Add word to user dictionary dialog box in which you specify the word you want to add to or remove from the dictionary.

 

  1. Under Search story, specify the scope of the search, e.g., in selected text, in the Current story only, or in All stories in the publication.
  2. Specify spell checking options:

 

  • Alternate Spellings – it lets you see suggested replacements for misspelled words.
  • Show Duplicates – displays repeated words.

 

  1. Click the Start button to begin spell checking.

 

Deleting text.

 

  1. Select the text to be deleted.
  2. On the Edit menu, select Clear (or press the Delete key).

 

Moving and copying text.

 

  1. Select the text to be moved or copied.
  2. On the Edit menu, click Cut (or press CTRL+’X’) to move the text to a new location, or click Copy (or press CTRL+’C’) to make a duplicate of the selected text.
  3. Click or select where you want to move or copy the text to.
  4. On the Edit menu, click Paste (or press CTRL+’V’).

AGRICULTURE NOTES BOOKLET FORM 1-4 FREE

TOPICS COVERED

SECTION I QUESTIONS

  •  INTRODUCTION TO AGRICULTURE………………………………………………………..3
  • CROP PRODUCTION I (LAND PREPARATION) ……………………………………………5
  •  FACTORS WHICH INFLUENCE AGRICULTURE……………………………………………5
  • WATER SUPPLY, IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE…………………………………..………….
  • SOIL FERTILITY 1 (ORGANIC MANURE) ………………………………………………..…..8
  • AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS  (BASIC CONCEPTS AND FARM RECORDS) ……………9
  •  SOIL FERTILITY II (IN ORGANIC FERTILIZERS) ……………………………….………..10
  • CROP PRODUCTION II (PLANTING) ………………………………………………..……….12
  • CROP PRODUCTION III (NURSERY MANAGEMENT PRACTICES) …………………….14
  • CROP PRODUCTION IV (FIELD MANAGEMENT PRACTICES) …………………………15
  • CROP PRODUCTION V (VEGETABLES) …………………………………………………..16
  • LIVESTOCK HEALTH (INTRODUCTION TO LIVESTOCK HEALTH) ……………………17
  • AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS II (LAND TENURE AND LAND REFORM) …………….18
  • SOIL AND WATER CONSERVATION…………………………………………………………18
  • WEEDS AND WEED CONTROL………………………………………………………………19
  • CROP PESTS AND DISEASES………………………………………………………………….21
  • (pp1): CROP PRODUCTION VI  ( FIELD PRACTICES FOR MAIZE, MILLET, SORGHUM,
  • BEANS AND RICE: HARVESTING OF COTTON PYRETHRUM, SUGAR CANE COFFEE
  • AND TEA CROP PRODUCTION III(NURSERY MANAGEMENT PRACTICES) …………23
  • FORAGE CROPS…………………………………………………………………………………24
  • AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS III (PRODUCTION ECONOMICS)………………………..25
  • CROP PRODUCTION IV (FIELD MANAGEMENT PRACTICES) ……………………………
  • CROP PRODUCTION V (VEGETABLES)……………………………………………………….
  • AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS IV………………………………………………………….29
  • LIVESTOCK HEALTH (INTRODUCTION TO LIVESTOCK HEALTH) ……………………
  •  AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS II (AND TENURE AND LAND REFORM) …………….…
  • SOIL AND WATER CONSERVATION……………………………………………………..…..
  • WEEDS AND WEED CONTROL………………………………………………………………..
  • CROP PESTS AND DISEASES………………………………………………………………..
  • CROP PRODUCTION VI  (FIELD PRACTICES FOR MAIZE, MILLET,
  • SORGHUM, BEANS AND RICE:
  • HARVESTING OF COTTON, PYRETHRUM, SUGAR CANE COFFEE & TEA………………
  •  AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS (V) …………………………………………………….……..32
  •  AGRO FORESTRY…………………………………………………………………………….32

      SECTION I ANSWERS………………………………………………………………..……..34

  • SECTION II QUESTIONS
  • FARM TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT…………………………………………………………….92
  • LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION I (COMMON LIVESTOCK BREEDS) ………………………96
  •  LIVESTOCK HEALTH II     (LIVESTOCK PARASITES) ……………………………………97
  • LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION II (NUTRITION) ………………………………………………..98
  •  LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION III (SELECTION AND BREEDING) ……………………..    99
  • LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION IV (LIVESTOCK MANAGEMENT PRACTICES)…………..100
  • FARM STRUCTURES ………………………………………………………………………103
  •  LIVESTOCK HEALTH III  (LIVESTOCK DISEASES) ……………………………………108
  • LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION V (POULTRY) ………………………………………………110
  • LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION III (LIVESTOCK REARING PRACTICES) …………………112
  • FARM POWER AND MACHINERY…………………………………………………………..113

SECTION II  Answers ………………………………………………………………………..117

SECTION I : QUESTIONS

INTRODUCTION TO AGRICULTURE

This topic entails the following:-

  • Definition of agriculture
  • Main branches of agriculture
  • Farming systems
  • Farming methods
  • Role of agriculture to Kenya’s economy
  • Varied opportunities in agriculture.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will help and motivate the user to       comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Give two factors which characterize intensive farming
  2. State three reasons why organic farming is encouraged in farming
  3. State two ways in which agriculture contributes to industrial development
  4. State four ways by which wind affects the growth of crops
  5. State one physical characteristic used in classifying soil
  6. Outline four advantages of organic farming
  7. State two conditions under which shifting cultivation is practiced
  8. Differentiate between the following terms as used in Agriculture:-

(a) Oleculture and floriculture

(b) Apiculture and aquaculture

 

FACTORS WHICH INFLUENCE AGRICULTURE

In this topic, the following factors influence agriculture.

-Human factors e.g. -level of education, -Health HIV/AIDS, -Economic status of the farmer e.t.c

– Biotic factors e.g. pests, parasites, decomposers, pathogens, pollinators, predators e.t.c.

– Climatic factors e.g. rainfall, temperature, wind and relative humidity, light

– Edaplus factors e.g. type of soils, soil profile, soil structure, soil texture, soil chemical properties.

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and

motivate the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts:

 

  1. State two roles of humus in the soil that are beneficial to crops
  2. a) outline five activities that may be  undertaken in organic farming
  3. List four effects of temperature on crop growth
  4. State four ways by which wind affects the growth of crops
  5. Name two factors related to light that affect crop production and distribution in Kenya
  6.  Describe the environmental conditions that may lead to low crop yields
  7. List three environmental factors that affect crop distribution in Kenya
  8. State one physical characteristic used in classifying soil
  9. Outline four advantages of organic farming
  10. The diagrams below show an experiment carried out by a form 1 class. Study them carefully and
E
D

answer questions that follow:

(a) What was the aim of the experiment?

(b) What was the observation that form 1 students made at the end of the experiment in

flasks D and E?

(c) Give the reason for the observation made in flask D

           

  1. Briefly explain how sub-soil as a horizon in a soil profile can affect soil productivity
  2. (a) What are the three aspects of light that are important to a farmer?

(b) Mention three ways through which relative humidity affect crop production

  1. The diagram labeled E and F below illustrates some type of soil structure. Study the diagrams

carefully and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the types of soil structure illustrated in diagrams E and F

(b) Identify the parts labeled (i) and (ii) in diagram F

(c) Outline the influence of physical characteristics of soil on its properties

  1. State three physical characteristics of soil
  2. Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State merits of horizon A                                                                                                  
  2. b) State distinct features of horizon B
  3. c) What does the term transition zone refer to in soil profile
  4. i) Name horizon C and state its importance
  5. Outline two ways temperature affects crop production
  6. List four ways by which biological agents can enhance the process of soil formation
  7. List four environmental factors that affect crop production in Kenya
  8. Explain the role played by topography in soil formation
  9. Mention two importance of parent’s material in soil profile
  10. Mention four ways of modifying soil temperature in crop production
  11. a) Mention two factors that   affect  selectivity of herbicides
  12. b) Name two farming practice that cause water pollution
  13. Give four factors that influence soil formation
  14. State three properties of soil that is influenced by soil texture
  15. Name any three agents of biological weathering

 

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION I (LAND PREPARATION)

  • Land preparation entails the following farming practices.
  • Land clearing or bush clearing tools, chemicals and equipment used.
  • Primary cultivation, tools and equipment as machines used.
  • Primary cultivation, tools and equipment as machines used.
  • Secondary cultivation, tools and equipment used.
  • Tertiary operations e.g. ridging, rolling and leveling.
  • Sub-soiling, tools used and reasons for the same.
  • Minimum tillage and reasons for the secure.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate

the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and farming practices:

 

  1. Give three factors that determine depth of ploughing during land preparation
  2. List four reasons for cultivating land before planting
  3. (a) What is minimum tillage?

(b) Give four farming practices that help in achieving minimum tillage.

  1. (a) Describe the establishment of grass pasture from the time the land is ploughed using a mould

board plough to the time the pasture is ready for grazing

(b) Explain five practices that a farmer should carry out to ensure uniform germination of seeds         (c) Describe five factors that determine the number of cultivations when preparing a seedbed

  1. State four physical conditions of the seedbed that need to be changed to facilitate germination
  2. State four importance of sub soiling as a tertiary operation
  3. Outline four advantages of rolling in seedbed preparation
  4. State four disadvantages of minimum tillage
  5. The diagram below illustrate a tertiary operation carried out in the farm

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the tertiary operation
  2. b) (i) State the importance of the tertiary operation identified in 20(a) above

(ii) Give two other  tertiary operations carried out in the field besides the one identified above

  1. Give two reasons why it is advisable to cultivate the field during the dry season
  2. How are hard pans caused by cultivation?
  3. Give four factors that determine the number of secondary cultivation operations
  4. Define the term minimum tillage
  5. List four advantages of timely planting
  6. State any two factors that determine the number of cultivation on a field before it is ready for

planting

  1. Give three benefits of timely planting of annual crops
  2. State four factors determining the depth of ploughing land

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

WATER SUPPLY, IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Hydrological cycle
  • Sources of water on the farm
  • Water collection and storage
  • Pumps and pumping of water
  • Types water pipes
  • Water treatment
  • Uses of eater of the farm.
  • Types of irrigation advantages and disadvantages.
  • Importance and methods of drainages
  • Water pollution causes and prevention.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. State two reasons for treating water for us on the farm
  2. State three reasons for draining swampy land before growing crops
  3. Use the diagram below of irrigation method to answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the method of irrigation
  2. b) State four advantages of the above irrigation system
  3. c) State three factors that determine the type of irrigation on the farm
  4. d) State two disadvantages o f the above system of irrigation
  5. a) What is irrigation
  6. b) Outline three methods of irrigation
  7. a) List four use of water on the farm
  8. b) Give four methods of harvesting water on the farm
  9. c) Outline the stages involved in water treatment process
  10. List any four uses of water in the farm
  11. State two types of irrigation used in Kenya
  12. Outline four disadvantages of cambered beds

Describe the process of water treatment

  1. Give four roles of drainage as a method of land reclamation
  2. Name two types of water pumps which can be used in the farm
  3. Name any four examples of working capital in maize production
  4. List four types of water pumps which can be used in the farm
  5. State four methods of drainage
  6. Distinguish between a dam and a weir                                  
  7. How do the government control prices of essential farm produce
  8. What is the difference between pumping and piping of water in the farm?
  9. List four reasons of draining water logged soils before planting.
  10. Give three Agricultural practices which lead to water pollution
  11. The diagrams below illustrate some methods of irrigating crops in the field. Study the diagrams

and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the methods used ;   (i) A              (ii) B

(b) State two advantages of method A over method B

(c) What material should be inserted at point T

  1. b) Name two farming practice that cause water pollution
  2. Give four reasons for practicing irrigation
  3. a) State four  importance  of water to plants
  4. b) State four reasons for treating water before use c) Describe water treatment system in a chemical treatment plant
  5. Name four diseases caused to man by drinking untreated water
  6. State the functions of the following chemicals as used in water treatment;

(a) Chlorine.

(b) Aluminum sulphate (AIlum)

  1. The diagrams labeled S and T illustrate some methods of draining waterlogged fields; use it to

answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the methods illustrated

            (b) What are the materials in S labeled M and N

           (c) Name two types of crops that can be planted in the field instead of carrying out the practice

illustrated in S and T

(d) What is the importance of carrying out land reclamation?

 

 

SOIL FERTILITY 1 (ORGANIC MANURE)

This topic entails the following:

  • Characteristics of a fertile soil
  • How soil loses soil fertility
  • Soil fertility maintenance
  • Reasons of adding organic matter to soil
  • Disadvantages of organic manure
  • Types of organic manure i.e green manure, farm yard manure and compost measure.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help the user to             comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. State two roles of humus in the soil that are beneficial to crops
  2. List four characteristic of fertile soil
  3. The diagram below illustrates a compost heap. Study it and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Name the part labeled Q and state its function
  2. b) What is the function of each of the following components in preparation of compost manure
  3. i) Top soil
  4.       ii) Wood ash

iii) Rotten manure

 

 

  1. The illustration below shows a four heap system of making compost manure. Study it and answer

the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) By use of arrows indicate on the diagram above how the following material should be

transferred from one heap to another till the manure is applied in the field

(b) How long does the material take to be ready for application in the field as manure?

(c) Give a reason for turning the material in the heap regularly

(d) Give two reasons why it is necessary to sprinkle water on the heap

  1. Name four indicators of well-decomposed manure
  2. (a) State two factors that should be considered when siting a compost manure heap

(b) When preparing compost manure, explain the importance of each of the following:-

(i) Addition of ash

(ii) Regular turning of the compost manure

  1. What is leaching?
  2. State four advantages of adding organic matter to a sandy soil
  3. (a) Describe the preparation of the following farm materials:-

(i) Farm yard manure

(ii) Hay

(b) Explain the factors considered in timely planting of annual crops

  1. A ration containing 18% protein is  to be  made  from  maize and sunflower cake. Given

that maize contains 7% protein, and sunflower seed cake 34% protein. Use Pearson square

method to calculate the value  of feedstuffs  to be used to prepare 100kgs  of the feed

  1. ii) A part from Pearson square method, name two other methods that can be used to formulate

feed ration

 

AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS

(BASIC CONCEPTS AND FARM RECORDS)

This topic entails the following

  • Definition of scarcity, preference and classic, opportunity cot as used in agriculture production.
  • Uses of farm records
  • Types of farm records i.e production records, filed operation records, breeding records, feeding records, health, labour records and master roll.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate

the user  comprehend and understand the concepts and practices.

 

  1. (a) What are the uses of farm records to a farmer?

 

  1. Identify the farm record below and the questions that follow:
Date Disease symptoms Animals affected Drug used Cost of treatment Remarks
           

(a)Identity of the record

(b) State two different information that should be entered in the remarks column

(c) Give two importance of keeping the farm record illustrated above

  1. State four uses of farm records
  2. State four uses of farm records
  3. Outline two ways the level of education and technology influence the efficiency of agricultural

production

  1. Study the illustration below of farm records:- Use it to answer the questions that follow:

Enterprise

Month                     

Name of cow DAYS IN MONTH
  1   2   3   4   5   6  
AM PM AM PM AM PM AM PM AM PM AM PM
                       

 

(a) Name the type of the farm record illustrated above

(b)  Give three reasons for keeping health records in a livestock production

(c) Give three pieces of information a dairy farm manager should collect for planning purposes

  1. List down four pieces of information recorded in a field operation record.
  2. List two events occur during induction stroke in a four stroke engine
  3. Give two conditions under which a farmer may prefer the use of donkey trailed cart instead of

a tractor drawn trailer in his farm

 

 

SOIL FERTILITY II (IN ORGANIC FERTILIZERS)

 

This topic entails the following;

  • Essentials elements required by cops
  • Classification of essential elements
  • Role o micro-nutrients
  • Deficiency symptoms of macro-nutrients and micro-nutrients.
  • Identification and classification of fertilizers.
  • Soil sampling and testing methods of fertilizer application.
  • Effect of soil acidity/alkalinity air crops
  • Fertilizer rate calculations

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. State four advantages of applying lime in clay soil
  2. a) Give the form in which the following elements are absorbed by crops
  3.     i) Sulphur
  4. ii) Nitrogen

iii) Carbon

  1.     iv)  Magnesium
  2. b) List three effects of nitrogen to plants
  3. Mr. Malombe of Shinyalu village prepared to top dress 10 hectares of nappier grass using

sulphate of ammonia (21%N). Sulphate of ammonia is applied at rate of 150kg per hectare.

Calculate

  1. a) The quantity of sulphate ammonia fertilizer the farmer will need for 10 hectares
  2. b) The number of 50kg bags of fertilizer he will purchase
  3. Give two disadvantages of using farmyard manure
  4. State four factors which influence the stage at which the crops are harvested
  5. A form four student was given a sample of a fertilizer with the following characteristics:

(i) Grey in colour

(ii) It is granular

(iii) Causes no corrosion

(iv) It is highly hygroscopic

(v) It is neutral

(a) Identify the fertilizer

(b) At what stage of growth of maize should it be applied?

(c) Calculate the amount of K2O contained in 400kg of a compound fertilizer 25:10:5

  1. State two pieces of information that soil sample should have before being taken to the laboratory

for testing

  1. A compound fertilizer bag has the labels 20-20-0. What do the figures stand for?
  2. Give four functions of sulphur in crops
  3. State four advantages of lining as a measure of soil improvement
  4. State two methods of increasing soil PH
  5. (a) State three factors that determine the amount of inorganic fertilizers needed to be applied

to crops

(b) What are the necessary precautions observed when carrying out soil sampling?

  1. List three functions of nitrogen in crops
  2. (a) Distinguish between fertilizer grade and fertilizer ratio

(b) List four elements whose deficiency results into chlorosis in plants

  1. The diagram below shows a method of soil sampling

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Name the method illustrated in the diagram

(b) State three precautions taken when collecting the soil for testing using the above method

(c) Give four reasons why soil from the farm is tested

  1. A farmer was advised to apply compound fertilizer 20-20-10 on an orchard measuring

20m X 10m at the rate of 80kg/ha. Calculate the amount of fertilizer the farmer would require

for the orchard.                                                                                     (Show your working)

  1. a) A compound of fertilizer  has a fertilizer grade of 25:10:5.calculate  the a mount

of phosphorus fore sent in 400kg of this fertilizer

  1. b) The diagram below illustrate methods of collecting soil sample from a field

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Identify the methods illustrated 1-
  2. ii) xx

iii) State three importance of carrying out soil sampling and testing

  1. (a) What is an incomplete compound fertilizer?

(b) State four reasons why a maize crop continued showing deficiency of potassium despite

applications recommended amount of potassic fertilizer

  1. The diagram below shows a soil sampling method.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the method illustrated above

(b) Name any two spots in a farm that should be avoided during sampling

(c) Describe the steps followed while carrying out the exercise in (a) above

 

CROP PRODUCTION II (PLANTING)

This topic entails the following:

  • Correct  planting materials for various crops
  • Selection and preparation of planting materials
  • Determination of optimum time of planting
  • Factors which determine planting depth
  • Planting procedure for different crops
  • Factors which determine seed rate, spacing and plant population.
  • Calculation of plant population
  • Economic value of land.

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate

the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. State two reasons for seed treatment of tree species before planting
  2. Give three factors that determine spacing of beans
  3. State four reasons for using certified seeds for planting
  4. Below are diagrams showing vegetative material used for propagation.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Name the propagation materials A, B, C, D
  2. b) What is the term used for inducing B to start germinating?
  3. c) State four advantages of vegetative propagation on crop production
  4. Differentiate between hybrid and composite
  5. a) A farmer planted 100 maize seeds and 90 seeds germinated.

Calculate the germination percentage

  1. b) Given that maize is planted at a spacing of 75cm by 25cm, calculate the plant population in a

plot measuring 4m by 3m

  1. Give four qualities of a mother plant which should be considered when selecting vegetative

material for propagation

  1. Explain five practices that a farmer should carry out to ensure uniform germination of seeds
  2. State two factors which determine the depth of planting
  3. State two advantages of adding organic matter to sandy soil

 

  1. Calculate the number of tea plants in two hectares (2ha) given that the spacing is 150cm x 75cm

and one seedling is planted per hole

  1. Outline four reasons why training is important in some crops
  2. Give four factors that influence the depth of planting
  3. Two precautions taken when harvesting cotton
  4. Outline four reasons why training is important in some crops
  5. Give four factors that influence the depth of planting
  6. Two precautions taken when harvesting cotton
  7. State four factors that determine the spacing of annual crops
  8. Outline four advantages of rolling in seedbed preparation
  9. List two factors that effect rooting of cuttings in crop production
  10. Outline three ways of preparing materials before sowing
  11. Outline three ways of preparing materials before sowing
  12. Distinguish between over sowing and under sowing

 

  1. Study the illustration below of a tea vegetative material and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) What name is given to the vegetative material drawn above for tea propagation
  2. b) State two devisable characteristics of the selected plants used to develop the plant shown
  3. c) Give two precautions observed during the preparation of the material above before planting
  4. The diagram below illustrates the spacing which is used when planting beans. Study the diagram

and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State the spacing illustrated above
  2. b) Suppose the student is asked to use the illustrated spacing to plant in a plot 4m by 3m leaving

30cm distance from the edge; calculate;

  1. i) The number of rows on the wider side of the plot
  2. ii) Calculate the plant population
  3. Using planting material whose diagram is shown below, list four factors that would influence the

rooting of the structure

                           

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Describe the selection, preparation and raising of vegetative tea seedlings in the nursery
  2. Explain the factors considered in timely planting of annual crops
  3. Give four disadvantages of broadcasting as a method of planting.
  4. Define the following terminologies as used in Agriculture
  5. Give two advantages of producing crops by use of seeds over vegetative propaganda
  6. State four ways of preparing planting materials before planting

 

 

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION III

NURSERY MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

 

This topic entails the following:

  • A nursery bed
  • A nursery bed and a seed bed
  • Reasons of establishing nursery bed
  • Suitable site for nursery bed
  • Nursery bed preparation
  • Nursery bed management practices
  • Transplanting seedling crops from nursery bed
  • Budding a seedling
  • Grafting a seedling
  • Reasons for budding, grafting and layering
  • Tissue culture
  • Damage caused by animals to a seedling and prevention.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. Name three methods of grafting that are used in propagation of plants
  2. State two practices done during hardening-off of seedlings in a nursery bed.
  3. List two methods of budding used in crop propagation
  4. List four management practices carried out on a nursery bed
  5. Outline two importance of tissue culture in crop propagation
  6. Differentiate between a nursery bed and a seedling bed
  7. Give four advantages of under sowing in pasture production
  8. Give four advantages of under sowing in pasture production
  9. The diagram below shows a structure used in crop production:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the structure above

(b) Give a reason for carrying out each of the following practices in the structure shown above

(i) Pricking out

(ii) Hardening off

(c) State three importance of the part labeled A in the above structure

  1. (a) Describe the siting and establishment of a crop nursery

(b) Explain management practices in a crop nursery

  1. State four importance of thinning seedlings in the nursery bed
  2. State the difference between a seedling bed and a seedbed.
  3. Below is a diagram of a nursery for raising the seedlings

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) State two advantages of having the part labeled J

(b) State any three management practices that should be carried out on the nursery from the time

seedlings emerge to the stage of transplanting

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION IV (FIELD MANAGEMENT PRACTICES)

This topic entails the following:

  • Crop rotation
  • Reasons for crop rotations
  • Crop rotation programme
  • Terms used in crop farming
  • Mulching
  • Reasons for various field management practices
  • Correct stage for harvesting crops
  • Harvesting practices of various crops.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Distinguish between staking and propping as a field management practice on crops
  2. Explain five advantages of crop rotation
  3. State four factors which influence the stage at which the crops are harvested
  4. The diagrams labelled B and C below are illustrations of coffee plants established using two

different formative pruning systems.

Examine the diagrams and answer the questions that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the system of pruning illustrated in B

(b) Identify the system of pruning in C

(c) Outline the procedure of how pruning in diagram C is carried out

  1. Give two functions of earthing up in crop production
  2. Describe the factors which determine the stage of harvesting of crops
  3. Give two ways in which inorganic much helps to conserve water
  4. State four factors that determine the spacing of annual crops
  5. Explain the importance of each of the following practices: (i) Hardening off

(ii) Pricking out

(iii) Gapping

  1. Outline two factors that determine the stage of harvesting crops
  2. (a) List four factors that determine harvesting sage of a crop

(b) Give four practices that can be used to control storage pests

  1. List four benefits of pruning in crop production
  2. (a) What is winnowing?

(b) Give one importance of the following practices: (i) Mulching                                                                                                                                                    (ii) Threshing

(c) Which factors are considered when carrying out a crop rotation program?

  1. What is frelishing?
  2. Briefly explain how each of the factors listed below will determine the stage at which a crop is harvested

(a) Intended use of the crop

(b) Market demand

  1. What is roguering in crop production?
  2. What is meant by the term “changing the cycle” in coffee growing?
  3. The diagram below shows a practice carried out on various crops on the farm. Study them

carefully and answer the questions that follow;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the farm practice represented by B

(b) State the importance of the above practice in the following crops;

(i) Maize

(ii) Irish potatoes

(c) At what stage of growth should the above practice be carried out in maize?

  1. Mention four factors which determine the stage at which crops are harvested
  2. State two limitation of using polythene sheets as mulching materials in a field of tomatoes
  3. Give two management practices carried in a banana stool
  4. State two functions of polythene sheet when used as mulch material
  5. Give four crops requiring training

 

CROP PRODUCTION V (VEGETABLES)

This topic entails the following:

  • Growing or production of a vegetable crop form nursery establishment to harvesting
  • Keep records of crop production.
  • Market vegetable crop produce
  • Give reasons or importance of growing vegetable crops.
  • The vegetable crops include the following: Tomatoes, cabbages, onions, carots, kales.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

 

 

 

  1. The diagram below is of a tomato plant. Study it and answer the questions that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) State three management practices that have not been carried on the plant above                        b) For each management practice state one reason why it should be carried  out
  2. c) Name two diseases that attack the crop above in the field
  3. Describe the production of tomatoes (lycopersicon esculentum) under the following subheadings
  4. a) Varieties
  5. b) Nursery establishment
  6. c) Field management practices
  7. List four symptoms of late blight in tomatoes
  8. State any four factors considered when grading tomatoes for fresh market
  9. State two ways of controlling purple blotch in onions
  10. The following is an illustration of an infected tomato plant. Study it carefully and answer the

questions below:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the disease which may have caused the condition shown in the illustration

(b) Name any other crop which may be affected by the disease identified in (a) above                   (c) Mention two other factors which can lead to the same condition as shown by the illustration

(d) State two measures that can be sued to control the disease named in (a) above

  1. Give two ways in which pruning helps to control diseases in tomatoes
  2. Outline four ecological requirements for cabbages
  3. a) Mention two pests which attack tomatoes
  4. b) Give two causes blossom end rot disease in tomatoes
  5. List three ecological requirements of tomatoes.

 

 

LIVESTOCK HEALTH

(INTRODUCTION TO LIVESTOCK HEALTH)

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Definition of Health and disease.
  • Signs of sickness in animals livestock diseases
  • Categories of livestock diseases
  • Reasons for keeping livestock in good health
  • Disease control practices
  • Appropriate methods of handling livestock.

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

  1. Identify four physical appearances to be observed in a sick animal
  2. State two reasons why tsetse fly control is considered to be a land reclamation method
  3. a) Explain five factors to consider when siting a fish pond
  4. b) Explain the measures used to control livestock diseases
  5. a) Name four notifiable diseases in livestock
  6. b) Discuss four ways in which livestock disease are spread in the farm
  7. c) Describe the methods of controlling livestock disease giving an example of different disease

in each case

 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS II

(LAND TENURE AND LAND REFORM)

  • Definition of land tenure.
  • Description of tenure systems.
  • Descriptions of land reforms.

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. State four ways by which Re-afforestation help in land reclamation
  2. State three objectives of land reforms that are taking place in Kenya
  3. State two causes of land fragmentation in Kenya since independence
  4. Outline the process followed in land adjudication
  5. State four benefits of a farmer having land title deed
  6. State four reasons for practicing land consolidation
  7. Give four advantages of communal land tenure system
  8. State four advantages of landlordism and tenancy
  9. Outline four objects of land tenure reform
  10. State three advantages of communal land tenure system
  11. List down four important details in a land title deed.

 

SOIL AND WATER CONSERVATION

This topic entails the following:

  • Definition of soil erosion
  • Explanation of various factors which influence erosion.
  • Agents of erosion
  • Description various methods of erosion
  • Description of various methods of erosion control
  • Description of micro-catchments and then uses.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Name three human activities that may influence soil erosion
  2. Below is a diagram showing soil erosion control method
Soil
Cultivated land with crops

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the structure used to control soil erosion
  2. b) What is the function of the structure made
  3. c) Why was soil not put on the upper side of the trench made
  4. d) State four effects if water was allowed into the cultivated land
  5. Give two roles played by Grassley in soil erosion control
  6. List three materials that may be used for constructing a gabion
  7. State one factor that would determine the width and depth of a cut off drain
  8. Explain five ways by which grass helps to conserve soil
  9. Give four farming practices that help in reducing the effects of water shortage in crop production
  10. Name two types of terraces
  11. Name two forms of gully erosion

9          -V- shaped

-U – shaped

  1. Explain the cultural methods of soil erosion control
  2. Mention four control measures of river bank erosion
  3. The figure below represents a physical soil and water conservation measure used on various slopes

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the measure represented above
  2. b) Describe the construction of the identified measure above
  3. a) What is soil erosion
  4. b) Give four types of water erosion
  5. c) Explain factors which influence soil erosion
  6. d) State any seven cultural ways of controlling weeds
  7. Give two ways through which gabions control soil erosion

 

 

WEEDS AND WEED CONTROL

This topic entails the following:

  • Definition of a weed
  • Identification of weeds
  • Classification o weeds
  • Competitive ability of weeds
  • Description of weed control methods
  • Harmful effects of weeds

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the weed

(b) Why is it difficult to control the weed?

(c) State the economic importance of the weed shown above

 

 

 

 

  1. The following is an illustration of a common weed of arable land

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the weed                                                                                                                          (b) Why is it difficult to control the weed?

(c) State one harmful effect of the weed on crop production

(d) Give two measures used to control the weed

  1. Below is a diagram of some common weeds. Study then and answer the questions that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Identify weed A and B                                                                                                                   (ii) State two effects of weed B on crop production

(iii) Give a reason why weed B is difficult to control

(iv) State the effective method of controlling weed B                                              

  1. Give four methods of propagation which make weeds have a high competitive ability

over crops

  1. The diagrams below show weeds:-
C
D

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Identify the weeds C and D

(b) State why it is difficult to control weed C                                                                       

(c) State two economic importance of weed D

  1. (a) List any four types of weeds known to be poisonous to livestock

(b) At what stage of life cycle is best recommended to control weeds?

  1. State two disadvantages of using herbicides
  2. a) Name four herbicides that can be used to control weeds in a field of maize
  3. b) At what stage of growth of maize should the weeds be controlled by use of a post

emergence herbicides

  1.       (b) Give an account of economic importance of weeds
  2. a) mention two factors that   affect  selectivity of herbicides
  3. Listing specific examples of weeds describe their harmful effects in agricultural production

 

 

 

 

CROP PESTS AND DISEASES

This topic entails the following:

  • Definition of a pest and a disease
  • Main cause of crop diseases
  • Description of harmful effects of crop pests and diseases
  • Identification of crop pests and diseases
  • Control measures of crops pests and diseases

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. State two possible causes of swelling on the roots of legume crops
  2. Discuss the various cultural methods of controlling pests in crops
  3. What does the term ‘close season’ mean in crop production?
  4. Explain five cultural methods of pest control in stored grains
  5. Name four symptoms of viral infections in plants
  6. Study the illustrations given below and then answer the questions that follow:-
C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the pests shown by the illustrations B, C and D

(b) State one effective method of controlling the pest labelled

(c) Name the type of crop commonly attacked by the pest labelled ‘C

  1. State the various practices carried out in the field to help control crop diseases
  2. State two ways in which pesticides kill crop pests

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The diagram below shows kale seedling attacked by a pest

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the pest

(b) What damage does the pest cause to the crop

(c)  State two methods of controlling the pest

  1. Define the term ‘economic injury level of a pest and integrated pest control management
  2. List four harmful effects of crop pests
  3. The diagram below shows a fungal disease in a section of potato crop leaf

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the fungal disease
  2. b) (i) State  the causal  organism of  the disease identified above
  3. ii) Give two symptoms of the above disease
  4. c) Give two control measures of the disease
  5. The diagram below shows a banana fruit infected by a certain disease.

 

 

 

 

 

  • Identify the disease
  • Suggest any one control measure for the disease you have named in (a)
  1. The diagram below shows a crop pest;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the crop pest

(b) State two damages the pest would cause to crops

 

  1. Give two symptoms of nematode attack on bananas.
  2. Give four cultural practices used in controlling crop pests
  3. State three symptoms of coffee berry disease.

 

19        (i) Use the diagrams below to answer the question that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the crop pests labeled M, N and P

(b) State one control measures of crop pests labeled M                                                                   

(c) State the damage caused to crops by crop pest labeled N

  1. State and explain the cultural methods of pest control

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION VI

FIELD PRACTICES FOR MAIZE, MILLET, SORGHUM, BEANS AND RICE: HARVESTING OF COTTON PYRETHRUM, SUGAR CANE COFFE AND TEA

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Description of management practices of the food crops from planting to harvesting and marketing.
  • Economic value of food crops and industrial crops

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. List four management practices carried out in maize field at 45cm high
  2. Why is it not recommended to use sisal bags in handling cotton
  3. Describe the production of rice under the following sub-headings:-

(a) Land preparation

(b) Water control

(c) Fertilizer application

(d) Weed control

(ii) Describe the environmental conditions that may lead to low crop yields

  1. Describe the production of maize for dry grain production under the following sub-headings:-

(a) Seedbed preparation                                                                                                                      (b) Planting

(c) Weed control

(d) Pest control

(e) Disease control

(f) Harvesting

  1. Two precautions taken when harvesting cotton
  2. Describe production of maize under the following sub-headings ;

(a) Varieties

(b) planting

(c) pest and pest control

(d) harvesting and storage

  1. Describe the field production of maize under the following sub headings
  2. a) Ecological requirement
  3. b) Varieties
  4. c) Seedbed preparation
  5. d) Pests and diseases
  6. e) Harvesting
  7. a) Discuss harvesting of cotton                         b) Explain the roles of Agricultural co-operatives in Kenya
  8. Describe the production of maize under the following sub-headings:

(a) Ecological requirements

(b) Land preparation                                                                                                                           (c) Planting and field management

(d) Pests and disease control

(e) Harvesting and marketing

  1. Give two precautions measures a farmer should put into consideration when harvesting cotton
  2. Describe the production of beans under the following sub headings:

(a) Ecological requirements

(b) Seedbed preparation                                                                                                                                     (c) Planting                                                                                                                                                        (d) Pest and pest control

 

 

FORAGE CROPS

This topic entails the following:

  • Definition and classification of pasture crops.
  • Identification of pasture corps
  • Description of ecological requirements of forage crops
  • Description of the establishment of pasture and fodder crops
  • Description of forage utilization and conservation.

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. State three factors which affects the quality of standing forage given to livestock
  2. Explain Napier grass production under the following sub-headings
  3. i) Seedbed preparation
  4. ii) Planting

iii) Fertilizer application

  1. iv) Weed control
  2. v) Utilization
  3. Why is it necessary to allow freshly cut nappier grass to wilt before ensiling
  4. Describe the establishment of grass pasture from the time the land is ploughed using a mould

board plough to the time the pasture is ready for grazing

  1. State two causes of failure in pasture establishment
  2. State two advantages of grass-legume mixture
  3. List four factors that determine the quality of hay
  4. i) Discuss the production of Guatemala grass (Trypsacum Laxum) under the following headings
  5. a) Ecological required
  6. b) Land preparation
  7. c) Planting
  8. d) (i) Utilization and defoliation
  9. ii) Discuss six effects of late defoliation of fodder
  10. Give four factors that determine the nutrient content in hay
  11. (a) Describe the preparation of the following farm materials:-

(i) Farm yard manure

(ii) Hay

(b) Explain the factors considered in timely planting of annual crops

  1. (a) What is topping in pasture management

(b)State two methods used in topping in pasture management

  1. Give two advantages of grass-legume pasture over pure grass pasture
  2. Why are farmers encouraged to conserve excess forage in the farm?
  3. Give two factors affecting the quality of hay

 

 

 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS III

(PRODUCTION ECONOMICS)

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Parameter of national development
  • Factors of production
  • Law of diminishing returns
  • Farm planning and budgeting
  • Agricultural services
  • Risks and uncertainities
  • How to adjust to risks and uncertainities.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. State four ways of increasing labour efficiency on the farm
  2. The table shows egg production from individual birds with varying mounts of layers mash

 

100 layers

(Fixed number)

Layers mash

Kgs/week

Total egg production per week Marginal production per week
100 0 140 0
100 10 155 15
100 20 180 25
100 30 240 60
100 40 340 100
100 50 470 130

(a) Sketch a graph representing the total egg production per week against amount of feed given

(b) Identify the type of production function represented by the graph in (a) above

 

  1. (a) What are the uses of farm records to a farmer?                         (b) Explain four ways in which a farmer may improve Labour productivity in the farm

(c) Outline the process followed in land adjudication

  1. Name any three types of agricultural services available to the farmer
  2. Outline four management guideline questions which assist a farm manager in making accurate

farm decisions

  1. Give four ways of improving labour productivity
  2. List four variable inputs in sorghum production
  3. List four agricultural support services available to a crop farmer in Kenya
  4. Define the following as used in Agricultural economics:-

(a) Gross domestic product (GDP)

(b) Per capita income

  1. Explain the various ways in which farmers may adjust to risks and uncertainties
  2. (a) The table below represents the yield of maize in 90kg bags in response to application of

different quantities of planting fertilizer

(i) Fill in the blank spaces

 

Input 50kg bag fertilizer Out put 90kg bag maize Average product (AP) Marginal product (MP)
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

6

10

24

31

36

40

43

43

40

 

(ii) Suggest the best level of production in relation to the inputs and output

(b) A farmer is considering undertaking the production of either maize or beans. Study the

following  information about the two crops then answer the questions that follow:

 

(i) Maize

Yield per hectare                                 5,500 kg

Price                                                    15 per kg

Cost of cultivation / ha                       Kshs. 3000

Amount of seeds/ha                            25kgs

Cost of DAP fertilizer/bag                  Kshs.1,500

Amount of DAP fertilizer/ha              3bags

Cost of seeds/kg                                  Kshs.100

Labour requirements/ha                      50 man days

Cost of labour                                    Kshs.150 per man day

Amount of CAN fertilizer/bag            3 bags

Cost of CAN fertilizer/bag                  Kshs.1000

 

(ii) Beans

Yield per hectare                                 5000kg

Price                                                    50per kg

Cost of cultivation / ha                       KShs.3600

Labour requirements/ha                      75 man days

Cost of labour                                     Kshs. 200 per man day

Cost of DAP fertilizer/bag                  Kshs. 1500

Amount of DAP fertilizer/ha              2bags

Cost of seeds/kg                                  Kshs.800

Amount of seed/ha                              20kg

Amount of CAN fertilizer/bag            1bag

Cost of CAN fertilizer/bag                  Kshs.1,000

Cost of sprays                                     Kshs.3,000

(i) Calculate the gross margins for each crop                                                                         (14mks)

(ii) From your calculation, which crop is profitable to grow?

  1. Below is a graphical representation of the law of diminishing returns.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NPK fertilizer input (in 50kg bags)

 

 

(a) Explain what happens in each of the three zones marked I and III in relation to the output

of maize     and the NPK fertilizer input

(b) Which of the three is a rational zone of production

  1. Give four variable costs in maize production
  2. A farmer has the following yield from a two hectare millet crop enterprise at Oluch irrigation schemes.

Study it and prepare his gross margin. is it  profitable to grow millet? He spent the following in

his operations

Weed                        800/=

Seeds                        20kg/ha

Irrigation                  600/=/ha

Ploughing                500/=/ha

Clearing the land   1200/=

Cost of seeds           300/= /10kg bag

Planting                   400/= /ha

Harvesting              1200/= /ha

Yield                       32bags

DAP fertilizer         2 bags at 10 000/= /50kg bags

CAN fertilizer        2 bags at 700/= /50kg bags

Gunny bags            40/= /bag

Transport to market    2000/=

  1. A farmer has the following yield from a two hectare millet crop enterprise at Oluch irrigation schemes. Study it and prepare his gross margin. is it profitable to grow millet? He spent the following in his operations

Weed                        800/=

Seeds                        20kg/ha

Irrigation                  600/=/ha

Ploughing                500/=/ha

Clearing the land   1200/=

Cost of seeds           300/= /10kg bag

Planting                   400/= /ha

Harvesting              1200/= /ha

Yield                       32bags

DAP fertilizer         2 bags at 10 000/= /50kg bags

CAN fertilizer        2 bags at 700/= /50kg bags

Gunny bags            40/= /bag

Transport to market    2000/=                                                             (20mks)

 

  1. What is profit maximization in Agricultural Economics
  2. a) A farmer is considering undertaking the production of either maize or beans. Study the

following information about the two crops and then answer the questions that follow:

 

Maize  
Yield per hectare 5500kg
Price Kshs.15 per kg
Cost of cultivation/ ha Kshs. 3000/=
Amount of DAP fertilizer/ bag Kshs.1500/=
Amount of DAP fertilizer/ ha 3 bags
Cost of seed/ Kg Kshs.100
Labour requirements / ha 50 man days
Cost of labour Kshs.150 per man day
Amount of CAN fertilizer 3 bags
Cost of CAN fertilizer/ bag Kshs.1000

 

Beans  
Yield per hectare Kshs.5000
Price Kshs.50 per kg
Cost of cultivation/ ha Kshs.3600
Labour requirements/ ha 75 man- days
Cost of labour Kshs.200 per man day
Cost of DAP fertilizer/ bag Kshs.1500
Amount of DAP fertilizer/ ha 2 bags
Cost of seed/ kg Kshs.80
Amount of seed/ ha 20kg
Amount of CAN fertilizer/ 1 bag
Cost of CAN fertilizer/ bag Kshs.1000
Cost of sprays Kshs.3000

 

  1. i) Calculate the gross margin for each crop
  2. ii) From your calculation which crop is profitable to grow
  3. b) Discuss five factors considered when planning a farm
  4. Using the data provided in the table below, make an interpretation and advice the farmer on which

crop to grow ;

Type of crop Gross margin (Ksh)
Cotton 18,400
Ground nuts 20,050
  1. Outline three advantages of budgeting in farm business
  2. A farmer has 1 Ha piece of land on which he grows maize. His farm record on maize

production for nine years is as shown in the table below:

Year Fertilizer applied (bags) Total output of maize (bags)
1995 0 4
1996 2 10
1997 4 28
1998 6 42
1999 8 52
2000 10 60
2001 12 66
2002 14 66
2003 16 64

 

(a) i) Using an appropriate scale, with input on the X-axis draw a graph to show the relationship

between inputs and total output

(ii) From the graph you have drawn, how many bags of maize would the farmer produce if

he applied 9bags of fertilizer?

Calculate the farmers marginal products and average products for the years                                    (i) From the data given, what rate of fertilizer application would the farmer choose if he

wanted to grow maize in 2004?

(ii) Give an explanation for your choice in (c) (i) above

(b) Assuming that the average price of fertilizer over the years recorded was shs. 1,200/= per bag

and the price of maize was ksh.1000/= per bag :

Calculate the gross income for the years 2002 and 2003

Calculate the net income for the year 1999. (Assume no other costs were incurred)

  1. Name five types of costs incurred in a farming business
  2. List any four sources of credit to farmers.
  3. List three ways in which labour peaks can be overcome in the farm (1½ mks)
  4. State four ways of improving farm labour productivity
  5. A farmer had a plot of land measuring 5 hectares in which be intended to plant maize.

He was advised to apply 150 kg of P20 per hectare at planting and 200kg N per hectare during

top dressing. The fertilizer available in the market was Calcium Ammonium Nitrate containing

20% N and Di-ammonium phosphate 46% P205. Calculate.

(a)  (i) The amount of Di—ammonium phosphate required

(ii) The amount of calcium ammonium nitrate required

(b) Baraka farm manager plans to grow Irish potatoes or maize for grains. Study the information

below and answer the questions that follow:

 

Irish potatoes

Cost of fertilizers/ha____________________________ Ksbs 10,000.

Labour requirements/ha ______________________ Kshs 50 man – days

Yield /ha ___________________________________ 10,000kg

Seed potato/ha ________________________________Kshs20, 000

Cost of labour ___________________________ Kshs 200 per man day

Cost of fungicides___________________________ Kshs 5000

Cost of ploughing____________________________ Kshs 4000

Selling price of potatoes per kg __________________ Kshs 30.

 

Maize

Yield per hectare ______________Kshs.7,500kg

Selling price of maize per kg _____________Kshs 20.

Cost of ploughing /ha ________________Kshs.4000

Seed maize/ha _____________________Kshs.3000

Labour requirement /ha _________________________ 200 man days.

Cost of fertilizers /ha ____________________Kshs 10,000

Cost of top dressing fertilizers __________________Kshs 4,800

Cost of labour _____________Kshs 150 per man – day

 

(i) What is gross margin?

(ii) Calculate the gross margin of each of the crops

(iii) From the calculation above which crop should the farm grow?

(d) Describe the environmental factors that may lead to poor yields in crop production

                       

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS IV

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Importance of farm accounts
  • Financial documents and their uses
  • Analysis  of financial statements
  • Books of accounts and their uses.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Name three methods of grafting that are used in propagation of plants

2          a) The following transactions were extracted from Mr. Tembo’s financial books for the year

ending 31st Dec 2003.study and answer the questions that follow:

            Particulars                                                       cost (ksh)

Milk sale                                                          8 000

Goat sale                                                             500

Purchase of farm tools                                     1 000

Construction of zero grazing unit                  10 000

Depreciation of machinery                                 800

Closing stock                                                 16 000

Veterinary bills                                                     400

Interest payable                                                   750

Wages                                                              4 800

Sales of cabbages                                                750

Sales of tea                                                       4 700

Opening stock                                                 12 000

Sales of heifers                                                  9 400

Purchase of pesticides                                          300

 

(a) i) Prepare a profit and loss account for Mr. Tembo’s farm for the year ending 31st Dec. 2003

  1. ii) Calculate the percentage profit or loss made by the farm
  2. b) i) Give five functions of farmer’s cooperative societies
  3.     ii) Outline five common risks and uncertainties in farming

 

  1. State four reasons for using certified seeds for planting
  2. List any two financial statements which may be prepared on a farm
  3. The following information was obtained from Lang’at’s farm records for the year ending

December, 2004. Study it and answer the questions that follow:-

Goats                              4,000

Poultry                          15,000

Causal workers             12,000

Opening valuation       150,000

 

His sales and receipts are as follows:

Mohair             75,000

Rabbits                        3,600

Eggs to hotel               15,000

Closing valuation        200,000

(a) Prepare the profit and loss A/C of Lang’at’s farm

(b) State the benefit of a profit and loss A/C to Mr. Lang’at

 

 

 

 

  1. (a) List any four financial documents used in the farm

(b)  Prepare a profit and loss account for Mr. Rob’s farm for the year ending 31st Dec. 2009, given

the following information:-

Sale of milk                 Kshs.10,000

Sold two heifers          kshs.10,000

Cabbage sold              Kshs. 20,000

Debts payable             Ksh.4,200

Sold tomatoes             Kshs. 3,000

Veterinary bills           Kshs.2,500

Bought livestock feeds Kshs.2,500

Purchase fertilizers     Kshs.5,000

Bought seeds               Kshs. 4,000

Debts receivable         Kshs.20,000

Opening valuation      Kshs.150,000

Closing valuation        Kshs.200,000

(c) Did the farm make a profit or a loss? Calculate the percentage profit or loss made by the Farm

(d) Explain the various ways in which farmers may adjust to risks and uncertainties

  1. a) The following transactions were extracted from Mr. Tembo’s financial books for the year

ending 31st Dec 2003.study and answer the questions that follow:

            Particulars                                                       cost (ksh)

Milk sale                                                          8 000

Goat sale                                                             500

Purchase of farm tools                                     1 000

Construction of zero grazing unit                  10 000

Depreciation of machinery                                 800

Closing stock                                                 16 000

Veterinary bills                                                     400

Interest payable                                                   750

Wages                                                              4 800

Sales of cabbages                                                750

Sales of tea                                                       4 700

Opening stock                                                 12 000

Sales of heifers                                                  9 400

Purchase of pesticides                                          300

 

  1. i) Prepare a profit and loss account for Mr. Tembo’s farm for the year ending 31st Dec 2003
  2. ii) Calculate the percentage profit or loss made by the farm
  3. b) i) Give five functions of farmer’s cooperative societies
  4.      ii) Outline five common risks and uncertainties in farming

 

  1. At the end year ended 31/12/2005 Bidii farm recorded the following:

Perennial crops           250,000

Bank loans                  30,000

Cash at hand               5,000

Bank overdrafts          15,000

Land                            350,000

Unpaid wages             3,000

Debts receivable          20,000

Stocks in store             25,000

Livestock                    200,000

Bank balances             100,000

(a) Prepare a balance sheet as at 31/12/2005

(b) Did Bidii farm qualify for a loan and why?

 

  1. State one condition in which each of the following documents is used.
  2. i) Invoice
  3. ii) Delivery note

iii) Receipt

  1. Below is a transaction showing Mrs.Okello’s financial position in her business for the year 2009

-Purchase of pesticides                           3,000  00

-Milk sales                                              8,000  00

-Sales of goats                                        5,000  00

-Construction of store                           10,000  00

-Closing valuation                                 16,000  00

-Depreciation of machinery                     3,000 00

-Interest payable                                      1,750  00

-Purchase of farm tools                               800 00

-Veterinary bills                                        1,400 00

-Sales of tomatoes                                    1,750  00

-Wages                                                   10,000  00

-Sales of heifer                                       10,000  00

-Opening valuation                                 12,000  00

-Sales  of coffee                                        5,000  00

  1.  i) Prepare a profit and loss account for Mrs. Okello’s farm
  2. ii) Calculate the percentage profit or loss that Mrs. Okello made during the year 2009

iii) Explain six ways in which farmers adjust to risk and uncertainties in farming

  1. Name two examples of liabilities in a balance sheet

 

AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS (V)

This topic entails the following:

  • Market and marketing
  • Types of markets
  • Supply and demand
  • Marketing functions
  • Problems of marketing
  • Agricultural organizations

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. a) Explain the principle that govern the  operations of farmers’  co-operative societies
  2. b) Explain the role of agricultural cooperatives in Kenya
  3. c) Explain various functions of agricultural marketing
  4. a) Give four marketing functions
  5. b) Outline four problems associated with marketing of agricultural products
  6. State two roles of agricultural society of Kenya
  7. (a) What is elasticity of demand for a commodity

(b) Given that at a price of shs.1000 per bag, 20 bags of maize are demanded but when the price

changes to shs.800 per bag, 22 bags are demanded. Calculate the elasticity of demand. Show

your working

(c)Outline six problems of marketing maize as an agricultural product

(d) Determine nine principles governing cooperatives in Kenya

  1. Outline four reasons why training is important in some crops
  2. (a) Explain marketing activities in Agriculture

(b) Discuss problems experienced in marketing of Agricultural products

  1. What is elasticity of supply

 

  1. How do the governments control prices of essential farm produce
  2. b) Explain the roles of Agricultural co-operatives in Kenya
  3. State the law of demand and supply.
  4. What do the following initials stand for?

(i) K.N.F.U – Kenya National Farmers Union

(ii) H.C.D.A – Horticultural Crops Development Authority

  1. (a) What is a co-operative society

(b) List two functions of co-operatives

(c) State and explain the nine principles of governing co-operatives

  1. Give four factors which influenced the demand of tomatoes in the market

 

 

 

 

AGROFORESTRY

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Definition of agro forestry
  • Importance of agro forestry
  • Forms of agro forestry
  • Importance of trees
  • Selection f trees to plant
  • Routine management practices on trees
  • Methods of tree harvesting.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

 

  1. State two reasons for seed treatment of tree species before planting
  2. State four ways by which Re-afforestation help in land reclamation
  3. List four advantages of agro-forestry
  4. The illustrations below are techniques of harvesting agroforestry trees. Study them carefully and

then answer the questions below:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the harvesting techniques represented by techniques A and B

(b) Give an example of a tree species suitable for technique B and C as a method of harvesting

  1. State four factors considered when choosing trees for Agroforestry
  2. (a) Five characteristics of trees used in agroforestry are;

(b) The benefits of agroforestry are:

  1. Name four forms of agro- forestry
  2. Give four characteristics that good agro-forestry tree should posses

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ANSWERS SECTION 1

 

INTRODUCTION TO AGRICULTURE

 

  1. two factors which characterize intensive farming
  • Small farms
  • Huge capital
  • Skilled labour
  • Produce for sale

Mechanization done

  1. three reasons why organic farming is encouraged in farming
  • Cheap
  • Environmental friendly

No chemical residues in produce

  1. two ways in which Agriculture contributes to industrial development.

– Provide raw materials for industries.

– Provide market for industrial goods.

– Is a source of capital for starting industries.

  1. four ways by which wind affects the growth of crops.

– Causes physical damage to crops.

– Cause rapid spread of diseases/ pests/ weeds.

– Can cause water stress as a result of evaporation.

– Causes stress of crops due to chilling caused cold winds.

– Encourage transpiration hence water and mineral uptake.

  • Agriculture – rearing of fish in fish ponds
  1. One physical characteristic used in classifying soil is:
  • Colour,
  • Texture,
  • Structure
  1. Four advantages of organic farming
  • Environmental friendly
  • Products do not have organic farming
  • Products do not have organic chemical residue
  • Improve soil structure
  • Replenishes nutrients in the soil as it uses organic manure
  • Enhances soil water retention
  • Provides food for soil microbes
  • Enhances soil water infiltration
  1. Two conditions under which shifting cultivation is practiced are:
  • Can only be practiced where land is abundant
  • Practiced where population is sparse
  • Practiced where number of livestock per units low (2 ½mks)
  1. Four factors that determine the time of planting a crop

(a) Olericulture – production of vegetables

  • Floriculture – production of flowers

(b) Apiculture – bee keeping

  • Agriculture – rearing of fish in fish ponds

 

 

 

 

FACTORS WHICH INFLUENCE AGRICULTURE

  1. two roles of humus in the soil that are beneficial to crops
  • Provide nutrients
  • Increase water holding capacity
  • Increase soil temperature

Neutral soil PH

  1. a) five activities that may be  undertaken in organic farming
  • Mulching
  • Apply manure
  • Use medicinal plants to control parasites and diseases
  • Crop rotation
  • Rear livestock on natural organically grown pasture
  • Physical/ cultural/ biological/ pests, weeds and disease control
  1. four effects of temperature on crop growth

Low temp-slow growth rate

-increase incidence of negative infection e.g. CBD

-improve quality of some crop

High temp-cause wilting

-increase growth rate

-improve quality of some crops

-increase pest and disease incidences (1/2×4=2mks)

  1. four ways by which wind affects the growth of crops.

– Causes physical damage to crops.

– Cause rapid spread of diseases/ pests/ weeds.

– Can cause water stress as a result of evaporation.

– Causes stress of crops due to chilling caused cold winds.

– Encourage transpiration hence water and mineral uptake.

  1. Two factors related to light that affect crop production and distribution in Kenya:-
  • Light intensity
  • Light duration

–     Light wavelength

  1. The environmental conditions that may lead to low crop yields
  • Poor soil fertility /infertile soil
  • Damage by hailstorms
  • Less rainfall/unreliable/drought
  • Poor soil type resulting into leaching or water logging
  • Inappropriate soil PH
  • Inappropriate temperature (too low or high)
  • Excessive wind leading to increase in water loss from the soil
  • Extreme relative humidity
  • Extreme of light intensity
  • Topography / some attitudes e.g. very high may limit crop growth ( 1mk x any 7pts = 7mks)
  1. – Rainfall
  • Soil
  • Topography
  • Light
  • Wind
  1. One physical characteristic used in classifying soil is:
  • Colour,
  • Texture,
  • Structure

 

 

 

  1. Four advantages of organic farming
  • Environmental friendly
  • Products do not have organic farming
  • Products do not have organic chemical residue
  • Improve soil structure
  • Replenishes nutrients in the soil as it uses organic manure
  • Enhances soil water retention
  • Provides food for soil microbes
  • Enhances soil water infiltration ( 4x ½ = 2mks)
  1. (a) The aim of the experiment was:- to show presence of living organisms in the soil

(b) observations were:

  • Flask D  – Limewater turns milky/turbid        (1mk)
  • Flask E – Lime water remains clear   (1mk)

(c)  The reason for the observation in flask D is:-

Carbon dioxide which turns water milky in flask D would have been produced only during the respiration of living organisms present in fresh soil

  1. – It may have hard pan which interfere with water infiltration
  2. a) – Light duration
  • Light intensity
  • Light wave length ( ½ x3=1 ½ mks)
  1. b)  Evapotranspiration
  • Presence of pest
  1. a) – E – Single grained structure

– F – Granular structure                                                                                    (1×1=1 mk)

  1.  b)        i) Humus with clay                                                                                          (1×1=1 mk)
  2. ii) Air space (1×1=1 mk)

c)-  Colour affects soil texture and hence micro- organisms in the soil Ö

– Texture – affects drainage, aeration and capillary

– Structure – affects aeration and root penetration

  1. three physical characteristics of soil (1 1/2mks)
  • Soil structure
  • Soil texture
  • Soil colour
  1. a) State merits of horizon A
  • source of plant nutrients
  • support/anchor the crops
  • store of water for the crops
  • sources of soil micro organism
  1. b) State distinct features of horizon B
  • deficient of humus(nutrients)
  • contain leached nutrients
  • contains more compact soil particles
  • presence of hard pans in  some soils
  1. c) Transitional zone-this is a zone bordering two adjacent layer of soil profile

i)Weathered rock

Importance

  • Give rise  to sub soil
  • Source of minerals
  • Determine mineral content of  soil and type  of soil

16

  • Low temperatures encourages crop diseases such as leaf rust
  • Low temperatures may increase or lower the quality of farm produce
  • High temperatures hastens maturity/ improves the quality/ lower the quality
  • Increases the rate of evapo transpiration which may result loss plant moisture/ leading to wilting of crops
  • Movement of animals in large numbers
  • Decomposition of plant and animal remains by soil micro- organisms
  • Physical breaking of rocks by roots of higher plants
  • Man’s activities e.g. cultivation, mining and road construction
  • Mixing up of soil by animals e.g. earth worms and
  1. – Temperature/ Altitude

– Soil type;

– Prevailing winds;

– Rainfall;        (4x ½ =2mks)

  1. – It influences the movement of the weathered materials hence affecting the depth of soil development;
  2. two importance of parent’s material in soil profile
  • Determine  soil characteristics
  • Determine  soil  depth

Determine  soil  nutrients

  1. four ways of modifying soil temperature in crop production
  • Mulching
  • Pruning
  • Shading of crops
  • Irrigation (4x ½ mks)
  1. a) two factors that   affect  selectivity of herbicides
  • Stage of plants  growth
  • Plants morphology and anatomy
  • Mode  of action
  • Environmental factors (2×1=2mks)
  1. b) Name two farming practice that cause water pollution
  2. four factors that influence soil formation
  • Parents  rock  material
  • Climate
  • Topography
  • Biotic/organic/living organism
  1. – Drainage

-Aeration

-Water-holding capacity

-capillary

  1. -large animals e.g. Buffaloes

-Man activities e.g. farming

-Root pressure of plants

-Burrowing animals e.g moles, termites

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION I (LAND PREPARATION)

 

  1. three factors that determine depth of ploughing during land preparation
  • Crop to be planted
  • Implement available

Type of soil

  1. Four reasons for cultivating land before planting.

– To improve soil aeration.

– To improve germination.

– Destroy weeds.

– Destroy weeds.

– Incorporate organic matter in the soil.

– Increase water infiltration.

  1. (a)Is a situation in which least possible cultivation operations are carried out in crop

production.

(b) – Clearing the land / bush clearing.

– Using appropriate chemicals to kill the existing vegetation.

– Weeding using herbicides.

– Planting / drilling seeds directly into the stubble of previous crop.

  1. (a) – Harrow the land to a fine filth;

– Harrow during the dry or before the rains;

– Make the seed be weed – free / ensure clean seed bed;

– Firm the seed bed using rollers after sowing;

– Select a desirable variety of seed for the ecological zone,;

– Sow seeds at the onset rains/ early planting;

– Apply phosphatic fertilizers at appropriate rate of 200 – 300 kgs/ ha at planting time;

– Drill or broadcast  the seeds evenly;

– Use a recommended seed rate for the variety / seed rate of 1.5 – 2.0 kh/ha pure seeds;

– Bury seeds at 2 ½ times their diameter;

– Control weeds by uprooting/ apply a suitable herbicide;

– Apply nitrogenous fertilizers about 6 weeks after germination in split application.

– Avoid grazing when the pasture is too young.

– Practice light grazing in the field phase of pasture establishment.  (10 x 1 = 10 mk)

(b) – Select seeds of  the  same size, variety, age and free from pests and diseases.

– Plant seeds at the same time.

– Prepare the whole field to required uniform tilth.

– Plant at the right moisture content of the soil / irrigation uniformly.

– Treat seeds before planting i.e. break dormancy.

– Plant at the correct depth.                                                                                        (5 x 1 = 5 mks)

(c) – Soil moisture content.

– Type of soil.

– Cost of operation.

– Size of seed/ type of planting material/ type of crop.

– Type of machinery available / use of tractors.

– Topography / gradient of the land/ liability of soil erosion.

– Skills of the operator.

– Initial conditions of the land/ the cropping history of the land.

– Time available to carry out the operation before planting.

  1. Four physical conditions of the seedbed that need to be changed to facilitate

Germination

  • Size of soil clods (clods (made small or medium size
  • Appropriate soil depth
  • Soil looseness
  • Should be weed free

–    Soil moisture content improved

 

  1. Four importance of sub soiling as a tertiary operation
  • Brings leached nutrients to the surface
  • Breaks hard pans
  • Promotes aeration of the soil
  • Promotes water infiltration

–    Ensures better root penetration

 

  1. Four advantages of rolling in seedbed preparation are:
  • Press the seeds against the soil moisture
  • Controls soil erosion
  • Ensure uniform germination
  • Controls removal of small seeds by wind
  • Breaks large soil cods
  1. four disadvantages of minimum tillage
  • The less porous surface increased soil erosion especially  in heavily sols
  • Difficulty in weed control
  • Speed of planting to reduce due to large amount of residues in the soil and big clods

Leads  to accumulating of soil borne  pests and diseases

  1. a)      – ridging
  2. b) (i) Encourage tuber expansion
  • Allow easy harvesting of crop roots

(ii)     Rolling

  • Leveling
  • Leads to timely planting
  • Weeds are appropriately controlled especially the perennial such as couch grass
  • Farmers take advantage of availability of labour reducing the cost of labour
  • Control of soil borne pests

Gives time for better organic decomposition

  1. – By repeated cultivation at the same depth;

– Cultivating the soil when wet using heavy machinery;

  1. – Type and size of planting material;

– Topography/slope f land;

– Soil moisture content;

– (Initial) condition of land/amount of vegetation on the land;

-Capital available

– Type of implement used;

  1. It is the least number of cultivation operations either during preparation of the seed bed or

during the management of the crops.

  • Market demand
  • Type of crop to be planted
  • Moisture condition of the soil and rainfall pattern
  • Prevalence of pests and diseases
  • Prevalence of weeds
  1. two factors that determine the number of cultivation on a field before it     is ready for planting
  • purpose of crop
  • moisture content
  • concentration  of desired  chemical
  • weather
  • market demand
  1. – Enables crop to benefit maximumly from available moisture

-Crops make use of nitrogen flush available at that time

-Crops fetch high market prices

-Crops escape from pests and diseases

-There is high vigour in crops that resist diseases

-Ensures timely harvesting

  1. – type of crop to be planted

-Implements available

-Type of soil

-Climatic conditions

WATER SUPPLY, IRRIGATION AND DRAINAGE

  1. State two reasons for treating water for us on the farm
  • Remove chemical impurities
  • Remove foreign material
  • Remove disease earning organisms

Remove bad smell & taste

  1. State three reasons for draining swampy land before growing crops
  • Increase soil volume
  • Improve aeration
  • Increases activities of micro organisms
  • Control erosion

Reduce toxic substance in soil

3 .         a )Sprinkle irrigation

  1.  b) four advantages of the above irrigation system
  • Little water required
  • Done on nay topography
  • Control weeds between rows
  • Water under low pressure
  • Prevent fungal diseases
  1. c) three factors that determine the type of irrigation on the farm
  • Where tree crops are planted
  • Little water supply
  • Enough capital for the method is available
  • Slope land                                                                                                       3x ½ = 1 ½ mks
  1. d) two disadvantages o f the above system of irrigation
  • Difficult to carry field mechanization
  • Require a lot of capital
  • Require clean water
  • Regular repair of broken pipes and blocked pipes

Applicable where tree plants are grown

  1. a) Artificial√ application of water to the soil  surface for purpose of supplying enough

moisture√  for plants growth(mark  whole)

  1. b) Surface,

overhead,

subsurface,

drip/trickle

  1. a) four use of water on the farm
  • Irrigation
  • Domestic use
  • Diluting  chemicals
  • Construction work
  • Watering  livestock and washing buildings
  • Processing  farm produce(1/2×4=2mks)
  1. b) four methods of harvesting water on the farm (2mks)
  • roof cantonment
  • weirs
  • rock cantonment
  • dams
  • ponds

 

  1. c) the stages involved in water treatment process
  • filtration of  water intake
  • softening
  • coagulation and sedimentation
  • filtration in  tanks
  • chlorination  storage  (1/2×6=3mks)
  1. four uses of water in the farm.

– For diluting chemicals used to control pests.

– For watering livestock.

– For watering plants e.g. irrigation.

– For washing utensils, calf pen bully sheds.

– For domestic use e.g. drinking, cooking.

– For rearing fish.

– For recreation

– Processing of farm produce.

– In construction of buildings.

  1. two types of irrigation used in Kenya.

– Overhead / sprinkler.

– Surface / Flood / furrow/ basin.

– Drip/ trickle.

  1. Four disadvantages cambered beds
  • High cost of maintenance
  • Provides breeding ground for vectors of malaria
  • Prevents proper mechanization of the farm

–     Labour intensive

(c) Stage I:      Filtration of water intake.

– Water from source river is made to pass through a series of sieves.

– Large particles of impurities are trapped by the sieves.

– Water then enters into the large pipe to be directed to the mixing chamber.

Stage II:          Softening of the water.

  • Water circulates in the mixing chamber and doses of soda ash to soften the water.

Stage III:         Coagulation and sedimentation

  • Water is passed through coagulation tank where fresh air enters to remove bad smell/ chloride of lime used.

 

  • Water stays for 36 hours thus solid particles settle and bilharzias causing organisms killed.
  • Alum added to coagulated solid particles which settle at the bottom.

Stage IV:         Filtration

  • Water is passed through filtration tank with layers of sand and gravel to filter it.
  • Water leaving the filtration tank is clean.

Stage V:          Chlorination

  • Water is passed through chlorination tank where chlorine is added.
  • Micro-organisms in the water are killed by chlorine.

Stage VI:         Storage

– The treated water is stored in large overhead tanks before distribution and use.

  1. – Improves soil aeration
  • Raises soil temperature
  • Increases activities of micro- organisms
  • Increases soil volume

–     Prevent accumulation of poisonous substances in the soil

  1. – Semi-rotary
  • Hydram
  • Piston/ reciprocating
  • Centrifugal
  • Rotary
  1. Four examples of working capital in maize production are;
  • Seeds
  • fertilizer
  • Herbicides
  • Pesticides
  • Fuel fragticides
  • Casual labour  (4x ½  = 2mks)
  1. four types of water pumps which can be used in the farm
  • Centrifugal/rotadynathic pumps
  • Piston/reciprocating pump
  • Semi-Rotan pump
  • Hydram pump
  1. four methods of drainage

Open ditches

  • Under ground drain pipes
  • French drains
  • Cambered beds
  • Pumping
  • Planting of trees/planting of trees such as Eucalyptus
  1. A dam is a barrier constructed a cross a  river  or a dry valley to hold water and raise its level

to form a reservoir  or  lake

  • A weir is a barrier constructed across a river to raise  the level  of water and still allow water to flow over it
  1. – Giving subsidies by reducing the cost of production inputs

Fixes prices of the related products

  1. – Piping is the conveyance of water through pipes from one place to the other while pumping is the lifting of water from one point to another by use of mechanical force;

17.

  • To facilitate the action of soil living organisms
  • To check or reduce leaching
  • To moderate or increase soil temperature
  • To reduce accumulation of dissolved soil salts
  • To reduce erosion rate of top soil
  • To improve soil structure
  • To increase effectiveness of phosphorous fertilizer and conserve soil nitrogen
  • As a way of reclaiming areas such as coastal plains and the river belts which may have high water tables
  • In rice fields, water should be controlled by draining the water for a different crop cycle.
  • Allowing livestock to graze near water sources often results in organic waste products being washed into the water ways.
  • Fertilizer application
  • Pesticides
  • Over grazing
  • Irrigation
  • Over cultivation
  • Use of farm machinery
  1. a) i) A – Drop/ trickle irrigation
  2. ii) B – Sprinkler/ overhead irrigation
  3. b) Two advantages of method A over method B
  • Conserves water
  • Does not damage flowers, leaves
  • Does not cause splash/ splatter irrigation
  • Does not encourage spread of fungal diseases from crop to crop
  • Does not encourage the growth of weeds all over the field
  • Agro- chemical can be dissolved in the water and directly applied to the crop
  1. c) i) Cotton wool
  2. ii) Rough sand
  3. four reasons for practicing irrigation
  • Increase crop production by  applying adequate  moisture
  • To reclaim  dry areas
  • To meet  moisture requirement  of crops
  • To produce and  benefit  from off  season crops
  • Growing  of paddy vice
  1. – to prevent rotting

-For processing

– For long storage

– Prevent pest and disease attack

  1. (a) Kill germs

(b) For sedimentation

  1. S- French drainage T- Vambedred peds                M – soil- stones

 

SOIL FERTILITY 1 (ORGANIC MANURE)

  1. two roles of humus in the soil that are beneficial to crops
  • Provide nutrients
  • Increase water holding capacity
  • Increase soil temperature

Neutral soil PH

  1. four characteristic of fertile soil (2mks)
  • Well drained
  • Correct PH
  • Good water  holding capacity
  • Adequate  plant  nutrients
  • Free from pest   and diseases
  • Correct soil nutrients
  1. a) Q-stick√

Function-checking temperature√ and other conditions within the heap

  1. b) i) Top soil-introduces organisms to effect composition√
  2. ii) Wood ash-increases the level of phosphorus and potassium√

iii) Rotten manure-provides food for micro-organism√

  1. The illustration below shows a heap system of making compost manure. Study it and answer

the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) use of arrows indicate how the decomposing material should be transferred from one heap

to another till the manure is applied in the field.

b)- 3  – 6 wks

  1. c) one reason for turning the material in the heap regularly.

– Proper decomposition.

– Facilitate air circulation.

– Microbial activities.

  1. d) two reasons why it is necessary to sprinkle water on the heap.

– To regulate the internal temperatures in the heap.

– Create moist environment for microbial activity.

  1. Four indicators of well-decomposed manure
  • Absence of bad odour and instead the smell of forest soil
  • Light weight
  • Brown colour
  • Moist but not wet
  • – Original nature of material not noticeable (½ x 4pts = 2mks)
  1. (a) Two factors that should be considered when siting a compost manure heap are:-
  • Accessibility
  • Drainage
  • Direction of prevailing wind
  • Size of the farm/proximity

(b) Five advantages of rotation grazing are:   (5mks)

  • Livestock with maximum use of pastures
  • Reduces build up of parasites and diseases
  • Animal waste evenly distributed
  • Pasture area given time to regenerate
  • Excess pasture conserved
  • Possible to apply fertilizer in the parts of the pasture which are not in use (5×1=5mks)
  1. It is movement of dissolved nutrients front p soil to lower horizons of soil becoming

Unravel able to crops

  • Improves soil structure
  • Adds nutrients
  • Increases cation exchange capacity
  • Increases microbial activity in the soil
  • Improves water holding capacity/ reduces leaching
  • Buffers soil PH

Moderates soil temperature

  1. (a) (i) Preparation of farm yard manure:-
  • Collect animal waste/refuse/dung and urine;
  • Collect animal bedding/litter and other rotten plant residues;
  • Store collected materials under roof/shed to prevent leaching and oxidization of nutrients;
  • Turnover the materials regularly;
  • Sprinkle water if dry;
  • leave the material to rote completely before use; (6×1=6mks)

(ii) Preparation of Hay

  • Cut the grass /legume in the field when 50% of it is starting to flower;
  • The cut forage is spread in the field for four continuous days (sunny days)
  • The cut forage is turned daily for even for four uniform drying;
  • Gather the dried material in a central spot;
  • Bale the material;
  • Properly store the baled hay (6×1=6mks)

 

 

 

(b) Factors to consider in timely planting of annual crops

  • Escape from serious weed competition;
  • Utilization of early rainfall;
  • Exploitation of Nitrogen flush in the soil that has accumulated during dry season;
  • Escape from serious pest + disease attack e.g. stalk borer in maize;
  • Fetch high market prices when harvested early;
  • Reduce competition for labour during labour peak period;
  • For harvesting season to coincide with dry period to reduce losses e.g. cotton

Early planting means early farming/calendar for the farmer to enable him /her to finish up other farm activities;         (8×1=8mks)

 

  1. i) A ration containing 18% protein is  to be  made  from  maize and sunflower cake. Given

that maize contains 7% protein, and sunflower seed cake 34% protein. Use Pearson square

methods to calculate the value of feedstuffs to be used to prepare 100kgs of the feed (3mks)

  1. ii) two other methods that can be used to formulate feed ration (2mks)
  • Linear programming
  • Trial and error

Graphical method.

 

AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS

(BASIC CONCEPTS AND FARM RECORDS)

  1. (a) – Help to determine the value of the farm/ determine assets and liabilities.

– Provide history of the farm.

– Assist in planning and budgeting in various fields.

– Helps to detect losses or theft in the farm.

– Assists when sharing losses or profits (dividends)for communal owned farms/ partnership.

– Help to settle disputes in the farm among heirs.

– Help to support insurance claim e.g. against fire and theft.

– Provide labour information like terminal benefits, NSSF due, Sacco dues for all employees.

– Help to compare the performance of different enterprises within a farm or other farms.

– Help in the assessment of income tax to avoid over or under taxation.

– Records, helps to show whether the farm business is making profit or losses. This information

helps in obtaining credit.                                                                                      (10 x 1 = 10 mks)

 

  1. (a)Health record

(b) Next date of treatment /vaccination

  • – Occurrence of the disease
  • – Response to treatment ( ½ x 2 =1mk)

(c) – Select and cull animals on health ground

  • Know the course of action to be taken in the event of a disease and maintenance of good health
  • Know the prevalent disease

–    Calculate cost of treatment

 

3          Four uses of farm records are;

  • Used to compare the performance of different enterprise
  • Shows history of the farm
  • Help in planning and budgeting of farm operations
  • Assessment of income tax
  • Calculation of profits and losses
  • Securing loans
  • Settling disputes where no will is left
  1. four uses of farm records
  • Help compare performance  of different enterprises within  the farm  and other farms
  • Shows the history of the farm
  • Guide a farmer in  planning and budgeting  of farm operations
  • Helps to detect losses or theft on the farm
  • Helps to avoid over taxation or under taxation
  • Helps to determine the value of the farm in terms of assets and liabilities
  • Helps in sharing of profits and losses  in partnership
  • Helps  in setting disputes among heirs in absents of a will
  • Shows whether the farm business is making profit or losses
  • Helps in supporting insurance claims of farm assets
  • Provide labour information
  • Understanding the technical language used in agriculture
  • Application of the right amounts of inputs
  • Correct/ appropriate measurements in farming

Uses of appropriate technology

 

  1. (a) Milk production record (1×1=1mk)

(b) Determine prevalent diseases;

– Establish treatment of diseases;

– Establish disease control method;

– Determine cost of medication/health care;

– Determine the health status of different animals;     (4×1=4mks)

 

(c) Price trends/market situation

– Production techniques

– Labour trends

– Breeds of dairy cattle

– Production constraints/risks and certainties

  • Field
  • Area of the land
  • Season
  • Crop planted
  • Crop variety
  • Land preparation date
  • Type of fertilizer at planting
  • Type of fertilizer at top dressing
  • Seed rate used
  • Type of  weed and date of weed control
  • Type of pest and date of pest control
  • Date of harvesting
  • Remarks    (Any 4)

 

  1. List two events occur during induction stroke in a four stroke engine. (1mk)
  • Piston moves down from TDC
  • Exhaust valve is closed
  • Inlet valve is open
  • Air / fuel mixture get into combustion chamber
  • Piston reaches BDC. (4x ½ = 2mks)

 

  1. – Where the resources are free

– where there is no alternative

– where the alternatives are very many.

 

SOIL FERTILITY II (IN ORGANIC FERTILIZERS)

 

  1. four advantages of applying lime in clay soil
  • Lower soil acidity
  • Increase calcium content
  • Hastens decomposition of organic matter
  • Improve soil structure/ improve drainage
  • Facilitates availability and absorption of nitrogen and phosphorous
  • Improve legume nodulation and nitrogen fixation

Increase multiplication of micro- organisms

  1. a) i) Sulphur- SO₄²⁻,SO₂
  2. ii) Nitrogen-NO₃⁻,NH₄

iii) Carbon-CO₂

  1. iv) Magnesium-mg²⁺
  2. b) three effects of nitrogen to plants (1 1/2mks)
  • delayed maturity
  • excessive succulence
  • excessive vegetative growth
  • weak stems
  • lodging
  1. a) The quality of sulphate ammonia fertilizer the farmer will need for 10 hectares (1mk)

100kg SA supplies   21kg N

1ha requires 150kg SA

10ha requires (150×10) kg SA

= 1500kg SA in 10ha

  1. b) The number of 50kg bags of fertilizer he will purchase (1mk)

50kg fill 1 bag

  • 1 x 1500=30bags (1)

50

  1. two disadvantages of using farm yard manure

– It’s bulky hence difficult to apply by one laborer.

– It may spread weeds.

– It may spread diseases.

– It releases nutrients slowly.

  1. four factors which influence the stage at which the crops are harvested.

– Purpose of the crop / maturity.

– Moisture content.

– Concentration of certain chemicals.

– Water condition.

– Market demand.

  1. a) – Calcium Ammonium Nitrate CAN.

b)- Knee high

– 30 – 45 cm height.

  1. c) Calculate the amount of K2O contained in 400 kg of a compound fertilizer 25 : 10 : 5.

5 kg of K2O is in 100 kg of 25 : 10: 5

∴ 400 kg of compound fertilizer

400 x 5            = 20 kg of K2O

100

  1. Two pieces of information that soil sample should have before being taken to the laboratory

for testing are:-

–     Name of the farmer

  • Address of the farmer
  • The type of test to be carried out

–      Date of sampling

  1. A compound fertilizer bag has the labels 20-20-10. What do the figures stand for
  • 20 – 20% Nitrogen (N)
  • 20 – 20% Phosphorous Pentoxide (P2O5)

–     0- 0% Potassium Oxide (K2O)

  1. Four functions of sulphur in crops are:-
  • Amino acids/protein synthesis
  • Formulating enzymes and hormones
  • Increase oil content and hormones
  • Needed for formation of chlorophyll

Needed in carbohydrate metabolism

  1. – Improves soil PH hence microbial activities
  • Allows wide production of different crop varieties
  • Improves soil aeration
  • Improves drainage

Improves soil structure

  1. -Liming
  •  use of alkaline fertilizer (2 ½ = 1mk)

 

  1. a) -Type of crop
  • Fertilizer characters
  • Type of soil
  • Environmental condition ( ½ x3=1 ½  mks)
  1. b) – Avoid unique sites e.g. compost, along fence
  • Remove all vegetation parts
  • Mix the samples thoroughly

Make as many samples as possible

  1. three functions of nitrogen in crops                                                                       (1 1//2mks)
  • Protein synthesis/formation
  • Forms part of chlorophyll molecule
  • Encourages vegetative growth
  • Regulate availability of phosphorus and potassium in plant
  • Increase to  size of grains and protein  content increases
  1. Fertilizer ratio is the proportion of various nutrients in a fertilizer grade is the percentage of

nutrients in a fertilizer;

(b)- Nitrogen

– Calcium

– Potassium

– Magnesium

– Sulphur

 

  1. (a) Diagonal/transverse method; (1×1=1mk)

(b) – Avoid contamination/use sterilized container;

– Avoid sampling soil from unusual sites e,g ant hills

– Avoid mixing top soil with sub-soil;            (3×1=3mks)

(c) – To determine the nutrient status of te soil;

– To determine the soil PH/type of fertilizer to add to the soil/lime to add to the soil;

– To determine the type of crop to grow;

– May help in diagnosing low crop yield/mineral deficiency;

  1. Area – 10×20 =200m² (1mk)

100,000m²   require 80kgs of 20-20-10

200m² will require

200 x  80

10,000

═ 1.6kgs                          (1mk)

  1. a) A compound of fertilizer  has a fertilizer grade of 25:10:5.calculate  the a mount

of phosphorus fore sent in 400kg of this fertilizer

N:P:K

25:10:5

If 10kg P2O5√1 = 100kg NPK

?             = 400kg NPK√1

= 400 x 10

100

= 40kg P2O5√1  (3 steps x 1=3mks)

  1. b) i)    – zigzag method
  2. ii) xx –traverse/diagonal

iii) State three importance of carrying out soil sampling and testing

  • determine  the type  of  crop  to grow
  • determine the  type of fertilizer  to be used
  • determine  type of  nutrients  in the  soil (3×1=3mks)
  1. (a) Lacks one of the major fertilizer NPK elements

(b) – The soils could be very acidic

– Too much rainfall.

  1. (a) Random/zigzag soil sampling

(b) – old manure heaps

– Ant hills

-Dead furors

-Fence lines

-Cattle bomas

(c)  – Clear vegetation

– Mark points using pegs

Collect top soil and sap soil n different paper bag.

– Dry the soil and mix thoroughly

– Sent dispatch to laboratory for fasting

 

 

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION II (PLANTING)

  1. two reasons for seed treatment of tree species before planting
  • Break dormancy

Control pests and diseases

  1. three factors that determine spacing of beans
  • Type of soil
  • Moisture in soil
  • Species/ size of bean plant
  • Machinery to be used
  • Purpose of beans

Stand in the field

  1. four reasons for using certified seeds for planting
  • High yielding
  • Quality produce
  • High germination percentage
  • Grow faster

 

  1. a)      A   Banana sucker

B  Stem tubes

C     Bulb

D Stem cutting

  1.  b)        Chitting
  2.  c) four advantages of vegetative propagation on crop production
  • Grow faster
  • True copy of mother plant
  • Have no dormancy period
  • Easy to obtain 4x ½ = 2 mks
  1. Differentiate between hybrid and composite
Hybrid composite
Seeds produced  by

crossing  inbreedlines

and controlled pollination√

Seeds  produced  by  growing  different

varieties together under uncontrolled

pollination√     2//

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Germinated seed x100√

Total seeds planted

=90 x100                              (2)

100  = 90%√

  1. b) Given that maize is planted at a spacing of 75cm by 25cm, calculate the plant population in a plot measuring 4m by 3m

plant ppl = land area

Spacing

4mx3m

75x25cm

400cmx300cm

75cmx25cm           = 64plants√             (2)

  1. four qualities of a mother plant which should be considered when selecting vegetative

material for propagation.

  • High quality.
  • High yielding.
  • Disease resistance / healthy/ disease tree.

Fast growth/ fast maturity.

  1. – Select seeds of the  same size, variety, age and free from pests and diseases.

– Plant seeds at the same time.

– Prepare the whole field to required uniform tilth.

– Plant at the right moisture content of the soil / irrigation uniformly.

– Treat seeds before planting i.e. break dormancy.

– Plant at the correct depth.                                                                                        (5 x 1 = 5 mks)

  1. two factors which determine the depth of planting

–      Soil type

  • Size of seed
  • Soil moisture content

–    The type of germination

  1. – Reduces leaching
  • Improves water holding capacity
  • Improves soil structure
  • Suffer soil pH
  • Moderate soil temperature
  • Increases microbial activities
  • Increases cation exchange capacity

–    Improve fertility of the soil after decomposition

 

  1. Area

Spacing

Tea population (10,000×2

1.5mx 0.75)                 1

20,000m²

1.125m²                           1

= 17,777 plants

Needed in carbohydrate metabolism

  1. Four reasons why training is important in some crops
  • Facilitate field practices of spraying and harvesting
  • Improves crop quality by preventing solving
  • Enable crop grow in the required direction
  • Improve yield
  • Control pest and diseases

 

  1. Four factors that influence the depth of planting are:
  • The size of the seed
  • Soil moisture content
  • Type of soil /soil texture
  • Type of germination

14.

  • Avoid mixing with foreign materials
  • Harvesting during the dry weather
  • During harvesting separate grade A and B

Don’t put in gunny/sisal bags

Needed in carbohydrate metabolism

  1. Four reasons why training is important in some crops
  • Facilitate field practices of spraying and harvesting
  • Improves crop quality by preventing solving
  • Enable crop grow in the required direction
  • Improve yield
  • Control pest and diseases
  1. Four factors that influence the depth of planting are:
  • The size of the seed
  • Soil moisture content
  • Type of soil /soil texture
  • Type of germination

17

  • Avoid mixing with foreign materials
  • Harvesting during the dry weather
  • During harvesting separate grade A and B

Don’t put in gunny/sisal bags

  1. – Moisture content of soil
  • Use of which the crop is to be put
  • Number of seeds per hole
  • Prevalence of certain diseases/ pests
  • Machinery to be used in subsequent operations
  • Fertility status of the soil
  1. Four advantages of rolling in seedbed preparation are:
  • Press the seeds against the soil moisture
  • Controls soil erosion
  • Ensure uniform germination
  • Controls removal of small seeds by wind
  • Breaks large soil cods
  1. two factors that effect rooting of cuttings in crop production
  • Temperature
  • Relative humidity
  • Light  intensity
  • Oxygen  supply
  • Chemical treatment
  • Leaf area
  • Breaking seed dormancy
  • Seed dressing

Seed inoculation

  • Breaking seed dormancy
  • Seed dressing

Seed inoculation

  1. Under sowing is the establishment of pasture under a cover crop usually maize while over sowing is the establishment of pasture legume in an existing grains pasture
  2. a) Stem cutting

b)

  • High yielding
  • High quality
  • Good rooting ability
  • Adaptable to the ecological zone
  1. c)
  • Make top cut near the auxiliary bud as close as possible and sloping away from it
  • Lower cut must be sloping at an angle and be 2.5 – 4cm below the leaf
  • Single leaf internodes cuttings must be kept shaded and wet floating in water from the time of cutting to planting

 

25        a) (30 X 15) cm2  / 30cm X 15cm

  1. b)

4M – 0.6 M   + 1

0.3M

3.4    +  1

0.3= 12 raws

  1. c) Plant population

3M – 0.6    +1

0.15

= 2.4    + 1

0.15

= 16 plants X 12 raws = 192 plants

  1. – Temperature;

– Relative humidity;

– Light intensity;

– Oxygen supply;

– Leaf area;

– Chemical treatment;

  1. Selection of mother plants (tea);

– Select healthy bushes/free of pests and diseases;

– Select high quality bushes;

– Select those which are high yielding;

– Select those with good rooting ability;

– select those which adapt to a wide range of ecological conditions; (4×1=4mks)

Preparation of planting materials

  • Prune the selected tea bushes and leave unchecked for six months;
  • Select and cut good branches for making cuttings
  • Obtain the cuttings form the middle of the branches/discard the brown and the hard bottom part/ the green soft top part
  • Make single leaf internodes cutting carefully 2.5-4cm long;
  • Make slant cut with the use of scalpel/sharp knife taking away from the node;
  • Make top cutting near the auxiliary bud as much as ossible;
  • Keep the cuttings wet in the water to avoid dehydration until they are planted;
  • Keep the cutting under the nursery;

Raising of tea seedlings in the nursery

  • Plant cuttings on rooting medium in polythene sleeves/sleeves measure 25 x 7.5-10cm and sealed
  • Rooting medium consists of fertile sub-soil and phosphate fertilizer;
  • Plant single leaf internodes per polythene sleeve,
  • Place the sleeves in the vegetative propagation units,
  • Erect wooden hoops over the sleeves cuttings, then place polythene sheet over it/erect shade over the nursery;
  • Water sleeved seedlings every 3weeks/main high humidity;
  • Uproot weeds when they appear;
  • Hardening off done 4 months after raising (9×1=9mks)
  1. Factors to consider in timely planting of annual crops
  • Escape from serious weed competition;
  • Utilization of early rainfall;
  • Exploitation of Nitrogen flush in the soil that has accumulated during dry season;
  • Escape from serious pest + disease attack e.g. stalk borer in maize;
  • Fetch high market prices when harvested early;
  • Reduce competition for labour during labour peak period;
  • For harvesting season to coincide with dry period to reduce losses e.g. cotton

Early planting means early farming/calendar for the farmer to enable him /her to finish up other farm activities;         (8×1=8mks)

29.

  • It is wasteful because a higher seed rate is used.
  • It is not possible to use machines.
  • It is not possible to establish plant population.
  • Lack of uniformity in seed establishment.
  1. (i) Seed inoculation;
  • It is the treatment of legume seeds with Nitro-culture/artificial bacteria to increase their Nitrogen fixation in the soil ,if grown in Nitrogen deficie soils.

(ii)Chitting;- Breaking of dormancy in Irish potatoes before planting

(iii) Tipping;- Removal of three leaves and a bud from each shoot above the required height of the

table in tea during plucking table formation / formation of a uniform and flat plucking table in tea.

  1. two advantages of producing crops by use of seeds over vegetative propaganda
  • Seed treatment is easier
  • Seeds can  be  stored for a long time
  • Faster and uniform germination
  • Mechanization of farm operation is easy/possible

Application of fertilizer/manure is easy and  can also be mechanized

  1. four ways of preparing planting materials before planting
  • Breaking  seed dormancy
  • Seed dressing
  • Chitting
  • Seed cleaning
  • Seed inoculation

Root trimming  as  in banana  or tree seedlings

CROP PRODUCTION III

NURSERY MANAGEMENT PRACTICES

  1. three methods of grafting that are used in propagation of plants
  • Whip are tongue grafting
  • Side grafting
  • Approach grafting
  • Bark grafting

Notch grafting

  1. two practices done during hardening-off of seedlings in a nursery bed.
  • Gradual removal of shade

Gradual reduce of watering

  1. two methods of budding used in crop propagation (1mk)
  • T-budding
  • Top budding
  • Paten budding

 

  1. four management practices carried out on a nursery bed (2mks)
  • Watering
  • Shading
  • Pest  an  disease control
  • Weed control
  • Mulching
  • Hardening off
  • Pricking out  (1/2×4=2mks)
  1. Two importance of tissue culture in crop propagation
  • Propagate pathogen free plants
  • Appropriate soil depth
  • Soil looseness
  • Should be weed free

–     Soil moisture content improved

  1. – A nursery bed is a portion of land specially prepared to raise seedlings before transplanting while a seedling bed is a specially prepared portion of land for receiving pricked out seedlings from the nursery bed Mark as a whole (1 mk)
  2. Four advantages of under sowing in pasture production
  • Amino acids/protein synthesis
  • Formulation of  enzymes and hormones
  • Increase oil content and hormones
  • Needed for formation of chlorophyll
  • Aid in nitrogen fixation in legumes

Needed in carbohydrate metabolism

  1. Four advantages of under sowing in pasture production
  • Amino acids/protein synthesis
  • Formulation of  enzymes and hormones
  • Increase oil content and hormones
  • Needed for formation of chlorophyll
  • Aid in nitrogen fixation in legumes

Needed in carbohydrate metabolism

  1. (a) The structure is a nursery

(b) Reason for carrying out each of the following practices in the structure shown above is:-

  • Pricking out – to avoid overcrowding /allow seedling to grow strong and healthy transfer seedlings from one nursery to another
  • Hardening off – To prepare seedlings to ecological conditions in the main field/reduce transplanting shock

(c) Three importance of the part labeled A in the above structure    (1/2 x 3= 1 ½ mk)

  • To reduce the amount of water through vaporization
  • To modify nursery temperature
  • To reduce the impact of raindrops/hailstones hence minimizing damage on seedlings
  • Reduce splash erosion
  • Reduce the scorching effect in the seedlings
  • Reduce the scorching effect in the seedlings
  1. a) – Sitting crop nursery
  • Good soil fertility
  • Security against destruction
  • Accessibility
  • Should be near source of water
  • Topography should discourage water logging (1×5=5 mks)

b)- Establishment

  • Prepare fine filth
  • Add manure or fertilizers to the nursery
  • Sterilize soil against soil borne pests/ diseases
  • Shade the nursery bed
  • Ensure nursery is 1m wide
  • Plant seeds in drills and cover with light soil layer (1×5=5 mks)
  1. b) Management practices
  • Mulch to conserve moisture and suppress weeds
  • Water regularly in the morning and afternoon
  • Pricking – remove excess seedlings and transfer to another nursery or use polythene sleeves
  • Weed control – done by hand uprooting
  • Pest and disease control – use clean seeds and apply chemicals as recommended
  • Hardening off – Done by removal of shade
  • 1 week to transplanting to make seedlings survive after transplanting
  1. State four importance of thinning seedlings in the nursery bed
  • To control  spread  of pests and diseases
  • To create space far  other seedlings
  • To avoid  competition for light, nutrients
  • Allow rapid growth of seedlings/vigorous(1/2×4=2mks)
  1. Seedling bed is where overcrowded seedlings from the nursery bed are transferred while

seedbed is the final land where planting materials are raised until they are ready for harvesting.

  1. a) two advantages of having the part labeled J
  • To reduce the amount of water loss through evapo- transpiration
  • To modify the temperature
  • To reduce the impact of the raindrops thereby minimize the damage of seedlings/ reduce splash
  • Retaining water
  1. b) Management practices carried out on the nursery from the time the seedlings emerge to stage of transplanting
  • Proper watering
  • Controlling weeds
  • Hardening off
  • Pricking out

 

CROP PRODUCTION IV

(FIELD MANAGEMENT PRACTICES)

  1. Staking is supporting tall varieties of tomatoes using a stick fixed next to the plant and tied with

sisal string while propping is supporting banana plant with sticks Mark as a whole= 1 mk

  1. five advantages of crop rotation
  • Improves soil fertility: where legumes are included nitrogen is fixed/ added in the soil
  • Control pests and diseases: disrupts the life cycle of certain pests and diseases
  • Control weeds: control weeds which are specific to certain crops e.g. striga in cereals/ cover crops in a rotation will smother certain weeds
  • Better use of the soil nutrients: different crops (due to differing root systems) draw nutrients from varying soils horizons/ different crops require different nutrients
  • Control of soil erosion: cover crops included reduce soil erosion
  • Improve soil structure: When grass lays are included which during the period organic matter will accumulate to enrich the soil and improve soil structure
  1. four factors which influence the stage at which the crops are harvested.

– Purpose of the crop / maturity.

– Moisture content.

– Concentration of certain chemicals.

– Water condition.

– Market demand.

  1. a) B.   –  Single stem pruning system.            (1×1=1mk)
  2. b) Identify the system of pruning in C.

– Multiple stem pruning system.         (1×1=1mk)

  1. c) Outline how pruning in diagram C is carries out.

– Main stem of the seedling is capped/ cut stem at 38 – 60 cm high.

– Two or three suckers are selected and allowed to grow while the rest are removed

  1. Two functions of earthling up in crop production
  • To influence tuber expansion
  • To retain water between the ridges which increases water conservation/infiltration
  • Reduces soil erosion

–    To prevent the greening effect in potatoes

  1. (a) The factors which determine the stage of harvesting of crops
  • Stage maturity of the crops
  • Use of the crop
  • Tastes and preferences of consumers
  • Weather conditions
  • Chemical conditions
  • Chemical concentration of the chemical
  • Moisture content ( 1mk x any 6pts = 6mks)
  1. – Reduces runoff thus increasing amount of water into the soil

Reduces evaporation thus increasing the amount of water retained

  1. – Moisture content of soil
  • Use of which the crop is to be put
  • Number of seeds per hole
  • Prevalence of certain diseases/ pests
  • Machinery to be used in subsequent operations
  • Fertility status of the soil
  1. i) To acclimatized the seedlings to direct light/ conditions in the seedbed
  2. ii) To avoid overcrowding and reduce competition for light.

iii) Produce healthy and strong seedling

  1. iv) To obtain correct plant population
  2. Two factors that determine the stage of harvesting crops are:-
  • Purpose of crop
  • concentration of required chemical

11        a)    –   Weather condition

  • Use/ purpose
  • Stage of growth
  • Concentration of the required chemicals (i.e. tea) ( ½ x4=2 mks)
  1.  b)    –    Proper drying of produce
  • Keeping storage facility/ structure clean
  • Use of pesticides on storage structure
  • Treating produce with pesticides e.g. cereals

Use of rodent guards

  1. Enable controlling over bearing by ensuring required leave ratio
  • Open up canopy for air and light penetration
  • Reduce chemical waste
  • Control pests and diseases
  • Allow other field operation

Give crop desired shape

(c) Which factors are considered when carrying out a crop rotation program?

  1. a) -Removing of chaffs by use of wind

b)i)-  Prevent erosion

  • Add organic matter
  • Conserve soil moisture
  • Raise soil temperature ( ½ mk)
  1. ii) – improve quality of grains by separating them from rest of plant (½ x1= ½ mks)
  2. c) – Root systems of crops
  • Botanical relation of crops
  • Nutrient absorption by plant

Susceptibility to pests, diseases or weeds

  1. a)This is support  given  to crops with  weak stem. So as to grow in the desired direction
  2. b) -Makes the plant to get enough sunlight to manufacture food i.e. prevent shading

-leads to more productivity

-reduced infections of diseases from the grounds

  1. (a) Some crops are harvested earlier e.g. maize for silage at silking stage while maize for grains when the grains are dry;

(b) A crop can be harvested earlier when the market demand is high;

  1. It is a farming practice that involves the removal and destruction of crop plants which are heavily

infested with pests and diseases from the field.

  1. It is the replacement of old bearing stems by suckers. The cycle is usually changed

after 4 – 6 years.

  1. a)- Earthening up
  2. b) Importance of the above practice
  3. i) Maize – provides support to prevent lodging
  4. ii) Irish potatoes – Improves tuber formation
  5. c) During second weeding
  6. Four factors which determine the stage at which crops are harvested
  • Original  conditions of land
  • Soil type
  • Cost
  • Size  of  planting materials
  • Soil moisture type of implement
  1. Two limitation of using polythene sheets as mulching materials in a field of tomatoes Expensive
  • Requires skilled labour
  • Does  not  decompose

May overheat soil around  crop roots

  1. – suckering

-Pruning of leaves

-Propping

-Mulching

-Earthing up

  1. – Smothers weeds

-Regulate soil temperature

-Conserve moisture

  1. -passion fruits

-Deep rooted

-Nitrogen fixing

-Good by-products

– Friendly too crops / not affent crop

 

 

CROP PRODUCTION V

(VEGETABLES)

  1. a)three management practices that have not been carried on the plant above
  • Pruning
  • Staking
  • Weed control 3x ½ = 1 ½ mks
  1.  b) For each management practice state one reason why it should be carried out
  • Pruning
  • Staking – prevents lying on ground where fruits are soiled and get diseases

Easy movement in field                                                                              1x ½ = ½ mk

  • Weeding – reduce competition for nutrients, water and space 1x ½ =1/2 mk

 

  1. c) Name two diseases that attack the crop above in the field
  • Tomato blight
  • Bacterial wilt

Blossom – end rot

  1. the production of tomatoes (lycopersicon esculentum) under the following subheadings
  2. a) Varieties
  • fresh market e.g. money maker, beef eater, marglobe  supermande
  • processing varieties-cal –j, marzano, Kenya  beauty  (1/2×4=2mks)
  1. b) Nursery establishment
  • select  site and  clear
  • dig to remove weeds and  narrow  to fine tithe
  • mark out  nursery  beds I  wide with convenient length   and level it
  • make drills 10cm apart  and  crop seeds  singly in furrows
  • cover with  thin layer of  soil, mulching, water (1/2×4=2mks)
  1. c) Field management practices
  • gabbing-to  reduce dad seeds  and maintain  optimum plant  population
  • weed  control-remove  weeds  mechanically to  prevent competition  avoid during flowering
  • top  dressing-use fertilizers at 20kg/ha when  plants are 25-30cm tall
  • staking-train  plants  to  grow  in desired   shape; to produce clean fruits, control pests  and disease
  • pruning-to remove unwanted  braches  to input micro climate  facilitate  spraying
  • pest control-use pesticides  and  other  appropriate methods to control pests e.g. aneucal ball worm, leaf hopper
  • disease  control-use  fungicides, legislative  methods ,etc to control early blight, damping off, bacterial  wilt  (7×2=14mks)

 

  1. two symptoms of late blight in tomatoes.

– Rapid drying of leaves.

– Brownish dry rots of fruits.

– Destruction / drying of the whole plant.

 

 

  1. four factors to consider when grading tomatoes for fresh market.

– Size i.e. large, medium, small.

– Degree of ripeness of fruit.

– Damage of tomatoes e.g. bruises on skin.

– Shape of the fruit.

  1. Two ways of controlling purple blotch in onions
  • Crop rotation

–     Application of fungicides

  1. (a) The disease which may have caused the condition shown in the illustration

.Bacterial with (Pseudomonas solana cerum). ( ½ x 2 = 1mk)

(b) Any other crop which may be affected by the disease identified in (a) above

  • Irish potatoes( ½ x 2 = 1mk)

(c) Two other factors which can lead to the same condition as shown by the illustration

  • Nematode attack
  • Lack of water
  • Physical damage on the roots/male attack ( ½ x 2 = 1mk)

(d) Two measures that can be sued to control the disease named in (a) above

  • Crop rotation
  • Regueing /field hygiene

–    Use of certified seeds

  1. -Enables efficient coverage of plant with chemicals
  • Creates unfavorable micro climate for disease causing organism
  • Diseased branches are removed hence reduced incidences of disease spread

Remove branches touching the ground to avoid infection

 

  1. – Altitude – 900-2900 meters above sea level

–  Rainfall – well distributed throughout the growing period

– 750mm – 2000 mm per annum

– practice irrigation

– Soils – well drained

– Deep rich

– Slightly acidic PH of 6.5

  1. a)
  • American boll worm
  • Cut worm
  • Red spider mite
  • Nematodes
  1. b) Lack of calcium
  • Irregular watering
  • Excessive application of Nitrogen in early stages of the plants growth

 

10

  • Altitude                       0 – 2100m above sea level.
  • Temperature range      18 – 29º C
  • Sunlight is important during ripening to give the tomatoes a bright red or yellow colour depending on the variety
  • Rainfall – well distributed during the growing season. (760 – 1300mm pa)
  • Soils      – warm and well drained soils with a PH of 5.5 – 7.0

 

LIVESTOCK HEALTH

(INTRODUCTION TO LIVESTOCK HEALTH)

  1. four physical appearances to be observed in a sick animal
  • Behaviour of  animal-over  excitement, aggression, abnormal  sores
  • General  appearance-dull  eyes, restlessness
  • Movement of  animals  -limping/straining  when walking
  • Posture (4x ½ =2mks)
  1. two reasons why tsetse fly control is considered to be a land reclamation method
  • Allows livestock rearing
  • Enables human settlement
  1. a) Siting a fish pond
  2. i) Soil type- clay soil is the best
  3. ii) Topography – requires gentle slope not Lilly and flat

iii) Source of water – near reliable source

  1. iv) Marketing centre should be close
  2. v) Accessibility from the homestead
  3. vi) Security – protected against predators

vii) far from natural source of fish

  1. b)
  • General farm hygiene, cleanliness of houses, equipment proper carcass disposal by burning/ burying/
  • Disinfection to destroy pathogens e.g. Anthrax and calf diseases
  • Isolation of sick animals – separated from healthy ones to avoid spread of diseases e.g. foot mouth
  • Drenching/ deworming to control internal parasites e.g. tapeworms and roundworms
  • Treatment of the sick animal – to prevent spread of diseases
  • Vaccination to create resistance to diseases on regular basis e.g. foot and mouth, anthrax, new castle
  • Control vectors – to avoid disease transmission e.g. ECF, nagana/ specific method
  • Prophylactic approach/ use of drugs to avoid injection e.g dry cow therapy against mastitis
  • Trypanocidal drugs to control trypanosomiasis
  • Proper breeding to control breeding diseases e.g. brucellosis
  • Proper feeding to prevent nutritional disorders e.g. milk fever, anaemia
  • Slaughtering/ killing – to prevent spread of contagious diseases e.g. anthrax
  • Quarantine – to avoid spread of diseases
  • – prevent introduction of diseases
  • Proper housing to avoid predisposing the animal to diseases e.g. ventilation, spacing
  • Foot trimming to minimize occurrence foot rot
  1. a) four notifiable diseases in livestock   (4mks)
  • Lumpy skin disease
  • Newcastle
  • Anthrax
  • African swine fever
  • Rinderpest
  • Rabbies (4×1 = 4 mks)
  1. b) Discuss four ways in which livestock disease are spread in the farm (4mks)
  • Ingestion of contaminated feed and water.
  • By carrying agents /vectors
  • Through wounds
  • Through inhalation of pathogens
  • By abrasion in the body
  • Through contact with the disease causing organisms. (4×1 = 4mks )
  1. c) the methods of controlling livestock disease giving an example of different disease in each case
  • Use of prophylactic drugs e.g.coccidiostat to control coccidiosis
  • Use of antiseptics / disinfectants to maintain farm hygiene to control calf scours
  • Quarantine to control foot and mouth disease
  • Isolation to control infectious diseases e.g. foul pox
  • Mass slaughter to control zoonotic diseases e.g. anthrax
  • Vaccination to control black quarter
  • Control vectors like tsetse flies to control nagana.
  • Use of healthy breeding stock / to prevent breeding diseases
  • Proper nutrition to control bloat and milk fever.
  • Treat sick animals to prevent spread e.g. mastitis
  • Drenching /control of internal parasites like flascioliasis , ascariosis
  • Keep resistant breeds e.g. zebu to control ECF
  • Foot trimming to reduce occurrence of foot rot
  • Proper housing to control pneumonia. (12×1 =12mks)

 

 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS II

(LAND TENURE AND LAND REFORM)

  1. Four ways by which Re-afforestation help in land reclamation
  • Add organic matter from falling leaves
  • Recycles soil erosion
  • Control soil erosion
  • Improve drainage of swampy areas

Play part in hydrological cycle

 

  1. three objectives of land reforms that are taking place in Kenya
  • Increase output from land
  • To meet changing national and market demands
  • To achieve increasing productivity of both land and labour
  • Proper utilization of national land resources and arid lands
  • Increases commercial farming

Increase land conservation and improvement

 

  1. two causes of land fragmentation in Kenya since independence.

– People buying pieces of land elsewhere.

– Compensation when the government takes pat of ones land for public use.

– Inheritance of land.

 

4  – Establishment of land ownership.

– Measurement of land size.

– Description of the land.

– Recording and mapping of the surveyed land.

– Solving objections if any.

– Submission of the maps and records to the district land office registration

  1. Four benefits of a farmer having land title deed
  • As security to get a loan
  • As security of land ownership
  • Minimizes land disputes
  • Acts as an encouragement to the farmer to carry out long term investment on the land
  1. Four reasons for practicing land consolidation are
  • To save time and transport
  • Make supervision of land easier and more effective
  • To facilitate mechanization of farm
  • To make it easy for long term investments in the farm
  • To have sound farm planning
  1. four advantages of communal land tenure system
  • Problems  of landlessness does not exist
  • Land cannot be easily fragmented
  • The system allows free  merchant of  livestock
  • The  land is  left rest  for a  while so s  to allow pasture regeneration
  • No  land dispute
  1. four advantages of landlordism and tenancy
  • Enables  landlords  who cannot use land  to get income from tenants
  • Idle  land can be  put into good agriculture use increasing agricultural production
  • The landless c an  rent  land  to earn a living
  • Ensure equitable distribution  of land as a  natural resource
  • It reduces land  dispute since  the  land  lord  or  the state control its allocation
  • To achieve flexibility in farming patterns to meet changing national and market demands
  • Achieve effective utilization of National land and introduction of irrigation schemes
  • Encourages measures on the land and general improvement of land
  • To achieve increasing productivity of both land and labour
  • Encourage commercial instead of subsistence production in order to ensure meaningful self employment in rural areas
  • Encourages farmers to invest more through offering security of tenure
  1. – Freedom to us eland by all members

– Promotes unity among members

– Promotes use of land according to general requirements of the community

  • The number of the title deed
  • Size of the land
  • The name and identity of the owner
  • Date of registration
  • Type of land ownership
  • Seal of the government
  • Issuing officer’s signature

 

SOIL AND WATER CONSERVATION

  1. Three human activities that may influence soil erosion
  • Ploughing up and down slope
  • Over cultivation
  •  Planting annual crops on slopes
  • Overstocking/ burning vegetation/ clean weeding

Over irrigation

  1. a)Cut off drain 1×1=1 mk

b)Collect water from uncultivated land and drain it into a water bay                       1×1=1 mk

c)Will be washed by water back to the trench, filling it then to cultivated land

  1.  d) four effects if water was allowed into the cultivated land
  • Will wash top fertile soil away
  • Will uproot planted crops
  • Expose unproductive soil

Soil washed will cover crops on the lower end of the farm

  1. two roles played by Grassley in soil erosion control (1mk)
  • Improves  soil  structure by  holding loose particles  together
  • Provides ground cover  to prevent exposure of soil to  agents of soil erosion
  • Reduce movement  of surface run  off
  1. three materials that may be used for constructing a gabion.

– Wires.

– Stones.

– Concrete/ sand/ cement/ water/ ballast.

– Wood/ poles/ metal pegs/ rods.

  1. one factor that would determine the width and depth of a cut off drain.

– Expected volume of run – off.

– Bed rock / soil type.

  1. (a) – Reducing the speed of surface run-off – hence reducing the runoffs water erosive power.

– Trap soil from surface run-off/ filter out soil.

– Reduce the impact of rain drops on the soil thus reducing splash erosion.

– Grass holds soil particles together hence reducing soil erosion.

– Soil structure is improved by organic matter from grass thus rate of water infiltration increases.

  • Water stays for 36 hours thus solid particles settle and bilharzias causing organisms killed.
  • Alum added to coagulated solid particles which settle at the bottom.

Stage IV:         Filtration

  • Water is passed through filtration tank with layers of sand and gravel to filter it.
  • Water leaving the filtration tank is clean.

Stage V:          Chlorination

  • Water is passed through chlorination tank where chlorine is added.
  • Micro-organisms in the water are killed by chlorine.

Stage VI:         Storage

– The treated water is stored in large overhead tanks before distribution and use.

  1. Four farming practices that help in reducing the effects of water shortage in crop production are:- -Mulching
  • Early planting
  • Planting early maturing crops
  • Practice land fallowing

–     Contour cropping/Contour farming

  1.  – Fanya juu terraces
  • Broad base terraces
  • Bench terraces
  • Narrow based terraces

–    Fanya chini terraces

  1. The cultural methods of soil erosion control are:
  • Planting cover crops – The more the soil is covered by a crop or grass, the less erosion will occur
  • Early planting- Established an early ground cover by crops thus reducing the risk of soil erosion
  • Inter-cropping – Increases the ground cover protecting the soil from erosion
  • Crop rotation – improves soil structure where the rotation includes a grass
  • Strip cropping/contour/field strip cropping – This is the growing of alternate strips of different crops in the same field with the purpose of interrupting the continuous flow of water or wind
  • Weed or disease and pest control – This ensures a good crop stand that covers the soil more
  • Harvesting procedures that leave crop residues on the field
  • Mulching- The covering of the soil with organic or inorganic materials
  • Contour farming follows the contours during ploughing, ridging and planting which reduces surface run off
  • Grass strips formed by either leaving narrow strips of land un ploughed or planting grass on strips along the contour
  • Afforestation and reafforestation
  • Fallowing – leave the land uncultivated for same time          (any 10×2=20mks)
  1. – Construction of dams
  • Construction of dykes
  • Planting trees along river bank to hold soil together

Observing government regulation on leaving a sizeable strip of an uncultivated land along

the river bank

  1. a) Bund
  2. b) It is constructed along the contours
  • A channel is dug with the upper width (y) 1.5cm and bottom width (x) 90cm
  • Excavated soil is put on the lower part of the channel leaving the part (W) the ledge
  • The steeper the slope the closer the bunds
  1. a) It is the process by which top soil is detached, removed and carried away from one place to

another place where it is not useful

  1. b) four types of water erosion
  • rain drop/splash erosion
  • sheet erosion
  • rill erosion
  • gully erosion
  1. c) factors which influence soil erosion
    • Amount and intensity of the rainfall
    • Excess water run off take with it loose soil articles
    • Slope of the land (topography)
    • Sped of water as it flows to determine by the slope of the land .the steeper
    • The slope the higher the rate of erosion
    • Type of soil
    • Some soils drain water faster than the other as sandy soil is easily eroded than sandy soil
    • Soil depth
    • Shallow soil become saturated with water quickly than deep soils
    • Vegetation cover
    • Forests protect soil against erosion than bare soil
    • Overstocking
    • Overstocking increase soil erosion
    • Deforestation
    • Cutting down of trees expose   soil to agents of erosion leading tom soil erosion
    • Planting annual crops in steep slope
    • It leads to frequent cultivation hence exposure soil to erosion
    • Indiscriminate   burning of vegetation before cultivation
    • The land is exposed to erosive forest of rain and wind
    • Clear weeding
    • This leaves the soil less protected against water erosion
    • Pruning up and down the slope
    • Increase soil erosion
  1. d) seven cultural ways of controlling weeds

i)matching-matching smother weeds

ii)cover  cropping-cover  crop smother weeds

iii) Crop rotation-some weed only grow well when in association with certain crops

e.g.  Striga grow only where some cereal crops and sugar cane are growing .when

these crops are rotated with dicots, striga does not germinate

  1. iv) Timely planting-crops establish early before weeds thus smothering them
  2. v) use of clean seed/planting material-prevents the introduction of weeds to the form land
  3. vi) Proper spacing-helps to create little space for weed growth

vii) Clean seedbed-this starts off the crops on a clean bed so that they effectively compete

with weeds

viii) flooding-mainly practiced in  rice fields

  1. -Slow down surface run – off

-Filter soil particles from surface run off

WEEDS AND WEED CONTROL

 

  1. Oxalis (sorrel)

-(oxalis latifolia)

b)- The weed contain builbs i.e Elaborate  & extensive root system that support the plant.

– Because it has rhizomes.

  1. c) State the economic importance of the weed shown.

– Reduces yields of crops.

– Increases cost of production.

– It’s a livestock feed.

– Fixation of nitrogen.

  1. (a)Couch grass Digetaria Scalarum ( ½mk)

(b) Why is it difficult to control the weed?

  • It has got underground rhizomes which grow deep in the soil ( ½ x 1pt =  1mk)

(c) One harmful effect of the weed on crop production

  • Competes with crops for nutrients/soil moisture and space resulting to low yields
  • Increases the cost of production when controlling it

(d) Two measures used to control the wed

  • Use of appropriate herbicides

–    Physical removal of rhizomes

  1. i)- A-Double thorn (oxygonium sinuatum)

– B- Coach grass (Digiteria  scalarum)

  1.  ii)  – Lower the quality of produce
  • Lower yields
  • Compete with intended plants for nutrients and water

iii)  Weed B is difficult to control as it has underground rhizomes

  1.  iv)   Can be effectively controlled by use of chemicals
  2. Four methods of propagation which make weeds to have a high competitive ability over crops
  • Availability to produce many viable seeds
  • Ability to propagate vegetative –with bulbs, rhizomes
  • Ability to regenerate woody stems-quickly
  • Efficient means of propagation

Ability to remain viable in the soil for a long period of time

  1. Weed C – Nutgrass (Cyprus rotundus)

Weed D – Sow thistle (sonchus oleraceous)

  1. a) – Thorn apple
  • Sodom apple
  • Oxalis
  • Tick berry                                                             ( ½ x4=2 mks)
  1. b)     – Before flowering to avoid spread through seeds

– Early stage before spreading underground organs

  • Requires skilled labour
  • Have long residual effect which interferes with future crops

It is not environmental friendly/ pollutes the environment

  1. a)
  • MCPA
  • 2 – 4 – D
  • Bentazon
  • Bromoxynil
  • Linuron
  • Loxyyril
  • Atrazine
  • Metrubuzin

 

  1. b) – 10 – 15cm high

– 2 – 4 weeks after emergence

  • Complete for nutrients/ light/ space
  • ACD as alternate host of insect pests
  • Some produce poisonous substances
  • Blocks water cords
  • Lowers the quality of pasture
  • Poisonous to man and livestock
  • Parasites of desired crops
  • Aquatic weeds affect navigation and water animals
  • Increase the cost of production
  • Cause irritation to workers
  • Some have medicinal value
  • Eaten by man and livestock
  • Acts as soil cover
  • Add organic matter in the soil

–     Some are legumes

  1. a) two factors that   affect  selectivity of herbicides
  • Stage of plants  growth
  • Plants morphology and anatomy
  • Mode  of action
  • Environmental factors (2×1=2mks)
  1. specific examples of weeds describe their harmful effects in agricultural production
  • Compete with crops for  nutrients spacing  ,light, moisture lowering yield  e.g. MacDonald’s  eye  etc
  • Some  are  parasitic  e.g.  wihhweed
  • Low  quality of  produce e.g. Mexican  marigold lowering quality of milk/pigweed  seeds  in finger millet
  • Poisonous to both  man and livestock e.g. Dahira  stramonium, Bracken fern
  • Allirnate  hosts  for  pests and  diseases  e.g. mallow weed –for  cotton strainer
  • Some  are  allelopallic/hinder  germination  e.g.  Mexican marigold
  • Block irrigation channel e.g. salvinia/water hyacinth
  • Affect  fishing and navigation-salvinia and water hyacinth
  • Lower quality of pasture e.g. manyatta grass
  • Reduce workers  efficiency/irritate  e.g. double  thorn, shnging nelthe, devil’s  horse whip

 

CROP PESTS AND DISEASES

 

  1. two possible causes of swelling on the roots of legume crops
  • Infection by nematodes

Nodulation/ nitrogen fixing bacteria

  1. the various cultural methods of controlling pests in crops
  • Timely planting-done early e.g. maize escape stalk borer
  • proper  tillage-to expose  soil boring pest i.e. white grubs
  • Timely harvesting-enables crops i.e.  maize to escape weevil attacks
  • close season-avoids  growing  susceptible crops for   some period to control pink worms in cotton
  • trap cropping-plant  crops together with main crop  to  trap/attract pests before they attack e.g. sorghum round the  maize plantation
  • trap rotation-rotate crops preferred  by certain  pests  with those  which are  not e.g. groundnuts and  potatoes rotated with maize  and beans to starve  pests
  • establishing resistance crop varieties-this enables crops  to resist pest using natural mechanism e.g. goose neck sorghum  against birds ,tiltering  sorghum against  shoot fly
  • field/farm hygiene-keep the  field free  from  any plant material harboring  pests by rouging ,removal  of crop residues
  • Alteration of environmental conditions by creating microclimates that are not conducive to some pests e.g. open pruning, mulching for  traps
  • Destruction of alternative host especially weeds that host pests e.g. Removal of mallow weeds help control cotton strainers. Use of clean planting material e.g. seeds, suckers, crown bananas weevils are  controlled
  • Proper  spacing-makes it  difficult for pests to move  from one  plant  to another  through close spacing in  ground  nuts  controls aphids
  • Using  organic  manure  which  discourages  eelworms
  • Irrigation-overhead  irrigation in  cabbages controls aphids(any 10×2 must  be  discussed)
  1. What does the term close season mean in crop production?

– A period during when a particular crop is not supposed to grown in a given areas so as to

control   diseases and pests built up.

  1. – Use of clean planting materials.

– Timely planting.

– Proper seed bed preparation.

– Use of resistant crop varieties.

– Proper weed control/ destruction of alternate host.

– Observing field hygiene.

– Mulching.

– Use of  close season.

– Use of trap crops.

– Proper spacing.

– Timely harvesting.

– Use of crop rotation.

  1. Four symptoms of viral infections in plants

– Leaf curling

– Mosaics

– Malformation/distortions

– resetting (short internodes)

– Leaf chlorosis

 

(a)        B – American bollworm ½mk

C – Weaver bird ½mk

D – Mongoose bird     ½mk

(b)- Flooding with water

  • – Fumigation of the soil with furadan
  • – Physical killing ( ½ x1 = ½mk)

(c)    Fruits      ( ½ x 1 = ½mk)

  1. (b) The various practices carried out in the field to help control crop diseases
  • Crop rotation
  • Rugueing/destroy infected plants
  • Plant disease-free plant/use certified seeds
  • Closed season
  • Early planting /timely planting
  • Proper spacing
  • Timely weed control
  • Use of resistant varieties
  • Application of appropriate chemicals
  • Use of clean equipment
  • Quarantine
  • Heat treatment to kill pathogens
  • Pruning to create unfavorable micro-climate for diseases

–     Proper nutrition to prevent deficiency

 

  1. – Some pesticides cause suffocation of pests by blocking respiratory surfaces
  • Some pesticides are stomach poisons that kill pests by damaging the cells/ tissues
  • Some pesticides damage the pests nervous system

–    Some pesticides kill pests by destroying digestive system

  1. a) Cutworm
  2. b) – Cuts the stem causing lodging

– Reduce plant population

  1.  c) – Use of appropriate insecticides

Removing and killing it

  1. i) This is a situation in which pest population caused damage beyond tolerance
  2. ii) This is the use of combination of both chemical and cultural pest control methods
  3. four harmful effects of crop pests
  • Some e.g. nematodes  damage crop roots  causing wilting and death of the plant
  • Some like squeals unearth planted seeds leading to low plant population some destroy crop leaves lowering photosynthetic area-result to reduced yield
  • Sucking pest deprive plants  of  food by  sucking plants sap
  • Some pests attack fruits  berries  and  flowers lowering  their quality and quantity
  • Some pests destroy embryo seeds lowering  their germination potential
  • Some transmit crop diseases
  • Some e.g. stalk borer eat the growing points causing retarded growth
  • They lower mansetabills of crops produce  by lowing quality
  • Where the leaf is the major product pest  damage lower the  quality and  quantity  through defoliation
  1. a)Potato blight
  2. b) (i) Pythophthora infestants
  3. ii) dry patches i.e. necrotic lessiory on leaves and fruits
  • affected fruits appear rotten and fall off prematurely
  1. c) spraying with copper fungicides
  • rogueing the affected crop
  1. (a) – Anthracnose of Bananas / Banane anthrancnose;(1×1=1mk)

(b) – Spray with (appropriate) fungicide

– Plant resistant varieties

  1. a)- Mouse bird
  2. b) – Destroys grains in records

– Destroys fruits e.g. tomatoes

16.

  • Cause swellings called galls on the roots.
  • Leads to blockage of the vascular vessels which transport materials within plants leading to wilting and stunting growth of the crops.
  1. four cultural practices used in controlling crop pests
  • Timely planting
  • Proper tillage
  • Close season
  • Trap  cropping
  • Timely harvesting
  • Crop rotation
  • Planting resistant  varieties

Field  hygiene

  1. three symptoms of coffee berry disease.
  • Fungal disease
  • Favoured by high rainfall
  • Flowers have dark brown blotch /stred on brown petals
  • Green servier have small dark sunken parches/lessions
  • Barry (dip in the ground/dry up on the  in the black mummified condition and when squeezed they are empty
  1. (a) M – hedgehog N- Squirrel      P – Rat

(b) M – Use dogs

N- eat germinating maize/bean seedling

– timely planting

  • Early planting
  • Timely harvesting
  • Early harvesting
  • Proper tillage
  • Close season- period when that crop is not grown anywhere trap cropping
  • Crop rotation
  • Planting resistant carieties
  • Field hygiene
  • Alteration of environmental
  • Crop nutrition
  • Destroying alternative host
  • Use of clean planting material
  • Proper spacing
  • Lose of organic manure
  • Irrigation.

 

CROP PRODUCTION VI

FIELD PRACTICES FOR MAIZE, MILLET, SORGHUM, BEANS AND RICE: HARVESTING OF COTTON PYRETHRUM, SUGAR CANE COFFE AND TEA

  1. four management practices carried out in maize field at 45cm high
  • Weed control
  • Thinning
  • Farthing up
  • Top dressing
  • Pest and disease control
  • Rouging (1/2×4=2mks)
  1. To prevent contamination of the cotton by the sisal strings
  2. (i) (a) Land preparation
  • Land is plaughed /dug
  • Ploughs/jembes used for primary cultivation
  • The land is leveled
  • Bunds are constructed around the plots to control water
  • The land is flooded up to a depth of 5cm
  • The soil-water mixture should be worked on until a fine mud is produced

 

(b) Water control

  • Bunds are constructed around the plots to control the water level
  • The land is flooded with water to a depth of 5cm before transplanting
  • The level of water is gradually increased to a height of 15cm by the time the rice crop is fully grown
  • Water should be allowed to flow slowly through the field
  • Old water should be drained and fresh one added where the flow of water is not possible
  • Old water should be drained every 2-3weeks
  • The field should be drained off 3weeks before harvesting ( 1mk x any 4pts = 4mks)

 

(c) Fertilizer application

Sulphate of Ammonia is applied in the nursery before sowing

  • Sulphate of Ammonia s applied at the rate of 25kg for each nursery unit of 18.5m x 18.5m
  • Sulphate of Ammonia is applied in two splits before transplanting and 40days after transplanting
  • Sulphate of ammonia is applied at the rate of 125kg/ha before transplanting and 125kg/ha about 40days after transplanting
  • Double super phosphate is broadcasted in the field before transplanting
  • DSP is applied at the rate of 120kg/ha ( 1mk x any3pts = 3mks)

 

(d) Weed control

  • Flooding
  • Uprooting
  • Use of herbicides such as propanil against aquatic weeds ( 1 x any 3pts = 3mks)

(ii) The environmental conditions that may lead to low crop yields

  • Poor soil fertility /infertile soil
  • Damage by hailstorms
  • Less rainfall/unreliable/drought
  • Poor soil type resulting into leaching or water logging
  • Inappropriate soil PH
  • Inappropriate temperature (too low or high)
  • Excessive wind leading to increase in water loss from the soil
  • Extreme relative humidity
  • Extreme of light intensity
  • Topography / some attitudes e.g. very high may limit crop growth ( 1mk x any 7pts = 7mks)

Seedbed preparation

  • Prepare land in dry period/ early/ before onset of rains
  • Clear the land
  • Remove stumps/ perennial weeds
  • Plough/ primary cultivation
  • Harrow/ carry out secondary cultivation (1×5=5 mks)

Planting – Early planting/ plant at onset of rains

  • Select suitable variety/ certified seed
  • Depth of planting 2.5 cm-10 cm
  • Plant with 1-2 seeds per hole
  • Plant with DAP/ SSP/ DSP at rate of 120kg/ ha DAP/100-150kg/ha/DSP
  • Plant 1-2 seeds per hole
  • Spacing 75-90cmx23-30 cm

 Weeding- Uproot weeds

  • Tillage
  • Use herbicides

 Pest control

  • Use chemicals/ pesticides
  • Early planting
  • Planting certify seeds
  • Rogueing/ field hygiene

Disease control- Uprooting and burning affected crop/rogueing

-Use appropriate chemicals

-Crop rotation

-Field hygiene

Harvesting       –Harvested after 4-6 months depending on variety and ecological time

– Harvested when dry 14-20 % moisture content

– Stalk, are cut and stoked in the field

– Cabs are removed by hand

 

  1. Two precautions taken when harvesting cotton
  • Avoid mixing with foreign materials
  • Harvesting during the dry weather
  • During harvesting separate grade A and B

Don’t put in gunny/sisal bags

  1. a) – Maize varieties
  • Different varieties are developed for different ecological zones
  • Example: Hybrids and composites available
  • Kitale hybrids e.g. 612, 622 for high and medium altitudes
  • Embu hybrids 511, 513 e.t.c. for medium altitudes
  • Composites for lower altitudes like katumani composite, coast composite e.t.c. (1×5=5 mks
  1. b) Planting
  • Plant early at the onset of rains
  • Dry planting is encouraged in low rainfall areas
  • Depth of planting 3 – 10 cm
  • One – two (1-2) seeds per hole
  • Spacing vary with variety (i.e. 20-30cm x 75-90cm)
  • Plant either manually or use planters    (1×5=5 mks)
  1. c) Pest and pest control
  • Maize stalk borer – early planting, rogueing, destroy crop remains, apply appropriate pesticides (placed in cone)
  • Army warm – use of recommended pesticides
  • Aphid – spray with appropriate pesticides
  • Maize weevil – proper drying and dusting with pesticides
  • Red flour beetle – good storage
  • Rats – use rat proof stores, cats, traps or poison

Pests 5x ½ = 2 ½

Control 5x ½ = 2 ½

  1. d) – Harvesting and storage
  • Storing in cool areas can be practiced
  • Carry out direct delusking in other warm areas
  • Store in bulk (grains)
  • Stored on cobs

Can be stored in bags

  1. a) Ecological requirement (3mks)
  2. i) Altitude 0-2200m above sea level
  3. ii) SOU- fertile alluvial or loam soil well drained

iii) temperature-moderate

  1. iv) rainfall-moderate

v)PH-neutral or alkaline

  1. b) Varieties (3mks)
  • Kenya flat complex
  • Double comb variety
  • Kitale hybrids
  • Embu hybrids
  • Coast composites
  • Katumani composite
  1. c) Seedbed preparation (5mks)

 

  • early land preparation  to allow rotting  of vegetation
  • clearing of land using appropriate tools
  • Ploughing done using  appropriate  implementing e.g. disc or mould board plough
  • harrowing  ids done where  the seedbed  is rough  to a medium tilth
  • does not require a very fine tilth
  • eradicate perennial weeds

 

  1. d) Pests and diseases (3mks)

 

PEST CONTROL
Maize stalk borer
  • Early planting
  • rogueing
  • Burning infected maize crops
  • Use of pesticides
Army warm
  • Dusting with appropriate chemicals
aphids
  • Spraying using suitable  insecticides
birds
  • Scared  away
Maize weevil
  • Dusting maize comb or shelled  maize with  appropriate chemical
  • Proper  storage hygiene
rats
  • Use  of rat  proof  stores, cats, traps
  • Bush  clearing around stores
                       (1×4=4mks)
DISEASES CONTROL
White  leaf blight
  • Planting resistant variety
Maize streak
  • Early planting
  • Use of resistant  varieties
  • rogueing
rust Planting resistant variety
smut   Crop rotation
                         (2×1=2mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. e) Harvesting
  • Period varies from one variety to anther
  • In some cases stalks are cut and stocked in the field to allow combs to dry

Properly followed by removal of the combs which are stoked   in the store

  • De-husking directly in the field
  • Use of the combined harvesters
  1. a) Harvesting of cotton
  • Harvesting is the picking of the cotton lint
  • Harvesting is done 4 – 5 months after planting
  • Cotton picking is done at weekly interval
  • Picked lint is placed clean containers/ never use sisal bags whose fibres may mix with the lint
  • Never pick wet lint
  • Grade lint as it is picked in the field
  • Place clean lint AR (safi) in one container and BR(fifi) in another container
  • Pick lint which is exposed/ fully opened and the lint dry
  • Harvesting is done in dry season
  • Avoid picking lint with contamination such as twigs, dry leaves or soil
  1. b) The role of Agricultural Co-operatives in Kenya
  • Co-operators pool their resources together to buy expensive machinery e.g. tractor for use by the members
  • Provide education/ technical information to members
  • Provide loans to members in form of inputs and cash
  • Negotiate for higher prices for members
  • Reduce overhead costs e.g. transportation, storage and use of machinery
  • Bargain with supplier to give discount on seed, fertilizers and other farm inputs/ provide inputs at lower prices
  • Provide employment for their members
  • Benefit members from lower taxes charged
  • Provide strong bargaining power for members on policy issues
  • Market farmers produce
  • Invest and pay out returns to members in form of dividends
  • Help to negotiate for loans for members without security
  • Some provide banking services to members
  1. Field production of maize under the following sub-headings
  2. a) Ecological requirements

– Altitude (0 – 2200) m above sea level

– Temperatures 23 – 27c

– Rainfall 750mm-1250mm

– Soils, fertile, well drained PH 7 -8

  1. b) Field preparations

– Done during the dry season

– Disc, mold board ploughing to a depth of 20cm

– Disk harrowing to break the soil clods to a medium tilth

–  Ridging done at spacing of 75cm apart

  1. c) Planting and field management

– Seeds placed in the ferrous at a spacing of 30cm and covered with soil mixed with DAP

– Gapping, thinning done depending on germination percentage

– Clean weeding done after every 4 weeks interval.

– Top dressing done at interval i.e. 1st done with CAN when the crop is knee high, 2nd when the

crop is tussling

  1. d) Pests and disease control

– Spraying the crop with fungicides (head smut control)

– Uprooting fully infected crops and burning them

– Spraying the crop with insecticides and dusty the base of the leaves (control stalk borer)

– Field hygiene

  1. e) Harvesting and marketing

–  Hand harvested by plucking the cobs/ or machine harvested

– Shelled, dusted for storage pests and packed

– Delivered to millers consumers

– Delivered to national cereals and produce board

  1. Give two precautions measures a farmer should put into consideration when harvesting *RCH*
  • Lint  should not e mixed  with  foreign  matter
  • Use different containers  for  different cotton  grades
  • Avoid picking during  wet weather

Avoid using  gunning bags

  1. (a) – Rainfall that is well distributed

Well drained fertile soils

Neutral soils

Warm temperatures

(b)       Clear the land/vegetation plought to appropriate tilth

Levelise for uniform planting

(c)        – Make holes 45 x  15cm

– put in 1 teas spoonful of DAP and cover with soils lightly

– Put I seed per hole and cover with soil when soils are moist

(d)pests           – Been aphids

Been brachids

American ball worm

Golden ring month

Hens at flowering stage

Control – spray using appropriate pesticide e.g diazinol

 

 

FORAGE CROPS

  1. three factors which affects the quality of standing forage given to livestock
  • Forage species
  • Stage of harvesting

Mode of feeding

  1. i) Seedbed preparation
  • Done during dry period/ done early
  • Clear vegetation/ remove stumps
  • Carry primary cultivation/ harrowing to
  • Make furrows/ holes
  • Spacing 90cm x 50cm for cutting and 90cm x 50cm for splits
  1.  ii) Planting
  • At on set of rains/ early planting/ irrigate if necessary
  • Select variety for ecological condition of the area
  • Use health planting material
  • Place the planting material in holes/ furrows
  • Cover the planting material with soil to an appropriate depth
  • Use cuttings or splits
  • Select cutting from mature cane/ stems
  • Cutting should have 3-5 nodes

iii) Fertilizer application

  • Apply phosphatic fertilizer at planting 200kg/ha
  • Apply manure before planting, 7-10 tonnes/ha
  • Top dress phosphorous fertilizer after 8 weeks after planting
  • Apply manure after harvesting and dig it
  1.  iv) Weed control
  • Cultivation/ tillage/ mechanical
  • Uprooting
  • Slashing
  • Suitable herbicide application
  • Interplanting legumes as cover crops e.g. Desmodium,
  1. v) Utilization
  • Cut and take to animals when proportion of leaf is higher than the stem/ 3-5 months after planting/ frequency 8 weeks
  • Cut down excess foliage to conserve as silage or hay
  • Cut and sold
  • Cut when mature to get stem cuttings for planting
  • Cut stems at 2.5 – 5cm above the ground surface
  • Use a sharp panga for harvesting
  • Chop forage into small pieces before feeding
  • Na[pier grass is cut, dried and used as mulching material
  1. to reduce moisture content √ which can lead to  rotting  instead of formation  during   ensiling
  2. (a) – Harrow the land to a fine filth;

– Harrow during the dry or before the rains;

– Make the seed be weed – free / ensure clean seed bed;

– Firm the seed bed using rollers after sowing;

– Select a desirable variety of seed for the ecological zone,;

– Sow seeds at the onset rains/ early planting;

– Apply phosphatic fertilizers at appropriate rate of 200 – 300 kgs/ ha at planting time;

– Drill or broadcast  the seeds evenly;

– Use a recommended seed rate for the variety / seed rate of 1.5 – 2.0 kh/ha pure seeds;

– Bury seeds at 2 ½ times their diameter;

– Control weeds by uprooting/ apply a suitable herbicide;

– Apply nitrogenous fertilizers about 6 weeks after germination in split application.

– Avoid grazing when the pasture is too young.

– Practice light grazing in the field phase of pasture establishment.  (10 x 1 = 10 mk)

  1. Two causes of failure in pasture establishment
  • Poor seed germination due to wrong placement of seeds
  • Poor inoculation of legume seeds
  • Lack f nutrients in the soil
  • Unfavourable chemical conditions in the soil
  • Poor drainage

–     Pest and disease attacks

  1. – High nutritive value
  • relieve bloat
  • Higher yields of forage per unit area
  • Improve soil fertility due to nitrogen fixation

Economy in use of nitrogen fertilizers

  1. four factors that determine the quality of hay
  • Forage species  used
  • Stage  of  harvesting i.e. leaf-stem ratio
  • Length of drying period
  • Weather condition during process
  • Conditions of storage  structure
  1. a) Altitude           – High altitude

– 2000 m above sea level

Soils                – well drained

– deep fertile

Rainfall           High rainfall above 900mm per annum

Well distributed throughout the growing period

  1. b)
  • Prepare land early enough/ during dry season/ before onset of rains
  • Carry out primary cultivation appropriately
  • Harrow to a medium tilth
  • Remove all perennial weeds

 

  1. – Establishment from stem cutting or splits or seeds makes furrows at a spacing 1m apart. Plant the grass 0.5m apart within the rows. Holes may also be used

Planting is done on the onset of long rains

Phosphate fertilizers are used as planting fertilizers

DAP fertilizer is applied at the rate of 100 – 150kg/ ha

Organic manure is applied at the rate 10 tones/ ha

 

  1. d)

Utilization – chopped and fed to livestock as green fodder

Detoliation – can be harvested when it is over 8 – 12 weeks

 

  1. ii)
  • Forage has high DM content hence high DM yield
  • High cellulose content hence it is woody and fibrous
  • High lignin cuten lannin and silia content which are all indigestible
  • It has low crude protein content
  • It has low leaf stem – ratio
  • It has low dry matter digestibility
  1. – Weather conditions during dry process;

-Length of the drying period

– Stage of growth at harvesting time/leaf-stem ratio of the plant species;

– Species of the hay crop;

– Storage facilities/method of storage;

– Period of storage

– Disease and pest attack on the crop;

– Fertility of the soil;

  1. (a) (i) Preparation of farm yard manure:-
  • Collect animal waste/refuse/dung and urine;
  • Collect animal bedding/litter and other rotten plant residues;
  • Store collected materials under roof/shed to prevent leaching and oxidization of nutrients;
  • Turnover the materials regularly;
  • Sprinkle water if dry;
  • leave the material to rote completely before use; (6×1=6mks)

(ii) Preparation of Hay

  • Cut the grass /legume in the field when 50% of it is starting to flower;
  • The cut forage is spread in the field for four continuous days (sunny days)
  • The cut forage is turned daily for even for four uniform drying;
  • Gather the dried material in a central spot;
  • Bale the material;
  • Properly store the baled hay (6×1=6mks)

(b) Factors to consider in timely planting of annual crops

  • Escape from serious weed competition;
  • Utilization of early rainfall;
  • Exploitation of Nitrogen flush in the soil that has accumulated during dry season;
  • Escape from serious pest + disease attack e.g. stalk borer in maize;
  • Fetch high market prices when harvested early;
  • Reduce competition for labour during labour peak period;
  • For harvesting season to coincide with dry period to reduce losses e.g. cotton

Early planting means early farming/calendar for the farmer to enable him /her to finish up other farm activities;         (8×1=8mks)

  1. (a)It is the constant removal of the steruny fibrous material left behind after continuous grazing

(b) -Done by slashing the whole pasture to the base, leaving only the maintenance forage.

– Burning is also done.

  1. two advantages of grass-legume pasture over pure grass pasture
  • More  nutritious to livestock
  • Improves soil fertility through nitrogen fixation
  • More total  yield per unit  area
  • Security against total  pasture lose (2×1=2mks)

-to feed animals during the dry seasons

– forage species used

-Stage of harvesting / leaf to stem ratio

-Length of drying period

-Weather conditions

-Storage conditions

 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS III

(PRODUCTION ECONOMICS)

  1. four ways of increasing labour efficiency on the farm
  • Training them
  • Giving incentives
  • Supervision
  • Good operator – worker relationship
  • Farm mechanization
  • Assigning tasks according to skills & specialization
  • Proper remuneration : Attractive salaries

 

  1. a) graph representing the total egg production per week.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. b) – Increasing returns production function.
  2. (a) – Help to determine the value of the farm/ determine assets and liabilities.

– Provide history of the farm.

– Assist in planning and budgeting in various fields.

– Helps to detect losses or theft in the farm.

– Assists when sharing losses or profits (dividends)for communal owned farms/ partnership.

– Help to settle disputes in the farm among heirs.

– Help to support insurance claim e.g. against fire and theft.

– Provide labour information like terminal benefits, NSSF due, Sacco dues for all employees.

– Help to compare the performance of different enterprises within a farm or other farms.

– Help in the assessment of income tax to avoid over or under taxation.

– Records, helps to show whether the farm business is making profit or losses. This information

helps in obtaining credit.                                                                                      (10 x 1 = 10 mks)

(b) – Training worker e.g. in F.T.C’s, during field days, Agricultural shows, through

demonstrations and workshops.

  • Measuring farm operations to supplement the labour force.
  • Providing incentives to workers such as attractive wages, free protective wear, housing, medical facilities, proper feeding, rewarding good workers. Et.c
  • Supervising and counseling workers.
  • Creating good operator – worker relationships.
  • Assigning specific tasks to the labor force.

(c) – Establishment of land ownership.

– Measurement of land size.

– Description of the land.

– Recording and mapping of the surveyed land.

– Solving objections if any.

– Submission of the maps and records to the district land office registration

  1. Three types of agricultural services available to the farmer
  • Credit
  • Extension and training
  • Agricultural research
  • Banking
  • Artificial insemination

–     Veterinary

  1. Four management guideline questions which assist a farm manager in making accurate

farm decisions

  • What product to produce?
  • How much to produce?
  • What to produce?

–    For whom to produce?

  1. – Training
  • Farm mechanization
  • Labor supervision
  • Giving incentives and improving terms and conditions of service

Assign specific tasks

  1.  – Fertilizers                 – Seeds
  • Pesticides -Casual labor
  1. – Banking
  • Extension and training
  • Credit facility
  • Agricultural research
  • Marketing
  • Farm input supplies

Tractor hire service

  1. (a) Is the sum total of goods and services produced by a country within a period of one year             (b) -Per capital income: Is the gross national income divided by the number of people living

in a country

  1. -Diversification- Setting up several and different enterprises on the farm. If one fails the

farmer cannot  incur total loss.

  • Contracting- farmers can enter into contract with consumers. It guarantees a constant fixed market for goods/services
  • Insurance- Taking an insurance cover to compensate them incase of loss
  • Input rationing- Farmers can control the quantities of inputs used in various enterprises to reduce losses
  • Flexibility in production methods- Ability to change from one enterprise to another in response to demand changes
  • Adopting modern methods of production e.g. disease control, irrigation, mechanization e.t.c.
  1. Application of fertilizer
Input 50kg bag fertilizer Out put 90kg bag maize Average product (AP) Marginal product (MP)
0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

6

10

24

31

36

40

43

43

40

10

12

10.33

9

8

7.18

6.14

5

0

4

14

7

5

4

3

0

-3

(ii) The best level of production in relation to the inputs and out put is level 3

(b) (i) Gross margins for the crops

(i) Maize

Value of maize/incomve 5,500 x 15 = 82,500/=   (1mk)
Cost of labour      50x 150 = 7,500/=   (1mk)
Cost of cultivation /ha 1 x 3,000 =    3,000/=   (1mk)
Cost of seed 25 x 100  =    2,500/=    (1mk)
Cost of DAP fertilizer 3 x 1,500 =    4,500/=   (1mk)
Cost of C.AN fertilizer 3 x 1000 =     3,000/=    (1mk)
Total variable costs                     20,500/=    (1mk)
GM for maize 82,500 – 20,500 = 62,000 (1mk)

(ii) Beans

Value of beans/income 5,000 x 500 = 250,000/=   (1mk)
Cost of labour      75 x 200 = 15,000/=   (1mk)
Cost of cultivation /ha 1 x 3,600 =    3,600/=   (1mk)
Cost of seed 20 x 80  =    1,600/=    (1mk)
Cost of DAP fertilizer 2 x 1,500 =    3,000/=   (1mk)
Cost of C.AN fertilizer 1 x 1000 =     1,000/=    (1mk)
Total variable costs                     27,200/=    (1mk)
GM for beans 250,000 – 27,200 = 222,800 (1mk)

 

(b) (ii) The crop which is profitable from the calculation is that :     (1mk)

  • It is more profitable to grow beans than maize
  1. a) ZONE I

– For each additional unit of input applied the output of maize increased at an increasing

rate because the fertilizer resources are underutilized Ö1                            (1×2=2 mks)

ZONE II

– For each additional unit of input applied the output of maize increased at a decreasing

rate because the resources are used to the maximumÖ1                               (1×2=2 mks)

ZONE III

– For each additional unit of input applied the output of maize decreases because

the fertilizer/ resources are excessively appliedÖ1                                      (1×2=2 mks)

  1. b) ZONE II
  2. Give four variable costs in maize production
  • Cost of fertilizer
  • Cost of seeds
  • Cost of pesticide
  • Cost of weeding
  • Cost of  harvesting
  • Cost of casual  labour
  • Cost of  fuel

 

ITEM QUANTITY NO. OF UNITS COST  PER UNIT TOTAL      VARIABLES

COST

Weeding

Seeds

Irrigation

Ploughing

Clearing land

Planting

Harvesting

DAP fertilizer

DAN fertilizer

Gunning bags

transport

20kg

2bags

2bags

32

2

2ha

2ha

2ha

2ha

2

2

32

300

600

500

400

1 200

10 000

700

40

800                   00

600                   00

1200                 00

1000                 00

1200                 00

800                   00

2400                 00

20 000              00

1400                 00

1280                 00

2000                 00

Total variable cost       32 680              00
income 32bags 1200 38 400              00

 

Gross margin=total revenue-total variable cost

= 38400-32680  = 5720.00

  • Profit maximization is the profit in a production process where the highest net returns (Net revenue) on invested capital is realized/ when the difference between total revenue (TR) and total cost (TC) is the highest point in a production process/ where profit is highest
  • Is where marginal revenue (MR) is equal to or almost equal to marginal costs

 

  1. a) i)  Gross margins for the crops

 

Value of maize/ income 55000 X 15 = 82500 1 mark
Cost of labour 50 X 150 = 7500 1 mark
Cost of cultivation/ ha 1 X 3000 = 3000 1 mark
Cost of seed 25 X 100 = 2500 1 mark
Cost of DAP fertilizer 3 X 1500 = 4500 1 mark
Cost of CAN fertilizer 3 X 1000 = 3000 1 mark
Total variable costs                    20500 1 mark
GM for maize 82500- 20500 = 62000 1 mark

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) Beans
Value of beans/ income 5000 X 500 = 250000 1 mark
Cost of labour 75 X 200 = 15000 1 mark
Cost of cultivation/ ha 1 X 3600 = 3600 1 mark
Cost of seed 20 X 80 = 1600 1 mark
Cost of DAP fertilizer 2 X 1500 = 3000 1 mark
Cost of CAN fertilizer 1 X 1000 = 1000 1 mark
Cost of sprays                     3000 1 mark
Total variable costs                    27200 1 mark
GM for beans  250000 – 27200 = 222800 1 mark

iii) It is more profitable to grow beans than maize 1 mark

  1. b)
  • Size of the farm
  • Climatic conditions
  • Fairness objectives and preferences
  • Existing market conditions
  • Available resources
  • Expected returns
  1. – The farmer should grow groundnuts;

– The crop has a higher gross margin than cotton;

  1. – The farmer may be able to estimate the required production resource e.g labour capital e.t.c

– Assists farmer when e.g. labour capital etc

– Assists farmer in making management decisions;

– Helps to reduce uncertainties in the production process;

– Shows progress or lock of progress in farm business;

  1. (a) (i) See the graph paper

(ii) 56 bags;     (1×1=1mk)

(b) Table – (    16x ½ =8mks)

Year Fertilizer applied (bags) Maize output (bgs) Marginal  product Average product
1995

1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

202

2003

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

4

10

28

42

52

60

66

66

64

6

18

14

10

8

6

0

-2

5

7

7

6.5

6

5.5

4.7

4

(c) (i) 4 bags (1×1=1mk)

(ii) MP is maximum;           AP is maximum; (2×1=2mks)

(d) Gross income = Total output x price per unit

in 2002  66 x 1000 = 66000/= (1×1=1mk

in 2003: 64 x 1000 = 64000/= (1×1=1mk)

(ii) Net income = Total income – Total cost

in 1999: Total income was 52 x 1000 = 52000/=

total cost was 8 x 1200 = 9,600/=

Hence 5200/= – 9600; (1mk)

= Shs. 42,400/=           (1mk)

 

 

21.

  • Flood costs (F.C)
  • Variable costs (V.C)
  • Total costs (T.C)
  • Average costs (A.C)
  • Marginal costs (M.C)

 

  • Co-operative societies
  • Crop boards
  • Commercial banks
  • Agricultural finance corporation (A.F.C)
  • Settlement fund trustees
  • Hire purchase companies
  • Insurance companies. (Any 4 )
  1. three ways in which labour peaks can be overcome in the farm
  • Overtime  working  for casual labourers
  • Greater use of casual workers
  • Mechanization
  • Use of  contractors  who may  be  engaged to do some work  at a fee
  • Cropping system devised such that  ripening  of crops could be  at  different times

Work study to devise new techniques of  doing  work more  quickly and   efficient

24        . – training

-giving incentives/motivation

-farm mechanization

-labour

  1. (a) 1000kg of NAP con 46kg P2O5S

150 x 100 – 150

50

300kg of DAP per hectar

1ha = 300kg of DAP

5ha x 300

1                      = 1500g of DAP

1 bag = 50kg

1500 x 1 = 1500kg

50        = 30bags pf DAP

N/B Approximation = 3obags

 

CAN

100kg contain 20kg of price N

200x 100 = 200kg

30                    = 1000kg

I ha = 1000kg

5ha = 1000 x 5 = 5000kg

1bag = 50kg

5000 x 1 = 5000kg

50

= 100bags of CAN

 

 

(b) (i) – cross margin is variable cost – total revenue

Gross margin of irish potatoes

Cost of fert = shs 10000 x 5 = 50000

Cost labour requirement = 50 x 200 x 5 = 50,000

Cost of seed potatoes 20,000 x 5 = 100000

Cost of fungicides 5000 x 5 = 25000

Cost of ploughing 400 x 5 = 50,000

Total variable cost shs.145,000

Total revenue = shs.50,000 x 50 = shs.1,500,00

Gross margin shs. 1,500,000 – shs.145,000 =shs.1,255,100

 

(i)                     Maize

Cost of fert. shs 10000 x 5 = shs.50000

Cost of fert. shs. 4800 x 5 = shs.24000

Cost of maize seed shs.3000 x 5 = shs.15000

Cost f labour shs.200 x 150x 5 = shs.150000

Cost of ploughing shs.4000 x 5 = shs.20000

Total cost                          = shs.259000

Revenue 750000 X 5 X 20= Shs.750000

Gross margin   = 750000

259000

Shs.481000

(ii)He should grow potatoes

– pests

Diseases

Unreliable rainfall

Change in temperature

Strong wind

Light aspect

Infertile soils

 

AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS IV

  1. three methods of grafting that are used in propagation of plants
  • Whip are tongue grafting
  • Side grafting
  • Approach grafting
  • Bark grafting

Notch grafting

  1. a) i) Prepare a profit and loss account for Mr. Tembo’s farm for the year ending

31st December 2003                                                                                                        (9mks)

PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT FOR MR. TEMBO√

FARM FOR THE YEAR ENDING 31ST DEC 2003

  Sales and receipts
                                                     sh         cts    
Opening stock√

Purchase of farm tools√

Zero grazing unit construction√

Machinery depreciation√

Interest payable √

Pesticide  purchase√

Veterinary  bills √

wages √

 

TOTAL

net profits √

 

12000   00

1000    00

10000   00

800    00

750    00

300    00

400    00

4800    00

 

30050   00

9300  00

Milk sale√

Sale  of goats√

Cabbage sale√

Sale of heifers√

Sale of tea√

Closing valuation√

8000          00

500        00

750        00

9400          00

4700          00

16000    00

 

 

 

39350         00

 

 

 

 

  39 350   00   39 350√    00

 

  1. ii) Calculate the percentage profit or loss made by the farm (1mk)

%profit=profit x 100

Total income

=9300 x 100

39350           = 23.6%

  1. b) five functions of farmer’s cooperative societies
  • function of farmers cooperative societies
  • marketing farmers produce
  • negotiating fair  prices for  produce and input
  • keeping records  of the  cooperative activities and  in forming the members accordingly
  • paying dividends to members
  • giving loans in kind  to members
  • educating members on matters relevant  to cooperative(5×1=5mks)
  1. ii) Outline five common risks and uncertainties in farming
  • risks and uncertainties
  • pest and diseases outbreak
  • price fluctuation
  • sickness and  injury
  • natural  catastrophes e.g. floods, earth quakes ,storm ,strong  wind
  • new technologies  of  production
  • ownership  uncertainty
  • physical yield  on  what is expected
  1. four reasons for using certified seeds for planting
  • High yielding
  • Quality produce
  • High germination percentage
  • Grow faster
  1. two financial statements which may be prepared on a farm.

– Balance sheet.

– Cash analysis.

– Profit and Loss Account.

  1. (a) Profit and loss A/C for Langat’s farm for the year ending 31st December, 2004

 

Purchases & Expenses Shs. Cts Sales & receipts Shs. Cts
Opening  valuation

Goats

Poultry

Casual worker

Subtotal

Net profit

150000

4000

15000

12000

181000

112600

00

00

00

00

00

00

Mohair

Rabbits

Eggs to hotel

Closing valuation

75000

3600

15000

200000

00

00

00

00

 

Total 293,600     293,600  

Awarding:-

–  Title (½mk)

– (Purchases & expenses and sales & receipts) ½mk

– Entries each ½ x 10 (5mks)

 

(b) State the benefit of a profit and loss A/C to Mr. Lang’at

  • Helps the farmer to detect whether he has loss or profit
  • Helps in tax assessment to avoid over taxation

–   Acts as evidence when a farmer requires a loan

  1. a) – Invoice
  • Receipt
  • Delivery note
  • Purchase order
  • Statement of account (4×1=4 mks)

 

 

  1. b) ROBS,

PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT

AS AT 31ST DEC, 2009

Purchases and expenses√ ½ mk Sales and receipt√ ½ mk
Opening stock                150,000

Vetenary bills                       2500

Livestock feeds                     2500

Fertilizer                              5000

Seeds                                   4000

Debts payable                       4200

TOTAL    √ ½ mk                168000   Profit   √ 1 mk                       94,800

 

263000

 

 

Sale of milk                                             10,000

Sale of cabbages                                       20,000

Sale of two heifers                                     10,000

Sale of tomatoes                                            3000

Debts available                                            20,000

Closing valuation                                        200,000

√ ½ mk                     263,000

√ 1 mk                            263,000

( ½ mk each entry 6 mks)

Total 10 mks

.

  1. c) It made profit

Profit ksh. 94,800√ 1 mk

% profit= profit   x 100

Opening Valuation

 94,800×100

150,000

= 63.2%√ 1 mk

 

  1. d) -Diversification- Setting up several and different enterprises on the farm. If one fails the

farmer cannot  incur total loss.

  • Contracting- farmers can enter into contract with consumers. It guarantees a constant fixed market for goods/services
  • Insurance- Taking an insurance cover to compensate them incase of loss
  • Input rationing- Farmers can control the quantities of inputs used in various enterprises to reduce losses
  • Flexibility in production methods- Ability to change from one enterprise to another in response to demand changes
  • Adopting modern methods of production e.g. disease control, irrigation, mechanization e.t.c.

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) i) profit and loss account for Mr. Tembo’s farm for the year ending 31st Dec. 2003

PROFIT AND LOSS ACCOUNT FOR MR. TEMBO√

FARM FOR THE YEAR ENDING 31ST DEC 2003

 

Purchases and expenses Sales and receipts
                                                     sh         cts    
Opening stock√

Purchase of farm tools√

Zero grazing unit construction√

Machinery depreciation√

Interest payable √

Pesticide  purchase√

Veterinary  bills √

wages √

 

TOTAL      net profits √

 

12000   00

1001    00

10000   00

801    00

751    00

301    00

401    00

4801    00

 

30050   00

9300  00

Milk sale√

Sale  of goats√

Cabbage sale√

Sale of heifers√

Sale of tea√

Closing valuation√

8001          00

501        00

751        00

9401          00

4701          00

16000    00

 

 

 

39350         00

 

 

 

 

  39 350   00   39 350√    00
  1. ii) Calculate the percentage profit or loss made by the farm (1mk)

%profit=profit x 100

Total income

=9300 x 100

39350

= 23.6%

 

  1. b) five functions of farmer’s cooperative societies
      • Function of farmers cooperative societies
      • marketing farmers produce
      • negotiating fair  prices for  produce and input
      • keeping records  of the  cooperative activities and  in forming the members accordingly
      • paying dividends to members
      • giving loans in kind  to members
      • educating members on matters relevant  to cooperative(5×1=5mks)
  1. ii) five common risks and uncertainties in farming
    • Risks and uncertainties
    • pest and diseases outbreak
    • price fluctuation
    • sickness and injury
    • natural catastrophes e.g. Floods, earth quakes ,storm ,strong  wind
    • new technologies of  production
    • ownership uncertainty
    • physical yield on  what is expected

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Prepare a balance sheet s at 31.12.2005

BIDII FARM BALANCE SHEET AS AT 31.12.2005

LIABILITIES                           SHS                 CTS

Current liabilities

Overdraft                      15000                 00

Unpaid wage                3000                  00

Long term liabilities

Bank l                           30000                 00

Net worth                 897000                   00

 

 945000                    00

 

ASSETS                           SHS                 CTS

Current assets

Debt receivable                 20000                 0

Stocks                               25000                 00

Bank balance                 100000                 00

Fixed assets

Perennial crops               250000                00

Land                              350000                 00

Livestock                        200000                00

 945000                  00

 

  1. b) Yes it qualified for a loan because it was solvent i.e. has more assets than liabilities
  2. one condition in which each of the following documents is used.
  3. i) Invoice –when  goods //services are sold /bought  on credit
  4.  ii) Delivery note-when goods are  physically  delivered  to the buyer

iii) Receipt-when goods/services are bought or rendered on cash

  1. i) Prepare a profit and loss account for Mrs. Okello’s farm

profit  and loss A/C  for Mrs.Okello’s farm  for the  year ending 31/12/2009

Purchase  and  expenses Sales and receipts
Opening valuation                      12000    00

Pesticides                                     3000     00

Construction  of  store                 10000    00

Depreciation  of  machines            3000   00

Interest payable                                1750   00

Purchase  of  tools                              800    00

Veterinary  bills   1                           400

Wages  10,000

 

Net profit         3800

 

Milk sales         8000

Sales  of  goats  5000

Sales of tomatoes 1750

Sales  of  heifer     10 000

Sales of coffee 5000

Closing valuation  16000

 

 

 

 

 

                                    45750                          45750

 

Award  of  marks        Title -1mk

Purchases and expenses  side -1mk

Sales and receipt sales-1mk

Net profit – 1mk

Both totals-1mk  (5×1=5mks)

Each of the correct  entries in purchase and expenses  and sales and receipt sides (14x ½ =7mks)

  1. ii) Calculate the percentage profit or loss that Mrs. Okello made during the year 2009

3800 x100√1

45750

= 8.3%√1

iii) six ways in which farmers adjust to risk and uncertainties in farming

  • diversification-production of services  products at the same time to  avoid risks  due  to  weather, fluctuation in price  and disease
  • contracting-make  contracts  with dealers  to  supply or  buy  certain commodities at fixed prices  thus  transfer the risk  of  drop in demand and  supply
  • insurance-purchase security by  payment of  small  sum of  money for compensation in case of  failure
  • input rationing-use  of inputs  sparingly to avoid wastage
  • flexibility in production-combination and  substitution of  inputs  and  techniques of  products for  each  other use the cheapest
  • use of  government price stabilization policies
  • adapting modern methods of farming-use  of  researched  varieties, breeds better  adapted to local conditions

selecting more certain   enterprises-engage in enterprises  with  more surerity  of success i.e. artificial insemination as opposed to natural insernimation (any 6×1=6mks)

  1. – Bank overdraft

-Bank loans

-Debts payable

-Tax payable

-rent

 

AGRICULTURE ECONOMICS (V)

  1. a) the principle that govern the  operations of farmers’  co-operative societies
  • Open membership
  • Equal rights
  • Share limit
  • Neutrality
  • Non- profit motive
  • Loyalty
  • Withdrawal of membership
  1. b) the role of agricultural cooperatives in Kenya
  • Provide education/ technical information to members
  • Negotiate for higher prices for members products
  • Market farmers produce
  • Help to negotiate for loans for members without security
  • Provide inputs to members at lower prices
  • Invest and pay out returns to members in form of dividends
  • Provide transportation, storage and use  of machinery to farmers
  1. c) various functions of agricultural marketing
  • Advertising: They advertise farm products in order to increase demand
  • Financing: Provide capital to carry out agricultural activities
  • Transportation: Provide transport to farm produce to the areas of consumption
  • Storage: store farm produce after harvest in order to minimize losses
  • Selling: Sell on behalf of the farmer
  • Packing: pack the farm produce to reduce storage space and make transportation easy
  • Processing: process the farm produce in order to provide a variety, increase value and prolongs shelf life
  • Grading: putting into grades to provide uniform standards
  • Assembling: gathering the farm produce for bulking and transportation
  • Insurance: Bearing risks by protecting farm damage
  1.  d) Explain five problems farmers face in marketing agricultural products
  • Perishability: detoxation of quality
  • Seasonability: affect price and storage problems
  • Bulkiness: occupy large space hence problems of handling and storage
  • Storage: lack of storage facilities on farms
  • Poor transport system: Lead to spoilage of farm produce
  • Change in market demand: time between planning and actual production create lack of market
  • Lack of market information: concerning prices, how much to produce, where to sell goods; farmers end up disposing of the surplus at throw away prices
  • Fluctuation in market price due to seasonality in nature of agricultural products
  • Poor marketing systems for some produce: Result in lack of market
  1. a) four marketing functions (4mks)
  • Buying and assembling
  • Transportation and  distributing
  • Storage
  • Packing
  • Processing
  • Grading
  • Marketing research
  • Selling
  • Financing
  • Bearing risk                                                                                                    (4×1=4mks)
  1. b) Outline four problems associated with marketing of agricultural products. (4mks)
  • perishability
  • seasoning
  • bulkiness
  • poor  storage facilities
  • poor transport system
  • lack of  market  information
  • limited  elasticity  of demand
  1. Two roles of agricultural society of Kenya

–     Promotes the agricultural industry

  • Organizes national ploughing competitions
  • Publish the Kenya farmer magazine
  • Improve useful indigenous animals
  • Publish a ‘stud’ book
  • Hold competitive shows
  • Hold trade fairs on livestock
  • Demonstration on how to use agricultural machinery

–    Encourage breeding and importation of pure breed stock

  1. (a) Elasticity of demand for a commodity is the degree of responsiveness of demand to price

OR – The sensitivity of demand to change in price    (1mk) (mark as a whole)

Pmk

(b) Calculation of  the elasticity of demand:-                                                                         (4mks)

Elasticity of demand = % D Quantity

% D price

% DQuantity = Change in quantity x 100

Pmk

Quantity

=  (1000 – 800 ) x 100 = 25%

800

% DPrice= Change in price x 100

Pmk

price

= (20- 22) x 100 = 9%

Pmk

22

Ed = 25 = 2.8

9

(c) Six problems of marketing maize as an agricultural product

  • Bulkiness
  • Poor storage
  • Seasonality of crops hence demand
  • Perishability of farm produce
  • Poor transport system
  • Delayed payments
  • Competition from cheap imports ( 1mk x any6pts = 6mks)

 

 

(d)  Nine principles governing cooperatives in Kenya

  • Open membership- voluntarily joining on payment of membership fees
  • Equal rights – One man one vote run democratically
  • Share limit – A member buys shares up to a specific maximum limit.
  • Interest on shares – Any money distributed according to shares
  • Withdrawal form ownership – voluntarily
  • Loyalty – Members to be faithful and loyal
  • Education – continuously educating its members
  • Co-operative principle- cooperative members joint cooperative movement

–    Non-profit motive – cooperatives are non-profit making organizations

  1. Four reasons why training is important in some crops
  • Facilitate field practices of spraying and harvesting
  • Improves crop quality by preventing solving
  • Enable crop grow in the required direction
  • Improve yield
  • Control pest and diseases

6 .        a) – Buying and assembling – acquisitions from small scale farmers and accumulate

  • Transporting and distribution – from area of production to areas of consumption and retailers
  • Storage – kept to accumulate in amount before selling off or to wait for time of scarcity
  • Packing- to protect agent damage, theft
  • Processing – involve preparation of produce for consumption e.g. pasteurizing milk
  • Grading and sorting – placing in groups according to size, colour e.t.c.
  • Each group attracts different prices
  • Packaging – presentation of produce in a way to attract consumers e.g. labeling, good packing materials
  • Collecting marketing information – through media, on prices and demands of goods on markets
  • Selling – Final presentation of produce to consumer’s e.g. advertising, display e.t.c.
  • Financing – availing capital for marketing activities
  • Bearing risks – at each stage of marketing, apart is to bear the cost of uncertainties
  1. b)   – Marketing problems of agri products
  • Perishability – short life cycle
  • Seasonality – supply depends on the season/ vary with season
  • Bulkiness – demand for more space Vs value
  • Storage – need costly storage e,g. cold rooms, refrigeration
  • Poor transport system especially in rural areas
  • Changes in market demand – take long to produce hence cannot meet changes in market
  • Limited elasticity of demand – restrict supply
  • Lack of market information
  1. Is the degree of responsiveness of supply to change in price
  2. – Giving subsidies by reducing the cost of production inputs

Fixes prices of the related products

  1. b) The role of Agricultural Co-operatives in Kenya
  • Co-operators pool their resources together to buy expensive machinery e.g. tractor for use by the members
  • Provide education/ technical information to members
  • Provide loans to members in form of inputs and cash
  • Negotiate for higher prices for members
  • Reduce overhead costs e.g. transportation, storage and use of machinery
  • Bargain with supplier to give discount on seed, fertilizers and other farm inputs/ provide inputs at lower prices
  • Provide employment for their members
  • Benefit members from lower taxes charged
  • Provide strong bargaining power for members on policy issues
  • Market farmers produce
  • Invest and pay out returns to members in form of dividends
  • Help to negotiate for loans for members without security
  • Some provide banking services to members
  1. Law of demand – when the price of a good or service is low, many consumers are able and willing to

buy it and vice versa

  • Law of supply – when the price of commodity is high, many sellers are able to provide the commodity in market for sale. (mark as a whole )
  1. (i) K.N.F.U – Kenya National Farmers Union

(ii) H.C.D.A – Horticultural Crops Development Authority

  1. a)- It is an organization of people who have joined together voluntarily with a common purpose

for  a mutual economic benefit

  1. b) Two functions of co-operatives

– Marketing farmers produce

– Negotiating for fair prices for farmers produce and also for Inputs

– Keeping records of the co-operative activities and informing the members accordingly

– Paying dividends to the members

– Giving loans in hand to the members

– Educating the members on matters relevant to their co-operative through field days,

seminars, workshops and demonstrations

  1. c) – Open and voluntary membership: Rights of anybody who fulfills the conditions set out by the

laws of co-operative society

  • Democratic control: All members have equal rights to say on the affairs of the co-operative
  • Each member is only allowed one vote regardless of shares possessed
  • Share limit: All members should have equal chances of buying shares
  • Distribution of dividends: Any profits should be distributed to members as dividends depending on their share contributions
  • Withdrawal of membership: Should be voluntary
  • Selling of produce: Only members can sell their produce through the co-operatives
  • Loyalty: members are bound to be loyal to their co-operative society
  • Non- profit motive: Co-operatives are not supposed to be profit motivated. They should sell their products to members at seasonable prices
  • Co-operative organization: The co-operative should join the co-operative movement from primary level to national or international level
  • Co-operative should sell on cash – goods sold on credit are sometimes not paid for
  • Continuous expansion: Co-operatives should aim at continuous expansion in terms of membership and physical facilities
  • Neutrality: Co-operatives should be neutral in terms of religion, politics or language
  1. four factors which influenced the demand of tomatoes in the market
  • Quality of  tomatoes
  • Price of  tomatoes
  • Presence of other  substitutes
  • Price of the  substitute

 

 

 

AGROFORESTRY

  1. two reasons for seed treatment of tree species before planting
  • Break dormancy

Control pests and diseases

  1. four ways by which Re-afforestation help in land reclamation
  • Add organic matter from falling leaves
  • Recycles soil erosion
  • Control soil erosion
  • Improve drainage of swampy areas

Play part in hydrological cycle

  1. four advantages of agro forestry
  • Source  of wood fuel (energy)
  • Source of  income
  • Conserve  environment/reduce  soil  erosion/improve water catmint
  • Source of food /fruits
  • Medicine/value
  • Aesthetic value
  • Feed  for  livestock
  • Labour saving
  1. (a)   A – Pollarding technique (½mk)

B – Coppicing (½mk)

(b) An example of a tree species suitable for technique B and C as a method of harvesting     B

(i) Calliandra               calothyrus

(ii) Markahmia            lutea

(iii) Psidum                 guajava

(iv) Croton                  macrostachyus             ( ½ x 1 = ½mk)

C (i) – Grevillea          robusta

Calliandra     calothyrsus

Croton            cacrostachyus  ( ½ x 1= ½mk)

  1. -Deep rooted
  • Nitrogen fixing/ leguminous
  • Fast growing

Good in by product production

  1. (a) Five characteristics of trees used in agroforestry are;
  • Fast growth rate
  • Nitrogen fixing/leguminous
  • Good in by product use timber, fruits etc
  • Deep rooted
  • Nutritious and palatable
  • easily coppiced
  • Non-competitive ability with main crop (5×1=5mks)

(b) The benefits of agroforestry are:

  • Provides food
  • Source of energy/fuel
  • Fodder for livestock
  • Aesthetic value
  • Provides shelter
  • Income generation
  • Soil and water conservation
  • Balancing of atmospheric gases (8×1=8mks)
  1. four forms of agro- forestry
  • Alley cropping
  • Woodlots
  • Multi-storey
  • Source of wood fuel
  • Source of income
  • Labour saving
  • Aesthetic value
  • Reduces the carbon dioxide reducing the depletion of Ozone layer

Used as a method of soil and water conservation

  1. – Border//edge grow
  • Source of wood fuel
  • Source of income
  • Labour saving
  • Aesthetic value
  • Reduces the carbon dioxide reducing the depletion of Ozone layer
  • Used as a method of soil and water conservation
  1. – fast growth

-Deep rooted

-Nitrogen fixing

-Good by-products

– Friendly to crops/not affent crop

 

 

PAPER ONE AND TWO

SECTION II QUESTIONS

 

FARM TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

 

There are five categories of farm tools and equipment namely:

  • Garden tools and equipment e.g. pangas, jembe, pick axe, spade e.t.c.
  • Workshop tools and equipment e.g. saws, hammers, planes, chisels e.t.c
  • Livestock production tools and equipment e.g. milking stool, strip cup, milk churn etc.
  • Masonry tools and equipment e.g. wood float, spirit level, plumb bob e.t.c
  • Plumbing tools e.g. pipe wrench spanner, stock and die e.t.c

 

It is very important to identify the farm tools and equipment, give the correct users and     maintenance practices.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate the             user to comprehend and understand the require concepts and practices:

 

  1. List four maintenance practice carried out on a cross-cut saw
  2. Identify the following tools and state their functions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Identify A, B, C, D

  1. Study the illustration below and answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Identify the equipment represented by the illustration
  2. ii) What is the use of the equipment?

iii) Name the parts labeled A and B

  1. iv) What is the function of the part labeled A and B
  2. What is the use of a garden fork?
  3. Name the tool that a builder would use to check the vertical straightness of a wall during

construction

  1. Name the farm tool that can be used when removing nails from timber
  2. Give two examples of equipment that a livestock farmer can use in administering oral

anti helminthes

  1. Below are farm tools, study them and answer
O………………………………………
……………………………….

the questions that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the tools L, M, N, O

(b) Give one functional advantage of tool M over tool N    

  1. Name a tool used to perform the following functions on the farm;

(i) Drilling of small holes on metal

(ii) Bore holes on wood

  1. State the common faults in the operation of Knapsack spray
  2. (a) Name the three tools in castration of livestock
  3. Name the most appropriate set of animal handling tools that a farmer uses for the following operations:-

(i) Restraining a large bull when taking it around the show ring

(ii) Cutting tail in sheep

  1. a) Below are illustrations of  farm tools

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) State the use of the tools
  2. ii) Name the type of hammer that may be used for driving tool K during work

 

  1. b) Given below is an illustration of one of the routine management practices in livestock

Production.

Study the diagram and answer the following questions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the practice indicated in the diagram above
  2. ii) Describe the procedure you would follow when carrying out the practice named

in (i) above in piglets

 

  1. Study the diagram below and answer the questions that follow;

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Identify the tools
  2. ii) Give the use of each of the tools named above

iii) State two maintenance practices that should be carried out on tool D

  1. List two equipments used in handling cattle during an Agricultural exhibition
  2. Mention the use of the following tools.
  3. i) Dibber
  4. ii) Spokeshaves

iii) Tinsnips

  1. iv) Burdizzo

 

  1. List four precautions that should be taken when using workshop tools and equipment.
  2. i) Below is an illustration of a farm equipment. Study it and answer questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the farm equipment illustrated above                                                                                           b) What is the use of the equipment                                                                                                               c) Name the parts labelled W, X and
  2. d) What is the functions of Y on the equipment
  3. Use the diagram below to answer questions which follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Identify the above diagram
  2. ii) Name the parts labelled A and B

 

 

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION I

COMMON LIVESTOCK BREEDS

This topic entails the following:

  • Reasons of keeping livestock
  • Parts of a cow
  • Characteristics of indigenous and exotic cattle breeds
  • Dairy cattle breeds
  • Beef cattle breeds
  • Dual purpose cattle breeds
  • Pig breeds
  • Sheep breeds
  • Goat breeds
  • Rabbit breeds
  • Camel breeds

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly help and motivate the             user to comprehend and understand the re1quired concepts and practices:

  1. State two reasons for treating water for us on the farm
  2. State four advantages of applying lime in clay soil
  3. State four ways by which Re-afforestation help in land reclamation
  4. Give two distinguishing features between the following breeds of rabbits; Kenya white

and California white

  1. Give four reasons why most farmers keep livestock in Kenya
  2. Give three ideal conformation features of beef cattle
  3. (i) Name a dual purpose cattle breed reared in Kenya
  4. ii) State three uses of a rotavator
  5. Name a pig breed with the following features:

White body colour, erect ears, dished snout, big in body size

  1. What does the term ‘epistasis’ mean in livestock improvement?
  2. (a) Explain the role of livestock industry in Kenya’s economy

(b) Outline the general characteristics of indigenous cattle

  1. Below is a diagram of a cattle. Study it an answer the questions that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) What type of animal is represented above?

(ii) If you stand at a point marked X, state five characteristics that tells you that the animal belong

to type name in (i) above?

(iii) State three areas on the body of a cow where ticks are commonly found

  1. Name four breeds of dairy goats
  2. List two distinguishing characteristics of Californian breed of rabbit
  3. Name the common milk breed of goats reared in Kenya
  4. Name four dairy cattle breeds reared in Kenya.
  5. Differentiate between ‘breed’ of animal and ‘type’ of animal.

17        Name the camel breed that is adapted to cooler regions and has a woolly body covering

  1. State any two channels through which beef is marketed in Kenya.

 

 

(LIVESTOCK HEALTH II

(LIVESTOCK PARASITES )

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Host-parasite relationships
  • Effects of parasites on livestock
  • Life cycle of parasites
  • Methods of parasite control in livestock
  • Identify different parasites

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

  1. Name two chemical methods used in deworming cattle
  2. a) state six  effects  of parasites
  3. b) Describe the life cycle of Taenia solium species of tapeworm
  4. c) State four control measures of the tapeworm
  5. Give two functions of calcium in dairy cows
  6. Give two control measures of fleas in a flock of sheep
  7. Give two measures a poultry farmer can use to control fleas in flock
  8. State two reasons why drenching alone is not an effective method of controlling internal parasites
  9. Give two forms in which a tape worm is found in livestock
  10. Below are diagrams showing different types of internal parasites. Study them carefully and

answer the questions that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the parasites K & M
  2. b) Identify the parts labelled
  3. c) Name the organs where each parasites is found
  4. d) Give the intermediate host of parasite M
  5. Give any two effects of external parasites that are harmful to livestock
  6. Outline the procedure followed when hand-spraying cattle to ensure effective use of acaricides

to control ticks

11        a) A boar gained 90Kg live weight after eating 360Kg pig finisher meal over a period of

time. Calculate the feed conversion ratio

  1. b) Describe digestion in the four stomachs of the ruminant animal
  2. c) Give the significance of lubrication system
  3. State four ways of controlling tsetseflies
  4. Name two types of roughages
  5. Name the common milk breed of goats reared in Kenya
  6. Why are the element calcium and phosphorus important in the diet of young livestock?

16        Give two parasites of cattle which are also disease vectors

17        Give three control measures of fleas in a flock of layers

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION II (NUTRITION)

This topic entails the following:

  • Identification and classification of livestock feeds.
  • Digestion and digestive systems of cattle, pigs and poultry
  • Definition of terms used to express field values
  • Preparation of balanced ration for various livestock
  • Functions and deficiency symptoms of various nutritional elements.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices;

 

  1. Give two ways by which production ration may be utilized by dairy goats
  2. Given that the livestock reared require a ration of 18% DCP and the farmer has maize bran of

10% DCP and sunflower meal of 30% DCP. Use Pearson’s square method to calculate how

much of the feedstuffs a 150kg rations

  1. State the importance of the following in livestock nutrition: i) Water                                                                                                                                                           ii) Vitamin A
  2. Name the compartment of the ruminant stomach where microbial digestion takes place.
  3. i) A ration containing 18% protein is  to be  made  from  maize and sunflower cake. Given

that maize contains 7% protein, and sunflower seed cake 34% protein. Use Pearson square

method to calculate the value  of feedstuffs  to be used to prepare 100kgs  of the feed

  1. ii) A part from Pearson square method, name two other methods that can be used to formulate

feed ration

  1. (a) Define the term ration as used in livestock nutrition

(b) A farmer wanted to prepare a 200kg of pig’s ration containing 16% D.C.P. Using the persons

square method, calculate the amount of maize containing 10% D.C.P and cotton seed

containing  28% D.C.P the farmer would need to prepare the ration (show your work)

  1. Give two livestock feed additives
  2. State three factors that would determine the amount of concentrate fed to dairy cattle
  3. State three factors that would determine the amount of concentrate fed to dairy cattle

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION III

(SELECTION AND BREEDING)

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Description of reproduction
  • Description of reproduction systems
  • Selection f breeding stock
  • Description of breeding system.
  • Identification of livestock on heat
  • Description of methods used in serving livestock.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. State four ways of minimizing disowning of lambs by ewes
  2. State the gestation period of the following farm animals
  3.  i) Pigs
  4. ii) Rabbits
  5. i) What is selection in live stock production
  6. ii) State three methods used in selection of livestock
  7. Give four signs of heat observed on female rabbit
  8. Name four meat breeds of rabbits
  9. State four reasons for cutting a breeding boar
  10. List the methods of selection in livestock
  11. Define the following terms as used in livestock breeding
  12. i) Heterosis
  13. ii) Epistasis
  14. State three signs of heat in Does (Female Rabbits)
  15. Give the gestation period of the following:
  16. i) Cow
  17. ii) Sow
  18. State three disadvantages of natural methods of mating in cattle breeding
  19. a) Explain the advantage of battery cage system of rearing layers
  20. b) Outline ten factors considered when selecting dairy cattle for breeding
  21. What is upgrading as used in livestock production?
  22. Define the word breech of birth as used in livestock production
  23. What does the term “drift lambing’ mean in livestock production?

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION IV

(LIVESTOCK MANAGMENT PRACTICES)

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Description of livestock rearing practices
  • Carrying out livestock rearing practices
  • Livestock routine management practices i.e. feeding, de-beaking e.t.c.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Give four reasons of carrying out crutching sheep management
  2. Name two ways a farmer can perform closed methods of castration on his male livestock
  3. Below is a diagram of a farm animal. Study the diagram carefully and then answer the questions

that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) On the drawing, mark the letters indicated in brackets the part of the animal where:
  2. i) Branding should take place (B)
  3.       ii) Vaccination should be carried out (V)

iii) Body temperature of the animal should be taken (BT)

  1.       iv) Mastitis infection may occur (M)
  2. b) Name three areas of the animal body where ticks are likely to be found
  3. c) Name the parts of the animal numbered 1-4

 

  1. a) What is castration as used in livestock production?
  2.  b) State four reasons why castration is done in livestock
  3. (a) Describe the management of a gilt from weaning to furrowing

(b) Discuss the preparation a poultry farmer should make before the arrival of day old chicks

  1. Outline two reasons for raddling in sheep management
  2. State any four reasons for castrating male piglets
  3. What are the methods of stocking bees? Give two.
  4. State two ways that show how good feeding help to control livestock diseases
  5. Name any two recommended methods of docking lambs
  6. State three disadvantages of inbreeding
  7. State four routine management practices that should be carried out on a lactating ewe
  8. (a) Describe the procedure which should be followed to castrate a three weeks old piglet using

surgical  method

(b) (i) State five factors that should be considered when sitting a bee hive in a farm

(ii) Describe the management practices that would ensure maximum harvest of fish from a

fish pond

  1. Give three types of bees found in a bee colony
  2. List three methods of castrating farm
  3. Outline the routine management practices of piglets from the 1st day to the 8th week
  4. List three types of calf pens
  5. State two factors that could lead to failure to conceive in sows after service
  6. List three advantages of hoof trimming in sheep production
  7. State four factors considered when citing an apiary in the farm
  8. Name three methods of stocking a beehive with honey bees
  9. List three common methods of extracting honey from the combs
  10. a)The illustration below shows a method  of  identifying pigs, study  the diagram  and answer the questions  that follow:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) On the diagram A provided below, draw the mark to indicate a pig number 147,

using the procedure of ear-notching in diagram

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

A

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) What is the recommended stage of growth in pigs at which the ear-notching should be

carried out?

iii) State any three reasons why weight is an important routine management practice in pig

production

  1. b) Below are illustrations showing the various parts of the Kenya top bar hive. Use the illustration

to answer the question that follow

D

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

B

 

 

 

  1. i) label the parts B ,C and D                                                                                                                       
  2. ii) How can a farmer attract bees to colonize a new hive?

iii) Outline the procedure of opening the hive to harvest honey

  1. a) Below are illustrations of  farm tools
E
H
F
G

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. ii) State the use of the tools

iii) Name the type of hammer that may be used for driving tool F during work                                         b) Given below is an illustration of one of the routine management practices in livestock

production.

Study the diagram and answer the following questions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the practice indicated in the diagram above
  2. ii) Describe the procedure you would follow when carrying out the practice named

in (i) above in piglets

  1. a) State and explain four advantages of  age  grouping farm animals as a management  practice
  2. b) Explain four major causes of lamb mortality from birth to weaning
  3. c) Describe brucellosis under the following sub headings

i)Cause

  1. ii) Transmission

iii) Symptoms

  1. iv) Control measures
  2. a) Explain the advantage of battery cage system of rearing layers
  3. Give two reasons why it is important to castrate animals when they are still young
  4. (a) Give two reasons why dehorning is carried out in farm animals

(b) State four methods of dehorning livestock

  1. (a) What is steaming up in livestock production?

(b) Give two reasons why the practice is important in pig rearing

  1. State four management practices that should be carried on a fish pond in order to obtain

maximum fish production.

  1. List four factors considered when formulating livestock ration. (2mk)

 

  1. Study the diagram of a cow below and answer the subsequent questions

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Identify the livestock equipment marked E above
  2. ii) State two uses of the equipment in 17(i) above

iii) Name the two types of identification marks applied on the animal above

  1. iv) Show with an arrow and mark with letter P where pye-grease acaricide should be applied

on the anima1

  1. v) Give one disadvantage for each of the identification marks made on the animal

 

Identification  marks  Disadvantage
A  
 
B  
 

 

  1. a) Describe the management practices of a gilt from weaning to the time of farrowing
  2.  b) State five factors to consider in selecting a gilt for breeding stock.

 

  1. State four conditions that necessitate the handling of farm animals .
  2. Give any two reasons why docking is an important practice in sheep management.
  3. Why is crutching a very important management practice in sheep breeding.

 

  1. Study the diagram of a sheep shown below carefully and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) What operation is usually carried out on the part labelled A?

(ii) Give two reasons for carrying out the operation in (i) above

(iii) At what age should the above operation be carried out?

(v) Name routine management practice carried out on the part labelked B

 

 

FARM STRUCTURES

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Description of parts of a building
  • Identification of materials for construction
  • Description of various farm structures and their uses
  • Construction and maintenance of farm structures.

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Mention four disadvantages of using steel materials for construction of farm structures
  2. Give two reasons for placing a polythene sheet on a foundation of farm buildings
  3. What is “calf crop” in beef production?
  4. a) Outline the procedure  in construction of a  barbed wire  fence
  5. b) List any four wood preservatives
  6. c) Give four factors that will determine the choice of farm building materials
  7. i) Give four factors considered when citing a fish pond
  8. ii) Give four features of a good laying nest

6          State two uses of a footbath in cattle dip

7          a) What is a green house

  1. b) Name four materials used in green house construction
  2. c) Give four maintenance practices carried out on a green house
  3. d) Explain the importance of maintaining farm structures

8          Give two disadvantages of a barbed wire fence when used in paddocking

9          The diagram below illustrates a cross-section of a fish pond. Study it carefully and answer the

questions that follow:-

 

 

X
Y
Z

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the parts marked A, B, C and C

(b) On the diagram the points marked X, Y and Z are possible sites where fish feeding

can be done.  Which is the most appropriate point for feeding?

(c) Give two reasons why the floor of the pond should be covered with lime 14days before

filling it   with water                                                                                                                                       (d) Why should part marked B be screened?

(e) State three maintenance practices carried out on the structure

 

  1. Study the farm structure below illustrating a pass:-

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the type of pass illustrated above

(b) Distinguish between a pass and a gate

(c) Name one type of live fence

11        State four requirements of a good maize store

12        State three factors that determine the depth and size of foundation in a farm building

13        (a) Explain the uses of  various hand tools in the construction of a poultry house

(b) Describe the procedure of erecting wooden rail fence

(c) Explain various factors considered when choosing the construction materials for farm building

14        State four features of a good calf pen

15        State four uses of a fence

 

16        Below is a diagram of a cross section of a farm structure. Study it carefully and answer the

following questions.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) Identify the labeled parts A, B, and C

(ii) What is the importance of the part labeled B to the structure

(b) (i) When making concrete blocks the ratio 1:3:5 may be used. What do these figures

represent?

(ii) In a concrete mixture 1:3:5, twenty four cubic metres of sand were recommended to be

used in putting up of a foundation of a building. Find the volume of the other two

17        (a) Explain the maintenance practices of a fish pond

(b) Give four ways of controlling fish predators in a fish pond

18        Mention four reasons of treating timber before roofing farm buildings

19        List four uses of crushing in the farm

20        a) Define  the term fence                                                                                                       

  1. b) List various types of fences
  2. c) Describe advantages of fences

21        Study the illustration of a farm structure below and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the parts labeled
  2. ii) State the function of the parts labeled

iii) Name two chemicals preservatives used to treat the wooden parts of the structure against

insects and fungal damage

 

  1. Below is a diagram of a fish pond, study it and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1.     i) Label the parts marked K and L
  2. ii) Give a reason why part M is usually deeper than the rest of the pond

iii) State three maintenance practices carried out in the pond

  1. a) Explain five factors to consider when siting a fish pond
  2. b) Explain the measures used to control livestock diseases
  3. State four factors which influence the selection of materials for constructing a diary shed
  4. a) State five  maintenance practices of a  mould board plough
  5. b) Explain five structural and functional differences between  the petrol and diesel engines                  c) List five uses of farm fences
  6. State four uses of farm buildings
  7. List four structural requirements for proper housing of farm animal to maintain good health
  8. The diagram below is part of a farm structure. Study it and then answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Name part of structure represented above

(b) Identify parts labeled P, Q, R, and S

(c) Give the functions of the part labeled P and S

  1. The diagram below shows an activity of processing a farm product. Study it and answer the

questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Name the product being processed

(b) Identify the method used in processing the product names in the diagram

(c)  Outline the procedure used when harvesting the product named in the diagram

(d) List two factors that affect quality of the product processed in the diagram

 

31        (a) Describe five parts of a plunge dip

(b) Outline six uses of live fences on the farm

(c) Outline four factors that influence power output of drought animals

  1. a) Explain the factors a farmer needs to consider before siting a farm structure on his farm
  2.  b) Outline the desirable features of a good grain store
  3. c) Describe the uses of farm fences in promotion of agriculture
  4. Name any two pests that attack timber used for construction in the farms
  5. State three factors that may lead to dip wash being exhausted or weakened while in the

dip tank

 

 

LIVESTOCK HEALTH III

(LIVESTOCK DISEASES)

 

This topic entails the following:

 

  • Description of causes and vectors of the main livestock diseases.
  • Signs of each stated livestock disease
  • Stating predisposing factors where applicable
  • Control measures of livestock disease

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. Name two diseases that affect female animals only
  2. Give four pre disposing factors of foot rot disease in sheep
  3. i) Name the causative organism of contagious abortion in cattle
  4. ii) Give four symptoms of contagious abortion in cattle

iii) State three methods of controlling contagious abortion in cattle

  1. What is a vaccine?
  2. (a) Discuss black quarter under the following sub-headings:-

(i) Animal affected

(ii) Casual organism

(iii)Symptoms of disease

(iv) Control measures

(b) (i) Explain four measures used to control liver flukes

(ii) Name an intermediate host of liver fluke

(c) Explain the following terms as used in livestock production

(i) Embryo transfer

(ii) Artificial insemination

(iii) Line breeding

(iv) Cross breeding

(v) Up-grading

  1. Give four predisposing factors of foot rot disease in sheep
  2. (a) Discuss coccidiosis disease under the following headings:-

(i) Causal organism

(ii) Livestock species attacked

(iii) Symptoms of attack

(iv) Control measures

(b) (i) What are the characteristics of an effective acaricide?

(ii) Explain three methods of acaricide application

  1. Name four ways of controlling coccidiosi in the farm
  2. State four predisposing factors of scour in calves
  3. Name four notifiable diseases of livestock
  4. Name two diseases of poultry that are controlled by vaccination
  5. State three signs of anthrax injection disease observed in the carcass of a cattle
  6. Differentiate between active immunity and acquired passive immunity
  7. Name four systems of a tractor engine
  8. State two adjustments that should be carried out on a tractor – mounted mould board plough

in preparation for ploughing

 

  1. List three causes of ruminal lympany (Bloat) in ruminant animals
  2. (a) Give four symptoms of milk fever

(b) State two methods of controlling milk fever

 

  1. (a) Describe East Coast Fever (E.C.F) under the following sub-topics:

(i) Animal attacked

(ii) Causal organisms

(iii) Symptoms of attack

(iv) Control and treatment

(b) Explain ten measures used to control livestock diseases

 

  1. Name two livestock diseases that are spread through natural mating.
  2. a) Give the method used in introducing a vaccine to poultry against fowl typhoid             b) State other methods introducing vaccines to livestock

 

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION V

(POULTRY)

This topic entails the following:

 

  • Identification of parts of an egg.
  • Selection of eggs for incubation
  • Identification of suitable sources for chicks.
  • Descriptions of broodiness
  • Description of condition for incubation
  • Description of rearing systems
  • Categories of poultry feds according to age-of birds
  • Stating causes of stress and vices in poultry and control measures.
  • Marketing of eggs and poultry meat.
  • Selection, sorting and grading of eggs.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help the             user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices.

 

  1. A deep little poultry house measures 9mx3m. Suppose the amount of space allowed for one

bird is 0.27m2.Calculate the number of birds that can be kept comfortably in the house. Show

your working

  1. Give two functions of isthmus in female bird
  2. Give four features of a good laying nest
  3. State four qualities of marketable eggs
  4. Study the diagram showing the behaviour of chicks in a brooder and answer the questions that

follow:-

A

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) State the behaviour of chicks in A, B and C                                            

(b) Explain why the brooder guard is rounded as shown in the diagram

  1. Mention six characteristics of an egg selected for incubation
  2. Describe the management of layers in deep litter system
  3. State four reasons for egg breaking and drinking by layers in a deep litter rearing system
  4. Below are diagram showing condition of eggs seven days after incubation study them and answer

the questions

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the conditions of eggs
  2. b) Identify the egg which suitable for incubation and give a reasons for your answer
  3. c) Name the practice which used to determine the state of eggs above
  4. The diagram U below illustrates an activity carried by a poultry farmer keeping layers. Study the

diagram carefully and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the activity carried out using the set up illustrated in diagram U
  2. b) List down four preparations that should be carried out structure U before arrival of

day old chicks

  1. c) List down one behaviouristic activity which would indicate that the chicks are under stress

 

  1. Give two reasons for using litter in a poultry house
  2. Give two reasons why it is important to castrate animals when they are still young
  3. (a) Give two reasons why dehorning is carried out in farm animals

(b) State four methods of dehorning livestock

  1. State four abnormalities of eggs that can be detected during egg candling.
  2. Describe the management of day old chicks in a deep litter system from preparation of brooder up

to eight (8)weeks old

  1. a) Describe the management practices of a gilt from weaning to the time of furrowing
  2.  b) State five factors to consider in selecting a gilt for breeding stock.
  3. Study the diagram of an egg be1ow and answer the questions that fol1ow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. i) Name the parts labeled N, O and P
  2. ii) State the functions of the parts M and L

iii) Why should the egg be turned during incubation

  1. State three reactions of chicks in a brooder which has higher temperature than normal.
  2. Give three types of bedding material a poultry farmer may use in deep litter rearing of layers
  3. Give two properties of good eggs for incubation

 

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION III

(LIVESTOCK REARING PRACTICES)

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Raising young stock
  • Milk and milk components
  • Milk secretion and milk let-down
  • Correct milking techniques
  • Marketing of milk and beef.

 

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and help

the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. What is “calf crop” in beef production?
  2. a) Describe the procedure of hand milking in a dairy cow
  3. b) Explain the practices observed in clean milk production
  4. Give two reasons for washing a cow’s udder with warm water before milking
  5. Give two roles of uterus in egg formation process
  6. The diagram below is a structure of part of a cow’s udder

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

O

 

 

 

 

(i) Name the parts labeled M, N, and O on the diagram above

(ii) State the functional difference between the following hormones which influence milk

let-down;

(a) (i) Oxytoxin

(ii) Adrenalin

(b) Mention three qualities of clean milk

  1. Give four characteristics of clean milk
  2. State three maintenance practices carried out on a milking machine
  3. State four reasons for feeding Colostrums to calves immediately after calving
  4. Give three ways of stimulating milk let down in a dairy cow
  5. a) Describe the operational differences of a disc plough and mould board plough
  6. b) Explain six marketing problems affecting dairy farming in Kenya
  7. c) State four reasons for culling a boar
  8. List three advantage of artificial method of calf rearing
  9. State three methods that may be used to improve milk production in a breed

of indigenous goats

  1. (a) Outline ten physical characteristics between a good layer and a poor layer in a deep

litter house

(b) Describe five factors that influence milk production in a dairy herd

  1. a) State two reasons for washing the udder of a cow with warm water before milking.
  2. b) Name the hormone that causes each of the following in dairy cows:.
  3. i) milk letdown.
  4.  ii) lactogenesis
  5. State four methods of increasing the depth of penetration of a disc harrow.
  6. List four farm machines implements that obtain power from P.T.O shaft of a tractor
  7. List two  tractor  drawn implements used for  breaking  hardpan  in  a crop field

 

  1. State any three machines which are used for harvesting crops

 

  1. a) describe the daily maintance and  servicing of  a tractor before use
  2. b) State one function of each of the following parts of a tractor engine.
  3.     i) Fly wheel
  4.     ii) Ignition coil

iii) Thermostat

  1.     iv) Injector
  2.    v) Piston

 

 

FARM POWER AND MACHINERY

 

This topic entails the following:

  • Sources of farm power
  • Systems of a tractor
  • Tractor implements, uses and maintenance
  • Animal drawn implements uses and maintenance
  • Tractor servicing and maintenance practices

The following relevant questions and their answers in this topic will greatly motivate and

help the user to comprehend and understand the required concepts and practices:

 

  1. Give four farm operations powered by engines

 

  1. a) Describe the maintenance practices required on a tractor before it is put to daily use
  2. b) Outline the factors that influence the power output by a draught animal

 

  1. State two uses of gear box in a tractor
  2. State two uses for which wind power is harnessed
  3. Name three implements that are connected to the power take-off shaft
  4. Below is a farm implement, study it keenly and answer the questions that follow:-
N

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Name the farm implement drawn above

(b) Identify the parts labelled L and M above

(c) Give the function of the part labeled M

(d) State the field condition under which the implement can work better than the others     (½mk)

 

 

  1. (a) Explain the factors that a farmer should consider in ensuring fast and efficient cultivation

by oxen

(b) Outline the importance of lubrication system in a tractor

(c) State the daily maintenance and servicing of a tractor

 

  1. State the functions of the following parts of power transmission in a tractor:

(i) Hydraulic system

(ii) Draw bar

(iii) Propeller shaft

(ii) State three sources of tractor hire service

 

  1. (i) What is a tractor hires services (1mk)

(ii) State three sources of tractor hire service (1½mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. The diagram below represents an assembled differential of a tractor. Use it to answer the
D
A
B
Wheel

questions   that follow:-

 

 

 

C

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Name the parts labeled A, B, C and D

(b) State two functions of differential system of a tractor

(c) Give two reasons why wheel skidding of a tractor is not allowed

 

  1. State four sources of power in the farm

 

  1. Give the four strokes of a four stroke cycle tractor engine

 

  1. State four factors which ensure efficient working by oxen in the farm

 

  1. Mention two sources from which farmers can hire tractors
  2. (a) Below is a diagram of a farm implement

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(i) State the use of the implement shown above

(ii) Name the parts labeled A, B, C, and D                                                           

                (iii) State two methods of increasing the depth of penetration of the implement

 

  1. State four ways through which a farmer would ensure maximum power output from

ploughing animals

 

  1. State three advantages of a disc plough over mould board plough

 

  1. a) Explain the differences  between petrol and chisel engine
  2. b) Describe components of transmission system of a tractor

 

  1. Name four systems of a tractor engine

 

  1. Give one function of the clutch

 

  1. State two adjustments that should be carried out on a tractor – mounted mould board plough

in preparation for ploughing

  1. The diagram below illustrates a farm implement. Study it and answer the questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the implement
  2. b) Name the parts labeled X, Y and Z
  3. c) State three maintenance practices that are carried out on a disc plough

 

  1. a) Describe the operational differences of a disc plough and mould board plough
  2. b) Explain six marketing problems affecting dairy farming in Kenya
  3. c) State four reasons for culling a boar

 

  1. Name the role of the following parts of a mould board plough
  2. a) Share .
  3. b) Mould board
  4. c) Land side….

 

  1. a) State five  maintenance practices of a  mould board plough
  2. b) Explain five structural and functional differences between  the petrol and diesel engines                  c) List five uses of farm fences

 

  1. Give two uses of ox-drawn fine harrow

 

  1. List four care and maintenance of a tractor battery

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Study the diagram of a farm implement shown below and answer the questions that follow:

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(a) Identify the farm implement illustrated above

(b) Label parts A, B and C

(c)  Outline the functions of  the parts labeled E and F

(d) Give two care and maintenance of the above implement

 

  1. Outline six uses of live fences on the farm

 

  1. List two possible causes of over heating in a tractor engine

 

  1. List two events occur during induction stroke in a four stroke engine

 

  1. i) the diagram below shows a tractor drawn implement.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Name the implement
  2. b) Give two uses of the implement above
  3. c) State three maintenance practices carried out on the above implement.                   ii) Below is an illustration of a farm equipment. Study it and answer questions that follow

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Identify the farm equipment illustrated above                                                                                           b) What is the use of the equipment                                                                                                               c) Name the parts labelled W, X  and Y                                                                                                         d) What is the functions of Y on the equipment

 

  1. a) Explain the factors that influence  the power  output of farm animals
  2. b) State the importance of farm fences

 

  1. Study the illustration of a biogas digester plant and answer the questions that follow.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. a) Name the major component of biogas that is trapped in part L above
  2. b) Give the name of the material deposited in part labeled M and its use
  3. c) What is the component of K in the biogas production
  4. d) Give three disadvantages of biogas as a source of farm power

 

  1. Other than hydro-electricity mention two sources of electrical energy which can be available

for use in the farm

 

  1. a) Describe the maintenance practices required on a tractor before it is put to daily use
  2.  b) Discuss the factors that influence the power output by a draught animal

 

PAPER ONE AND TWO

SECTION II ANSWERS

FARM TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

  • Store the saw properly after use
  • Oil the blade for long storage to avoid rust
  • Sharpen the teeth properly

Tighten the handle screw if loose

 

  1. A-Tin snip – cutting thin metal sheets

B-Spokes have – smoothing curved and circular surfaces

C- Ceardeners trowel – uprooting seedlings during transplanting

D-Brace drill – boring/ drilling holes in wood

 

  1. i) Stir up pump/ bucket pump
  2. ii) Spraying livestock with acaricide

iii) A – Nozzle                  B – lance handle

  1. iv) A – Atomises the acaricide into spray      B – Direct the nozzle to the parts to be sprayed

 

  1. Garden fork is a tool used in weeding in the nursery beds/and in carrot fields

 

  1. The tool for checking the vertical straightness of a wall is Plumb bob and plumbline

 

  1. A tool for removing nails from timber is a claw harmer (1mk)

 

  1. Two examples of equipment that a livestock farmer can use in administering oral

anti-helminthes                                                                                                                        (1mk)

  • Narrow necked bottle
  • Drenching gun

–    Dosing gun

 

8.

O………………………………………

(a)        L…- Pickaxe                            M- Adjustable spanner

N..- Ring spanner                    O..- Pipe wrench

(b) Give one functional advantage of tool M over tool N      ( ½

 

  1. Tools used to perform functions on the farm

– Hand drill

– Bit brace

 

  1. – Blockage of nozzles and filters leading to uneven or no release of spray.

– Control pump may slacken or loosen, making it difficult to regulate the rate of spraying.

– Inadequate operating pressure due to leakages in the compressor pump, hoses or control valves.

 

  1. (a) – Elastrator and rubber ring.

– The burdizzo.

– Sharp knife / scalpel.

(iii) Extracting blood samples for laboratory analysis

 

  1. most appropriate set of animal hand tools that a farmer uses for the following operations:-

(i) Restraining large full when taking it around the show ring-bull  ring and  lead  stick     (1mk)

(ii) Cutting tail in sheep-rubber  ring  and  elastrator (1mk)

(iii) Extracting blood samples for laboratory analysis-hypodermic needle and syringe

 

  1. Provision of extra and quality feeds to sheep, two or three weeks before mating

 

  1. ai) On the diagram a provided below, draw the mark to indicate a pig number 147,

using the procedure of ear-notching in diagram above

  1. ii) the recommended stage of growth in pigs at which the ear-notching should be carried out?
  • before  wearing/3-7 weeks of age/21-56 days/1 month-22months)

iii) three reasons why weight is an important routine management practice in pig production

  • to determine  growth rate  i.e. weight gain
  • facilitate  administration of drugs  e.g. drenching
  • for feeding i.e.  to  know  the  amount  of feed to give
  • to determine the service/breeding time  (1×3=3mks)

 

  1. b) i)B-entrance

C-top bar/bar

D-top  cover/lid(1×3=3mks)

 

  1. ii) by applying bees wax/honey/molasses on the sides or top  of the  hive/jaggery/sheep

sorrel/saliva /sugar syrup (Accept concentrated sugar solution-reject-sugar solution)  (1×1=1mk)

iii) Outline the procedure of opening the hive to harvest honey

smoke  the  hive  through  the entrance using  a  smoker then light the hid  to  remove  the  top  bar(the  order must be  considered)  (1×2=2mks)

 

  1. a) i) E-key hole saw/compass saw

F-wood chisel

G-cold/metal chisel

H-plumb bob  (1/2×4=2mks)

  1. ii) E-to cut  or make key holes               F-cutting timber

G-cutting  metal                      H-checking  whether a  tall wall is vertical

iii)  wooden hammer/mallet(1mk)

 

b)i) open castration/surgical castration  (1mk)

  1. ii) procedure you would follow when carrying out the practice named in( i) above in piglets
  • restrain  the  piglets
  • sterilize the  blade
  • disinfect the secretal sac
  • slit  the secretal sac  to  expose  the testicle
  • locate  and  hold  the  sperm duct
  • cut  the  sperm  dust  by scrapping  with the slide
  • sew up  the wound
  • sterilize/disinfect  the wound
  • release the animal(piglet

 

  1. i) A – Sickle

B- Pruning saw

C- Hoof cutter

D- Metal float

  1. ii) A sickle is used in harvesting grass, rice, wheat by cutting

B    Pruning saw is used for pruning tree crops, cutting hard stems in coffee

C      Hoof cutter – Trimming hoofs in animals e.g. cattle, goats, sheep

D     Float (wood or metal) smoothing concrete during plastering

iii) Maintenance on B

  • Sharpen and reset the teeth
  • Replace broken handle
  • Oil the blade for long storage
  • Halter
  • Rope
  • Nose ring and leading stick

 

  1. Mention the use of the following tools.
  • -making holes for  transplanting
  • Spoke shaves.-planning curved surface
  • Tin snip.-cutting metal/iron  sheets
  • Burdizzo-castration (4x ½ =2mks)

 

  1. four precautions that should be taken when using workshop tools and equipment.
  • Use tools for correct purpose.
  • Maintain them in good working conditions.
  • Keep them safely after use.
  • Handle tools correctly during use.

Use of safety devices / protective clothes

 

  1. a) Bucket pump /stir – up pump (1×1 = 1mk)
  2. b) Spraying acaricide on livestock (1×1 =1mk)
  3.  c) W – Nozzle
  •             X – Trigger
  •             Y –  Pail /bucket

d)For holding acaricide solution during spraying. (1×1 = 1)

 

  1.  i) Identify the above diagram   (1mk)
  • Artificial vagina.
  1.  ii) Name the parts labelled A and B (2mks)
  • A – warm water
  • B – collecting cap

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION I

COMMON LIVESTOCK BREEDS

  1. two reasons for treating water for us on the farm
  • Remove chemical impurities
  • Remove foreign material
  • Remove disease earning organisms

Remove bad smell & taste

 

  1. four advantages of applying lime in clay soil
  • Lower soil acidity
  • Increase calcium content
  • Hastens decomposition of organic matter
  • Improve soil structure/ improve drainage
  • Facilitates availability and absorption of nitrogen and phosphorous
  • Improve legume nodulation and nitrogen fixation

Increase multiplication of micro- organisms

 

  1. four ways by which Re-afforestation help in land reclamation
  • Add organic matter from falling leaves
  • Recycles soil erosion
  • Control soil erosion
  • Improve drainage of swampy areas

Play part in hydrological cycle

 

  1. Distinguishing feature between Kenya white and California Kenya white is white all over the body, has pink eyes California white is white with black nose and eras; has black/ brown eyes

 

  1. Reasons why farmers keep livestock in Kenya
  • Source of food
  • Source of income
  • Cultural uses e.g. paying dowry, recreation
  • Provide source of power e.g. oxen

–    Provides raw material to the industries

 

  1. Ideal conformation features of beef cattle
  • Blocky/ square/ rectangular
  • Deep well flashed bodies
  • Short strong legs to support their heavy bodies

–    Compact body

 

  1. (i) Dual purpose cattle in Kenya.

– Sahiwal;

– Red Poll;

– Simmental;

(ii) Uses of Rotavator.

– Mixes trash and the soil;

– Cuts the furrow slices and harrows them; 92 in one pass).

– Break up large soil clods into smaller ones / performs 20 tillage;

– Cut the furrows slices / primary tillage;

 

  1. Large white is the pig with such characteristics

 

  1. Epistasis is s combination of genes which on their own could have been inferior on undesirable(1mk)

 

  1. (a) The role of livestock industry in Kenya’s economy
  • Provision of food; various livestock products such as milk, eggs, meat and honey are used as food
  • Source of labour: some livestock can be used to provide power for carrying out various activities e.g. oxen, donkeys and camels
  • Provides employment; Several people are employed in the livestock industry ether directly of indirectly e.g. those employed by KMC
  • Social cultural uses: depending on the culture of the society e.g. dowry, status, symbol e.t.c
  • Source of income when livestock and livestock products are sold either locally or internationally: income is earned whish is used for national development which is used for national development
  • Industrial development, various products are processed n industries which are taxable to raise income or national development

(stating any 5pts = 1mk x 5; Explanation each 1mk x 5pts =5mks            (10mks)

(b) The general characteristics of indigenous cattle

  • they have large thoracic humps for storing fat
  • they are tolerant to high temperatures
  • They are able to resist tropical diseases e.g East Coast fever
  • They have relatively long calving interval (beyond one year)
  • They have a slow growth rate and mature rate
  • They have smooth and short coat of hair
  • They have along and narrow head
  • they have a relatively short lactation period
  • they can walk for long distances without serious loss in condition
  • They are relatively small in size even when mature (1mk each for any 10pts = 10mks)

 

  1. (i) Dairy cattle

(ii) five characteristics that tells you that the animal belong to type name in (i) above?

  • Straight  top line
  • Large udder/well develop udder
  • Prominent milk vein
  • Large swell develop head  quarter
  • Triangular  shape
  • Large  stomach capacity (any 5×1=5mks)

(iii) three areas on the body of a cow where ticks are commonly found       (1½mk)

  • Base of ear/inside the  ears
  • Neck
  • Flanks
  • Tail switch/tail
  • Belly
  • Brisket/dew  lap (any 3x ½ =1 ½ mks)

 

  1. 4 dairy goats

– Saanen

– Jamnapari

– Anglo- Nubian

– Toggenburg

– British Alphine

 

  1. two distinguishing characteristics of Californian breed of rabbit
  • White body
  • Black ears /nose/paws/tail  (2x ½ =1mk)

 

  1. two common milk breed of goats reared in Kenya
  • British Saaren
  • The  Toggenburg
  • Anglo-Nubian
  • Jamnapari
  • The  British alpine ( ½ x2=1mks

 

  1. four dairy cattle breeds reared goats in Kenya.
  • Ayrshire
  • Friesian
  • Guernsey
  • Jersey   (4x ½ =2mks)

 

  1. Differentiate between breed of animal and type of animal. (2mk)
  • Breed-group of animals with similar characteristics and common origin.
  • Type –the purpose for which the animal is kept. (2x1mk = 2mks)    (mark as whole)

– smothers weeds

– Regulate soil temperature

– Conserve moisture

 

 

(LIVESTOCK HEALTH II

(LIVESTOCK PARASITES )

 

  1. – Use of caustic potash stick (potassium hydroxide)

– Use of dehorning collodion

 

  1. a)
  • Cause anaemia
  • Deprive the hoof animal of food
  • Cause injury and damage to animal tissue and organs
  • Transmit diseases
  • Cause irritation
  • Cause obstruction to internal organs
  1. b)
  • Human beings drop tapeworm segments/ progloltudes together with their faeces
  • Eggs are released from the segment. Once outside the human body
  • Eggs are picked by pigs when feeding
  • Eggs hatch into embryos in the intestine of pigs
  • The embryo penetrate the intestinal wall and enter into the blood stream
  • Embryo localize in the liver
  • Embryos are disturbed throughout the muscle where they become cyst/ bladder worms
  • Bladder worms get into human beings through eating under cooked pork/ bacon
  • Once inside the human intestines the cyst wall dissolves and the bladder worm attach themselves to the wall of intestines
  • Bladder warm develop into adult tape worm
  • Adult tape worm releases segments/ progloltides containing fertilized eggs with human faeces
  1. c)
  • Use prophylactic drugs/ deworms to kill the internal parasites
  • Keep animal houses clean and disinfected
  • Practice rotational grazing
  • Use of clean feeding and watery equipment
  • Use of latrines/ proper disposal of human faeces

Proper cooking of meat

  1. Functions of calcium in dairy cows.

– Milk and egg formation / production;

– Bones / skeleton / teeth formation;

– Blood clotting;

 

  1. Control measures of fleas.

– Keep clean animals sleeping places;

– Dust animal surroundings with appropriate insecticides;

– Cover with petroleum jelly to suffocate stick fast fleas;

 

  1. Control measures of fleas *NYR*
  • Dusting with appropriate insecticide in the pen
  • Ensuring cleanliness in poultry house
  • Dusting of the birds with correct insecticide
  • Applying petroleum jelly on infected parts (1mk each for any 2 pts = 2mks)

 

  1. two reasons why drenching alone is not an effective method of controlling internal parasites
  • Cannot  kill  all  stages  of  parasites
  • Cannot kill  the  eggs (2x ½ =1mk)

 

  1. -Embryo

-Cyst/bladder worm (2x ½ =1mk)

 

  1. a) K-tapeworm M-liver fluke
  2. b) a-hooks     b-suckers

c-mouth           d-digestive glands

  1. c) i) Small intestine
  2.         ii) the liver
  3. d) Water snail (1×1=1mk)

 

  1. – External parasites effects

– Transmit diseases

– Causes anemia/ sucks blood

– Causes irritation/ discomfort

– Causes wounds on the skin that may predispose animal to secondary infection

– Loss of hair

 

  1. – Read the manufacturers instructions carefully
  • Mix the acaricide appropriately
  • Pour the chemical solution into the knapsack sprayer through the sieve/ stir up pump container
  • Restore in the animal
  • Spray along the back to loin
  • Spray the sides
  • Spray under the belly including the udder/ scrotum
  • Spray the rear/ hind quarters
  • Spray fore limbs
  • Spray the face, the eras last
  • Allow the animal to drain the chemical
  • Release the animal

 

  1. a) Feed conversion is 90Kg/360Kg = ¼  = 1 : 4                                                                          *MMS*
  2. Digestion in ruminant animal – 4 stomachs
  3. i) Rumen (A pauch)

– Stores food temporarily

– Fermentation of food

– contains bacteria, fungi, protozoa which breaks down cellulose

– Synthesis of amino acids from ammonia gas

– Synthesis of vitamin B complex

  1. ii) Reticulum (Honey comb)
  • Sieves and separates fine from coarse food particles
  • Retrains foreign and undigestible materials

iii) Omasum (Many plies or book)

  • Stores food temporarily
  • Grinds and sieve food particles
  • Absorption of water
  1. iv) Abomasum (True stomach)
  • Enzymetic digestion takes place
  1. c)
  • Prevents rusting of surfaces
  • Reduces the rate of wear and tear of moving parts
  • Minimizes power loss due to friction
  • Acts as a cleaning agent
  • Reduces the heat created by the rubbing surfaces and acts as a seal between them

 

  1. Bush clearing to destroy breeding places

– Spraying breeding places with insecticides

– use fly traps with impregnated nets

– use stressing agents e.g. radio isotopes on male file sand then releasing them

 

  1. – Succulent

– Dry

 

  1. two common milk breed of goats reared in Kenya
  • British Saaren
  • The  Toggenburg
  • Anglo-Nubian
  • Jamnapari
  • The  British alpine ( ½ x2=1mks

 

  1. the element calcium and phosphorus important in the diet of young livestock?
  • For bone  formation  and development
  • For proper  teeth  development
  • For  increased  conversion  of feed
  • Increase livestock appetite  (  ½  x1=1mk)

 

16        two parasites of cattle which are also disease vectors

  • Ticks
  • Tsetse flies

Mosquitoes

 

  1. -training

-Giving incentives/motivation

-Farm mechanization

-Labour supervison

 

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION II (NUTRITION)

  1. Production ration may be utilized by dairy goats in:
  • Milk formation
  • Growth

–     Foetal/embryo development

  1. Use Pearson’s square method to calculate how much of the feedstuffs a 150kg rations (5mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Maize bran = 12 x 150 = 90kg maize bran

20

Sunflower   8 x 150 = 60kg sunflower

20

 

  1.         i) Water (1mrk)
  • Transport  medium
  • For  metabolic processes
  • Regulates  body  temperature
  • Maintains  shell  shape
  • Component of livestock product
  • Lubricant of body joints (2x ½  = 1mk)
  1.  ii) Vitamin A (1mrk)
  • Bone formation
  • Prevents diseases / Increases disease resistance
  • Improves vision

Improves vigour/ for proper growth

 

  1. Rumen.

 

  1. i) A ration containing 18% protein is  to be  made  from  maize and sunflower cake. Given

that maize contains 7% protein, and sunflower seed cake 34% protein. Use Pearson square

methods to calculate the value of feedstuffs to be used to prepare 100kgs of the feed (3mks)

  1. ii) two other methods that can be used to formulate

feed ration

  • Linear programming
  • Trial and error

Graphical method.

 

  1. (a) The daily amount of food given to an animal/ the amount of food given to an animal

per day

 

 

(b) Quantity of maize = 12 x 200Kg

18   = 133.33kg

Quantity of cotton seed = 6 x 200

18    = 66.67kg

 

  1. Hormones

Antibiotics

Medicants

  • Qualities of roughages
  • Availability of the concentrates
  • Level of production
  • Physiological states of the animals
  • Quality of concentrates
  • Economic factors
  • Qualities of roughages
  • Availability of the concentrates
  • Level of production
  • Physiological states of the animals
  • Quality of concentrates
  • Economic factors

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION III

(SELECTION AND BREEDING)

  • Steaming up of ewes to have milk to be suckled
  • Use of lambing pens
  • Ewes as made to recognize lambs after lambs
  • Blind folding ewes to activate maternal instinct
  • Attend/ treat inflamed udders/ painful
  • Pig 112 – 15 days

Rabbits 28 – 32 days

3          (i) Selection.

– It is the process of allowing certain animals to be the parents of the future generations while

culling  others;

(ii) Methods used in selection.

  • Mass selection;
  • Progeny testing;
  • Contemporary comparison;

 

  1. – Restless.

– Frequent urination.

– Swollen vulva.

– The doe throws itself on its side.

– She (does rubs herself against the wall or any other solid object.

– The doe tries to contact other rabbits in the next hutch by peeping through the cage walls.

 

  1. four meat breeds of rabbits
  • Flemish giant
  • California white
  • New Zealand white
  • Ear lop
  • chinchilla

 

  1. four reasons for cutting a breeding boar
  • Bareness/loss of Libido
  • Loss of sight, limb, cannot mate
  • Old age
  • Perpetual sickness/contract
  • Reproductive diseases
  • Aggressiveness/wildness

 

  1. – Mass
  • Progerry testing
  • Comparison

 

  1. (i) Heterosis- Increased vigour/ performance resulting from mating two superior unrelated Breeds

(ii) Epitasis- Is a combination of genes that individually could have been both undesirable

or inferior

  • Heat signs in rabbits (doe)
  • The doe throws itself on its sides
  • She rubs herself against walls or solid objects
  • Tries to contact other rabbits in the next hutch (peeping)
  • Restlessness
  • Swollen vulva
  • Frequent urination
  1. Gestation periods of :- Cow 270 – 285 days

Sow – 113 117 days

  1. Disadvantages of natural mating
  • A lot of semen is wasted
  • High chances of inbreeding
  • Large males can injure small females
  • Expensive to transport bull over long distance
  • May need extra pasture, extra cost

 

  1. a) the advantage of battery cage system of rearing layers
  • Higher  egg production due  to  less  energy wastage  by  birds
  • Accurate egg production records re kept
  • Cannibalism and egg  eating are  controlled
  • Eggs are clean
  • Allows for  mechanization
  • Birds  do not  contaminate food  and water
  • Makes handling  easy as birds  are restricted  within small areas
  • Discourages broodiness
  • Increases the sticking rate
  • Sick  birds can easily  be isolated
  • The  wire floor prevails re-infection on the parasites, worms  and coccidiosi
  • There  is no bully during feedings
  • There is low labour requirement (1×10=10mks)
  1. b) Outline ten factors considered when selecting dairy cattle for breeding
  • age-young animals  have  longer  productive live and are more productive and

Economical to keep than old animals

  • level of  performance-animals  with highest production level  be kept
  • health-consider  animals which are less susceptive to  disease
  • body  confirmation  go  for ones well people dairy characteristics
  • temperature/behaviour select only decline animals which  are easy to  handle mothering ability
  • adaptable under suitability  to  the environment
  • prolycacy  ability to give  built to  many  off springs at a time
  • physical defects
  • quality of products  (1×10=10mks)

 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. A type  of mating  where  the female of  low grade  is  mated  to a pure  bred sire of

superior  quality (1mk)

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION IV

(LIVESTOCK MANAGMENT PRACTICES)

 

  1. Reasons of carrying out crutching in sheep.

– Facilitates easy mating;

– Minimizes blowfly infestation;

– Provides hygienic conditions at lambing time;

– Allows easy access to the teats by the lambs;

– Provides hygienic suckling conditions;

 

  1. Ways of performing closed castration.

– Use of elastrator and rubber ring;

– Use of the burdizzo;

 

  1. (a)
  • B – Should take place – Hooks, cheek, rump
  • V – Is done – Thigh muscles and the shoulders
  • BT – is taken – Anus
  • M – May occur – Udder and teats
  1. b) — Ears (ear lobes)

– Tail switch..

– Under the tail head.

– Both fore and head flanks.

– Between the hooves.

  1. c) 1 – Muzzle

2 – Poll

3 – Shoulder

4 – Heart girth

 

  1. (a) – The removal of the testicles in male livestock or stoppage of production of spermatozoa or

semen.

– It is the rendering of male reproductive organs non- functional.

(b) – To control breeding and inbreeding.

– To make animals, especially the bulls docile.

– To improve quality of meat by removing unpleasant smell especially in goats.

– To encourage faster growth rates of the castrated male animals.

– To control breeding diseases such as brucellosis, vaginitis trichonomiasis and others that area

transmitted through mating.

 

  1. (a) The management of a gilt from weaning to furrowing
  • Feed gilt on at least 3kg of sow and weaner meal daily/balanced diet
  • Provide clean drinking water
  • Control any external parasites by spraying with pestcides or washing
  • Treat the gilt next to the bear at the age 12months ready to be served/serve gilt at the right age.
  • Keep the pen clean by maintaining clean
  • Flush the gilt 3-4weeks before service by feeding high quality diet
  • Take the gilt to the boar’s pen for service and let it stay there for at least 12hours
  • Observe the return to heat, f any after three weeks, and repeat the services if necessary
  • Steaming up should start 1 ½ months before furrowing by giving 3-4kg of feed
  • 7-10days furrowing, the gilt should be washed
  • The gilt should be moved to disinfected pen/clean en
  • provide guard rails or furrowing crate in a furrowing pen
  • Provide a source of heat
  • Sow and weaner meal should be reduced three days before furrowing and fed with bran
  • Observe the signs furrowing and supervise the process of furrowing
  • Deworm the gilt 7-10days before furrowing
  • Weigh the gilt regularly
  • Keep proper records

 

(b) The preparation a poultry farmer should make before the arrival of day old chicks

  • Ensure the brooder is ready 2-3days before arrival of chicks
  • Brooder should be cleaned and disinfected to reduce risk of disease infection
  • Spreading litter on the floor to provide warmth
  • Provide a functional heat source e.g. electric bulb, lantern e.t.c
  • Provide adequate feeding equipment
  • Ensure adequate floor space considering the number of chicks
  • Ensure the chick mash is ready before chicks arrive
  • Provide wire guard
  • Make holes on the walls of brooder for ventilation
  • To identify mated ewes
  • To indicate active rams hence help in culling

Identify the sire of each lamb

  • Promote docility
  • Improve meat quality
  • Control breeding diseases
  • Control interbreeding/ control hereditary defects

Improve growth rate

  • Use of swarm net
  • Use of catcher box

Placing the hire in a strategic position  for bees to occupy

  • Control deficiency diseases
  • Impact resistance to diseases

Good physical appearance/ good coat cover

 

  1. two recommended methods of docking lambs
  • Use elastrator and  rubber ring
  • Sharp knife/scalpel (2x ½ =1mk)

 

  1. three disadvantages of inbreeding
  • Loss  of  hybrid vigour
  • May lead to decline fertility  leading to species extinction
  • May  bring about reduction in performance
  • Leads to high rate of prenatal mortality (any 3x ½ =1 ½ mks)

 

  1. four routine management practices that should be carried out on a lactating ewe
  • Inadequate  feeding  /balance diet
  • Spraying/dipping  to control external  parasite
  • Drenching/deworming  to   control internal  parasite
  • Provision of clean  water  ad-lib
  • Tugging
  • Avoid extensive movement
  • Provide mineral licks (any 4x ½ =2mks)
  1. the procedure which should be followed to castrate a three weeks old piglet using

surgical Method

  • Assemble  equipment and sterilize
  • Restrain the  animal to be castrated
  • Thoroughly  wash  hands before opening  up  animals  skin
  • Artery of  forces  is used to close up the open blood vessel to stop excess  bleeding
  • Cut the  skin of scrotum
  • Remove  the  two  tests  completely, leaving  on empty scrotal sac
  • Disinfect the wound
  • Animals  heals faster  since  its  castrated  when young (7×1@=7mks)

(b) (i) State five factors that should be considered when sitting a bee hive in a farm

  • Away  from  homestead, pastures and road
  • Sheltered/quiet place
  • Near  source  of water
  • Nearest to flowers producing ants
  • Safe from predators (5×1=5mks)

 

(ii) Describe the management practices that would ensure maximum harvest of fish from a fish

pond

  • Control stocking rate
  • Control  water pollution
  • Supply  enough  food to fish
  • Aerate  the  water/constant  in flow  and  out flow of  water
  • Maintain appropriate depth of water
  • Control predators
  • Harvest fish art  correct  maturity stage
  • Fertilize  the pond/adequate  water  plants

 

 

  1. three types of bees found in a bee colony
  • The queen
  • The drown
  • The workers
  1. List three methods of castrating farm
  • Closed method-use buidizzer
  • Open method-use surgical method
  • Caponization-use  hormones

 

  1. the routine management practices of piglets from the 1st day to the 8th week
  • Placenta  disposal
  • Umbilical cord  cutting  with sharp and sterilized scalpel
  • Disinfecting  the umbilical  cord with iodine solution
  • Extracting needles teeth/teeth clipping/di-tusking
  • Keeping  piglets in  warm creep area
  • Weighing   the  piglets 24hrs  after birth
  • Feeding the piglets on colostrums
  • Iron supplementation through the intra-muscular injection/paste
  • Vaccination against diseases
  • Feed  the piglets with creep  feeds
  • Water provision  at adlibitum
  • Nose ringing
  • Putting if identification  marks e.g. ear notching
  • Deworming /drenching with antihelminthes
  • Tail  cutting of the  piglet
  • Castration of the male piglet
  • Ensure that  they are breathing
  • Assist  the weak piglets  to suckle
  • Changing  the beddings regularly
  • Removing dead piglets from the pen
  • Providing furrowing crate  to avoid crushing  of  piglets
  • Raised pers with slatted floor
  • Permanent calf pen with concrete floor
  • Movable calf pen
  • Temporary calf pen
  1. Poor nutrition – infertility

Poor timing of service

  1. three advantages of hoof trimming in sheep production
  • Facilitate easy movement
  • Control foot rot disease
  • Prevents the ram  from injuring the ewe during mating ( ½ x3=1 ½ mks)
  1. State four factors considered when citing an apiary in the farm
  • Availability  of water
  • Availability  of flowers
  • A sheltered  place
  • An area free from noise/disturbance
  • Away  from lime stead and grazing grounds
  • Well drained area (2×2=4mks)

 

  1. three methods of stocking a beehive with honey bee
  • Use  swarm nets
  • Use of a catcher box
  • Use of  an  empty  hive  ( ½ x3=1  ½ mks)

 

  1. three common methods of extracting honey from the combs
  • Use of  heat
  • Crushing  and straining

Centrifugal extractor

  1. a) i)
  2. ii) before wearing/3-7 weeks of age/21-56 days/1 month-22months)

iii) -to determine  growth rate  i.e. weight gain

  • -facilitate  administration of drugs  e.g. drenching
  • -for feeding i.e.  to  know  the  amount  of feed to give
  • -to determine the service/breeding time  (1×3=3mks)

 

  1. b) i) B-entrance

C-top bar/bar

D-top  cover/lid(1×3=3mks)

  1. ii) by applying bees wax/honey/molasses on the sides or top  of the  hive/  jaggery/sheep

sorrel/salvial/sugar syrup

(Accept concentrated sugar solution-reject-sugar solution)  (1×1=1mk)

iii) Outline the procedure of opening the hive to harvest honey

smoke  the  hive  through  the entrance using  a  smoker then light the hid  to  remove  the  top  bar(the  order must be  considered)  (1×2=2mks)

 

  1. a) i) E-key hole saw/compass saw

F-wood chisel

G-cold/metal chisel

H-plumb bob  (1/2×4=2mks)

  1. ii) E-to cut  or make key holes

F-cutting timber

G-cutting  metal

H-checking  whether a  tall wall is vertical  (1/2×4=2mks)

iii)  wooden hammer/mallet(1mk)

b))i) open castration/surgical castration  (1mk)

  1. ii) procedure you would follow when carrying out the practice named in( i) above in piglets
  • restrain  the  piglets
  • sterilize the  blade
  • disinfect the secretal sac
  • slit  the secretal sac  to  expose  the testicle
  • locate  and  hold  the  sperm duct
  • cut  the  sperm  dust  by scrapping  with the slide
  • sew up  the wound
  • sterilize/disinfect  the wound
  • release the animal(piglet)  (1/2×6=3mks)
  1. four advantages of  age  grouping farm animals as a management  practice
    • Avoids bullying among the animals
  • Facilitate feeding /adequate and economic use  of feed
  • Facilitate  the administration of  drugs e.g. drenching
  • Easy keeping  of management records
  • Facilitate  breeding/cutting  of livestock  (2×4=8mks)
  1. b) four major cause of lamb mortality from birth to weaning
  • chilling
  • scours
  • internal parasitic infertation
  • loss of  mother/lack of foster  parents
  • inadequate mothers  milk/malnutrition
  • crushing  by t he  mother (1×4=4mks)

 

  1. c) i)cause-bacteria/brucella abortus brucells
  2. ii) Transmission-sexually transmitted/it is a breeding diseases

iiI) Symptoms

  • abortion/premature  birth
  • yellowish  slimy  and odourless discharge through  the vulva
  • retained afterbirth/placenta
  • the cow  may become  barren  (1×4=4mks)
  1. iv) Control measures
  • vaccination
  • use of healthy semen/bull/Al
  • cull/destroy  affected cattle
  • proper  disposal of foetus  and carcass (1×2=2mks)

 

  1. Reasons for castrating animals when young
  • Less pain
  • Quick healing

–    Little loss of blood

 

 

  1. a) Reasons for dehorning farm animals
  • Reduce space occupied by animal
  • Making handling easier
  • To reduce destruction of farm structures
  • To make them
  • To reduce risk, injury to farmer and other animals 2x ½ = 1 mark
  1. b) Methods of dehorning livestock
  • Use of caustic potash stick (Potassium hydroxide)
  • Use of dehorning iron
  • Use of dehorning saw or wire
  • Use of rubber ring and elastrator

–     Use of dehorning collation

  1. a)Is the giving of high quality seeds to a gestating animal towards end gestation period
  2. b) Reasons for steaming up
  • Increase milk yield after farming
  • Help build up body reserves for lactation
  • Ensure rapid growth and development foetus

–     Ensure healthy and string young at birth

 

  1. four management practices that should be carried on a fish pond in order to obtain maximum

Fish production.(2mrk)

  • Control predators.
  • Control Water pollution.
  • Maintain appropriate water level.
  • Maintain correct stocking rate.
  • Supply adequate food. (4x ½  =2mks

 

  1. four factors considered when formulating livestock ration. (2mk)
  • Body weight / size
  • Available feeds
  • Cost of feeds
  • Nutrient composition of feeds available.
  • Ingredients required in the ratio.
  • Animals level of production.
  • Age / stage of growth.

Type of production.

 

  1. four conditions that necessitate the handling of farm animals. (2mk)
  • During treatment
  • When spraying or hand dressing
  • When milking
  • When performing some management practices e.g. dehorning

When inspecting animals for any signs of a disease

 

  1. – Large animals e.g. buffaloes

– man activities e.g. farming

– root pressure of plants

– burrowing animals e.g. moles, termites

 

  1. (a) – Random/zigzag soil sampling-Arrow roots

(b) -Old manure heaps

– Ant hills

– Dead furrows

– Rice

– Fence lines

– Cattle bomas

 

 

FARM STRUCTURES

  • Steel is expensive
  • Require high skilled labour
  • Heavy and difficult to transport
  • Rusts easily

Low workability

  • To prevent termites from rising up to the wall
  • To reduce moisture rising up the wall
  1. A group of calves kept according to age

 

  1. a) Procedure in construction of a barbed wire fence
  • Slash/ clear vegetation around fence line 2 m wide
  • Measure and mark spots for holes using pegs
  • Dig holes 60cm – 90cm deep depending areas where the poles are to be placed
  • Assemble poles and other requirement materials
  • Drop pole and struts at respective points
  • Prepare concrete mixture
  • Erect poles in pole holes
  • Align the poles and put concrete using spade or soil
  • Compact the concrete in holes
  • Allow to settle for a few days while curing
  • Put barbed wire around using appropriate tools
  • Tighten the wire using wire strainer
  • Mail barbed wire using fencing staple at required distance
  • Put droppers along the fence as required 12×1=12 mks
  1. b) Wood preservatives
  • Creosote
  • Old engine oil
  • Paint/ far/ tanesc
  • Copper sulphate
  • Sodium dichromate
  • Arsenic pentoxide
  • Pentachloroplenol
  • Triputyl tin oxide 4×1=4 mks
  1. c) Choice of farm building materials
  • Cost of materials
  • Availability/ strength of the material
  • Workability

Type of enterprise

 

  1. (i) Factors considered when sitting a fish pond.

– Reliable source of water/ water source;

– Soil type / poorly drained clay soil the best;

– Topography / gently sloping;

– Security/ be secure from thieves / predators;

– Water quality / free of pollutants;

– Machine milking;

(ii) Features of a laying nest.

  • Dimly lit; dark;
  • Spacious / large enough to accommodate bird comfortably;
  • Dry clean beddings;
  • Have lockable doors;
  • Kept in secluded parts of the house;
  • Have slanting roofs to prevent birds from perching on;
  1. Uses of footbath in cattle dip.

– To wash the foot off mud;

– Contains chemicals for controlling foot rot; CUSO4 (blue vitriol/ formalin solution;)

  1. (a) – A green house is a farm structure made up of glass or translucent material as wall and

roof to  enhance and achieve optimum condition for valuable horticultural crop production.

(b) Material used in green house construction.

– Galvanizing iron.

– Aluminium or wooden frame.

– Glass or clear polythene sheet.

– Fibre glass or reinforced panels.

(c) Maintenance practices on green house.

– Dirty polythene sheet should be clear.

– Blocked systems should be repaired and cleared.

– Torn polythene material should be replaced.

– Should be fenced for security.

(d)  Importance of maintaining farm structures.

– Last longer/ enhance durability.

– Reduce replacement cost.

– Protect livestock from predator.

– Prevent straying animals.

– To prevent diseases brought by cold winds.

– Make them effective in their use.

 

  1. Disadvantages of barbed wire fence in paddocking:-
  • Can remove wool from sheep
  • Barbs can injure the animals

–    Smaller animals can pass through if the wire strands are widely spread

 

  1. (a)        A .Inlet

B – Spillway/ overflow.

C –  Drain pipe/outlet              (1 ½ mk each = 1 ½  mks)

(b) The most appropriate part for feeding is part X   (1mk)

(c) Two reasons why the floor of the pond should be covered with lime

  • Facilitate the work of fertilizer in the pond
  • Maintain PH of pond water ( ½  mk each 2pts = 1mk)

(d) Why should part marked B be screened?

  • Prevent escape of fish
  • Prevent entry f foreign /unwanted organisms ( ½ x 1pt = ½mk)

(e) three maintenance practices carried out on the structure

  • Removing weeds
  • Unblocking inlet and outlets
  • Maintaining same water level
  • repairing leakages on walls, floor e.t.c

–    Draining of water during harvesting

 

  1. (a)Stille ( ½ mk x 1pt =  ½ mk)

(b) A pass allows only human passage while gate allows for both human and livestock in and

out of the farm      ( ½mk mark as a whole)

(c) One type of live fence

  • Electric

–    Hedges

 

  1. four requirements of a good maize store
  • Leak proof
  • Rat proof
  • Properly ventilated
  • Easy to clean
  • Raised off the ground properly drained
  • easy to load and unload/spacious (any 4x ½ =2mks)

 

  1. three factors that determine the depth and size of foundation in a farm building
  • Function  of  building
  • Soil type
  • Soil  depth
  • Drainage of area (any 3x ½ =1 ½ mks)

 

  1. (a) the uses of various hand tools in the construction of a poultry house
  • Jembe- levelling the  ground
  • Spade-scooping soil
  • Tape-measuring distance
  • Wheel barrow-carrying small load
  • Spirit level-checking whether surface  is vertical or  horizontal
  • Rip-saw/tenor saw-cutting  timber
  • Hand drill/bit brace-boring in  wood
  • Claw hammer-driving  in/hitting and removing nails
  • G-clamp-holding  objects /wood  when  joining
  • Tin-snip-cutting  iron  sheet
  • Chisel
  • Mallet (any 10×1=10mks)

(b) the procedure of erecting wooden rail fence(7mks)

  • Locate  the area  to  be fenced off
  • Determine the amount of  material  needed
  • Treat  the  post
  • Clear the area
  • Measure  the  distance  3-4m  apart and  place  pegs
  • Dig  holes  up to 60cm deep
  • Put fencing  post  in hole and  reinforce with  concrete
  • Place 3-4 horizontal rails
  • Space at  about 125mm,175mm, 225mm  and 275mm from  ground
  • Fixed  them  onto  post using nail (10x1pt=10mks)

(c) factors considered when choosing the construction materials for farm building

  • Purpose  of building determine  strength and durability of material
  • Availability of capital; depends  on  ability to purchase
  • Aesthetic aspect:-determine by economic status of farmers
  • Availability of material: easily obtained
  • Durability: good quality .not be  repaired  often
  • Resistant to extreme weather  condition
  • Safely  of  farm animals and farmer:- not have side  effects/workability
  • Suitability of the  material.(any5pointsx2mks=10mks)

 

 

  1. – Have adequate space

– single housing ( 1caf per pen)

– Properly lit

– Have proper drainage

-Well ventilated

– Drought free

 

  1. – Demarcates boundaries of farms

– Prevents intruders, wild animals, thieves in the farms

– Facilitate mixed farming

– Enhance paddocking of farm for effective rotational grazing

– Control unnecessary movement in the farm

– Control inbreeding

– Isolate sick animal

 

  1. (a) (i) A – Wall plate/team beam/lintel

B – Damp proof coarse

C- Hard core

(ii) – Prevents termite invasion

– Prevents water capillarity /dampness

(b) (i) 1 bag of cement

3 parts/wheel barrows of sand

5 parts /wheel barrows of ballasts or gravel

(ii) Sand

3 parts of sand = 24m3

1 bag = 1×24 = 8m3

3

ballast

parts = 24m3

5 parts = 5×24 = 40m3 (½mk)

3

  1. (a) Maintenance of the fish pond

– Protection of the pond – regularly check pond walls, plant grass on the walls to help control soil erosion

– Pond bottom repair- check water seepage problems regularly, It can be done introducing an even layer of clay to seal off the bottom of pond properly

– Removal of weeds; -regularly remove all weeds that grow on the walls and around the ponds

– Maintenance of appropriate water level: Maintain the same level of water in the pond by use of inlet and outlets

– Inspection of pond: – Regularly check for cracks in the walls and seal immediately

– Cleaning the pond- once n a while to drain out the pond water, remove all stones, silt or roots that may have settled at the pond bottom, lime the water before refilling it with water

– removal of organic materials – any vegetative matter or food remains should be removed as soon as they are noticed to ensure they do not start decomposing

– Repair fence around the pond- In case of worn out posts, repair/replace immediately

(b) Ways of controlling of fish predators in a fish pond

– Put a strong wire fence around the pond

– Provide a wire screen above the pond to guard against prevatory birds

– A sire screen is put in the inlet, outlet and in the spillway

– Scare away in the binds as necessary

– occasionally drain the ponds to kill all unwanted predatora in the pond bottom

 

  1. four reasons of treating timber before roofing farm buildings
  • Prevent attack from insects
  • Prevent attack from fungi (rotting)
  • Resist weather condition:-extreme temperature
  • Resist water penetration
  • To harden woo-make it durable and more strong
  • To avoid warping

 

  1. four uses of crushing in the farm
  • Spraying livestock  against external parasites
  • Identifying animals by use  of  such   methods as branding ,ear-tagging and ear notching
  • Vaccination
  • Administering prophylactic drugs to the animals
  • Treating sick animals
  • Dehorning
  • Pregnancy test
  • Artificial insemination
  • Taking  body temperature
  • Hoof trimming
  • Milking

 

  1. a) A fence is a structure that encloses a designated area and forms a physical barrier for

animals and human

  1. b) List various types of fences
  • live  fence
  • electric  fence
  • barbed wire fence
  • chicken wire  fence
  • wooden fence
  • pole and rail fence
  • plain  wire  fence
  • trench fence
  • wall  fence
  1. c) Describe advantages of fences
  • keep off intruders/thieves
  • prevent  damage of crops  by  animals
  • control grazing in paddocks
  • control breeding by separating male and female
  • acts as wind break
  • control pests and disease by controlling  wild animals
  • add aesthetic value
  • provide livestock feed or human fruits  or firewood
  • add value  to the farm
  • provide security to the  house stead and farm animas
  • they form perimeter fence along the boundary to demarcate farm land from the  neighbours
  • used to isolate sick animals from the rest of the herd  to prevent spread of diseases
  • separate crop field from pasture facilitating mixed farming

 

  1. i) E – rafter         F- Struct

G- Eaves                     H- Wall plate

  1. ii) E (Rafter) – To provide support for the roofing materials

F (Strut) – To support the rafter/ holding the weight of the roof

G (Eaves) – Prevent rain from falling on the wall

H- (wall plate)- To support the roof

iii) Chemicals for treating timber

  • Tar
  • Sodium dichromate
  • Copper sulphate
  • Arsenic pentoxide
  • Old engine oil
  • Pentachlorophenox
  • Tributyl tin oxide
  • Creosote
  • Paint

 

  1. i) K- Spill way (reject over flow pipe)

L- Drainage channel

  1. ii) M is deeper to provide breeding place for the fish

iii) Maintenance of the pond

  • Cleaning the pond by removing all foreign materials
  • Repairing the dyke (bunds)
  • Maintain good level of water
  • Control predators
  • Weed control around the pond
  • Plant grass on dykes to prevent erosion
  • Remove the silt if accumulated
  • Regular pond fertilization
  • Apply lime before refilling

 

  1. a) Siting a fish pond
  2. i) Soil type- clay soil is the best
  3. ii) Topography – requires gentle slope not Lilly and flat

iii) Source of water – near reliable source

  1. iv) Marketing centre should be close
  2. v) Accessibility from the homestead
  3. vi) Security – protected against predators

vii) far from natural source of fish

  1. b)
  • General farm hygiene, cleanliness of houses, equipment proper carcass disposal by burning/ burying/
  • Disinfection to destroy pathogens e.g. Anthrax and calf diseases
  • Isolation of sick animals – separated from healthy ones to avoid spread of diseases e.g. foot mouth
  • Drenching/ deworming to control internal parasites e.g. tapeworms and roundworms
  • Treatment of the sick animal – to prevent spread of diseases
  • Vaccination to create resistance to diseases on regular basis e.g. foot and mouth, anthrax, new castle
  • Control vectors – to avoid disease transmission e.g. ECF, nagana/ specific method
  • Prophylactic approach/ use of drugs to avoid injection e.g dry cow therapy against mastitis
  • Trypanocidal drugs to control trypanosomiasis
  • Proper breeding to control breeding diseases e.g. brucellosis
  • Proper feeding to prevent nutritional disorders e.g. milk fever, anaemia
  • Slaughtering/ killing – to prevent spread of contagious diseases e.g. anthrax
  • Quarantine – to avoid spread of diseases
  • – prevent introduction of diseases
  • Proper housing to avoid predisposing the animal to diseases e.g. ventilation, spacing
  • Foot trimming to minimize occurrence foot rot

 

 

 

  1. four factors which influence the selection of materials for constructing a diary shed
  • Kind of dairy shed i.e.  permanent  or  temporary
  • Availability of  materials
  • Cost of  materials
  • Environment conditions of climate and soil type
  • Durability of materials a
  • Availability of killed labour for  construction
  • Capital available  (1/2×4=2mks)

 

  1. a)
2
  1. i) On the diagram a provided below, draw the mark to indicate a pig number 147,

using the procedure of ear-notching in diagram above

ii)the recommended stage of growth in pigs at which the ear-notching should be carried out?

  • before  wearing/3-7 weeks of age/21-56 days/1 month-22months)

iii) State any three reasons why weight is an important routine management practice in pig production

  • to determine  growth rate  i.e. weight gain
  • facilitate  administration of drugs  e.g. drenching
  • for feeding i.e.  to  know  the  amount  of feed to give
  • to determine the service/breeding time  (1×3=3mks)

 

  1. b) i) B-entrance

C-top bar/bar

D-top  cover/lid(1×3=3mks)

 

  1. ii) by applying bees wax/honey/molasses on the  sides or top  of the  hive/ jaggery/sheep

sorrel/salvial/sugar syrup

(Accept concentrated sugar solution-reject-sugar solution)  (1×1=1mk)

iii) Outline the procedure of opening the hive to harvest honey

smoke  the  hive  through  the entrance using  a  smoker then light the hid  to  remove  the  top  bar(the  order must be  considered)  (1×2=2mks)

 

  1. a) State five  maintenance practice of a  mould board plough
  • Lubricate  the moving pests
  • Sharpen blunt  share
  • Tighten bolts and   nuts
  • Clean  the  plough after  use
  • Coat  the unpainted  parts with old engine oil before any storage
  • Replace worn out parts (1×5=5mks)
  1.  b) Explain five structural   and functional differences between the petrol and diesel engines
Petrol engine Diesel engine
i)has a carburetor

ii)fuel and air mixed in the carburetor

iii)fuel ignited by an electric spark

 

iv)produces little smoke

v)is  light  in weight

i)Has  an  injector pump

ii)Fuel and air  mixed  within  the cylinder

iii)fuel ignited by  compression of air and  fuel

mixture  in the cylinder

iv)produces  a lot of  smoke

v)relatively  heavy

 

  1.  c) List five uses of farm fences
  • keep of wild  life ,predation and  intruders
  • demarcates boundaries
  • separate crop field from pasture land
  • divide pasture land into  paddock
  • control  movement of  animals and people within  the farm and  prevent formation of unnecessary pests
  • control disease  and parasites helps in isolate  sick animals
  • helps in  controlling breeding
  • provide security
  • act as  wind break  (1×5=5mks)

 

  1. Uses of farm buildings
  • Protect the farm animals from predators
  • Provide shelter to the farmer and livestock
  • Used to store farm produce and valuable inputs
  • Controls livestock diseases and parasites

–     Enhances efficiencies in farm planning, budgeting and production

 

  1. Structural requirements for proper housing
  • Well ventilation
  • Free from cold/ draught
  • Adequate space
  • Proper drainage
  • Leak proof roof
  • Well lighting
  • Easy to clean/ concrete floor

 

  1. a) – roof
  2. b) P- purklin                    Q- Rafter

R- Cross tie                 S- Gutter

  1. c) P- Support roofing material/ iron sheet

Q – Collect water and safely directs it away from building

 

  1. a) Honey
  2. b) Crushing and straining
  3. c) Procedure of harvesting the named product
  • Wear protective clothes
  • Approach hive quietly from behind
  • Blow smoke around hive then through entrance
  • Lower hive
  • Remove lid/ cover
  • Lift top bars and brush off with bees
  • Cut honey combs with honey leaving 3cm of wax
  • Put combs in container
  • Place back bars
  • Put lid
  • Return hive in position
  1. d) Factors that affect quality of product harvested
  • Type of plant from which nectar is obtained
  • Maturity stage
  • Method of harvesting
  • Method of processing
  1. i)Docking
  2. ii) Reasons for carrying out the operation
  • Avoid incidences of blowfly
  • Make mating easy
  • Even distribution of fat in body
  • Avoid dirtifying wool

iii) Age of operation

  • within two weeks from lambing
  1. iv) Methods used for operation
  • use of rubber ring and elastrator
  • cutting with sterilized docking knife
  • use of burdizzo
  • use of hot iron bar
  1. v) Routine management practice carried out on part B

– hoof trimming

 

  1. a) Five parts of plunge dip
    1. Holding yard- Hold animal before dipping
    2. Foot bath- Wash animal feet off dung, mud

-Prevent foot rot/ contain copper sulphur,

  • Jump- Narrow entrance allow single animal easily to jump in dip wash
  1. Draining race- Animal held while dip wash drain back in dip tank
  2. Drying yard- Animals need to dry before allowed to pasture, avoid contamination
  3. Silt trap-raps mad, dung before dip wash flow back to dip tank, prevent siltation of dip tank
  • Shelter-Prevent evaporation

-Prevent dilution of dip wash with rains

  1. b) Six uses of live fences
  • Thorn species prevent wild animals and other invaders into the farm
  • Tall varieties act as wind breakers
  • Add aesthetic value to the homestead
  • Roots holds soil firmly controlling soil erosion
  • Species such as lantana canara can be used to feed livestock
  • Provide shade to livestock and man
  • Trimmed branches can be used as organic manure, wood fuel
  • Some species have medicinal value 1×6=6 marks

 

  1. c) Four factors that influence power output of drought animal
  2. i) Training- Proper training of oxen will plough better and faster than untrained animal
  3. ii) Feeding- Well fed animals work better than poorly fed animals

iii) Rest-Animals given enough rest work better than those that are not

  1. iv) Honestly-Animals housed are protected from harsh condition e.g. cold thus work better
  2. v) Disease control- Animals treated when sick, vaccinated, sprayed/ dipped against

external parasites/ dewormed against internal parasites are more efficient

  1. vi) Age of animals- Young and very old animals give low output than averagely aged

 

 

 

LIVESTOCK HEALTH III

(LIVESTOCK DISEASES)

  1. -Mastitis

– Milk fever

  1. Pre-disposing factors of foot rot.

– Overgrown / untrimmed hooves;

– Tick infestation between hooves;

– Muddy / filthy living / grazing areas;

– Presence of sharp objects e.g. stones;

  1. (i) Causative agents of Brucellosis.

Brucella abort – Cattle

Brucella suis  – Pigs

Brucella malitensis – sheep and goats;                                                                     (½ x 1 = ½ mk)

(ii) Symptoms of contagious abortions.

  • Retained after birth;
  • Sterility in cows;
  • Spontaneous abortion;
  • Yellowish – brown, slimy discharge, odourless discharge from the vulva after abortion;

 

(iii) Methods of controlling contagious abortion.

  • Use of artificial insemination (A.I).
  • Vaccination against the disease in young animals;
  • Avoid contact with the aborted fetus;
  • Blood tests of all breeding animals before mating;

Cull, slaughter infected animals;

 

  1. A vaccine is an active disease pathogen reduced in strength /virulence or killed and is

introduced into an animals body to induce immunity

 

  1. (a) Discuss black quarter under control predators under the following sub-headings:-

(i) animal affected-cattle, sheep, goats

(ii) casual organism-clostridium chauvei

(iii) Symptoms of disease       (5mks)

  • Rise in body temperature
  • Lameness  and  swelling of  upper part  of  limbs,  making animals  lie on side
  • Swollen  shoulders  on either side of  body, chest or  back,  formation of gas under skin
  • Difficulties in breathing
  • Muscle appear black and spongy
  • Grunting and grinding of teeth
  • Failure to  chew cud
  • On  exposure  to air, muscle of  body rapidly  darken

(iv) control measures  (3mks)

  • Annual vaccination  using  black  quarter  vaccine
  • Burning  of   carcass
  • Carcass  should not be  skinned or  opened
  • Cleaning  and treating  of  all wounds  with antiseptics (any 3×1=3mks)

(b) (i) Explain four measures used to control liver flukes      (4mks)

  • Controlling liver flukes
  • Draining  swampy  areas
  • Avoid grazing animals in swamps  area
  • Burning heavily infested pastures
  • Apply  chemicals (copper  sulphate) to kill snails
  • Remove and  kill snails
  • Fencing  off swampy area (any 4×1=4mks)

(ii) Name an intermediate host of liver fluke

Water  snail (limnea sp.)

(c) Explain the following terms as used in livestock production

(i) Embryo transfer

  • Method  of breeding  which involve  removal of ova  from a  superior animal, fertilize externally   in a test tube  then transfer to a foster mother which carry pregnancy to term

(ii) Artificial insemination

  • Introduction of semen  in to the females reproductive system by  use of a tube

(iii) Line breeding

  • Is mating  of distantly related animals but  within the same breed

(iv) Cross breeding

  • Mating  of animals  belonging  to  different breeds e.g. fresian bull and  jersey cow

(v) Up-grading

  • Is   the  mating  of high grade  bull/sire  to a low  grade cow/dam (05×1=5mks)

 

 

  1. – Overgrown hooves

– Presence of sharp objects/stores

– Muddy living/grazing areas

– Living infestation between hooves

  1. (a) (i) Coccidia

(ii) Poultry, calves, young rabbits, kids, lambs

(iii) -Diarrhea

– Dysentery in the dung

– Euraciation

– Ruffled feathers

– Birds become dull with dropping wings

– sudden death in birds, rabbits and kids

(iv) Drugs such as coccidiostats mixed with food or water

– Isolation of infected animals

– Avoid filthy, unhygienic animal surroundings

– Avoid common dunking points for livestock from different farms

– Avoid overcrowding in poultry houses

(b) (i) – Able to kill ticks

– Harmless to both human beings and livestock

– stable – remains effective even after contamination by dung, mud or hair

(ii) – Spraying animals

  • dipping – involves immersing the animal into the acaricide or wetting the animal by the acaricide

– Hand dressing – involves smearing pyegrene on areas not likely to be reached by the acaricide

e.g. in the ears

  1. four ways of controlling coccidiosis in the farm
  • Avoid overcrowding in poultry
  • Provision of coccidiostat in feeds and water
  • Use of portable calf pen
  • Practicing proper hygiene
  1. four predisposing factors of scour in calves
  • Unhygienic  condition in the house of the young ones
  • Feeding  the calves on cold milk
  • Lack of colostrums and
  • Feeding at irregular intervals
  1. four notifiable diseases of livestock
  • Rinderpest
  • Foot and mouth
  • Anthrax
  • Rift valley fever
  • New  castle  disease: mud cow disease
  1. New castle, fowl pox, fowl typhoid, gumboro, marek – injections, pursaa disease
  • Signs of anthrax in carcasses
  • Blood does not clot
  • No rigormatics after death
  • Stomach swells/ bloat
  • Darkened blood oozes out through the natural opening
  1. Differentiate
  • Active immunity – animal producing antibodies
  • Acquired/ passive immunity – external source of immunity
  • Fuel system
  • Electrical system
  • Cooling
  • Lubrication
  • Transmission
  • Ignition
  • Hydraulic

 

  1. 2 adjustment on mould board plough
  • Adjust the plough depth
  • Front furrow depth
  • Lowering/ raising ploughing pitch
  • Front furrow width

 

  1. a) Disc plough reject disc alone
  2. b) X – Disc scrapper

Y-  Rear wheel/ furrow wheel

Z – Disc

  1. c) – Replace broken discs
  • Clean plough after use reject wash plough
  • Lubricate hubs and furrow wheel bearing/ moving parts reject movable parts
  • Lighten loose nuts and bolts
  • Store in a cool dry place
  • Apply old engine oil to prevent rusting during long storage/ paint implement
  1. Causes of ruminal tympany (Bloat)
  • Obstruction of esophagus due to bulky food e.g. potatoes
  • Abnormal pressure exerted on esophagus by swelling in wall of chest

Indigestion due to eating poisonous herbs, soft young green foliage

 

  1. a) Symptoms of milk fever
  • Muscular twitching
  • Staggering
  • Animal lies down on its side most of the time
  • Animals lies on sternum with rock twisted on one side
  • General paralysis
  • Breathing becomes slow and weak 4x ½ =2 marks
  1. b) Control measures of milk fever
  • Feed animal o diet rich in calcium
  • Give intramuscular injection of calcium 2-3 days before cavity
  • Partial milking

–     Cull susceptible animal

 

  1. East coast fever (ECF)
  2. i) cattle 1×1=1 mark
  3. ii) Theirelia parva Reject if not underlined, spellings are wrong

iii)

  • Fever/ high temperature
  • Salivation
  • Lachrimentim/ tears from eyes
  • Difficult in breathing
  • Haemorrhages in vulva/ mouth
  • Coughing
  • Sight impairment                                     6×1=6 marks
  1. iv)
  • Regular spraying/ dipping/ hand dressing with acaricide
  • Fencing/ rotational grazing
  • Treatment using appropriate drugs 2×1=2 marks
  1. b) Ten measures used to control livestock diseases
  2. i) Proper breeding and selection

– Animals fed on balanced ration adequate in quantity and quality are strong and able to resist    diseases

  1. ii) Proper breeding and selection

– Animals selected that are free from diseases or resistant to diseases will prevent transmission of diseases

 

iii) Proper housing and hygiene’s

– Animals houses should be built to meet construction requirement e.g. ventilation, space, drainage, leak proof, lighting and will prevent and protect animals from contracting diseases

  1. iv) Isolation of sick animals

– Is separation and confinement of animals from health ones while undergoing treatment, this prevents spread of the diseases

  1. v) Imposition of quarantine

– Is restriction of movement of animals and their products from and into affected areas, thus prevents spreads of diseases

  1. vi) Prophylactic measure and treatment

– Involves use of drugs before disease attack to prevent occurrence e.g. use of coccidiostat to control coccichosis, drenching to prevent anti helminites

– Also involve vaccination, spraying with appropriate acaricize and treatment to restore good health

vii) Slaughtering affected animla

– Highly infection and contagious diseases e.g. rinderpest, new cattle foot and mouth animals should be slaughtered and carcasses will dispose to prevent spread

viii) Use of antiseptics and disinfectants

– Applied on skin to kill germs or clean livestock to maintain hygiene

  • Vaginitis.
  • Brucellosis.
  • Trichomaniasis.
  • Vaginitis.
  • Brucellosis.
  • Trichomaniasis.
  • Leptospirosis. (2x ½  = 1mk)

 

  1. (a) injection             (b)oral

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION V

(POULTRY)

  1. One bird occupies 0.27m2

Area available 9m x 3m= 27m2

1 bird        0.27m2

?          27m2

= 27m2    = 100 birds        1×2=2mis

0.27m2

 

  1. Functions of isthmus.

– Shell membranes formed/ determines shape of egg;

– Water mineral salts and vitamins added;

 

  1. Features of a laying nest.
  • Dimly lit; dark;
  • Spacious / large enough to accommodate bird comfortably;
  • Dry clean beddings;
  • Have lockable doors;
  • Kept in secluded parts of the house;
  • Have slanting roofs to prevent birds from perching on;

Have an appropriate height from floor;

 

  1. Qualities of marketable eggs.
  • Smooth texture;
  • Right shape, colour, size and weight;
  • Right shell hardness;

Clean and fresh;

 

  1. (a)           A – Too high temperature

B- draught C chilliness from left side

C – Inadequate heat supply /low temperatures           ( ½ x 3 = 1 ½ mk)

(b) Explain why the brooder guard is rounded as shown in the diagram

To avoid overcrowding in the corners which can lead the suffocation and death

 

  1. – Fertilized

– Medium size (55-60gm)

– oval shaped

– free form abnormalities e.g. double yolk/ blood spots

– Be freshly collected (not more than 1 week)

– Have smooth shells

– Be free from cracks in the shells

– Be clean

 

  1. Adequate space

– Litter to be kept dry and free form dust

– Turn the liter frequently

– Perches and rosters should be adequate and well spaced

– Adequate waterers

– Well distributed waterers

–  Provide clean and adequate water

– equipment to be kept clean

– Replenish soft litter in the nest

– ensure the nest is dark

– Collect eggs regularly

– Feed the birds well

– Supply gut to assist in digestion

– Keep the birds busy by hanging greens

– Curl the birds and pool layers

– De-beak birds to prevent cannibalism

– Vaccinate birds regularly

– Check birds for disease symptoms

– control parasites

– Avoid stress factors

– Discourage broodiness

– Maintain and repair the houses

– Provide enough fed troughs

– Keep proper records

– Dispose off dead birds

 

 

  1. four reasons for egg breaking and drinking by layers in a deep litter rearing System             Bright light in the laying boxes/over corroding/few laying boxes
  • Poor feeding without mineral rich feeds
  • Undebeaked birds
  • Irregular egg collection

 

  1. a)      a-infertile (clear)

b-fertile egg

c-damage yolk

  1. b) Identify the egg which suitable for incubation and give a reasons for your answer Egg b-it is fertile and will develop into a chick
  2. c) Name the practice which used to determine the state of eggs above

Candling

 

  1. a) Brooding of chicks (1×1=1mk)
  2. b) four preparations that should be carried out structure U before arrival of day old chicks

cleaning the house and brooder with disinfectant

  • dusting with chemical to kill etoparasites
  • placing  the polythene  paper on  fresh  and clean saw  dust
  • fixing  and setting of sources of heat  and  light
  • Fixing the feed and water troughs and putting fresh feed and water.
  1. c) List down one behaviouristic activity which would indicate that the chicks are under stress Moving away or close to the heat source
  • Fighting
  • Cannibalism

 

  1. – Litter gives comfort and warmth to the birds

– Helps in drying dropping

– keeps birds bust

  1. Reasons for castrating animals when young
  • Less pain
  • Quick healing

–    Little loss of blood

 

  1. a) Reasons for dehorning farm animals
  • Reduce space occupied by animal
  • Making handling easier
  • To reduce destruction of farm structures
  • To make them
  • To reduce risk, injury to farmer and other animals                         2x ½ = 1 mark
  1. b) Methods of dehorning livestock
  • Use of caustic potash stick (Potassium hydroxide)
  • Use of dehorning iron
  • Use of dehorning saw or wire
  • Use of rubber ring and elastrator

–     Use of dehorning collation

  1. four abnormalities of eggs that can be detected during egg candling. (2mk)
  • Absence of yolk.
  • Double / triple yolk.
  • Air space in wrong position.
  • Excessively large air space.
  • Cracks on egg shell.
  • Blood / meat spots.
  • Deformed / broken yolk.
  1. The management of day old chicks in a deep litter system from preparation

of brooder up to eight (8)weeks old (20mks)

  • ensure  brooder is  working  well 2-3days  before  arrival  of  chicks
  • provide  brooded  with  litter  for  warmth and  moisture  absorption
  • provide  heat  source
  • put  wire gauze around  the  heat source
  • make holes on the  brooder to provide fresh  air
  • provide dim light to prevent  cannibalism
  • cover  litter with  polythene  sheet  or  newspaper  and place feeds on them to discourage  chicks  from  eating litter
  • check the temperature at  above 15cm above  the  floor to  ensure  that  the temperature  is  appropriate
  • from 4th -6th week withdraw the  heat source gradually
  • feed  chicks  on chicks mash
  • provide  plenty of  clean water
  • vaccinate against  Newcastle disease  after 2-3  weeks
  • keep proper records
  • dust  birds  with  insecticide  to control external parasites
  • at 6 weeks  introduce growers  mash
  • isolate sick birds  from  healthy ewes
  • remove  and treat sick birds
  • clean  and  disinfect the  house
  • provide  greens
  • remove dead  chicks from the  house
  • provide  foot bath with disinfectants

 

  1. (a)- Piglets are weaned at the age of 8 weeks and feet on sow and weaner meal.

– Deworming should be done to control internal parasites.

– Vaccinate to control diseases e.g African swine Fever.

– Spray to control external parasites

– Identification is done by ear notching

– Take it to pork when it shows signs of being heat

-Trim over grown hooves.

– Gestation period is 4 months

– Prepare furrowing pen by disinfecting the walls

– Sow brought to furrowing pen 3 days to.

 

(b) -Age

-Mothering ability be good

-Physical fitness

-Health of gut

-Body confirmation

-Temperament of behaviour

-Adaptability

-prolificacy

 

  1. (i) M- Chalaza                        L- Space

N- Yolk                              O- Inner shell membrane        P- Shell

(ii) M- Hold the yolk in position at centre of the egg.

L- Air trappd in this space used by developing embryo

(iii) – To avoid germinal disc sticking on the egg shell

 

  1. – Move away from the source of heat to the periphery

 

  1. -saw dust

Wood shavings

Crushed maize cobs

Coffee husks

Rice husks

20.

  • Be fertilized
  • Should be medium in size i.e 50-65 gm in weight
  • Have smooth shells
  • Be oval in shape
  • Be free of any cracks in shells
  • Be clean to ensure that pores are clean
  • Not have any fresh i.e collected withine one week
  • Should be fresh i.e collected within one week

 

 

LIVESTOCK PRODUCTION III

(LIVESTOCK REARING PRACTICES)

  1. A group of calves kept according to age

 

  1. (a) – Assemble all milking equipments such as buckets, milking can and towels.

– Put animals in milking shed and restrain appropriately.

– Wash udder and teat using warm water mixed with an appropriate sanitizing agent.

– Dry the udder using a towel.

– Use trip cup to test the first few drops of milk for mastitis.

– Carry out milking by squeezing out the milk / teats.

– Strip the udder dry.

– Dip the teats in ant-mastitis solution after milking.

– Apply milking jelly 9milk salve) on the teats.

– Release the cow.

– Weigh and record the milk.

– Strain the milk into the milking can to cover immediately.

-Cool the milk  rapidly to a temperature of 40c.

(b)        – Keep cow healthy/ free from diseases.

– Wash cow flanks, udder  and region around the udder using clean water then dry using clean

towels.

  • Milking shed should be clean, wash after every milking and disinfect.
  • Clean and sterilize milking utensils.
  • Keep milk in a dust free environment.
  • Deliver milk to collecting centres.
  • Don’t feed cows on feeds which may taint milk a few hours to milking e.g. Mexican marigold, silage, garlic e.t.c.
  • Do not expose milk to direct sun.
  • Milk should be carried in aluminium container.

Copper and iron containers may cause oxidation of milk fats.

 

  1. Reasons for washing a cow’s udder with warm water
  • To remove dirt
  • To stimulate milk let down ( ½ mk each = 1mk)

 

  1. two roles of uterus in egg formation process
  • Additional of calcium which harden egg shell
  • Additional of egg pigmentation (2x ½ =1mk)

 

  1. (a) M – Alveolus N – Gland cistem        O – Teat          ( ½ x 3= 1½mks)

(ii) Oxytocin – Controls the muscle fibres surrounding alveoli to allow milk secretion

adrenalin – A hormone that relaxes the udder muscles to all milk let down        (1×2=2mks)

(b) Free from disease causing organisms

  • Has no hair/dirt dust
  • Its of high keeping / lasting quality
  • Chemical composition is within the expected standards ( ½  x3=1 ½mks)

 

  1. four characteristics of clean milk
  • Has normal taste
  • Free  from physical materials
  • Free from pathogens
  • Free from foul smell
  • It is of  high  keeping quality
  • Is chemical composition  is within  the expected standards

 

  1. three maintenance practices carried out on a milking machine
  • Flushing the tubes under high pressure to deblock it
  • Greasing/orling the rotating parts in the pump
  • Storing it to dry upside down after through washing

 

  1. four reasons for feeding Colostrums to calves immediately after calving
  • Easily digested
  • Has high nutritive value
  • Contains antibodies which protect the calf from diseases
  • Has laxative effect

 

  • Presence of milk man/ milky parlour
  • Washing/ massaging udder
  • Feeding
  • Sounds associated with milking
  • Maintain regular milking time
  1. a) Differences operational
Disc plough Mould board plough
Can be used in fields with obstacles Cannot be used in fields with obstacles
Ploughs/ cuts at varying depths Ploughs/ cuts at constant depths or confirm depth
Requires less skills to operate Requires more skills to operate
Works well in sticky soils Does not work well in sticky soils
Rotates and not easily broken since rolls over obstacles Easily broken by obstacles
Requires more harrowing Requires fewer harrowing
Poor furrow slice inversion Proper furrow slice inversion
Does not require constant replacement of parts More power to pull
  1. b)
  • Poor communication network/ poor infrastructures
  • Lack of cooling/ handling facilities/ processing facilities
  • Competition with non- dairy products/ cheap imported dairy products
  • Prevalence of Zoonotic diseases
  • Inefficient/ poor management of marketing society/ dairy boards
  • Late/ non- payment by marketing agents/ exploitation by marketing agents/ middle men
  • Lack of capital to finance marketing activities
  • Price fluctuation due to changes in supply
  • Lack of market information
  1. c) Reasons for culling livestock
  • Old age
  • Poor health
  • Low libido/ infertile
  • Physical deformities
  • Hereditary defects
  • To avoid inbreeding

 

  1. three advantage of artificial method of calf rearing
  • Accurate records  of milk  yield may be  kept
  • It is easy to regulate the amount of  milk  taken by  the calf
  • Cows  produce milk eve in  the absence  of  the  calf
  • It is easy to maintain high standard of cleanliness/sanitations
  • The farmer  is likely  to sell more milk  hence  maximizing profit (1/2×3=1 1/2mks)

 

  1. three methods that may be used to improve milk production in a breed of indigenous goats
  • Proper selection/culling
  • Proper breeding/upgrading/ cross  breeding
  • Maintaining good  health
  • Proper feedings
  • Proper milking  methods
  • Proper housing   ( ½ x3=1  ½ mks)

 

  1. a) Physical characteristics between good layer and poor layer
Part/feature Good Poor
Comb/wattle Large warm,wavy Small, shrunken, dry, scaly pace, cold
Eyes Bright, orange, alert race Dark, pace, yellow
Beak Oval, moist, reddish, active Yellowish
Vent Soft, pliable, wide Round, dry, less active
abdomen Soft, pliable,wide Hard, full
Space between keel and petric bone Wide fits 3-4 fingers Small fits 1-2 fingers
Temperate Alert- active Dull, less active
Moulting Start late Start early
Plumage Dry,rugged, rough Preened, glossy, smooth
Shanks Pace Yellowish
broodiness rare common

 

  1. b) i) – Young animals produce with high butter fat content than older animals
  2. ii) Pregnant, emaculated animals have lower butter fat content than normal animals

iii) early and late stage of lactation has lower butter fat content while middle phase has higher butter fat content

  1. iv) last drawn milk from udder has more butter fat
  2. v) – Different breeds of animals produce milk with different % composition e.g. Jersey produces milk with high butter fat content than fresian
  3. vi) Season of the year
  • Fat % increases during cold season of year but decreases during dry season

vii) Animals fed roughages produce milk with high fats, protein and lactase than those fed on

grains

viii) mastitis reduces lactose composition in milk

  1. ix) Certain drugs are known to lower milk composition if animal is under treatment

 

  1. a) – Remove dirt.

– Stimulate milk letdown  (2x ½  =1mk)

  1. b)           i) Milk letdown – oxytocin
  2.  ii) Lacto genesis – Prolactin (2x ½  = 1mk

 

  1. four methods of increasing the depth of penetration of a disc harrow
  • Exert more hydraulic force.
  • Use fewer discs.
  • Increase space between discs.
  • Add weights.

Increase cutting angle of discs

  • Boom sprayer
  • Spray race
  • Rotavator
  • Maize Sheller

Mowers

  • Chisel plough

Sub soiler

  • Combine harvester
  • Forage harvester
  • Potato lifter

Mowers

 

 

  1. a)
  • Oil bath air cleaner – check for oil level and add more if low
  • Check for cleanliness in oil bath and wash bowl – replace oil if dirty
  • Battery – check for electrolyte level and top up if low
  • Fuel – check and fill if low
  • Radiation- check for water level and top up with clean water if low
  • Check for trash in tins and remove if any
  • Fan belt- checks for tension and tighten if loose
  • Engine oils – check oil level using a dip stick and add more if level is low
  • Tyres- check for tyre pressure and add if low
  • Bolts, nuts and pins- check for tightness and tighten if loose
  • Grease all the moving parts
  • Check for any physical abnormalities and rectify accordingly
  • Check sediment bowl and drain if dirty
  • Use of right type of oil                                                                                                15×1=15 mks
  1. b) i) Flywheel – maintain the rotational motion of the crankshaft
  2. ii) Ignition coil – steps up the voltage from the battery

iii) thermostat – controls engine temperature

  1. iv) Injector – Atomises the fuel into very fine spray/ injects fuel into cylinder
  2. v) Piston – compresses air/ fuel mixture in the cylinder/ expels exhaust gases/ transmits power

 

 

FARM POWER AND MACHINERY

  1. Farm operations powered by Engines.

– Ploughing and harrowing / land preparations;

– Transporting farm produce;

– Spraying of herbicides/ pesticides.

– Mowing the grass;

– Lighting of homes;

– Pumping water for irrigation.

– Harvesting farm produce;

– Machine milking.

 

  1. (a) Maintenance practices required on a tractor before setting out to work.

– Check the engine oil daily using dip stick.

– Check fuel and add if necessary.

– Nuts and bolts are tightened whenever they loosen.

– Water level in the radiator be checked and added if necessary.

– Battery electrolyte be checked daily and if below level, top up be done using distilled water.

– Greasing be done on the bearings.

– Tyre pressure be checked and if low, should be added.

– Fan belt tension be checked.

– Break shaft bearing  should be greased.

– Ensure break fluid and clutch fluid levels are maintained.

– Sediments from the sediment bowls should be removed.

– Check battery terminals and grease.

– Oil cleaner be cleaned.

(b) Factors that influence power output by a draught animal.

– Age – Mature animals produce more power output than young ones.

– Breed & Type – Indigenous animals are more hardy than exotic.

– Training Level – better trained animals have better work output.

– Body Weight – A draught animal  can pull 10 – 20% of its body not for 6 – 8 hours.

(The bigger the animal, the more output).

– Harnessing of the animal – well harnesses animal is more efficient at work than poorly

harnessed  work.

  • Condition of working equipment on well maintained equipment have higher work output with the draught animal than poorly maintained ones.
  • Environmental/ Ambient temperature – Cool temperatures lead to higher work output with a draught animal than high temperature.
  • Health Status – A healthy draught animal has higher workout put than a sick animal.

 

  1. Uses of a gearbox:-
  • Stops the tractor without switching off engine
  • Provides different forward speeds
  • Enables reversing ( ½ x 2pts = 1mk)

 

  1. Two uses for which wind power is harnessed
  • To pump water
  • To generate electricity
  • For processing /winnowing of grains e.g. millet, rice e.t.c
  1. Name three implements that are connected to the power take-off shaft
  • Sprayers
  • Rotarators
  • Reciprocating (1mk each = 3mks)

 

  1. (a) Implement identity – Disc plough

(b)           L – Furrow wheel                  M – Beam

(c) – Adds weight

  • Forms attachment of all the other parts ( ½ x 1pt = ½ mk)

(d) Where there are hidden obstacles e.g. stumps , rocks e.t.c

–    Heavy soils

 

  1. (a) Factors that a farmer should consider in ensuring fast and efficient cultivation by oxen
  • A well trained personnel
  • Using well trained animals
  • use of efficient implement
  • Avoiding overworking the animals (allow them to rest
  • Good working environment should be created for the animals
  • Animals should be handled well
  • Feeding the animals properly
  • Using of males animals to do the work
  • Using healthy animals only to do the work (1mk x 8pts = 8mks)

 

(b) The importance of lubrication system in a tractor

  • Prevents rusting i.e when oiling is done
  • It pacts as a cleaning agent as it washes off the dirt, dust
  • Reduces the heat/cooling
  • Increases efficiency of the machine and reduces the rate of wear and tear on moving parts

 

(c) The daily maintenance and servicing of a tractor

  • Checking of maintenance and servicing of a tractor
  • Checking of engine oil by use of dip stick and add if low
  • The level of electrolyte in battery should be checked daily and add if low
  • Inspect the H2O level in radiator and add if low
  • Loose nuts and bolts should be tightened
  • Tyre pressure should be checked and added if low
  • Level of fuel should be checked and added if low
  • Removal of large sediments from the sediment bowl
  • Greasing should be done by use of grease on nipples of bearings
  • Fan belt tension should be checked to ensure that it deflects between 1.9–2.5cm when pushed
  • Break shaft should be greased
  • Maintain break fluid level (1mk each for any 9pts= 9mks)

 

 

  1. (i) Hydraulic system-raise and  lower  mounted  implements like  plough

(ii) Draw bar-attachment  of trail  implement

(iii) Propeller shaft-connect gearbox to  differential which has  axle  to  drive wheel

making tractors  to move backwards or forward.(@ 1mkx3=3mks

 

  1. (i)Hiring of tractors and  implements  by  farmers  who do not  have  them(correct definition=

(ii) three sources of tractor hire service          (1½mks)

  • Government tractors  hire service
  • Private  contractors
  • Individual  farmers
  • Cooperative  societies (any 3x ½ =1 ½ mks)

 

  1. (a) A-ring pinion gear

B-bevel side gear

C-wheel exle

D-drive pinion gear

(b) State two functions of differential system of a tractor      (2mks)

  • Change  direction  of  drive to right angle for power to be transmitted  to rear  wheel
  • Enable  rear  wheel to  travel faster/slower than other when negotiation corner (1×2=2mks)

(c) Give two reasons why wheel skidding of a tractor is not allowed            (1mk)

  • To make tyres  last  longer
  • To make  it easy to control the  tractor
  1. Wind , water, human, animal, biogas, wood fuel, charcoal, kerosene, fossil fuel, petroleum,

ethane (natural gas), hydroelectric power, nuclear , Geothermal, storage battery

  1. Induction, compression, power exhaust
  2. – Keeping them healthy

– Proper feeding

– Proper handling e.g not over working /not beating them

– Proper training

– Not overloading them

  1. Individual owners

– Government tractor hire service

– Co-operative societies

– Companies

  1. (i) Primary cultivation

A- To link bracket

B _ scrapper

C- Standard/disc hanger

D – Rear finow wheel / thrust wheel  2mks

(ii) Adding weight on beam

  • exerting more hydraulic force
  • – Sharpen the disc blade
  • – Increased space between the disc
  • – Loosen the area of disc contact with the soil
  • Increase the cutting angle
  1. four ways through which a farmer would ensure maximum power output from

Ploughing animals

  • Feeding and watering animals well before working
  • Training animals on  draft techniques
  • Allowing  animals  to rest well after a day work/avoid overworking the animals
  • Keeping the  animals in good  health while working
  1. three advantages of a disc plough over mould board plough
  • Tears and wear is less
  • Needs less power to pull
  • It can ride over obstacle
  1. a) the differences  between petrol and diesel engine
Diesel Petrol
i)use diesel as fuel

ii)has injector pump

iii)has no spark  plug

iv)fuel is ignites by  compression

v)air and fuel first meet in cylinder  before ignition

vi)specific fuel consumption is low

vii)higher air compression ratio

viii)air/fuel ratio is not constant

ix)has sediment bowls

x)operation cost is lower

xi)it is  heavy in weight and suited  to heavy machines

xii)produces a lot  of smoke

 

Use petrol as  fuel

Has carburetor

Has  spark plug for ignition

Fuel ignites by spark  plug

Air and fuel meet in carburetor before  ignition

 

Specific fuel consumption is high

Lower air compression ratio

Air/fuel ratio is  constant

No sediments bowls

Operation cost  is  high

Operation cost is  high light in weight and suited to light machines

Produce  minimal smoke

 

  1. b) Describe components of transmission system of a tractor
  2. i) Clutch- It disconnects the engine from the rest of the transmission system. It is mounted on the

flywheel and made up of pressure plates and clutch plate in the middle. The clutch

allows the driver to temporarily interrupt the power flow from the engine to the fear

box and shift from one gear to the other

  1. ii) Gear- These are toothed wheels. They provide towards speed or reverse. The set of gears are

housed in the gear box.

iii) Differential- it is located between the wheel axial. it enables one wheel to move faster than the

other while negotiating a corner

  1. iv) Driving axial- The final drive is brought about by driving axial which gets the power from the

differential.

When the axial rotates they rotate the wheels making the tractor to move either engorged gear

  1. Wheels- Comprises of the tyres, tubes rims nuts and bolts. They must be inflated to the

movement  of the tractor

  • Fuel system
  • Electrical system
  • Cooling
  • Lubrication
  • Transmission
  • Ignition
  • Hydraulic

 

  1. Functions of clutch
  • Connects or disconnects the drive shaft to or from the engine
  • Facilitates smooth and gradual take off
  • Provides power from the engine to the P.T.O (Power Take Off)
  1. 2 adjustment on mould board plough
  • Adjust the plough depth
  • Front furrow depth
  • Lowering/ raising ploughing pitch
  • Front furrow width
  1. a) Disc plough reject disc alone
  2. b) X – Disc scrapper                                Y-  Rear wheel/ furrow wheel

Z – Disc

 

  1. c) – Replace broken discs
  • Clean plough after use reject wash plough
  • Lubricate hubs and furrow wheel bearing/ moving parts reject movable parts
  • Lighten loose nuts and bolts
  • Store in a cool dry place
  • Apply old engine oil to prevent rusting during long storage/ paint implement
  1. a) Differences operational
Disc plough Mould board plough
Can be used in fields with obstacles Cannot be used in fields with obstacles
Ploughs/ cuts at varying depths Ploughs/ cuts at constant depths or confirm depth
Requires less skills to operate Requires more skills to operate
Works well in sticky soils Does not work well in sticky soils
Rotates and not easily broken since rolls over obstacles Easily broken by obstacles
Requires more harrowing Requires fewer harrowing
Poor furrow slice inversion Proper furrow slice inversion
Does not require constant replacement of parts More power to pull
  1. b)
  • Poor communication network/ poor infrastructures
  • Lack of cooling/ handling facilities/ processing facilities
  • Competition with non- dairy products/ cheap imported dairy products
  • Prevalence of Zoonotic diseases
  • Inefficient/ poor management of marketing society/ dairy boards
  • Late/ non- payment by marketing agents/ exploitation by marketing agents/ middle men
  • Lack of capital to finance marketing activities
  • Price fluctuation due to changes in supply
  • Lack of market information
  1. c) Reasons for culling livestock
  • Old age
  • Poor health
  • Low libido/ infertile
  • Physical deformities
  • Hereditary defects
  • To avoid inbreeding
  1. a) Share-makes a horizontal cutting  on  the furrow slice
  2.  b) Mould board-completes the turning of the furrow  slice
  3.  c) Land side-stabilizes the plough by absorbing the side pressure ( ½ x3=1 ½ mks)
  4. a) five  maintenance practice of a  mould board plough
  • Lubricate  the moving pests
  • Sharpen blunt  share
  • Tighten bolts and   nuts
  • Clean  the  plough after  use
  • Coat  the unpainted  parts with old engine oil before any storage
  • Replace worn out parts (1×5=5mks)
  1.  b) five  structural   and functional differences between  the petrol and diesel engines
Petrol engine Diesel engine
i)has a carburetor

ii)fuel and air mixed in the carburetor

iii)fuel ignited by an electric spark

 

iv)produces little smoke

v)is  light  in weight

i)Has  an  injector pump

ii)Fuel and air  mixed  within  the cylinder

iii)fuel ignited by  compression of air and  fuel

mixture  in the cylinder

iv)produces  a lot of  smoke

v)relatively  heavy

  1.  c) List five uses of farm fences
  • keep of wild  life ,predation and  intruders
  • demarcates boundaries
  • separate crop field from pasture land
  • divide pasture land into  paddock
  • control  movement of  animals and people within  the farm and  prevent formation of unnecessary pests
  • control disease  and parasites helps in isolate  sick animals
  • helps in  controlling breeding
  • provide security
  • act as  wind break  (1×5=5mks)
  1. Uses of ox-dram tine harrows
  • Leveling of seed bed
  • Breaking large soils clod
  • Mixing up soil with organic matter
  • Destroy weeds
  • Cover seeds

Collecting trash

  1. Care and maintenance of tractor battery
  • Maintain correct level of electrolyse by topping up with distilled water
  • Scrap corroded terminals and smear with grease
  • Fix battery tightly in box to avoid spillage and damage
  • Charge regularly and periodically
  • Under storage empty battery and keep it upside down
  • Generator belt should always be functioned to charge
  1. a) moulboard
  2. b) A – Shaire                   B- Mouldboard                       C- Disc coulter
  3. c) E- Stabilize the plough

– absorb side thrust by pressing against furrow wall

F- Scrapes of mind from disk coulter

  1. d) Care and maintenance
  • Lubrication of moving parts
  • Loose nuts and bolts should be tightened
  • Clean after use/ remove trash and wet soil
  • For long shortage paint with old engine to prevent
  • Replace/ repair worn out parts
  1. Six uses of live fences
  • Thorn species prevent wild animals and other invaders into the farm
  • Tall varieties act as wind breakers
  • Add aesthetic value to the homestead
  • Roots holds soil firmly controlling soil erosion
  • Species such as lantana canara can be used to feed livestock
  • Provide shade to livestock and man
  • Trimmed branches can be used as organic manure, wood fuel
  • Some species have medicinal value
  1. two possible causes of over heating in a tractor engine
  • Slack fan belt
  • Low  oil  level

Low water level in radiator

  • Deformed / broken yolk.
  1. two events occur during induction stroke in a four stroke engine. (1mk)
  • Piston moves down from TDC
  • Exhaust valve is closed
  • Inlet valve is open
  • Air / fuel mixture get into combustion chamber
  • Piston reaches BDC. (4x ½ = 2mks)
  1. i) a)    Spike tooth harrow (1×1 =1 m k)
  2. b) two uses of the implement above.(2mks)
  • Level seed bed
  • Break soil clods
  • Stir soil
  • Destroy weeds
  • Incorporate fertilizer in the soil
  • Removing trash from the field. (2×1 = 2)
  1. c) three maintenance practices carried out on the above implement.(3mk)
  • Replace worn out parts
  • Clean after work
  • Tighten loose bolts and nuts
  • Oil unpainted parts for storage. (3×1 = 3mks)
  1. ii) a) Bucket pump /stir – up pump (1×1 = 1mk)
  2.         b) Spraying acaricide on livestock (1×1 =1mk)
  3.        c) W – Nozzle                  X – Trigger                  Y –  Pail /bucket
  4. d) For holding acaricide solution during spraying. (1×1 = 1)
  5. a) the factors that influence  the power  output of farm animals (8mks)
  • Training
  • Level  of  nutrition
  • Harnessing  animals properly
  • Body  weight
  • Age-mature ones produce  more  power than young
  • Handling  of  animals
  1. b) State the importance of farm fences (12mks)
  • demarcates farm land from that  of  neighbours
  • keeps  wild  animals  and other intruders from entering  the  farm
  • separates crop field  from pastures facilitating mixed  cropping
  • used  to divide  pastures into paddocks facilitating controlled  grazing
  • controls  movement  of  animals  and people preventing  formation of  unnecessary paths  in the  farm
  • helps  control spread of  diseases  and  parasites in the  farm by keeping  wild animals  away
  • helps  isolate sick animals from the rest of the herd preventing  the  spread of diseases
  • enables farmer to control breeding rearing  different  animals in different  paddocks
  • provide security  to the homestead
  • they have  aesthetic value
  • live  fences  act as  animal feeds
  • live  fences  act  as wind breakers (1×12=12mks)
  1. (a) Methane

(b) slurry

(c) Fresh mixture of waste material

(d) Initial capital investment is high hence very expensive

Requires management skills that may not be available & it available expensive

Requires large number of farm animals to produce animal waste.

35        . – Solar panels

– Petrol and diesel generators

– wind mills

– steam production form boilers using organic or inorganic

  1. (a) Check engine oil, fuel, water level, electronic in the battery

-Tighten nuts and bolts

-Apply grease

-Remove large sediments from sediment bowl

-Check the tyre pressure and inflated or deflated appropriately

-Fan belt tension should be checked to ensure it defients between 1.9cm to 2.5cm when punched

-Grease the brake shaft and maintain brake fluid level

(b) -Health of animal

-Level of feeding

-Animal slpeciesa

-Care and handling